24D-070 (12) i
A. Initiating and Signal Circuits: Building wire as specified or Power limited fire-
protective signaling cable, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees
C. where approved by local authorities.
5 PART 3 EXECUTION
5.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install manual station with operating handle per Handicap code above floor. Install
audible and visual signal devices 80 inches above floor or on ceiling as shown.
C. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit
conductors. Install wiring in conduit or cable with conduit sleeves where exposed.
D. All wiring to be Class "A" four (4) wire.
E. Provide conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve
tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors, etc.
5.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72H and local fire department requirements.
5.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
5.4 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE
A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with color coded insulation, or use color coded
tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box as follows:
1 . Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
4• Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
5. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange.
END OF SECTION
POW 16721-5
D. Signal Circuits: Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to
system.
E Municipal Trip Circuit: Provide output connections for connection to local energy
municipal master fire alarm box, and connection to remote station transmitter.
Include municipal trip DISCONNECT switch.
F Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE and ALARM SILENCE switch.
4.3 INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Station: Semi-flush or Surface mounted, single action.
B. Heat Detector: Fixed temperature, rated 135 degrees F (57 degrees Q.
C. Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E; ionization type with adjustable
sensitivity, plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact, integral thermal element rated 135
degrees F (57 degrees C), and visual indication of detector actuation, suitable for
mounting on 4 inch (100 mm) outlet box. Two-wire detector with common power
supply and signal circuit.
D. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E; ionization type with auxiliary SPDT relay
contact, key-operated NORMAL-RESET-TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending
width of duct, and visual indication of detector actuation, in duct-mounted housing.
Four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits.
E. Remote Test Switch: Key-operated switch mounted on flush cover with lamp to
indicate detector actuation. Provide one switch for each smoke detector and heat
detector as noted.
4.4 SIGNALING DEVICES
A. Alarm Lights: NFPA 72G; strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered FIRE on white
lens.
B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 72G; surface car flush projector type fire alarm horn. Sound
Rating: 87 dB at 10 feet (3 m). Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher with red
lettered FIRE on white lens. Provide "MINI" horns in toilet rooms. All equipment to
be A.D.A approved.
C. Remote Annunciator: Provide remote annunciator including visual indication of fire
alarm by zone, and audible and visual indication of system trouble. Install in flush
wall-mounted enclosure.
4.5 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
17621-4
3 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 01700.
B. Include location of end-of-line devices.
3.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures.
C. Include manufacturer representative's letter stating that system is operational.
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section
01600.
4 PART 2 PRODUCTS
4.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gamewell.
B. Autocall.
C. F. C. I.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
4.2 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL PANEL
A. Control Panel: Modular construction ADDRESSABLE system with flush-mounted
enclosure.
B. Power Supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote
annunciators, door holders, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices.
Include battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating
system in standby mode for 60 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 minutes.
C. Detection Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication.
WOW 16721-3
2 System Supervision: Provide electrically-supervised system, with supervised alarm
initiating and alarm signaling circuits. Occurrence of single ground or open condition in
initiating or signaling circuit places circuit in TROUBLE mode. Component or power supply
failure places system in TROUBLE mode. Occurrence of single ground or open condition
on alarm initiating circuit does not disable that circuit from transmitting in ALARM.
Occurrence of single ground or open condition on signaling circuit does not disable that
circuit from transmitting in ALARM.
A. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of manual fire alarm station or automatic
initiating device causes system to enter ALARM, which includes the following
operations:
1 . Sound and display local fire alarm signaling devices with non-coded signal.
2. Transmit signal to municipal connection and remote station equipment.
3. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and or remote
annunciator panel as noted on plan.
B. Alarm Reset: Key-accessible RESET function resets alarm system out of ALARM if
alarm initiating circuits have cleared.
C. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System trouble, including grounding or open circuit
of supervised circuits, or power or system failure causes system to enter TROUBLE
mode, including the following operations:
1 . Visual and audible trouble alarm by zone at control panel.
2. Visual and audible trouble alarm at annunciator panel.
3. Manual ACKNOWLEDGE function at control panel silences audible trouble
alarm; visual alarm is displayed until initiating trouble is cleared.
4. Transmit trouble signal to remote station.
D. Lamp Test: Manual LAMP TEST function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire
alarm control panel.
2.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide wiring diagrams, data sheets, and equipment ratings, layout, dimensions,
and finishes.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that system
meets or exceeds specified requirements.
16721-2
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire alarm and smoke detection systems.
1 .2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable.
1 .3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 72A - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Local Protective Signaling System
for Guard's Tour, Fire Alarm, and Supervisory Service.
B. NFPA 72B - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Auxiliary Protective Signaling
System for Fire Alarm Service.
C. NFPA 72C - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Remote Station Protective
Signaling System.
D. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors.
E. NFPA 72G - Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems.
F. NFPA 72H - Guide for Test Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems.
G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
1 .4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. System: UL and FM listed.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101 .
C. Conform to applicable State and local code for fire alarm systems.
1 .5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72A; NFPA 7213; NFPA 72C;
automatic manual ADDRESSABLE type fire alarm system.
16721-1
L. Connect luminaires , emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets
provided under Section 16130 using flexible conduit as indicated. 100*k
M. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable
for temperature conditions within luminaire.
N. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
O. Install specified lamps in each luminaire , emergency lighting unit and exit sign.
P. Provide slack cable at all recessed lighting fixtures to allow for relocation of
fixtures up to four (4) feet in any direction.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper
connection and operation.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust Work under provisions of Section 01700 .
B. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
C. Adjust exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
D. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700 .
B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
END OF SECTION
16510-4
B. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers:
1. PHILIPS LIGHTING COMPANY.
2. Substitutions: NONE.
C. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamp Manufacturers:
1. PHILIPS LIGHTING COMPANY OR VENTURE WHERE NOTED.
2. Substitutions: NONE.
D. Provide lamp type specified for luminaire.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires.
B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel
hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C. Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing.
D. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
E. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with
building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement.
F. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly
from building structure.
G. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet
regulatory requirements for fire rating.
I. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. Provide seismic
support per local codes.
J. Install wall mounted luminaires , emergency lighting units and exit signs at height
as indicated on Drawings .
K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
16510-3
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700 .
B. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101 .
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable
for purpose specified and shown.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as specified on Drawings.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 .
C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. loo'
2.2 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballast:
B. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type ELECTRONIC TYPE.
1. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified.
2. Voltage:Match luminaire voltage.
3. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified
Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.
C. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballast:
1 . Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide & high pressure sodium lamp
ballast.
2. Provide ballast suitable for lamp specified.
3. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
2.3 LAMPS
A. Incandescent Lamp Manufacturers:
1. PHILIPS LIGHTING COMPANY.
2. Substitutions: NONE.
16510-2 ^"
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Exit signs.
C. Ballasts.
D. Lamps.
E. Luminaire accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge
Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns.
,., B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps
(Multiple Supply Type).
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not
a standard product of the manufacturer.
B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
16510-1
F. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Power: 0 to 60 seconds, adjustable;bypass
time delay in event of alternate source failure.
G. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 60 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded
operation.
H. Engine Exerciser: Start engine every 7 days; run for 30 minutes before shutting
down. Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during exercising period.
2.5 ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosure: ICS 6; Type 1.
2.6 ACESSORIES
A. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE
AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, SWITCH POSITION.
B Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source.
C Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer
from alternate to normal source.
D Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 1 normally open; 1 normally closed.
E Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage and frequency;
initiate transfer when voltage drops below 95 percent or frequency varies more than
3 percent Hertz from rated nominal value.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
16495-3
E. Include routine preventive maintenance and lubrication schedule.
F. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
1 .7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for emergency/standby electrical systems.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. ONAN-McGRAW EDISON.
B. Substitutions: Kohler or Caterpillar.
2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2; automatic transfer switch.
B. Configuration: Electrically-operated, mechanically-held transfer switch.
2.3 RATINGS
A. Ratings: NEMA ICS 2; as follows:
1 . Voltage: 480/277 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz.
2. Switched Poles: 3.
3. Load Inrush Rating: Combinationload.
4. Continuous Rating: AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS.
2.4 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by
normal source monitor.
B. Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator:
0 to 10 seconds, adjustable.
C. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor
and permission by alternate source monitor.
D. Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source:
0 to 30 seconds, adjustable.
E. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source
monitor.
16495-2
SECTION 16495
TRANSFER SWITCH
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Automatic transfer switch.
1 .2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16622 - Package Engine-Generator System: Testing requirements.
1 .3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in automatic transfer equipment with three
years documented experience.
1 .5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit product data for transfer switches showing overall dimensions, electrical
connections, electrical ratings, and environmental requirements.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of Section 01300.
1 .6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Include instructions for operating equipment.
C. Identify operating limits which may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
D. Document ratings of equipment and each major component.
16495-1
B. Visual 'and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for
circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
AMW 16470-5
E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1
F. Cabinet box: 6 inches deep; width: 20 inches minimum.
G. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface "Door in Door" cabinet front with concealed trim
clamps, concealed hinge, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's
standard gray enamel.
2.4 FUSES
A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time
fuse, UL Class RK 5.
B. Fuses 601 Amperes and Larger: Current limiting, time delay one time fuse, , UL
Class L.
C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190.
C. Height: 6 ft to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 ft with bottom no
more than 4 inches above floor.
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory
to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location
above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 3 empty 1 inch . Identify each as SPARE.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in
the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 15 percent of each other.
Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
16470-4
ovlk
B. Square "D" Company.
C. Seimens- I T E
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.
B. Panelboard Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide ground bus in each
panelboard.
C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240
volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards.
D. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent
opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. Provide circuit breakers with integral
thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL
listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F. Provide circuit breaker accessory trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. Cabinet box: width: 20 inches minimum.
H. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinge and latch. Provide hinged door with
flush lock. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA P131, circuit breaker type.
B. Panelboard Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide ground bus in each
panelboard[; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240
volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as
indicated.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as
Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit
breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
16470-3
1 .5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement.
1 .6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and
indicated.
1 .10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as [indicated [on shop drawings].] [instructed by
manufacturer.]
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each panelboard key.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide three of each size and type of fuse.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General Electric Company.
16470-2
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Distribution panelboards.
B. Branch circuit panelboards.
C. Load centers.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation."
B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrical Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus
ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch
arrangement and sizes.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
16470-1
D. Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer
noise from the building structure.
E. Provide seismic restraints.
F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16170.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer.
B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
END OF SECTION
+ " 16461-5
E. Winding Taps:
1. Transformers Less than 15 KVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full
capacity taps on primary winding.
2. Transformers 15 KVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
F. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.
G. Basic Impulse Level:10 KV for transformers less than 300 KVA.
N. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
I. Provide electrostatic winding shield with separate insulated grounding connection.
J. Mounting: Suitable for wall , floor , or trapeze mounting, except transformers larger
than 75 KVA, suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
K. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
L. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1.ventilated . Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
M. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. ,
N. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are suitable for installing transformer supports.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set transformer plumb and level.
C. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 16111, 2 ft minimum length, for
connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of
enclosure.
16461-4
C. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows:
1. 1-15 KVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise.
2. 16-500 KVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
D. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point.
E. Winding Taps:
1. Transformers Less than 15 KVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full
capacity taps on primary winding.
2. Transformers 15 KVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
F. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.
G. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV for transformers less than 300 KVA.
H. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
I. Mounting: Suitable for wall , floor , or trapeze mounting, except transformers larger
than 75 KVA, suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
J. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
K. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20; Type 1.ventilated. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
L. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
M. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
2.2 ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . General Electric Company
2. Square "D" Company
3. Seimens- I T E
B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled dry type shielded isolation
transformers , ratings as indicated.
C. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows:
1 . 10-15 KVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise.
2. 16-500 KVA: Class 220 with 150 degrees C rise.
D. Case temperature: Do not exceed 50 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point.
16461-3
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this
Section with minimum three years experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect, and handle products to site.
B. Deliver transformers individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping
skids.
C. Accept transformers on site. Inspect for damage.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris,
and traffic.
E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal
components, enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. General Electric Company
2. Square "D" Company
3. Seimens- I T E
B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled dry type transformers,
ratings as indicated.
16461-2
SECTION 16461
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Dry type two winding transformers.
B. Dry type isolation transformers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16111 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections.
B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers
B. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and
accessories, unit weight, voltage, KVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics,
tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
B. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load,
and sound level.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
OOW 16461-1
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ,
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening
front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips:
Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; quick-make, quick-break, load
interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to
prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF
position.
C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type 1,or 313 as indicated on Drawings.
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FUSES
A. Bussman
B. Gould-Shawmut
2.4 FUSES
A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK5;dual element, current
limiting, time delay,250 or 600 volt.
B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION
16440-2
SECTION 16440
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types.
B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders .
D. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, Surface-Mounted.
E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage,
capacity, horsepower, and short circuit.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. General Electric Company
B. Seimans I.T.E.
C. Square D Company
16440-1
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2.2 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Cloth , tape, split sleeve , or tubing type wire markers.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters , pull boxes, outlet and junction
boxes and each load connection.
C. Legend:
1 . Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on
drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and
interconnection diagrams on drawings.
2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
1. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, type,] colored yellow with suitable
warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws , rivets , or adhesive.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished
locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per
trench at 3 inches below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
16195-2
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit markers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and
installation of Product.
1 .4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing
firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white
background.
B. Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2. Communication cabinets.
16195-1
C. Anchors and Fasteners: ,
1. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps , spring
steel clips.
2. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
3. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and
hollow wall fasteners.
4. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
5. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
6. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of
Installation".
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or
use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and
rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
E. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
F. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and
panelboards one inch off wall.
END OF SECTION
16190-2
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA - National Contractors Association.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. OR testing
firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the
loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting
products.
16190-1
temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment.
D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated.
Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated.
E. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet
boxes and equipment connection boxes.
F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices
as indicated.
G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated.
H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment
where indicated.
I. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler
walls, floor, and ceilings.
END OF SECTION
"" 16180-3
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation
schedule for equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for
equipment.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided
for equipment.
C. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, multiconductor flexible cord with identified
equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of
branch circuit overcurrent protection.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and
energization.
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight
flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
16180-2
SECTION 16180
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections.
1 .2 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information
showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.OR
testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's
instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
16180-1
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving
rod electrodes.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes
as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
C. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to
reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated.
A. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
B. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to
ground.
C. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object.
D. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying electronic cash
registers , personal computers and equipment as noted.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for
tightness and proper installation.
B Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system.
Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's
recommendations using the fall-of-potential method.
END OF SECTION
16170-3
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic
connectors.
1 .6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
1 .7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ROD ELECTRODE
A. Material: Copper-clad steel.
B. Diameter: 3/4 inch .
C. Length: 10 feet .
2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Material: Bronze.
2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . CAD-WELD.
2.4 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
16170-2
SECTION 16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B. Equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bonding.
1 .2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1 .3 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
40"
A. Existing Metal underground water pipe.
B. Metal frame of the building.
C. Concrete-encased electrode.
D. Rod electrode.
E. Plate electrode.
1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.
1 .5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 .
B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections.
16170-1
4.1 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
4.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
4.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
END OF SECTION
16141-4
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify floor boxes are adjusted properly.
E. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper OR
branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
H. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
16141-3
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. HUBBELL
2. LEVITON
3. ARROW-HART
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, general-duty, AC only general-use snap switch.
C. Device Body: Brown plastic with toggle handle.
D. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC.
E. Current Rating: 20 amperes.
2.1 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. HUBBELL
2. LEVITON
3. ARROW-HART
B. Description: NEMA WD 1; general-duty general-use receptacle.
C. Device Body: Brown plastic.
D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; type as specified and indicated.
E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-15 .
F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit
interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel
B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover.
16141-2
SECTION 16141
WIRING DEVICES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16130 - Boxes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300,
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,
colors, and configurations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency specified under regulatory requirements.
2. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
operation and installation of product.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable
for purpose specified and shown.
*, 16141-1
1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section
16160.
2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box.
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors.
B. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner
only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
C. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches and backsplashes.
D. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closure in unused box opening.
END OF SECTION
16130-4
areas only.
D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches
0 50 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270.
F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar
devices with each other.
G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch
(150 mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic
rated walls.
I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position
to allow for surface finish thickness.
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its
effectiveness.
L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
N. Support boxes independently of conduit , except cast box that is connected to two
rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches (300 mm) of box.
0. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use
sectional box.
P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
R. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are
acceptable for other installations.
S. Set floor boxes level.
T. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches (1 600 cubic centimeters) in
volume or 12 inches (300 mm) in any dimension.
16130-3
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable
for purpose specified and shown.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify locations of outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.
C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless
dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment
supported; include 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required.
2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4 6; flat-flanged,
surface-mounted junction box.
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron Cast aluminum.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover
screws.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical
appearance.
C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished
16130-2 �.,
SECTION 16130
BOXES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Floor boxes.
C. Pull and junction boxes.
1 .2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07270 - Firestopping.
B. Section 08305 - Access Doors.
C. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices: mounting heights of wiring device outlets.
D. Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
E. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems.
F. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm System: Mounting height of fire alarm outlets.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1 .4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction
boxes.
16130-1
J. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
'"'t
K. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
L. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
M. Make splices,taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
N. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated aluminum-bodied compression
connectors only. Fill with anti-oxidant compound before installing conductor.
O. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting
aluminum conductors to copper conductors.
P. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of
insulation rating of conductor.
Q. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor
splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
R. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices
and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195.
B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on
Drawings.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with
manufacturer's recommended values.
C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
END OF SECTION
16123-4
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from
weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3 WIRING METHODS
A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway. Nonmetallic- sheathed cable or armored cable only where approved by
local authorities.
B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use building wire in raceway. Nonmetallic-sheathed
cable or armored cable only where approved by local authorities .
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.
*+ F. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
E. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
F. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
G. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
H. Protect exposed cable from damage.
1. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or cable ties to
support cables from structure . Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
�,,, 16123-3
Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.
D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, '00'"
determine exact routing and lengths required.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Determine required separation between cable and other work.
C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW.
2.2 NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type NM.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.3 ARMORED CABLE
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type AC.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
16123-2
SECTION 16123
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building wire and cable.
B. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable.
C. Armored cable.
D. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16111 - Conduit.
B. Section 16130 - Boxes.
C. Section 16195 - Identification.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable
for purpose specified and shown.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Conductor sizes are based on copper .
C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.
,,, 16123-1
0. Install a duct marker in each insert adjacent to junction box, at end of each duct run,
on both sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change of direction of
duct. Install markers flush with finished floor material. •
P. Install surface service fittings after installation of floor finishes. Cut floors as
necessary, following duct manufacturer's recommendations. Replace damaged floor
construction and finish.
Q. Clean ducts and fittings of debris and dust before
installing wire and cable.
R. Pull wire and cable from outlet insert toward junction boxes.
S. Install branch circuit conductors continuous between junction box and farthest
fitting. Do not cut conductor to make connections to receptacle devices.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Location Shown on Drawings: 6 inch maximum.
3.3 CLEANING
A Clean finished surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. 01535.
B. Protect boxes, covers, and rings from distortion and finish damage.
C. Replace boxes, covers, and rings marred during construction.
END OF SECTION
16113-4 AWN
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Locate duct in slab.
C. Provide expansion fittings with suitable bonding jumper where duct crosses building
expansion joints.
D. Terminate ducts in junction box for extension with conduits to panelboards, P.O.S.
room, and telephone equipment.
E. Level cover plates flush with finished concrete floor.
F. Securely hold junction boxes and ducts in place during installation to avoid floating
or other movement.
G. Close unused duct or conduit entrances to junction boxes. Seal duct terminations
at junction boxes.
H. Ground and bond duct under provisions of Section 16170.
1. Install underfloor duct with tops of preset inserts 1/8 inch (3 mm) below finished
floor line. Locate ducts as indicated on Drawings.
J. Install flush duct flush with finished floor.
K. Place schedule on the inside of coverplate of each junction box indicating distance
to first insert in each direction, measured from the center of the box. Use
self-adhesive labels for schedule.
L. Use blank duct in permanent corridors, vestibules, passages, lobbies, for connecting
parallel ducts less than 6 feet (1 .8 m) apart, for feeder duct from cabinet or
panelboard to first junction box, and where indicated.
M. Support Couplers and Supports: Join duct lengths using combination support
couplers where practical. Provide additional supports at intervals of not over 5 feet
(1.5 m), within 30 inches (750 mm) each side of junction boxes, and as close as
practical to elbows, bends, and terminations.
N. Install insert within 12 inches (30 mm) of edge of junction box. Align inserts on
same centers for all services.
16113-3
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable
for purpose specified and shown.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Walkerduct.
2.2 UNDERFLOOR DUCT
A. Description: Steel duct with corrosion-resistant finish.
B. Type: Underfloor.
C. Configuration: One level system using ducts in parallel runs as shown on Drawings.
D. Inserts: Fabricate distribution lengths with 2 inch high preset inserts on 12 inch
centers.
E. Single Level Junction Boxes: Round cover and trim, adjustable height. Provide
internal barriers, conduit and duct entrances, and extension rings as required.
F. Junction Box Cover Plate: Provide tile trim plate flush with finished floor with 1/8
inch thick burnished stainless steel plate in lieu of tile. drill and countersink holes
for screws to match junction box holes.
G. Supports: Adjustable before concrete topping placement.
H. Service Fittings: As specified in Section 16141 .
I. Duct Markers: Corrosion resistant marker screws, with escutcheon.
J. Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.
16113-2
SECTION 16113
UNDERFLOOR DUCTS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Underfloor ducts.
B. Flush ducts.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 16121 - Insulated Wire and Cable.
1 .3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
C. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, insert spacing and height, locations of fittings and
accessories, and overall dimensions.
B. Product Data: Provide data showing component details, dimensions, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
1 .5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of ducts, service fittings, junction boxes, and branch
circuiting arrangements.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Instructions for locating inserts and installing afterset inserts.
16113-1
E. Close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings.
F. Ground and bond raceway and wireway under provisions of Section 16170.
END OF SECTION
16112-3
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface
metal raceway.
B. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories.
2.2 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY
A. Multioutlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired
receptacles, suitable for use as multioutlet assembly.
B. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Receptacles: Provide covers and accessories to accept convenience receptacles
specified in Section 16141.
D. Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, type 5-15R, single receptacle.
E. Receptacle Spacing: As indicated.
F. Receptacle Color: Gray.
G. Channel Finish: Gray.
H. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, outlet and device
boxes, and connectors.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces.
Mount plumb and level.
C. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner
fittings.
D. Wireway Supports: Provide steel channel as specified in Section 16190.
16112-2
SECTION 16112
SURFACE RACEWAYS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface metal raceways.
B. Multi-outlet assemblies.
C. Wireways.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16113 - Underfloor Ducts
B. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractor's Association) Standard of Installation.
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials,
fabrication details, finishes, and accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of Product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
"' 16112-1
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, 10041k
using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable
roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
END OF SECTION
16111-6 .
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab.
N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
0. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with
temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe
nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to
entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
S. Use conduit hubs or sealing iocknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp
and wet locations and to cast boxes.
T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use
conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic
one-shot bender to fabricateor factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than
2 inch (50 mm) size.
U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system.
V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit
crosses seismic , control and expansion joints.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
16111-5
B. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FB 1.
2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel aluminum construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel set screw type.
2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 80 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable
hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel
channel ; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of
Section 16190.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
16111-4
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Route as required to complete wiring system.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations:
a. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit ,intermediate metal
conduit , plastic coated conduit , thickwall nonmetallic conduit.
1 . Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.
C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel and , intermediate metal conduit.
D. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel and aluminum conduit , intermediate metal
conduit.
E. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steel , intermediate metal conduit , electrical metallic
tubing
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel and aluminum conduit , intermediate metal conduit.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel aluminum construction.
16111-3
D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies. Aow
E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
F. NECA "Standard of Installation."
G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
I. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit , flexible metal conduit , liquidtight
flexible metal conduit , metallic tubing , nonmetallic conduit , flexible nonmetallic
conduit , nonmetallic tubing , fittings , conduit bodies.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ,,
A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade.
Provide appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
16111-2
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal conduit.
B. Flexible metal conduit.
C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D. Electrical metallic tubing.
E. Nonmetallic conduit.
F. Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
G. Flexible nonmetallic conduit.
H. Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07270 - Fire Stopping.
B. Section 16130 - Boxes.
C. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
D. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
E. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
16111-1
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets
if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for
abandoned outlets
which are not removed.
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization
equipment that has been removed.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers,
and other accessories.
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify
installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections.
Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions.
Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
C. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean
all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps
, ballasts, and broken electrical parts.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Section 01120.
END OF SECTION
16060-3
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service
during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or
circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is
complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and
connections. Obtain permission from Owner&Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours
before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make
temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is
accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify
Owner,Architect/Engineer and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is
complete and ready for service. . Disable system only to make switchovers and
connections. Notify Owner,Architect/Engineer and Telephone Utility Company at
least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage
duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work
area.
G. Existing Refrigeration Alarm/ Energy Management System: Maintain existing system
in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only
to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the
Owner,Architect/Engineer and Store Operations at least 24 hours before partially
or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Section 01120,
Section 02072, and this Section.
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new
construction.
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible
ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
16060-2
SECTION 16060
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition.
1 .2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 120 - Alteration Project Procedures.
B. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual
Sections.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record
documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing
installation.
D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.
16060-1
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in
addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of
related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittals.
B. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
1 .4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable State Building Code.
B. Electrical: Conform to National Electrical Code with State ammendments.
C. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project
conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain
permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1 .6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Section 01010.
END OF SECTION
16010-1
7. Automatic temperature control wires from
heat reclaim valves in the refrigeration
compressor room to the remote control panel
for the sales area heating/cooling system.
8. Thermostats for all electric baseboard
heaters and unit heaters. Thermostats supplied by others.
9. Magnetic starters and motor switches for HVAC
equipment. Starters supplied by others.
10. Furnish and install guards on all thermostats.
11. Furnish, install, and connect all damper motors, linkages, and
devices as shown on drawings and details. Equipment shall be as
specified or approved equal.
16000.26 STAND BY ELECTRICIAN
A. On opening day of the store, typically a weekend
or holiday, the electrical foreman shall be in the
store from opening until closing or 9:00 PM for a
24 hour store to provide instruction, service or
maintenance as required by store personnel.
16000.27 HAND DRYERS
A. Furnish and install one (1) hand dryer in each toilet room that
is accessible to the public, typically two required. Units to be WORLD
Model "A" 208 volts single phase with 30 second timing
or approved.
END OF SECTION
16000 - 15
5. SECURITY SYSTEM
A. This contractor shall install all wiring as shown on the drawings. All
devices for the security system will be furnished and installed by others.
Cable, layout and supervision will be supplied by the Alarm Service Co.
B. Install video and data cables and equipment furnished by TV security
system vendor. Provide 120 volt power at cameras, control boxes, and
monitors as shown on plans. Final connections and testing will be by
vendor.
6. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install conduits and wires as shown on the drawings.
Conduits shall terminate in the Energy Management Room.
B. Furnish and install junction boxes and circuits as shown on the
drawings.
C. All equipment and devices will be furnished by others for installation and
connections by this contractor.
16000.25 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. Furnish, Install and Connect:
1. All electrical power wiring for HVAC equipment.
2. Control wiring for exhaust fans & make-up air units.
3. Thermostat wiring for electric baseboard heaters and unit
heaters.
4. All service disconnecting means and motor protection for
fractional horsepower 120 volt unit heaters and exhaust fans.
5. Thermostat wires from each heating/cooling
system to its respective thermostat.
6. Automatic temperature control wires from
the main control panel to each remote control
at each heating/cooling system.
16000 - 14 '""
1. Door Bell System
2. Computer Communication Wiring
B. It includes provisions for installation of equipment by others for:
1. Local Telephone Company
2. Security System
2. DOOR SIGNAL SYSTEM
A. Install Edwards signal transformers to power the signal equipment.
B. Run #16 TW wire in conduit or steel tube to the bell and pushbuttons.
Bell and pushbuttons shall be located as shown on plan.
C. Exterior button shall be Edward #1786-C mounted 6' 0" above grade or
platforms connected to operate Edwards 17-4G5 bells.
3. COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
A. Provide computer cables and terminations as indicated on drawings
for cash register system, electronic funds transfer, coupon system,
electronic scales, in-store processor system, electronic time clocks,
customer information terminals, pharmacy computer system, and DSD
ordering system.
B. All computer wiringfor cash register system shall be run in rigid
metal conduit for both power and communication.
C. See drawings for termination details and locations.
4. TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. For telephone service, run two, 4" conduit under-ground from Telephone
backboard to riser pole or manhole. See plans.
B. Stub conduit 12 inches above floor in Compressor Room.
C. Provide telephone outlets and wireing as shown on drawings.
D. All instruments will be provided and installed by the Telephone Company
16000 - 13
3. SECURITY, SIGN & CANOPY LIGHTING CONTROL
A. All exterior lighting shall be controlled as shown on the drawings.
B. All lighting shall be either photocell on - time clock off or dusk to dawn
photocell controlled.
4. COMPACTORS
A. Provide power and control wiring for two trash compactors as shown on
the drawings including safety interlock wiring. Magenetic switch shall
Be Sentrol #GS-305A - No substitute.
B Provide wiring and connections as required for automatic door
closer furnished by others. Wiring to include smoke detectors and
push button controls. Connect per manufacturer's wiring diagram..
6. ELECTRICALLY OPERATED DOORS
A. Provide power wiring for electrically operated doors. Control wiring will
be furnished and installed by others.
7. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all power and control wiring for all refrigeration compressors,
condensers, cases and evaporators.
B. Make final connections to cases and control panels
to provide a complete operating system.
8. CAFETERIA EQUIPMENT
A. The owner will furnish and install vending machines for plug-in
connection receptacles shown on the drawings.
16000.24 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
1. SCOPE
A. The scope of work under this Section consists of
furnishing and installing:
16000 - 12 ''
are not suitable for this purpose. Raceways shall be connected to
grounded structural steel or the ground network. After assembly all
conduit locknuts, all EMT coupling fittings and set screws, and all bond
wire screws shall
be set up tight before installation of wiring. Long threads known
as "running threads" shall not be used. Conduit bends shall not have
kinks or flats, and shall not be less than the standard radii. Insulated
metallic bushings shall be used on all conduits entering panel cabinets,
pullboxes, and wiring gutters except on branch lighting circuits.
16000.22 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Lighting contactors for remote control of branch circuits shall be furnished
and installed as specified in riser diagram.
B. Contactors shall bein a NEMA Type 1 enclosure or panelboard mounted
as shown on riser diagram, electrically or mechanically held.
C. Number of poles shall be as specified on drawings and shall be
wired to control circuits as shown. Each contact shall be rated for the
load of tungsten, fluorescent, or high pressure sodium
lighting.
' D. Contactors shall be equal to General Electric Co.
or as shown on drawings.
16000.23 OWNER'S EQUIPMENT
1. SCOPE
A. This section includes the wiring for and connection of equipment
furnished by the Owner under other divisions of this specifications, or
furnished by the Owner under separate contracts.
2. SUMP PUMP
A. In the refrigeration indirect waste pit, provide weatherproof duplex
receptacle for the sump pump furnished by others.
B. Furnish and install a weatherproof float switch to signal high water
in the pit. Connect to refrigeration alarm system by others. Float switch
shall be Anchor Scientific form 2750-A model PN20N0.
16000 - 11
be run in straight lines parallel to walls, beams, and columns and with
right angle bends and threaded conduit fittings.
O. Plastic duct used for underground systems shall be heavy wall, as
manufactured by Carlon or Bermico Brown Company. Plastic spacers
shall be installed 4 ft. 0 in. on centers to maintain minimum concrete
enclosure. No conduit larger than 1 inch trade size shall be embedded
in floor slabs.
P. Conduit and raceways shall be concealed within finished walls,
ceilings, and floor where possible and shall be kept a minimum of 6
inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes.
Raceways shall not be run parallel to and above hot ducts and pipes, the
raceways shall cross beneath wherever practical. Conduits and
raceways shall be adequately supported and secured at intervals of not
more than 8 ft. They shall be run with a slight pitch and in such a
manner that condensate traps will be avoided. Exposed raceways shall
be parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections
of vertical planes and ceilings. Supports shall be furnished and installed
where required whether or not shown on the drawings.
Q. Conduit raceways shall be supported by pipe straps, wall brackets, angle
or strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze, or beam clamps. Where EMT is run
above hung ceilings, it may be supported by conduit wire clips directly
to the ceiling support wires provided specific written approval is obtained ,
from the Architect and the manufacturer of the ceiling provides written
statement that the support wires are adequately sized to support weight
of both ceiling and raceway system. Conduit and raceway supports and
directly fastened boxes, panels, etc. shall be fastened with wood screws
on wood with clinch anchors, precast inserts or bolts and expansion
shields on concrete.
R. Conduits stubbed up through concrete floors for connections to
freestanding equipment shall be provided with a short elbow and a
coupling set flush with the finished floor and threaded inside for a plug.
Wiring shall be extended in rigid threaded conduit to expose equipment,
except that where required, flexible conduit may be used. Conduit
stubbed inside metal-clad equipment shall be terminated in an insulating
bushing. Screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs shall beinstalled in
conduits from which no equipment connections are made.
S. All spare conduits shall be sealed at both ends by terminating in a
coupling and a screwed plug. A noncorroding pull wire shall be installed
in all empty conduits. Conduits and wireways shall be made electrically
continuous at couplings and connections to boxes and cabinets by
means of the joining fasteners or copper bond wires. Slip-fit fasteners
16000 - 10
E. Couplings, connectors and fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be
of the setscrew type.
F. EMT shall not be embedded in concrete or masonry. EMT may be
used for power and control wiring below 600 volts above hung ceilings,
in equipment rooms, in mechanical and electrical chases and closets.
G. Conduit extensions in metal partitions may be made with flexible
metal conduit (Greenfield).
H. Connections to portable equipment, motors, and any vibrating or
rotating equipment shall be made with liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
Flexible connections shall be a minimum of 18 inches long and with
grounding conductor. When the motor and driven equipment are
integrally mounted on a single frame, there shall be a flexible connection
between the building structure and a location on the frame or motor.
The intent of this paragraph is to ensure prevention of rigid connections
between the building structure and the equipment.
I. All conduit sizes shall be as required by the National Electrical Code.
J. Nonmetallic sheathed cable or armored cable may be used where
allowed by local codes in walls and above hung ceilings. The Electrical
Contractor shall contact local authority to determine if "ROMEX" is
acceptable before submitting his bid.
K. Conduit fittings shall be threaded galvanized or cadmium plated.
Conduit fittings and outlet boxes shall be held in place by fittings of a
type approved by the Architect. Steel supports or racks shall be
galvanized steel channel and fittings, Unistrut of Steel City.
L. Expansion fittings shall be furnished and installed wherever building
expansion joints occur or where raceways run through isolated slabs.
Expansion joint for conduit shall be Appleton type XJ or Crouse-Hinds,
size as required.
M. All conduit work shall be carefully cleaned and dried inside before
the installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit
system until all rough plastering is completed. Plug conduit ends to
exclude dust, moisture, plaster, or mortar while building is under
construction. No lubricants or cleaning agents which might have a
deleterious effect on conductor coverings shall be used for drawing
conductors into raceways.
N. Contract drawings are for the most part diagrammatic. Concealed
conduit shall be as short and direct as possible. Exposed conduit shall
16000 - 9
C. As the various parts of the work are installed and completed, perform
tests to insure that the systems are free from short circuits and grounds,
and that all connections, switches, controls and equipment are in proper
operating condition.
D. This Subcontractor shall be responsible for correct voltages, tap settings,
trip settings, phase load balancing and correct phasing on all equipment
from the secondary distribution system to points of utilization.
Secondary voltages shall be tested at the bus in the main switchboard,
at panelboards, and at such other locations on the distribution system as
necessary. Secondary voltages shall be tested under no-load and full-load
conditions.
E. All lighting fixtures shall be tested with specified lamps in place for
not less than ten hours.
F. Provide necessary testing equipment. These tests shall incur no
additional expense to the Owner.
G. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or
inspection shall be corrected promptly and retested. Defective material
shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner.
H. Insofar as practical, a normal full-load test shall be made on the
power and lighting systems.
16000.21 WIRING METHODS
A. All wiring shall be run concealed where possible.
B. All wiring installed below grade and in concrete shall be installed
in plastic conduit except as shown on drawings. All elbows out of
ground or concrete slabs shall be steel galvanized conduit. Conduit over
1 inch trade size shall not be installed in slabs, and no conduit smaller
than 3/4 inch shall be installed in or under slabs.
C. Galvanized steel conduit shall be used for all raceways run in trenches,
or pits, run exposed within 6 inches of floor or exposed to weather. Steel
conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications.
D. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all raceways run in walls
or partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or
above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic
tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of National
Electrical Manufacturers Association Publication "Standards for Zinc-
Coated Metallic Tubing."
16000 - 8 '"
to Owner. Submit manufacturer's maintenance. All the above mentioned
manufacturer's data shall be compiled into a bound volume.
16000.17 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS
A. Where drawings and/or Specifications indicate discrepancies, unclarities
or incompleteness Electrical Subcontractor shall notify the Engineer prior
to award of General Contractor. Otherwise, this Subcontractor shall
abide by the Engineer's inter-pretation of the Bid Documents.
16000.18 MATERIALS. WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION
A. All materials shall be new, first quality and free from defects. All
materials shall conform to the latest requirements of the Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc., and bear the seal thereof, where such standards have
been established for the particular types of materials and equipment
specified. All materials shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommended best practice.
B. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and in accordance
with the trades' best practices.
16000.19 EXAMINATION OF SITE CONDITIONS
A. Before submitting proposals, bidders for work covered under this
Section of the Specifications shall visit and carefully examine the
portions of the site which affect this work so as to familiarize themselves
with existing conditions and difficulties that will attend the execution of
the work. The bidders shall compare the Drawings and Specifications
with the results of their examination of the site and either include
adequate allowance in their bid to fulfill and requirements which can be
detected from a careful site examination, or else comply with the
provisions of Paragraph 1600.18.
16000.20 TESTING
A. Perform all tests required by codes, ordinances, and authorities
previously mentioned. Notify the proper authorities have jurisdiction over
the work Prior to testing.
B. Test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before
the fixtures are connected, and when directed, demonstrate by "megger"
test the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance between
conductors and grounds for the secondary distribution systems shall not
be less than the requirements of the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code.
POW 16000 - 7
switchboard through panels to each receptacle. A separate insulated
copper ground conductor is to run from panel to each receptacle for
computer equipment.
C. A properly sized equipment ground wire shall be run with LE circuits
installed in PVC conduit.
16000.13 TRENCHING & BACKFILLING
The General Contractor shall supply all labor for the trenching and backfilling
required for his work.
16000.14 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide the Owner with a written
guarantee covering all electrical work for a period of one year from date
of final acceptance, or if so noted, for longer periods for parts of the
work.
B. Attended immediately to any and all defects occurring during the
guarantee period and repair in a manner to prevent reoccurrence.
C. Guarantee shall cover all labor and materials.
16000.15 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. This Subcontractor shall protect all fixtures and materials from loss
or damage during construction until complete installation is turned over
to the Owner. All finished work damaged during construction shall be
replaced by this subcontractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the work, all fixtures, fittings, and exposed
materials shall be cleaned and ready for use in the best possible
condition as approved by the Engineer.
C. This subcontractor shall keep the Owner's premises clean and free
from waste material and rubbish and on the completion of the work shall
promptly remove all of his tools, machinery, equipment, facilities, surplus
materials and supplies.
16000.16 MANUFACTURER'S BULLETINS AND INSTgUCTIONS TO OWNER
A. Deliver three copies of the manufacturer's bulletins operation manuals,
shop drawings, wiring diagrams and parts list for each apparatus to the
Engineer when all work is completed, and instruct Owner in proper
operation of all systems to satisfaction of Engineer. All work at no cost
16000 - 6
requirements of the building while under construction and until the
permanent feeders have been installed and are in operation. Temporary
00%. light shall be based on one 200 watt lamp covering each 1,000 square
feet of floor area in the building; and power for motors to a maximum of
112 H.P. at 120 volts. Sufficient wiring and outlets shall be installed to
insure proper lighting in all stairwells, corridors, and separate rooms and
areas.
B. All necessary transformers, meters, cables, panelboards, switches
and accessories required by the temporary light and power installations
shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install and maintain in the building a
feeder, or feeders, of sufficient capacity for the requirements of the entire
building and he shall provide a sufficient number of outlets, located at
convenient points, so that extension cords of not over 100 feet in length
will reach all work requiring temporary light or power.
D. The General Contractor and all subcontractors, individually, shall
furnish all extension cords, sockets, lamps, motors and accessories
required for their work. They shall also pay for all temporary wiring of
construction offices and buildings used by them.
E. All temporary electrical work shall meet the requirements of the
National Electrical Code.
F. All temporary wiring and accessories thereto installed by the Electrical
Subcontractor shall be removed by him after they have served their
purpose.
G. This Subcontractor shall pay all charges of the Utility Company for
their work in the installation of the temporary service.
H. The General Contractor shall pay for the cost of all lamp replacements
and for all energy and demand charges by the Utility Company for the
temporary service.
16000.12 GROUNDING
A. This Subcontractor shall furnish and install all fittings, clamps, conduits
and wire, of proper size to make ground connections between the electric
service, apparatus, conduits and water piping as required by the National
Electrical Code and the local utility company.
B. Grounding for special receptacles for computer equipment shall
provide a continuous insulated path from ground bus of main distribution
16000 - 5
B. In case of conflict between this work and other trades necessitating a
change in design, no work shall be done until the Engineer has been ,.
notified and has rendered a decision as to the necessary changes.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall obtain from the Owner and other
trades the required information as to the location, sizes and type of
connections for the items of equipment furnished by them but connected
by the Electrical Subcontractor.
16000.9 WORKING PROCEDURE
A. At all times during construction, the Electrical Subcontractor shall
keep his material, equipment and tools neatly and safely organized in the
area assigned to him by the General Contractor.
B. He shall keep the premises clean of all packages, boxes, cartons
and wrappings of his materials, and shall remove from the premises all
such rubbish and other waste material at frequent intervals.
16000.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All cutting and patching will be performed by the General Contractor,
using mechanics skilled in the particular trades involved.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall specifically inform the General
Contractor and the various trades involved of the size and location of any
chases, openings and supports in the building which are required by his
work.
C. If the Electrical Subcontractor fails to give proper notice to the
General Contractor of his requirements for sleeves, chases, supports,
etc., the costs of all cutting and patching thus necessitated shall be
borne by the Electrical Subcontractor.
D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall not cut away or remove any
structural portions of the building with-out the consent of the Engineer,
and the Electrical Subcontractor will be held responsible for any damages
resulting from said work.
16000.11 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND PnwFR
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide temporary service of
sufficient size at three phase four wire 120/208 volt from the utility
company power lines to provide for the electrical light and power
16000 - 4 IOM*"
(1) Switchboards and panelboards.
(2) Lighting fixtures, ballasts and lamps.
(3) Transformers.
(4) Wire and cable.
(5) Emergency generator set.
(6) Wiring devices and plates.
(7) Lighting contactors and controls.
(8) Conduit.
(9) Underfloor duct.
(10) Disconnect switches.
(1 1) Building and site lighting fixtures and poles.
(12) Equipment, if submission required under other
sections of this DIVISION.
1
16000.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall maintain at the site a set of drawings
on which shall be accurately shown, as it progresses, the actual
installation of all work under this section, indicating thereon any
variations from the Contract Drawings, including changes in sizes,
locations and dimensions. At the conclusion of the work the Electrical
Subcontractor shall deliver to the Owner a complete set of reproducible
Electrical Drawings showing the entire work as actually installed.
B. For this purpose the owner will furnish two sets of black or blue
line on white drawings, and one set of sepia transparencies of the
electrical drawings.
16000.8 COORDINATION
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to all other
trades to permit all construction to be performed satisfactorily and with
the least possible interference or delay.
16000 - 3
other piping or structural features and from unsightly appearance. It is
not the intent of the drawings to show every offset, fitting and box
required but these shall be furnished where required whether or not
specifically indicated. If any changes from the drawings are deemed
advisable by the Electrical Subcontractor, details of which changes shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval and no changes shall be made
without such approval.
C. The drawings are, in general, made to scale but all measurements
preferably shall be taken from figured dimensions and not by scaling.
D. When measurements are affected by conditions already established, the
Electrical Subcontractor shall take all necessary measurements of existing
work, notwith-standing the figured dimensions of the drawings.
16000.5 LAWS, ORDINANCES PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain
all permits and pay all governmental taxes, fee and other costs in
connection with this work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents
and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments
having jurisdiction; obtain all required Certificates of Inspection for this
work and deliver same to the Engineer before request for acceptance and
final payment for the work. This Contractor shall include in the work,
without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services,
apparatus, drawings (in addition to contract drawings and documents)
in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations, whether or not shown on the drawings, and/or specified. All
materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and
recommendations of the State Authorities, the National Board of Fire
Underwriters, the National Electrical Code, and all other local and Utility
Company rules which may apply.
16000.6 SHOP DRAWINGS ND APPROVALS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval in
sextuplicate, shop drawings of the electrical items listed below.
B. No materials for which shop drawings are required shall be released
for shipment to the job until shop drawings have been returned with the
Engineer's written approval in a degree not requiring resubmission.
C. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following
electrical materials:
16000 - 2
SECTION 16000
GENERAL
16000.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Modifications, and
Supplements of the specifications are hereby made a part of this division.
16000.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of work under this DIVISION without limiting the generality
thereof, consists of furnishing all labor, material and equipment and all
operations and adjustments required for the complete installation and
testing of the electrical work and all items incidental thereto, as indicated
on the drawings, stipulated in the specifications, and as reasonably
implied by either or both excluding only such items of labor, materials
and operations specifically mentioned as furnished under another section
of these specifications or specifically mentioned as furnished by the
Owner.
16000.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. The following items of labor and/or materials are appurtenant to
this Division of the Contract, but are furnished by the Owner or under
other Sections of these specifications:
(1) Furnishing and mounting all electrical motors.
(2) Furnishing all motor starters.
16000.4 DRAWINGS
A. The work shall be coordinated with all drawings which are a part
of the General Contract. including applicable standard details bound in
these specifications, and shall conform to the electrical drawings which
form a part of these specifications and the contract documents.
B. The drawings show the extent and general arrangement of the electrical
work and locations of equipment. All conduit or equipment is shown
diagrammatically. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for
the locations in the most practical manner, free from interference with
`` 16000 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL
16000 GENERAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELS
16111 CONDUIT
16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS
16113 UNDERFLOOR DUCTS
16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16130 BOXES
16141 WIRING DEVICES
16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16461 DRY TRANSFORMERS
16470 PANELBOARDS
16495 TRANSFER SWITCH
16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16721 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
B. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall adjust all equipment associated with the
Work under this section for proper operation at the completion of the Work.
3.4 GUARANTEES:
A. The entire hood fire suppression system installation, as specified under this section shall be
guaranteed for one (1)year against defective equipment, materials and/or workmanship. The
Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor under this guarantee shall repair and replace any
defective equipment, materials and/or workmanship at no cost to the Owner. The guarantee
period shall begin on the date of approval and acceptance.
B. The guarantee shall not be construed as requiring the Hood Fire Suppression System
Contractor to render service or maintenance required in the normal operation of the equipment, or
to make repairs that may be needed due to the Owner's negligence, abuse or breakage.
END OF SECTION
HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM— 15700-6
OOW Q.All discharge nozzles shall be listed, chrome plated, brass nozzles, each covered with a
protective blow off cap.
R.All pipe and conduit penetrations shall be sealed with listed, factory approved, "Compression
Seal"and/or"Quick-Seal" liquid tight, mechanical, hood seal adaptors.
S.All pipe and conduit entering and/or leaving the hood ventilation system shall penetrate the top
of the hood only and not the sides unless specified otherwise herein.
T.All sources of fuel, heat and electric power to fryers and rotisserie shall be shut off
automatically upon operation of the system.
U.A UL listed, factory approved, full sized, mechanical, gas shut off valve shall be furnished by
the Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor and installed by the Plumbing Contractor for each
gas fired appliance specified herein. The valve shall have an external visual indicator of the
closed or open position and shall be located and sized as required by State Codes, Local Codes
and/or Local Authorities having jurisdiction.
V.The Hood Fire Suppression System shall be UL listed for the hazard and installed in
accordance with NFPA standards 96 and 17A and conform to all State and Local Codes.
W. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring, switches, contactors, etc., and make
connections to all electrical and alarm systems necessary for a completely operational Hood Fire
Suppression System.
X. Installation of the Hood Fire Suppression Systems specified herein shall be performed by a
State licensed,factory trained and approved technician in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Y. Upon final installation of each Hood Fire Suppression System specified herein, the Hood Fire
Suppression System Contractor shall seal the automan cabinet cover with two(2) meter type,
plastic or monel wire/lead seals, "Seton" Part#197 thru each eye hole in the cabinet cover and
apply a self adhering label with company name and address at the lower corner of the cover.
Z. For duct layouts, hood sizes, number, and locations, see HVAC drawings and specifications.
Coordinate all piping with the Exhaust Hood Representative. See the Drawings for quantities,
sizes, etc.
3.2 TESTING & MAINTENANCE:
A. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall perform all inspection test procedures
specified herein and/or required by State and Local Authorities having jurisdiction for the initial
installation and ensuing six(6)and twelve(12)month periods following installation for all Hood
Fire Suppression Systems specified herein.
B. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall attach a test and inspection report,
concealed in an envelope, to each respective Automan certifying acceptance by local authorities.
C. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall provide the Stop& Shop Engineering and
Maintenance Departments with copies of test and inspection certificates for the testing and
inspection of all hood fire suppression systems specified herein for a period of one (1)year
following installation as specified herein.
D. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall perform a mechanically activated
discharge test of the Hood Fire Suppression Systems specified herein in accordance with NFPA
17A, Section 2-4 and where required by State and/or Local Authorities, a full dump test or puff
test with CO2 expellant cartridge at no additional cost to Stop& Shop.All system nozzles and
piping shall be flushed or cleaned after each test.
E. Inspection and maintenance testing of hood fire suppression systems shall be performed by a
State licensed, factory trained and approved technician in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Installation of all hood fire suppression systems specified herein shall include a one (1)year
service and maintenance contract from the store opening date.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:
A. Upon completion of the Hood Fire Suppression System the Hood Fire Suppression System
Contractor shall clean and remove all oil and debris resulting from the Work, clean, polish and
leave bright all equipment and metal work intended to be exposed, clean out all piping systems
and equipment; and insure that all work is in perfect operating condition.
HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM— 15700-5
3. EXECUTION
3.1 HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM:
A. A state licensed, factory authorized Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor regularly
engaged in this type of work shall furnish and install a complete hood fire suppression system
"Ansul" Model#R-102 automatically actuated, pre-engineered, liquid agent, cartridge operated,
completely mechanical, hood fire suppression system with a fixed agent nozzle distribution
network at each BBQ/Rotisserie and Pizza Oven location as specified herein.
B. Each system shall provide surface protection to said cooking equipment and provide protection
to all associated hoods, exhaust duct work, ventilators and grease removal devices.
C. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall verify specifications for all associated
cooking appliances and hood vent stations systems specified herein prior to design of
suppression systems specified herein.
D. Each system shall have the following actuation capabilities: automatic actuation with a(usable
link detection system rated in accordance with operating temperature in the ventilating system;
local manual actuation by a push button located on the cover of the release mechanism
enclosure; and remote manual actuation by glass, break-rod type mechanical pull stations
(mounted 4-6"above finished floor).
E. Linkage assemblies shall be comprised of 1/2" rigid or E.M.T. thin wall conduit, 1/16"dia.
flexible stainless steel rope with 900 pulley elbows.
F. The regulated release mechanism shall be the spring loaded mechanical/pneumatic type
capable of providing the expellant gas supply to one or two agent tanks dependent on capacity of
the nitrogen cartridge used. The mechanism shall have a push button with visual indicator of the
cocked or fixed condition accessible without having to open the stainless steel enclosure.
G. All system components number, sizing and ratings of piping, nozzles, mechanical gas valves,
pull stations, adaptor seals, agent tanks, expellant cartridges, fusible links, etc. shall be selected
and designed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA standards as
specified herein.
H. Automan cabinet and mechanical pull station locations and mounting heights shall be
coordinated with Stop& Shop Construction and Engineering Department and comply with all
State Codes, Local Codes and Manufacturer's recommendations.
I. All automan cabinets shall be installed tight to finished ceiling tile.
J. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall provide fusible links for the
BBQ/Rotisserie and Fryer Hood in accordance with NFPA Standards and manufacturer's
recommendations.
K. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall give special consideration to the
coordination, installation, roughing and concealment of all suppression system piping, conduit,
and pull station work boxes with respect to all associated construction work.
L. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall rough pull station, 4"steel octagon work
boxes with cover plate screws positioned at 2 and 8 o'clock prior to closing and/or finishing of
associated walls.
M. The extinguishing agent utilized for the system shall be a potassium carbonate potassium
acetate-based formulation with the trade name "Ansulex Low PH"designed for flame knock down
and securement of grease related fires.
N. The liquid agent storage tank shall be selected with a capacity necessary for proper coverage
of cooking equipment and associated exhaust hood system specified herein and in accordance
with HVAC drawings and specifications.
O. All piping used to convey the extinguishing agent shall be scale free schedule 40 black steel
pipe and fittings unless specified otherwise herein. All piping shall be run concealed above
finished ceiling where possible.
P. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall furnish and install individual drops for
each nozzle when providing coverage to the cooking surfaces of appliances specified herein.
Exposed horizontal sections of pipe shall not be permitted below and/or exposed within the hood.
All nozzles shall be located away from the cooking surfaces of appliance as per manufacturers
recommendations and NFPA standards as specified herein. All exposed portions of piping shall
be furnished and installed with polished chrome brass pipe and fittings. Chrome sleeved schedule
40 black steel pipe shall not be approved in lieu thereof.
HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM— 15700-4
D. No work shall commence until the Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor has obtained a
set of Shop Drawings stamped "Approved" by the Architect or his Engineer, and the Stop &Shop
Engineering Dept.
1.10 EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall within 30 days after the award of the
sprinkler contract and prior to placing orders for material, submit six(6)complete sets of
equipment submittals for approval and review with combined comments to the following:
1 -Architect-Six (6)complete sets of equipment submittals distributed for approval and
review with combined comments to:
a. Construction Manager
b. Hood Fire Suppression Contractor
c. Fire Protection Engineer
d. Stop& Shop Engineering Dept.
B.All equipment submittal sets shall be bound listing all pertinent data, checked and highlighted
for the following materials and equipment included under this section denoting name of
manufacturer, model number, composition, finish, grade, size and capacity.
1. Automan Cabinet
2. Suppression Agent
3. Agent Tanks
4. Expellent Cartridges
5. Pull Stations
6.Adapter Seals
7. Fusible Links
C. Stop&Shop Engineering Dept. reserves the right to request equipment submittals on any
material or equipment not specified herein under this section.
2. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS
2.1 WORKMANSHIP, HANDLING AND DELIVERY:
A. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall see that all his materials and equipment
are delivered to the building when required, so as to allow the Work to progress in the most
efficient manner.
B. All equipment and materials must be new, unused, free from any imperfections.
C. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times.The Hood Fire Suppression
System Contractor shall make good all damage caused by his workmen either directly or
indirectly. All equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,water, chemical or
mechanical injury.
D. All work shall be done by skilled workmen in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
E. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall confine his storage and handling of
materials and his construction operations to such limits as directed by the Architect and/or the
CM.
F.All respective materials and equipment shall be by same manufacturer, identified by the
maker's name, mark, rating and approved standards where applicable.
G. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest edition of NFPA Codes and
Standards as modified by FM.
H. Any request for deviation from the requirements of this section shall be submitted to Stop &
Shop Engineering Department in writing for review and approval prior to the start of any Work
under this section.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:ANSUL
HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM—15700-3
1.6 STANDARDS
A. All work shall conform to all applicable State Codes and Local Codes, and the latest editions of
the following National Fire Protection Association Codes and Standards as modified by Factory
Mutual:
NFPA Standards: Factory Mutual Data Sheet
1. 17A- Liquid Agent Extinguishing System None
2. 96 -Cooking Equipment Vapor Removal None
B. Where the requirements of this specification are more stringent than the said standards, the
requirements of this specification shall govern.
C. The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall comply with all requirements cited by
State and/or Local Authorities and shall provide any additional requirements at his own expense.
1.7 PERMITS AND FEES: The Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor shall file all
required notices and plans with proper authorities and shall secure and pay for all necessary
permits, inspections, tests and costs incidental to his work. No work shall commence prior to this.
1.8 GUARANTEES
A. The hood fire suppression system installations specified herein shall be guaranteed for one (1)
year against defective equipment, materials and workmanship. The Hood Fire Suppression
Contractor under this guarantee shall repair and replace any defective equipment, materials
and/or workmanship at no cost to owner. The guarantee period is to begin on the date a
successful acceptance test is made.
B. The guarantee shall not be construed as requiring the Hood Fire Suppression System
Contractor to render service or maintenance required in the normal operation of the equipment, or
to make repairs that may be needed due to owner's negligence, abuse, or breakage.
C. System components shall have a five (5)year warranty and a lifetime guarantee against
cartridge leakage.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Hood Fire Suppression Contractor shall, within 30 days after the award of the contract and
prior to fabrication, submit complete shop drawings to the following for approval, review, comment
and/or coordination:
1 -Architect- Six (6)complete sets of shop drawings and calculations (Unapproved by
F.M.)distributed for approval and review with combined comments to:
a. Construction Manager
b. Sprinkler Contractor
c. Architect(2)
d. Fire Protection Engineer
e. Stop & Shop Engineering Dept.
2 - Construction Manager-A minimum of six (6)complete sets of shop drawings for
coordination to:
a. Construction Manager(2)
b. Sprinkler Contractor
c. HVAC Contractor
d. Plumbing Contractor
e. Electrical Contractor
B. Shop drawings shall be based on the latest revisions to Architectural, Structural, HVAC,
Plumbing, Electrical Drawings and Stop& Shop Fixture Plan (F-1)prior to the award of the
Contract.
C. Should the Hood Fire Suppression Contractor have any questions concerning the
Specifications either during bidding, while preparing shop drawings or during construction, they
shall be directed to the Stop& Shop Engineering Dept. in writing for the necessary interpretation
from the Insurance Carrier.
HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM— 15700-2
SECTION 15700 - HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:The Construction Manager and/or his sub-contractor shall supply and install a
complete hood fire suppression system designed for coverage of all store hoods at cooking areas
shown on the latest Architectural Drawings and the Stop &Shop Fixture Plan (F-1) in accordance
with all applicable NFPA, FM, State and Local codes and/or local authorities.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED: The following items of work are to be included in the responsibility of
the Hood Fire Suppression System Contractor as Work of this section:
A. Shop drawings.
B.As built Drawings.
C. Equipment Submittals.
D. Coordination of the Work of all other trades.
E.Application, securing and payment for all permits, certificates, taxes, fees, inspections, tests
and approvals required in connection with the Work under this section.
F. Testing of the completed system.
G. Hood fire suppression systems.
H.All work shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
I. Furnishing of mechanical gas valves supplied with the hood fire suppression systems.
1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED: The following items of work are to be done by others and shall
not be included in the Work of this section. However, it shall be the responsibility of the
Construction Manager to supply the Subcontractors with the necessary information, drawings and
supervision so that they can properly complete their phase of the installation.
A. Electrical wiring and connections to all switches, valves and alarms associated with the hood
fire suppression systems.
B. Cutting, patching, box-outs and holes through metal deck.
C.Alarm systems.
D. Installation of the mechanical gas valve supplied with the hood fire suppression systems.
1.4 COORDINATION
A.All work done under this section shall be coordinated with all other disciplines involved with
construction, engineering and/or design of this project. Any deviation from requirements of this
outline specification shall be submitted to Stop&Shop Engineering Dept. in the form of a type
written letter for review prior to any changes associated with work under this section.
B. The Construction Manager shall obtain one (1)complete set of the approved exhaust hood
shop drawings from the HVAC Contractor for coordination purposes.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. "Contractor"the Hood Fire Suppression Contractor and any of his Subcontractors, Vendors,
Suppliers or Fabricators.
B. "Provide"furnish and install.
C. "Furnish"purchase and deliver to other trade or owner for installation.
D. "Install' install materials, equipment and/or assemblies furnished by other trades or owner.
E. "Concealed"where used in connection with the installation of piping and accessories, shall
mean that hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts of above suspended
ceilings.
F. "Exposed" shall mean not"Concealed"as defined above.
G. "UL" Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
H. "FM" Factory Mutual. ("Approved" shall refer to approval by Factory Mutual).
I. "Listed"shall refer to materials or equipment included in a list published by a nationally
AOW. recognized testing laboratory that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equipment
or materials, and whose listing states either that the equipment or materials meets nationally
recognized standards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.
HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM—15700-1
50. ALTERNATE
A. This Contractor shall furnish, with his base bid price, a separate price to be
added or deducted from his bid, to provide a complete Captive-Aire, Deli Exhaust
Hood System.
B. The Captive-Aire Deli Hood Exhaust System shall include all components as
outlined on drawing M-2 and shall include furnishing and installing the hood,
exhaust duct, exhaust fan with curb, control panel, wiring, a fully charged fire
suppression system, gas solenoid valve, start-up, testing, balancing and a report
on the final system operation.
END OF SECTION
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-25
D. Damper Motors - All power units shall be split phase motors with oil immersed
gear trains. Motors shall have integral spring return feature where required.
They shall be of the modulating type where required. All automatic motorized
dampers shall be furnished and installed by the HVAC Contractor. Automatic
motorized damper motors and linkage shall be furnished, installed and wired by
the Electrical Contractor.
E. All magnetic starters and associated motor switches shall be furnished by the
HVAC Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall install and wire all starters and
disconnects. Refer to Motors and Starters paragraph within the specification for
information.
F. Control panels for hoods shall be furnished by the HVAC Control. The Electrical
Contractor shall install and wire hood control panels.
G. Calibration and adjustment of all control devices shall be the responsibility of the
HVAC Contractor. Furnish and install all calibration and control device
adjustment requirements as per the EMS Contractor requirements, specifications
and Stop & Shop requirements for a complete and properly operating system.
H. Thermostats and guards shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor. The
Electrical Contractor shall install and wire thermostats.
47. PAINTING
A. Paint inside of all air outlets and connecting plenums with one coat of black paint,
or provide all such items factory prepainted. For roof-mounted equipment,
provide factory prefinish on all exposed surfaces. Touch-up scratches and
abrasions on all equipment.
48. TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Stop & Shop shall provide the air balancing services for all air handling systems
excluding the compensating hood systems. The General Contractor shall be
responsible for scheduling and providing all support required by the Stop & Shop
Balancing Contractor. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for correcting
any system deficiencies identified by the Balancing Contractor. Stop & Shop
shall provide a follow-up air balance to verify the results of the corrective
measures. If system remains deficient, this Contractor shall be responsible for
the cost of additional follow-up air balances deemed necessary by Stop & Shop.
The use of an independent Air Balance Contractor shall in no way void any
warranties required from the General or HVAC Contractors.
49. PHASING
A. The existing facility will remain in operation while the majority of the work of this
Contract is being performed. This contractor shall coordinate all aspects of the
installations of all new systems so that they are complete and operational before
any previously existing stem is removed and/or abandoned. Coordinate the
extent of work in each phase of the construction with all Stop & Shop
Representatives.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-24
accordance and APPROVED by ALL governing Codes, State, City, Town, Local,
Fire Department and Gas Company Inspectors having jurisdiction.
E. The Installing HVAC Contractor will be totally responsible for obtaining ALL
approvals PRIOR to installation.
F. Vent piping must terminate as required by Local Code, or as required by NFPA
37 and NFPA 211.
G. The system shall be installed as designed by the manufacturer and in
accordance with the terms of the manufacturer's 10-year warranty.
44. ARRANGEMENT
A. The following principals must be observed and followed in the arrangement of
heating and cooling components in all systems.
1. All motors, belts and bearings shall be outside the air stream or suitably
protected from the heated air.
2. Sufficient clearance must be provided above the gas regulator to permit
adjustment.
3. All manufacturer's recommended clearances must be complied with to
insure proper servicing.
4. Local Codes should be consulted to determine acceptance of a proposed
type of installation.
5. A three foot (3') service platform is required with access (door or ladder)
around any and all air handling units and heat exchangers, if they are
suspended from roof framing.
45. COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that equipment is installed and connected according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
46. CONTROLS
A. Basis of ALL HVAC systems design in constant fan operation.
B. The HVAC Contractor will provide the Electrical Contractor and E.M.S. installing
Contractor all wiring diagrams, assistance, coordination and supervision to insure
complete operating systems.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall coordinate with the E.M.S. installing Contractor to
insure that ALL systems and controls are FULLY operational twenty-one (21)
Days PRIOR to store opening date.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-23
42. GAS-FIRED TYPE UNIT HEATERS
A. Gas unit heater shall have a minimum 80% thermal efficiency, shall have a �►+d
factory-installed power venter, sealed vent product collection chamber, an
intermittent spark ignited pilot with electronic flame supervision, and a single
stage combination gas valve. The unit is to include all limit and safety controls
and shall be furnished and installed with OSHA. approved fan guards. Heat
exchangers to be Type 409 stainless steel and burners shall be aluminized steel.
B. Gas unit heater shall be manufactured by Reznor, Modine, Sterling, or approved
equal, and shall be AGA approved.
C. Unit shall be of capacities as required, separately flued, and individually
thermostatically controlled.
D. Unit heater must be installed level with 3/8" diameter threaded rod and four (4)
point suspension. Two (2) point suspension is not acceptable.
E. Unit heater must be installed per NFPA guidelines and a minimum of 7'-6" above
floor. Unit heaters installed under the mezzanine or in any area with a ceiling
height of less than 12'-0", must be low profile type, Reznor Model "FT" or equal.
Location of heater must not restrict Stop & Shop work activities and must be
specifically approved by Stop & Shop. Units shall be positioned so as not to be
in the path of door swings, and direction of blow shall not be directed at
refrigerated chest doors.
F. Gas flues that penetrate exterior walls shall be furnished and installed complete
with Tjernlund high temperature side wall vents in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and all codes.
G. Unit heaters installed in a receiving or storage area with a height to the roof deck
of 14'-0" or greater shall be installed at a height to the top of the unit of no more
than 14'-0" and shall be equipped with a 250 downturn outlet nozzle.
43. FLUES FOR FORCED EVACUATION OF PRODUCTS OF COMBUSTION
A. Furnish and install complete Flue Vent Systems as indicated on drawings. All
flues which run inside the building shall be Metalbestos type "G" 304 stainless
steel designed for this application. All flues running through walls or roof and
outside the building shall be Metalbestos type "PS". The vent system shall be
designed and include all components as recommended by Metalbestos.
B. When flues are individually flued to atmosphere up through roof, they shall have
appropriate flue caps and "tall roof cones" flashed in by the Roofing Contractor,
and shall be located as far away from parapets as possible. First floor unit
heaters go through wall. Maintain 6" clearance from combustibles.
C. The inner pipe joints shall be sealed by use of overlapping type V-Bands (P-
OVB) with a Premixed 2000 degree F. sealant (P-2000E). The outer channel
bands shall be sealed with a 600 degree F. sealant (P-600) where exposed to
weather.
D. ALL applications of type "G" and ""PS". flues MUST be installed in STRICT
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be in STRICT
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-22
I. Between hood make-up air intake and hood exhaust fan, a MINIMUM of fifteen
(15') feet distance shall be maintained. Also other flues, exhaust fans and air
intakes should be carefully considered.
J. The grease exhaust fan shall be vertical discharge and built and installed in strict
accordance with NFPA Bulletin 96. Fan construction shall include spun
aluminum shell and dome, aluminum fan wheel and hub, removable grease
through with drain tube, insulated heat shield on motor compartment base plate,
prelubricated ball bearing drive, Class B insulated motor, vari-pitch drive, and
service disconnect switch. Furnish an aluminum curb for the fan of sufficient
dimensions to meet requirements of NFPA. Fan shall be manufactured by
ACME (no substitution).
K. One (1) control panel shall be furnished complete by Halton Company for
installation by the HVAC Contractor with the features noted as follows:
1. The Model "E" control panel is for use with hood and fan systems.
2. The control panel shall control respective make-up air fan and exhaust
fan shall contain the following:
a. Fuse block and fuses.
b. Motor starters with thermal overloads.
C. Main disconnect switch with door operator (non-fused).
d. Start/Stop toggle switch with pilot light for exhaust fans with door
operator (non-fused).
e. Toggle switch for hood lights.
f. All components above shall be installed in a water-tight and dust-
tight NEMA rated enclosure designed and approved for indoor
"* use.
g. The control panel shall carry the "UL" label.
3. The supply fan shall be furnished by Halton Company and shall be
complete with utility, vibration isolation, motor, and service disconnect
switch. The supply fan will be interlocked with the exhaust fan.
L. Hood shall be a minimum of 6-10" A.F.F. to bottom of hood with stainless steel
finish skirt of size required.
40. FILTERS AND FILTER SECTIONS
A. All systems and/or units shall be furnished and installed complete with filter
sections, and throw-away type filters, Farr 30/30, two inch (2") thick. The
Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of filters for each unit.
B. Upon completion of construction, and prior to air balancing (approximately two
(2) weeks prior to store opening), the HVAC Contractor shall furnish and install in
all systems clean new throw-away type filters, Farr 30/30 two inch (2") thick or
four inch (4") thick filters to match the original equipment filter specification. The
third set of filters shall be provided Stop & Shop prior to the store opening.
41. VIBRATION
A. All equipment that may cause vibration must be supported on vibration
eliminators.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-21
39. EXHAUST HOOD
A. Furnish and install in the Deli area, complete in all respects, a stainless steel
exhaust hood, Model KVE, as manufactured by Halton Company, including
ductwork for the exhaust of the hood. Hood shall be provided with Grease
Filters. Hood size shall be as required for capture of odor and heat in
accordance with good practice, and in conformity with all Codes. Exhaust double
wall canopies shall be constructed of 16 gage polished No. 304 stainless steel
with No. 4 finish, both the exterior shell and interior liner. Exterior shell shall be
liquid tight, continuously welded, with all visible weldments ground smooth and
blended conforming to the latest edition of NFPA Bulletin 96. Exhaust canopy
shall bear the NSF No. 1113 label, BOCA label per research report 78-46, and
UL classification for exhaust hood without damper, for use with a UL listed fire
suppression system which shall be provided with the hood. The hood shall
include 2" deep UL listed aluminum panel extractors. Filter removal tool shall be
included. The exhaust hood shall include UL listed 115V vaporproof
incandescent light spaced every 5'-0" (max.) of canopy length. All lights shall be
factory mounted and wired in conduit to a power junction box for field connection
by the Electrical Contractor to the power supply. Light bulbs will be furnished by
Stop & Shop.
B. The face area of the hood shall be used for air quantity determination. A
minimum of 100 C.F.M. to 125 C.F.M. per sq./ft. of hood face area be applied
and/or as required by hood manufacturer.
C. The hood shall have grease drain and gutter system and shall be fire proofed
and installed in accordance with all State, City, Town and Local NFPA and Fire
Department codes.
D. The hood's exhaust ductwork shall be welded black iron. Provide cleanout
access doors.
E. The make-up ductwork shall be galvanized of gauge, as required, shall be
insulated with glass fiber blanket insulation (1-1/2") inch thick, 3/4# density,
Johns-Manville, Microlight, or approved equal, applied over the insulation.
F. The system exhaust fan and make-up air unit shall be interlocked and shall be
operated manually by a manual switch and pilot light. The exhaust system shall
be arranged so that, when the manual switch is put in the "OFF" position, the
exhaust fan shall continue to operate for a maximum of thirty (30) minutes, for
POST PURGE evacuation of the system. Under no condition will the exhaust fan
start or operate prior to, or without the make-up air unit being in operation.
G. The chicken barbecue hood control panel will also include a 120 degree F sensor
(shipped loose) and 30 minute time delay relay. See AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION of the Specifications for the sequence of
control. Sensor to be field installed by HVAC Contractor and wired by the
Electrical Contractor.
H. Exhaust fan shall be furnished and installed complete with factory built roof curb
and curb adaptor. A minimum of 26-1/2" high and/or as required to conform with
NFPA-96 Code, that fan discharge outlet be a minimum of 40" above roof
surface.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-20
including rooftop equipment which weighs more than 2,000 pounds and is
located more than 15 feet above the floor, all ductwork six (6) square feet in
cross sectional area or greater, or piping 2-1/2" in diameter or larger, not located
in HVAC spaces, where piping 1-1/4" and greater must be restrained.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted on all seismic curbs and hanger systems.
Calculations detailing the seismic abilities of the submitted components along
with a letter of compliance from a Registered Structural
Engineer confirming that the seismic component submitted meets the State
Seismic Requirements for the installation proposed must be provided.
38. IN-STORE BAKERY OVEN EXHAUST
A. In the Bakery Area, the gas ovens (two (2) separate dual rack ovens) by Baxter
Manufacturing Company, Inc. or units as manufactured by other oven
manufacturers, shall be furnished by Stop & Shop Company, Inc. for installation
by the General Contractor and set in place by the General Contractor for
mechanical installation.
B. For each of the two (2) gas ovens, the Contractor shall furnish and install
complete a Type II (no grease) exhaust system. The exhaust system shall
consist of a 10-inch diameter "B-Vent" connected to a 8-inch diameter collar at
the oven and a roof mounted upblast exhaust fan with a backdraft damper. The
exhaust fan shall be sized for 600 CFM with a static pressure loss of 0.4 i.w.g.
through the oven. The fan motor shall be a maximum of 1/3 horsepower and
include internal overload protection.
C. Any and all related incidental work as required shall also be furnished and
installed by this Contractor.
D. ALL stacks and flues shall rise up through roof a minimum of thirty feet (30') IN
from THE FRONT of the building.
E. ALL WORK FOR OVENS, AS INDICATED ON PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS,
AND AS REQUIRED SHALL BE DONE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH
OVEN MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
AND AS FIELD DIRECTED REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY AN
AUTHORIZED MANUFACTURER'S FIELD ENGINEER. ALL OVEN WORK
SHALL BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED PRIOR TO OVEN OPERATION BY:
1. OVEN MANUFACTURER.
2. BUILDING INSPECTOR.
3. FIRE MARSHALL.
4. GAS COMPANY.
5. PLUMBING INSPECTOR.
AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND ALL
GOVERNING AUTHORITIES.
F. This Contractor shall be responsible to disconnect and remove the existing
exhaust system for the old bakery ovens, complete with all associated fans,
controls, etc. to allow for installation of new system and related components.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-19
34. VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Provide additional sound isolation as required to limit the noise level in look
conditioned space to maximum of NC-40.
B. Mount vibrating equipment on appropriate vibration absorption components as
manufactured by Peabody Noise Control or Vibration Eliminator Company.
C. Isolate piping from structure in a manner to prevent transmission of vibration.
35. MOTORS AND STARTERS
A. Provide motors and starters designed for the supply voltages made available for
this portion of the work. Coil voltage on starters shall be as required by the EMS
Contractor.
B. Where motor is used with V belt drive, equipped with a sliding base and belt
guard, and motor sheave.
C. All motors 35 HP and larger shall be reduced voltage starting type.
D. All heating and air conditioning equipment shall be furnished and installed
complete with three (3) leg overload protection. All three phase HVAC
equipment shall be factory furnished and installed complete with PHASE LOSS
PROTECTION SYSTEMS to protect all motors and compressors. This will
include, but shall NOT be limited to:
1. Heating and air conditioning rooftop units.
2. Heating and ventilation rooftop units.
3. Air-cooled condensing units.
4. Air-cooled condensers.
5. Heating and air conditioning air handling units evaporator fan motors.
6. Heating and ventilating air handling unit fan motors.
7. Ventilating air handling unit fan motors.
36. GENERAL EXHAUST SYSTEMS
A. Provide exhaust systems complete as shown on drawings and specified herein.
B. Exhaust fans shall be roof mounted, through wall or in-line type, as scheduled on
the drawings. Provide fans, ducts, controls and diffusers as shown and
scheduled on the drawings.
C. Air exhaust fans shall be provided with backdraft dampers, bird screen, magnetic
starters and disconnect switches.
D. Sound ratings shall be recommended by ASHRAE.
37. SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. This Contractor shall provide all required seismic curbs, hangers, restraints, etc.
to insure that all components are installed in accordance with the State Building
Code. This shall include, but not be limited to, all individual components,
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-18
31. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. All fabric for flexible duct connections to equipment shall be 30 ounces glass
fabric double coated with neoprene, fire retardant, waterproof, airtight and acid
resistant or Ventfabrics "Ventglass." Flexible connections shall be fabricated
from approved flame proofed fabric conforming to 90A of the NFPA. Asbestos
cloth will not be acceptable. At ducts to equipment, provide vent-fabric flexible
connections with a minimum of 6" full length and approved by the governmental
agencies having jurisdiction.
32. ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors and frames in all ductwork, as required, to permit access to
automatic dampers, fire and smoke dampers and other similar equipment.
B. All access doors shall be double construction of not less than No. 20 gauge
sheet metal and shall be neoprene gasketed around their entire perimeter.
Doors in insulated ducts or insulated casings shall be rigid fiberglass insulation
between the metal panels and shall be of same thickness as the duct or panel
adjacent to the access doors.
C. All access doors in sheetmetal ducts shall be hung on heavy flat hinges and shall
be secured in the closed position by means of cast zinc clinching type latches.
Where space conditions preclude hinges, four (4) heavy window type latches
shall be utilized.
33. DUCT INSULATION
A. Provide materials complying with NFPA Bulletin 90-A, as determined by UL
method NFPA 225-ASTM E 84, and complying with the governing code, with
flame spread rating under 25 and smoke developed rating under 50. Where
vapor barriers are used, provide intact and continuous throughout. The
acceptable manufacturers are Owens/Corning fiberglass, Johns-Manville and/or
Microlite.
B. All supply and return ductwork shall be insulated with 3/4 pcf 1-1/2" thick
fiberglass duct wrap blanket with factory applied F.S.K., Foil Scrim Draft vapor
barrier facing laminate. Plenums, fresh air intakes and pressure reliefs shall also
be insulated in the same means.
C. Wrap insulation firmly around ductwork covering all surfaces including standing
seams, and with all joints lapped at least 2". Take special care to avoid
excessive stretching and compressing, and to achieve securing at lapped
sections where possible.
D. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. All ductwork insulation shall be furnished and installed ONLY by a competent
Insulation Contractor totally responsible to the HVAC Contractor. This work shall
NOT be acceptable, if installed and/or executed by the HVAC, and/or Heating,
Ventilating & Air Conditioning Contractor, Sheetmetal Contractor, or General
Contractor.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-17
K. This contractor shall provide an alternate price to furnish all new supply, return
and exhaust diffusers to replace existing devices. Style, size and blow shall
match existing exactly. Face velocity shall not exceed 500 FPM. All diffusers,
grilles and registers shall be factory painted white. Provide factory-applied on-
site applied black coating on the inside of all air outlets and connecting plenums.
Acceptable manufacturers: All manufactured by Agitair or Tuttle & Bailey only.
Round diffusers are not acceptable. Return grilles shall be the horizontal face
bar type 40 deflection.
30. DAMPERS
A. Provide all fire and smoke dampers, smoke and fire sensors as required by the
National Board of Fire Underwriters, State, City, Local Ordinances, Fire
Department Codes, NFPA and the Owners and Tenants Insurance Carriers.
B. Fire dampers shall be interlocking blade type dampers as manufactured by
Ruskin Model IBD2 Style A. Dampers shall be supplied with UL approved fusible
link rated at one and one-half (1-1/2) hours and 212 degrees F. Dampers shall
be constructed of 20 GA galvanized steel and shall suite the size of the ductwork
in which installed. Fire dampers shall be installed in locations as required by all
applicable Codes.
C. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be a low leakage FSD 60 as
manufactured by Ruskin. Damper shall be normally closed and shall be supplied
with an MD 2781 type actuator. Damper shall be constructed of 16 GA
galvanized steel and sized as shown on the drawings.
D. Motor-operated dampers shall be low leakage damper CD-50 as manufactured
by Ruskin. Dampers shall be supplied with the following actuators:
1. Normally closed dampers MP 2781
2. Normally open dampers P150
E. Furnish and install fire dampers constructed and tested in accordance with UL
safety Standard 555. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal
installation, as required. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall
and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials, and practices
required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer
when dampers were tested. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper
manufacturer's instructions.
F. Fire dampers shall be as manufactured by Ruskin, Prefco, Air Balance, or
approved equal, for use in walls and/or floors to match fire ratings.
G. Each sleeve enclosing a fire damper shall be installed per requirements.
Sleeves for fire dampers shall be suitable gauge to provide a fire rating equal or
greater than the fire rating of the wall penetrated, but shall not be lighter gauge
than scheduled below:
Maximum Duct Size Sleeve Gauqe
0" thru 24" 16 gauge
24" and larger 14 gauge
H. Fire damper blades shall be outside the air stream for all duct sizes.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-16
metal surfaces and so as to endure without falling in the presence of moving air.
All liner application shall comply with SMACNA "Duct Liner Application
Standard".
L. Branch takeoffs, tees and vanes, except otherwise specified shall conform to
Figures and Plates of the applicable SMACNA Duct Manuals.
M. After duct system is competed, test for duct leakage in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repeat leaks and repeat tests
until total leakage is less than 1% of system design air flow.
29. DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. All ceiling diffusers shall be of the surface mount type with a square or
rectangular inlet as an integral part of the frame, and shall have a removable
inner core. The core shall include built-in diffusing vanes welded to each louver.
The diffusing vanes shall be arranged to discharge air from adjacent louvers at
an angle of 451 in opposite directions to insure rapid mixing of primary and room
air. Diffusers shall include an opposed blade damper for volume control.
Diffusers shall be Agitair type RC as manufactured by Tuttle & Bailey, Metal Aire
model 5000-4-I, or Titus model TDV-1.
B. Ceiling return air grilles for the main Sales Areas air handlers and transfer grilles
unit to be '/z" x '/2" grid core, Tuttle & Bailey type CR500C, Metal Aire type
CCSTBC, or Titus type 50F-A. All other return air grilles shall be horizontal face
bar type, 401 deflection, Tuttle & Bailey type T70D, Metal Aire type RH, or Titus
type 4FL.
C. Provide diffusers of sizes, capacities, and pattern as scheduled on the drawings.
D. All diffusers and grilles shall be white unless otherwise directed by Stop & Shop.
Provide factory-applied or site-applied black coating on the inside of all air outlets
and connecting plenums.
E. Provide louvers with size, and capacities as scheduled on the drawings. Where
exterior louvers are specified, provide drainable storm proof type with bird
screen. Provide sponge rubber under all flanges.
F. Round diffusers or alternate manufacturers are NOT acceptable.
G. Face velocity shall not exceed 500 FPM.
H. Air diffusers, grilles and registers shall be factory painted white.
I. Paint duct black inside return air grilles.
J. This Contractor shall be responsible to remove and reinstall all existing diffusers,
grilles and registers, noted on the drawings, to allow the replacement of ceiling in
all areas of the store with hung ceilings. This Contractor shall be responsible to
repair any broken blades and provide all air devices so they can be cleaned and
#poll painted by the General Contractor, prior to reinstallation by this contractor.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-15
each indicated function. Installation shall be per SMACNA Standards.
Suggested SMACNA Duct Manual References shall be considered as a
Requirement when used for this project.
C. Except as otherwise noted, ductwork shall be hung by using sheetmetal bands of
soft steel secured at a minimum of two (2) locations in the vertical and one (1)
under the duct. For additional ductwork hanging arrangement and reinforcement
requirements, refer to the Duct Manual recommendations.
D. Where ductwork width is larger than 36", ductwork shall be hung by using rods of
not less than 3/8 inch soft steel secured at points of attachments with threaded
nuts. All rods used on ductwork exposed in finished areas shall be plain smooth
rods threaded only at the ends. Bent rods will not be allowed. Ductwork shall be
reinforced per the Duct Manual.
E. Ductwork shall be securely attached to the building construction. The hanger
design and spacing shall be governed by the major duct dimension and shall be
in accordance with SMACNA Duct Manual except as modified herein. Vertical
ductwork shall be supported at each floor level in an approved manner using
angles or channels riveted to the ducts. The installation, when complete and
under operating conditions, shall be free from chatter or vibration. If necessary to
achieve this, additional supports shall be furnished without extra cost to the
Owner. Supports and bars and similar items shall be galvanized structural steel.
F. All ductwork shall be installed to true alignment, generally parallel or
perpendicular to adjacent building walls, floors and ceilings, so as to present a
neat and workmanlike appearance. Care shall be paid to the exact locations of
all sheetmetal work with respect to equipment, ducts, conduits, piping, slabs,
beams, columns, ceiling suspension systems, lighting fixtures, and electrical,
plumbing and fire protection systems in the building. Trades in locating the
piping -and equipment in the best interests of the Owner. The drawings and
specifications covering other work to be done in the building shall be carefully
studied and arrangements shall be made to avoid conflict.
G. The installation of special items of equipment in the duct systems, including
automatic dampers, thermostats, thermometers, duct air flow measuring devices
and other related controls shall be done per manufacturer's specifications.
H. All elbows, tees and branch takeoffs in round ductwork shall be made of the
same materials as the ductwork.
I. Duct connections to equipment shall be in no case smaller than the equipment
openings.
J. All openings for pilot tube traverses shall be fitted with neat removable plugs or
caps. As a minimum, such openings shall be provided at every fan inlet, and at
such other points as may be required for air flow measuring and balancing.
K. All lined duct sections and joints shall be closely inspected by the HVAC
Contractor before and after each piece is erected. Loose edges, open joints,
damaged areas and other defects shall be sealed securely so as to insulate all
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-14
PLATE DIMENSION OF LONGEST METAL GAUGES
NO. SIDE OF DUCT STEEL
7 19" through 30" 24
8 31" through 42" 22
L. All field provided outside air plenums serving air handling units or other air
handling equipment, shall be externally insulated.
M. Fiberglass ductwork is not acceptable.
N. Provide volume dampers in all branch takeoffs and in all main branches and
ducts of all ductwork systems (supply, return and exhaust) for properly regulating
and balancing airflow in all air systems. The above requirement is mandatory.
Dampers shall conform to applicable requirements of the Duct Manual and each
shall be controlled by an approved galvanized locking quadrant indicating the
damper position as detailed on the Drawings.
O. All square elbows in rectangular supply ducts shall be provided with double
thickness turning vanes in accordance with the Duct Manual.
P. All galvanized steel sheetmetal shall conform to ASTM A-527, having not less
than 1-1/4 ounces total of zinc for both sides on each square.
Q. All sealants, adhesives and coatings shall be of approved kinds and qualities for
each point of application, complying with for the use and storage.
R. All joints, seams, screws and rivets in all ductwork and casings shall be sealed
air tight with a coating of sealing compound applied all over and around each
potential point of leakage so as to assure air tightness. Glass tape shall be
bedded in the sealing compound reinforcing such seals, but this tape shall never
be applied with its own adhesive backing to base metal or to dry sealants.
Sealing compound shall be neatly applied to exposed ductwork.
S. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all connections, and ductwork to serve
equipment provided by the General Contractor and/or Owner as shown on the
HVAC or Architectural Drawings. Provide shop drawings for approval before
installation.
T. The HVAC Contractor shall provide baffles and/or diffusion plates as required in
the air handling unit intake plenum to assure proper air intake to the unit, coil
velocities and air distribution across filters or coils as determined in the field by
the Engineer, at not extra cost to the Owner.
28. INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK
A. Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork, is to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to install.
B. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve airtight and quiet operating systems, capable of performing
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-13
27. DUCTWORK
A. Rooftop HVAC units shall be installed with complete duct distribution systems *OW
(supply and return). All existing ducted systems shall be altered as shown on the
Drawings to provide complete duct distribution systems (supply and return).
B. All ductwork shall be G90 galvanized steel constructed, reinforced and sealed
per SMACNA standards for pressure class 2" and seal Class C. Ductwork may
be round or rectangular in shape. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
provide the duct type shown on the Engineer's plans. If an alternate to round or
rectangular ductwork is proposed, the Contractor shall submit full shop drawings
to the Engineer showing equivalent duct sizes and construction details. The
Contractor shall also verify that proper clearances are maintained for sprinklers
and lighting fixtures. Acceptance of the alternate is subject to the approval of the
Engineer and Stop & Shop.
C. Rectangular ductwork shall have "Pittsburgh Lock" or double locked and
flattened longitudinal seams. Round ductwork shall have a spiral seam.
D. Supply air velocities shall not exceed 2,000 FPM and/or .10" SP loss per one
hundred (100) feet of ductwork. Return air velocities shall not exceed 500 FPM
and/or .06" SP loss per one hundred (100)feet of ductwork.
E. All rectangular duct taps are to be fabricated with a 45-degree flare towards the
upstream duct main. The minimum flare dimension per SMACNA standards
shall be 1/4 the horizontal duct width with the minimum being 4 inches.
F. All round duct taps are to use conical tee fittings. Saddle taps are not allowed.
Round duct taps off of rectangular ducts shall be made using a bellmouth fitting.
G. Turning vanes shall be located in all rectangular duct elbows. Turning vanes
shall be the double thickness type on 2-1/4 inch spacing.
H. Round duct elbows shall be the segmented type with continuously welded
seams.
I. Provide all ducts, flexible connectors, dampers and other items specified and
required including air distribution and control devices and other items of
sheetmetal work and air distribution work shown on the drawings and herein
specified for a complete system. Make connections to louvers and provide
plenums as indicated on the drawings.
J. Metal gauges shall be U.S. Standard, except as may be otherwise stated. All
ductwork shall be fabricated of galvanized sheetmetal, except as otherwise
herein specified.
K. Low velocity gauges shall be in accordance with the following table:
PLATE DIMENSION OF LONGEST METAL GAUGES
NO. SIDE OF DUCT STEEL
6 through 12" 26
6 13" through 18" 24
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-12
M. Units shall be furnished and installed complete with factory-installed manual
reset controls. These controls must be arranged so that the unit must be
manually restarted in the event of power failure. Units shall have low ambient
(Head Pressure Control) controls for 0°F operation.
N. All HVAC systems shall be started and checked in all modes of operation. If
winter conditions prevent a proper start-up of air conditioning systems, then the
Contractor is required to return before the start of the cooling season to perform
a complete air condition start-up.
24. ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. Unit heaters shall be of size, type, manufacturer and capacity as shown and
located on plans, equipped with an on/off switch, casing, replaceable heating
element, contactor, fan and motor, OSHA approved fan guard, and all incidental
items necessary for complete unit.
B. The units for the Mens and Ladies Rooms shall be ceiling recessed mounted with
integral return air grilles. Each unit shall be individually controlled using 24 volt
controls for connection to EMS system.
C. Unit heater capacity, as tested and rated in accordance with standard test
conditions of Industrial Unit Heater Association, as manufactured by Chromalox,
Electromode, Markel or Carolina Production Enterprises.
25. ROOF INTAKE AND EXHAUST HOODS.
A. Penn Airette Type: Mill finish aluminum construction in number and sizes shown
on Drawings and as manufactured by Penn Ventilator Co., Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania, or equal. Ventilators are to be equipped with prefabricated-
aluminum self-flashing curbs, 12" high. All ventilators to have 1/2" wire mesh bird
screens, storm shields and hinged hoods as per detail on Drawings. All
ventilators under 26" square to 44" square to be 16 gage; above 44" square to be
14 gage; and to have aluminum extension collars to raise height of ventilators to
24" above roof. All standing seams shall be secured with corrosion resistant
bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Button lock seams are not acceptable.
B. Hoods shall be securely fastened to curbs with 1/2" diameter corrosion resistant
lag screws not less than two per side, 2'-0" on center, with the space between
curb and base provided with filler pieces as required to form a rigid mounting.
26. POWER ROOF VENTILATORS (EXHAUST)
A. Roof exhaust fans shall be of low silhouette type and shall be constructed of
aluminum housing and shall be complete with centrifugal fans, backdraft damper,
variable pitch V-belt drive, vibration isolation, disconnect switch, 1/2" wire mesh
bird screen, and shall have weatherproof cover over motor and drives. Furnish a
12" high aluminum curb for each fan. Backdraft dampers to be constructed of felt-
tipped, interconnected light weight aluminum blades, spring counterbalanced,
with brass pins and nylon bearings. Refer to paragraph above for method of
fastening. See motor Control Section of Specifications.
B. Fans to have the AMCA seal, and shall be Jenn-Air, Penn, Greenheck, Acme, or
Exitair.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-11
Carpentry Contractor shall provide pressure treated wood blocking (cut from 2 x
stock) on top of the curbs for all small rooftop packaged HVAC units to provide a
level base for setting the units on. The wood blocking shall be wedged shaped
with the minimum dimension being 2" nominal. The wedge shaped blocking shall
be secured to the roof curb with galvanized or alloy screws. The HVAC
Contractor shall coordinate this work with the Carpentry Contractor. All units
called for in this paragraph shall be located as shown on the Roof plan and
structural drawings.
1. Pharmacy Area.
2. Greenhouse
B. These areas shall be treated with air-cooled rooftop units with electric air
conditioning and gas heating.
C. Rooftop units shall be high efficiency models by Carrier, Trane, York or Lennox.
Units with a nominal capacity of 2.0 tons or less shall have a minimum SEER of
10.0. Units with a nominal capacity of 2.0 to 5.0 tons shall have a minimum
SEER of 12.0. Units with a nominal capacity of greater than 5.0 tons shall have
a minimum SEER of 11.0.
D. Rooftop units shall be installed with full factory curb as directed by Stop & Shop
Construction and Engineering.
E. Rooftop units shall have a fresh air intake with factory-installed manually
adjustable damper.
F. Units shall be factory-furnished and installed complete with all controls required .w.,
for proper operation. Included will be the following:
1. Three (3) leg overload protection.
2. Internal or external, or both, compressor or compressors, overload
protection.
3. Differential pressure air flow switches.
G. Units shall have a five (5) year warranty on compressors, with warranty copies
sent to the Stop & Shop Company, Inc.
H. Units shall be UL and AGA approved.
I. Refrigerant R-22 shall be used.
J. Units shall be furnished and installed complete with two inch (2") throw-away
type filters Farr-Air 30-30 or equal.
K. The heat exchangers shall be stainless steel and shall carry a ten (10) year non-
prorated warranty.
L. Units shall be furnished and installed complete with the following items:
1. Fresh air intake with manual damper.
2. Disconnect switches.
3. Hi-Efficiency motors.
4. Extended grease lines.
5. Hinged access doors.
6. Redundant, dual gas valves (2-stage)
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-10
E. All work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to other
parts) of all other system components provided under this Contract requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance. All ductwork and piping shall be arranged
in a manner to clear the openings or swinging overhead access doors as well as
ceiling tiles.
F. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs
and location of piping, ducts and equipment, and not necessarily showing all
required offsets, details and accessories and equipment to be connected. All
work shall be accurately laid out with other trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain
a neat and workmanlike installation which will afford maximum accessibility for
operation, maintenance and headroom.
G. Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what trade provides items
such as starters, controls and etc. Such conflicts shall be reported to the
Architect prior to signing of the Contract. If such action is not taken, the various
trades shall furnish such items as part of their work for complete and operable
systems and equipment, as determined by the Architect.
H. Where drawing details, plans and/or specification requirements are in conflict and
where sizes of the same item run are shown to be different between plans and/or
between plans and sections or details, the most stringent requirement will be
included in the Contract. Systems and equipment called for in the specification
and/or shown on the drawings shall be provided under the Contract of each trade
as if it was required by both the drawings and specifications. However, prior to
ordering or installation of any portion of work which appears to be in conflict,
such work shall be brought to Architect's attention for direction as to what is to be
provided.
22. SUBMITTALS
A. Within 14 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to
Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,
anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of
adjacent trades.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when
approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Fabrication Drawings showing exact duct routing, size, fittings, etc. as
required for a complete coordinated system. Fabrication drawings may
be submitted within thirty (30) days if approved by Stop & Shop.
B. Upon completion of the work of this Section, and as a condition of its acceptance,
deliver to the Architect three (3) copies of operation and maintenance manuals.
23. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ROOFTOP UNITS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish and install complete individual separate
heating and air conditioning systems for the areas as outlined below. The
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-9
L. "HVAC Contractor" shall refer to the Contractor responsible for furnishing and
installation of all work indicated on the HVAC Contract Drawings and the HVAC
Specifications.
M. The HVAC Contractor shall be a "Subcontractor" as designated by the General
Conditions.
N. Reference to "his" is not intended to mean gender but in fact refers to the
Contractor in this Section or specific referenced sections.
20. USE OF PREMISES
A. The HVAC Contractor shall confine all apparatus, storage of materials and
construction to the limits indicated on the drawings and directed by the Architect
and he shall not encumber the premises with his materials. The HVAC
Contractor will be held responsible for repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from
any unauthorized use of premises by him.
B. Not withstanding any approvals or instructions which must be obtained by the
HVAC Contractor from the Architect in connection with use of premises, the
responsibility for the safe working conditions at the site shall remain that of the
Contractor. The Engineer, Architect or Owner shall not be deemed to have any
responsibility or liability in connection therewith.
C. All building security and directives shall apply as set forth by the Owner.
21. COORDINATION OF WORK ,
A. The HVAC Contractor shall compare his drawings and specifications with those
of other trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect and
General Contractor and obtain from the Architect written instructions to make the
necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shall be installed in
cooperation with other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, all
trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved
by the Architect. All changes required in the HVAC and/or work of other trades
caused by the HVAC Contractor's neglect, shall be made at the expense of the
HVAC Contractor, to the Architect's and/or Engineer's Satisfaction.
B. Locations of ducts and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work
with interferences anticipated and encountered. The HVAC Contractor shall
determine the exact routing and location of his systems prior to fabrication or
installation.
C. Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For
example, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose
elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose
elevations can be changed.
D. Offsets and changes of direction in all HVAC systems shall be made as required
to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated
on the drawings. The HVAC Contractor shall provide fittings, connections, etc.,
as required for his work to allow offsets and changes to suit job conditions.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-8
result in complete and fully operational systems. Coordinate installation
diagrams and methods of installation of all equipment from manufacturers.
Follow instructions strictly.
B. Gas and electrical connections shall be made by the respective trades when
applicable. The HVAC Contractor shall verify these connections prior to
roughing.
19. DEFINITIONS
A. Words in the singular shall also mean and include the plural, wherever the
context so indicates, and words in the plural shall mean the singular, wherever
the context so indicates.
B. Wherever the terms "shown on drawings" are used in the specifications, they
shall mean "noted," "indicated," "scheduled," "detailed," or any other
diagrammatic or written reference made on the drawings.
C. Wherever the term "provide" is used in the specifications, it shall mean "furnish"
and "install," "connect," "apply," "erect," "construct" or similar terms, unless
otherwise indicated in the specifications.
D. Wherever the term "material" is used in the specifications, it will mean any
"product," "equipment," "device," "assembly" or "item" required under the
Contract, as indicated by trade or brand name, manufacturer's name, standard
specification reference or other description.
E. The terms "approved" or "approval" shall mean the written approval of the
Architect and Engineer.
F. The term "specification" shall mean all information contained in the bound or
unbound volume, including all "Contract Documents" defined therein.
G. The terms "directed," "required," "permitted," "ordered," "designated,"
"prescribed" and similar words shall mean the direction, requirements,
permission, order, designation or prescription of the Engineer; the terms
"approved," "acceptable," "satisfactory," and similar words shall mean approved
by, acceptable or satisfactory to the Engineer; and, the terms "necessary,"
"responsible," "proper," "correct," and similar words shall mean necessary,
reasonable, proper or correct in the judgment of the Engineer.
H. "Ductwork or Piping" includes in addition to ducts and pipes, all fittings, hangers
and other accessories relative to such systems.
1. "Concealed" means hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung
ceilings, embedded in construction or in crawl spaces.
J. "Exposed" means not installed underground or concealed as defined above.
K. "General Contractor" and "The Contractor" shall refer to the Contractor
* responsible for all work of this project, as defined under Supplementary
Conditions.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-7
14. CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The HVAC Contractor shall promptly correct all work provided under this
Contract and rejected by the Architect or Engineer as defective or as failing to
conform to the Contract Documents, whether or not fabricated, installed or
completed.
15. EXTRA WORK
A. No claim for extra work will be allowed unless it is authorized by the Architect in
writing before commencement of said extra work.
16. PAINTING
A. The HVAC Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and systems provided
under this Contract from rust, splatters and other foreign matter of discoloration,
leaving every part of each system in an acceptable prime condition. The HVAC
Contractor shall refinish and restore to the original condition all equipment and
piping which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats
of paint and/or enamel.
17. MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL
A. Except where specifically indicated for the General Contractor to provide
supports, the HVAC Contractor shall provide all steel supports and hangers as
shown on the drawings or required to support all equipment or materials provided
under this Contract. All secondary and any additional supports required for any
equipment to be installed, shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
B. All work shall be cut, assembled, welded and finished by skilled mechanics.
Welds shall be ground smooth. Stands, brackets and framework shall be
properly sized and strongly constructed.
C. Measurements shall be taken on the job and worked out to suit adjoining and
connecting work. All work shall be done by experienced metal-working
mechanics. Members shall be straight and true and accurately fitted.
D. Welded joints shall be ground smooth where exposed. Drilling, cutting and
fittings shall be done as required to properly install the work and accommodate
the work of other trades as directed by them.
E. Members shall be generally welded except that bolting may be used for field
assembly where welding would be impractical. Welders shall be skilled and
certified.
F. All shop fabricated iron and steel work shall be cleaned and dried and given two
(2) coats of weatherproof primer paint of all surfaces and in all openings and
crevices.
18. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all duct or HVAC piping connections to
equipment if piping is provided under other Sections of the Specifications to
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-6
11. GIVING INFORMATION
A. The HVAC Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the shape, size and
position of all openings required for his apparatus and shall give information to
the General Contractor and other Contractors sufficiently in advance of the work
so that all openings may be built in advance.
B. Manufacturer's field representative shall be present at time of start-up of any and
all major Heating and Air Conditioning equipment. This authorized
representative shall submit a written report to Stop & Shop Construction Division,
and the Engineer, confirming that all requirements and manufacturer's
recommendations have been adhered to by the installing Contractor.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall notify and give the Stop & Shop Project Manager five
(5) days notice, PRIOR to start-up, so that the Stop & Shop Project Manager may
be in attendance on the start-up Day.
12. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Equipment and materials shall be delivered to the site and stored in original
sealed containers, suitably sheltered from the elements but readily accessible for
review by the Architect and/or Engineer until installed. All items subject to
moisture damage such as controls shall be stored in dry, heated spaces.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have his equipment tightly covered and protected
against dirt, water and chemical or HVAC injury and theft. At the completion of
the work, equipment and materials shall be cleaned, polished thoroughly and
turned over to the Owner in a condition satisfactory to the Architect and/or
Engineer. Damage or defects or work developing before acceptance of the work
shall be made good at the HVAC Contractor's expense.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall make necessary field measurements to ascertain
space requirements for equipment and connections to be provided under this
Contract and shall furnish such sizes and shapes of equipment to allow for the
final installation to conform to the drawings and specifications.
D. All heating and air conditioning systems shall be designed and arranged so that
the evaporator sections shall be electrically interlocked with compressor sections,
so that in the event of failure or outage of the evaporator section and/or loss of
air flow, the compressor and compressors automatically are de-energized and
become inoperative.
E. Any equipment or ductwork to be hung from bar joists shall be hung from the top
chord of the bar joists. Under no condition will it be permitted to hang equipment
from the bottom chord of bar joists.
13. DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK
A. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible and shall pay for all damages
caused by this work to the building structures, equipment, and all work and
fir.,, finishes at the expense of the responsible HVAC Contractor to Architect's
satisfaction.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-5
D. Holes in Concrete:
1. Provide sleeves, accurately dimensioned and shaped, to permit passage
of items of this Section.
2. Deliver all such sleeves and setting information to the trades providing the
surfaces through which such items must penetrate in a timely manner to
assure inclusion in the Work.
E. Flashing
1. Where items of this Section penetrate the roof, outer walls, or
waterproofing of any kind, provide under this Section all base flashing and
counter flashing required at such penetration.
2. Provide on each pipe passing through the roof a 4 lb. seamless lead
flashing and counter flashing assembly.
8. FIREPROOFING
A. It shall be the HVAC Contractor's responsibility to fireproof all openings in slabs
and or in firewalls provided for the passage of his equipment except as noted on
the drawings.
B. Fireproofing shall be done by the use of Dow Corning 3-654-8 R.T.V. silicone
foam installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain
a rating equal to the location penetrated.
C. Refer to Section regarding fire dampers for additional information.
9. PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
A. All materials shall be properly protected and all duct openings shall be
temporarily closed by the HVAC Contractor to prevent obstruction and damage.
Post notice prohibiting the use of all systems provided under this Contract, prior
to completion of work and acceptance of all systems by the Owner's
representative. The HVAC Contractor shall take precautions to protect his
materials from damage and theft.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards for
the prevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials,
equipment or systems provided under this contract.
C. Keep the job site free from all debris and rubbish. Remove all debris and rubbish
from the site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis.
10. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish his own cords and sockets, as may be
required for their work, and shall also pay for the cost of all temporary wiring of
construction offices and shanties used by them.
B. The Owner will pay for the cost of all energy consumed by all trades. Any
temporary wiring of a special nature for light and power required, other than
mentioned above, shall be paid for by the contractor using same. 10"k
C. All extension cords shall be GFCI protected or shall be fed from GFCI circuit
breakers.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-4
E. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of any systems or
equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be
OW replaced by the HVAC Contractor for his respective work, as applicable, at no
additional cost.
F. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish, before the final payment is made, a written
guarantee covering the above requirements.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for servicing the system for a period of 12
months after acceptance. Warranty shall include servicing of the equipment
during this time and answering any necessary trouble calls. This shall mean also
the responsibility of any loss of refrigerant charge during the warranty period,
regardless of cause, unless due to direct damage caused by store personnel.
5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work to be performed under this Section is shown primarily on the HVAC
drawings and as specified herein. Attention is directed to other trades affecting
work of this Section.
6. APPROVED EQUALS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Equality of Materials and Substitutions for additional
information. The HVAC Section shall take precedence for interpretations.
B. It is the intent of these Specifications to establish quality standards of installed
materials and equipment. Hence, specific items are identified by manufacturer,
trade name and catalog designation.
C. Acceptance or rejections of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the HVAC Contractor
shall submit for inspection samples of both the specified and the proposed
substitute items.
D. The Engineer shall determine the manufacturers which are equal to those
specified. When three manufacturers are listed, the Contractor shall utilize one
of those manufacturers listed.
7. CUTTING, PATCHING AND PREPARATION
A. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling for holes up to 6" in
diameter, as required for work under his Contract, but in no case shall the HVAC
Contractor cut into any structural elements without the written approval of the
Architect.
B. All cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided by the General
Contractor.
C. All concrete and masonry equipment bases and pads, curbs, chases, pockets
and openings (except core drilling) required for the proper installation of the work
under this Contract will be provided by the General Contractor using dimensions,
templates, bolts, anchors, as shown on the drawings or as required and as
furnished by the Contractor installing the equipment.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - 15500-3
C. The specifications and drawings describe the minimum requirements that must
be met by the HVAC Contractor for the installation of all work as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
D. Give all notices, file all Plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvals from
authorities having jurisdiction for this Work. Include all fees in the bid price.
3. CODES, ORDINANCES AND AUTHORITIES
A. Perform all work in accordance with all rules, regulations, standards, codes,
ordinances or laws of local, state and federal governments having jurisdiction.
Such authorities shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Local and State Building Codes.
2. SMACNA standards.
3. ASHRAE design.
4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
5. Building Officials Code Administrators (BOCA).
6. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
7. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and the requirements of any
Code or Authorities having jurisdiction, the most stringent requirements of the
aforementioned shall govern.
4. GUARANTEE
A. Attention is directed to the provisions of the General Conditions regarding
guarantees and warranties for work under this Section. The HVAC Contractor
shall submit a one (1) year guarantee for the entire installation upon Architect's
final acceptance of the installed work.
B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees of work under the HVAC
trade; however, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities which the manufacturer and the HVAC Contractor may have by law or
by other provisions of Contract Documents. In any case, such guarantees and
warranties shall commence when the Owner accepts the HVAC systems, as
determined by the Engineer, and shall remain in effect for a period of one year
thereafter. The HVAC Contractor shall provide free supervision and adjustment
for a period of one year within four (4) hours as per Stop & Shop criteria.
C. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Section
shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and
workmanship. Any fault under any Contract, due to defective or improper
material, equipment or workmanship which may develop shall be made good
forthwith, by and at the expense of the HVAC Contractor for the work under his
Contract, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other systems
resulting from this failure.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems which are
to be provided under his Contract, are of sufficient capacity of meet the 6%
requirements outlined herein or as indicated.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-2
SECTION 15500
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the specifications for requirements
affecting this section. Include in and make part of this Section all work related
under other Sections and required on all Drawings and Documents.
B. Before submitting bid, visit the site and examine conditions under which the work
has to be performed. Report to the Owner any conditions which might adversely
affect the work to be performed.
C. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited
to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications. When a conflict occurs between Section 15500 and
aforementioned sections, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. Coordinate work with all other trades affecting work of this Section. Cooperate
with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work of this Contract.
2. SCOPE
A. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. New rooftop units.
2. Ductwork, including alterations and additions.
3. Insulation.
4. Sound attenuation.
5. Dampers.
6. Hangers, supports and seismic restraints.
7. Control wiring and EMS coordination.
8. Testing.
9. Ventilation Air System.
10. Exhaust Air Systems.
11. All peripheral equipment specified.
12. Unit heaters and flues
13. New Registers, diffusers and grilles and removal and reinstallation of
existing to be reused.
14. New Bakery Oven exhaust systems and related components.
15. Securing of existing Exhaust systems not to be reused with all related
components.
16. Work shown on plans and specified herein.
B. The work under this Contract shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
transportation, insurance, temporary protection, supervision and incidental items
essential for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically
mentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper
installation and operation of all HVAC systems as indicated on the Drawings and
specified herein.
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING- 15500-1
47. PAINTING......................................................................................................................24
48. TESTING AND BALANCING.........................................................................................24
49. PHASING.......................................................................................................................24
50. ALTERNATE..................................................................................................................25
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - INDEX-2
SECTION 15500
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
INDEX
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................1
2. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................1
3. CODES, ORDINANCES AND AUTHORITIES ................................................................2
4. GUARANTEE...................................................................................................................2
5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.............................................................................................3
6. APPROVED EQUALS .....................................................................................................3
7. CUTTING, PATCHING AND PREPARATION.................................................................3
8. FIREPROOFING..............................................................................................................4
9. PROTECTION AND CLEANUP.......................................................................................4
10. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER ...............................................................................4
11. GIVING INFORMATION ..................................................................................................5
12. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS......................................................................................5
13. DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK..........................................................................................5
14. CORRECTION OF WORK...............................................................................................6
15. EXTRA WORK.................................................................................................................6
16. PAINTING........................................................................................................................6
17. MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL ...........................................................................6
18. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT..................................................................................6
19. DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................7
20. USE OF PREMISES........................................................................................................8
21. COORDINATION OF WORK...........................................................................................8
22. SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................................9
23. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ROOFTOP UNITS......................9
24. ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS..........................................................................................11
25. ROOF INTAKE AND EXHAUST HOODS......................................................................11
26. POWER ROOF VENTILATORS (EXHAUST)................................................................11
27. DUCTWORK..................................................................................................................12
28. INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK....................................................................13
29. DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS...................................................................15
30. DAMPERS.....................................................................................................................16
31. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS...........................................................................................17
32. ACCESS DOORS..........................................................................................................17
33. DUCT INSULATION ......................................................................................................17
34. VIBRATION ISOLATION ...............................................................................................18
35. MOTORS AND STARTERS ..........................................................................................18
36. GENERAL EXHAUST SYSTEMS..................................................................................18
37. SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................18
38. IN-STORE BAKERY OVEN EXHAUST.........................................................................19
39. EXHAUST HOOD..........................................................................................................20
40. FILTERS AND FILTER SECTIONS...............................................................................21
41. VIBRATION....................................................................................................................21
42. GAS-FIRED TYPE UNIT HEATERS..............................................................................22
43. FLUES FOR FORCED EVACUATION OF PRODUCTS OF COMBUSTION................22
44. ARRANGEMENT...........................................................................................................23
45. COMMISSIONING.........................................................................................................23
46. CONTROLS...................................................................................................................23
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - INDEX-1
52. PHASING OF WORK
A. The existing facility will remain in operation during certain times the work of the
Contract is being performed. This Contractor shall coordinate all aspects of the
installation of all new system so that they are complete and operational before
any previously existing system is removed and/or abandoned. Coordinate the
extent of work in each phase of the construction with all Stop & Shop
Representatives.
B. All existing systems which are to be replaced with new systems shall have all
above slab piping removed once the new system is in operation. All abandoned
piping system below the slab shall be capped and sealed, as directed by the
Plumbing Inspector, and left in place unless pipe conflicts with installation of new
buried piping in which case it shall be removed and remaining ends capped.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING - 15400-52
L. Unless otherwise specified herein, all materials and workmanship shall conform
to the latest edition of the following standards and specifications - ADA, AGA,
AWS, ANSI, ASHRAE, ASME, ASTM, CISPI, CS, MSS, NEC, NFPA, PDI, PFI,
UL, FM and USC.
M. PVC or ABS piping construction (other than as specified herein) shall not be
permitted for plumbing construction, unless accepted by State Plumbing Code
and local regulations only and when specifically approved in writing by Stop &
Shop Company. The Plumbing Contractor must submit a materials estimate with
cost credits for PVC and/or ABS piping as a substitute to materials specified
herein when and if accepted by Stop & Shop.
N. All piping left exposed subsequent to backfilling shall be identified with flagged
stakes and spray painted with fluorescent paint to guard against mechanical
damage.
O. Plumbing Contractor shall observe all concrete pours in areas associated with
work performed under this Section.
P. All plumbing fixtures, trims, accessories, specialties, components, etc. specified
herein shall be of the same respective manufacturer unless noted otherwise
herein.
Q. The Plumbing Contractor shall acquire "Hot Work" permits when operating with
open flame equipment for buildings containing combustible materials and/or
construction.
R. All bottled gas vessels used in pipe fabrication by the Plumbing Contractor shall
be secured in the appropriate carriers, stands or carts, etc. so as to be kept
stable during storage and use.
S. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide the services of one (1) plumbing foreman
to be present at the site the day preceding and the day of the store opening (for a
continuous period of eight (8) hours each day) to address any potential plumbing
issues.
52. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. At the completion of the work, all fixtures, equipment, specialties, components,
and exposed trim shall be cleaned and, where required, polished ready for use.
Faucet washers which have been damaged during construction shall be
replaced. All drains, sediment buckets and traps shall be thoroughly cleaned.
B. At the completion of work, all floor drain, trench drain, floor sink and floor
cleanout grates and frames shall be etched with muriatic acid and buffed with a
fire wire brush until bright.
C. At the completion of the work, all valves and automatic control devices shall be
adjusted for proper and quiet operation of all plumbing systems specified herein
ew under this Section. Hot water system shall be adjusted for proper identification.
PLUMBING - 15400-51
51. WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall see that all his materials including fixtures,
pumps, equipment, components, specialties, etc. specified herein are delivered
to the building, when required, to allow work to progress in the most efficient
manner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall verify all lead times and delivery dates for all
materials specified herein.
C. All fixtures and materials must be new, unused, free from defects and/or
imperfections.
D. All work, fixtures and materials shall be protected at all times. The Plumbing
Contractor shall make good all damage caused by his workmen either directly or
indirectly. All pipe openings shall be closed with caps and/or plugs during
installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected
against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury.
E Duct tape shall be applied to the openings and finished surfaces of all floor
drains, trench drains, floor sinks, floor cleanouts, floor access covers, case drains
and condensate drains to protect against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical
injury and shall be removed prior to completion of work. Plywood covers may be
secured to floor drain grates with coated wire in lieu of duct tape.
F. All work shall be done by skilled workmen in accordance with the best practices
of the trade.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall confine his storage and handling of materials and
his,construction operations to such limits as directed by the Engineer and/or the
General Contractor.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all carting, handling and hoisting for his
materials and equipment in a safe and satisfactory manner. Any damage
resulting there from shall be repaired or paid for by his Contractor to the
satisfaction of the parties concerned.
I. All respective materials and equipment specified herein shall be of the same
manufacturer, identified by makers name, mark, rating and approved standards
where applicable.
J. Work shall be executed in strict conformity with the latest edition of the prevailing
State Plumbing and Building Codes and all local regulations that may apply. In
case of conflict between the contract documents and a governing code or
ordinance, the more stringent standard shall apply. If any work is performed and
subsequent changes are necessary to conform to local ordinances, these
changes shall be made at the Plumbing Contractor's expense.
K. All plumbing materials and equipment shall be selected and designed so as to
conform to applicable State Codes, local ordinances and Energy Codes. Water
heaters, boilers, storage tanks, aerators, flow control fittings, insulation, etc. shall
be selected with efficiencies and design conditions to meet applicable Energy
Codes.
PLUMBING - 15400-50
50. TESTS AND STERILIZATION
A. The final sanitary, grease waste, vent, storm, indirect waste, water and gas
systems shall be tested, flushed and/or sterilized by the Plumbing Contractor in
the presence of the General Contractor, local authorities (Plumbing Inspector and
Gas Fitting Inspector, if separate from Plumbing Inspector) and, when possible,
Stop & Shop Engineering Department representative after completion of "rough
in" work before concealing any section from view to the complete satisfaction of
the appropriate code officials in accordance with their requirements. Notice shall
be given 48 hours in advance of all test dates and times.
B. All tests shall be made as prescribed in the applicable Ordinances, Codes, etc.,
but at least as follows:
1. Tests shall be made by filling the sanitary, grease waste, indirect waste
and storm drainage systems with water so that all piping being tested will
be subject to a pressure equal to the height of the building, with a
minimum of 10'-0" in height.
2. All cold and hot water piping shall be tested before being concealed and
before fixtures are installed to hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi, and proved
tight at this pressure. The test pressure shall be held for at least one (1)
hour with no drop during the time.
3. All gas piping shall be tested upon completion to a pressure required by
State and/or Local codes for a period of twenty-four (24) hours. No drop
in pressure shall be permitted, except that due to temperature change.
All leaks shall be properly repaired and the system re-tested and proven
tight. In addition, gas testing must be satisfactory to the company
supplying the gas and the local gas inspector.
C. Sterilization of all water piping inside and outside the building shall be disinfected
as follows:
1. System piping shall be filled with a chlorine solution of 50 parts per million
and allowed to stand for twenty-four (24) hours before flushing.
2. System piping shall be filled with a chlorine solution of 200 parts per
million and allowed to stand for one (1) hour before flushing.
3. Notice shall be given forty-eight (48) hours in advance of all dates and
times for sterilization of all system piping.
D. Following the final slab pour within the building, the Plumbing Contractor shall
perform additional testing and flushing of each entire underground sanitary,
grease waste, storm drainage and indirect waste system once all said
underground systems have been totally installed below grade (completely
backfilled, compacted and sealed below the building slab) to detect any
obstructions and/or damage to pipe, etc. of said systems following backfilling,
compacting and final slab pours.
E. Upon successful completion of testing, sterilization and flushing of each piping
system specified herein, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit a letter stating that
all piping systems above and below ground specified herein have been approved
by the local Plumbing Inspector to General Contractor with copies to Architect
and Stop & Shop Engineering Department.
Apok
PLUMBING - 15400-49
4. Zurn.
5. Precision Plumbing Products.
Y. Shock Absorbers (SA):
1. Josam.
2. Smith.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
Z. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preveneter (RPB-1 through RPB-5):
1. Watts.
2. Febco.
AA. Backflow Preventers (BFP-1 through BFP-16):
1. Watts.
BB. Vacuum Breakers (VB-1, VB-2 & VB-3):
1. Watts.
2. Nidel.
CC. Hangers and Supports:
1. Carpenter& Paterson.
2. ITT Grinnell.
3. B-Line.
4. Michigan Hanger Company,
DD. Insulation:
1. Certain Teed.
2. Owens-Corning.
3. Knauf.
4. Manville.
EE. Insulation PVC Covers:
1. Proto.
2. Zeston.
3. Knauf.
4. Speedline.
5. Ceel-Co.
FF. Insulation/Protective Coverings/Handicapped Lavatories:
1. Truebro.
2. Skal Gard.
3. McGuire.
4. Brocal.
GG. Thermometers (T):
1. Trerice Company.
HH. Cartridge Water Filters (F-1 through F-2):
1. AMF-Cuno.
PLUMBING - 15400-48
M. Faucets (P-20, P-23 and P-30) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. American Standard.
2. Kohler.
N. Faucets (P-22, P-24 through P-29 and P-33) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. T&S Brass.
O. Drains (P-19 through P-27 & P-29 through P-32) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. Standard-Kell.
2. Component Handler.
P. Drains (P-28, P-33 and P-34) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. Standard-Kell.
2. Component Handler.
Q. Floor Drains, Floor Sinks (FD-A through FD-1):
1. Josam.
2. Smith.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
R. Grease Interceptors (GI-1 & GI-2):
1. Josam.
2. Smith.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
S. Cleanouts& Floor Access Covers (FCO-1, WCO-1, WCO-2, CCO-1,
FAC-1):
1. Josam.
2. Smith.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
T. Wall Access Panel (WAP-1):
1. Mifab.
2. Milcor.
3. Karp.
4. Elmdor.
U. Hose Bibb (HB-1 through HB-7):
1. Woodford.
V. Hose Reel (HR-2):
1. Fisher.
W. Hose Reel (HR-3):
1. Hannay.
X. Trap Seal Primer Valve (TP-1 through TP-3):
1. Josam.
2. Smith.
3. Wade.
PLUMBING - 15400-47
49. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Water Closets, Urinals, lavatories, Service Sinks (P-1 through P-11):
1. American Standard.
2. Kohler.
3. Elijer.
B. Seats (P-1 through P-4):
1. Chruch.
2. Bemis.
3. Benek.e
4. Olsonite.
C. Flush Valve (P-1 through P-6):
1. Sloan.
D. Faucets, Fittings &Accessories (P-7 through P-9):
1. American Standard.
2. Kohler.
3. Elijer.
E. Carriers (P-1 through P-9):
1. Josam.
2. Smith.
3. Wade.
4. Zuran.
F. Sink (P-14) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. Barnett/Premier.
G. Faucets, Fittings &Accessories (P-14) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. Barnett/Premier.
H. Handsink (P-15):
1. Aero (supplied by Atlantic Store Fixture Company, Inc., N. Woburn, MA
01888 Tel. (617) 935-4300).
I. Faucets, Double Pedal Valve, Fittings &Accessories (P-15):
1. American Standard.
2. Kohler.
J. Eye Wash Stations (P-17):
1. Western.
2. Haws.
K. Work Sinks (P-19 through P-21, P-23 through P-31) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. Amtecko Industries, Inc., Columbus, OH 43207-1899, Tel. (614) 443-
4677.
L. Work Sink (P-33) (Supplied by Stop & Shop):
1. Dunhill Company/Atlantic Store Fixture Company, Inc., N. Woburn, MA
01888, Tel. (617) 935-4300.
PLUMBING - 15400-46
4. Show no tool marks or threads on exposed plated, polished, or enameled
connections from fixtures. Tape all finished surfaces to prevent damage
during construction.
5. Make changes in directions with fittings; make changes in main sizes with
eccentric reducing fittings. Unless otherwise noted, install water supply
and return piping with straight side of eccentric fittings at top of the pipe.
6. Run horizontal sanitary drainage piping at a uniform grade of 1/8" per
foot, unless otherwise noted. Run horizontal water piping with an
adequate pitch upwards in direction of flow to allow complete drainage.
7. Provide sufficient swing joint, ball joints, expansion loops, and devices
necessary for a flexible piping system, whether or not shown on the
Drawings.
8. Support piping independently at pumps, coils, tanks, and similar
locations, so that weight of pipe will not be supported by the equipment.
9. Pipe drains from drip pans, relief valves, air vents, and similar locations,
to spill over and open sight drain, floor drain, or other acceptable
discharge point, and terminate with a plain end unthreaded pipe 6" above
the drain.
10. Securely bolt all equipment, isolators, hangers, and similar items in place.
11. Support each item independently from other pipes. Do not use wire for
hanging or strapping pipes.
12. Provide complete dielectric isolation between ferrous and non-ferrous
metals.
13. Provide union and shut off valves suitably located to facilitate
maintenance and removal of equipment and apparatus.
B. Equipment Access:
1. Install piping, equipment, and accessories to permit access for
maintenance. Relocate items as necessary to provide such access, and
without additional cost to the Owner.
2. Provide access doors where valves, motors, or equipment requiring
access for maintenance are located in walls or chases or above ceilings.
Coordinate location of access doors with other trades as required.
48. DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS
A. Disinfect hot and cold water systems. Perform disinfection under the Architect's
observation. Notify the Architect at least 48 hours prior to start of the disinfection
process. Upon completion of disinfecting, secure and submit the Certificate of
Performance required as specified herein, stating system capacity, disinfectant
used, time and rate of disinfectant applied, and resultant residuals in ppm at
completion. Use disinfectant method approved by the Architect.
B. When disinfection operation is completed, and after final flushing, secure an
analysis by a laboratory using water samples from the system, showing test
negative for coli-aerogene organisms. Provide a total plate count of less then
100 bacteria per cc, or equal to the control sample. Submit laboratory analysis to
Architect for Approval.
C. If analysis results are not satisfactory, repeat the disinfection procedures and
retest until specified standards are achieved.
PLUMBING - 15400-45
d. Valves:
1) Gate Valves (2" or smaller) Bronzed body, solid wedge,
rising steam, 125 psi working pressure. "
a) Threaded ends - Nibco Model T-134 or approved
equal.
2) Gate Valves (2-1/2" and larger) Cast iron body, solid
wedge, outside stem and yoke, 125 psi working pressure.
a) Flanged Ends - Nibco Model F-617-0 or approved
equal.
3) Ball Valves (2-1/2" and larger) Bronze body, bronze
chrome plated ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, steel
lever handle with vinyl grip, 400 psi working pressure.
a) Threaded Ends - Apollo 70-100 Series or approved
equal.
4) Check Valves (2" or smaller) Bronze body, swing type,
renewable disc, 125 psi working pressure.
a) Threaded Ends - Nibco Model T-433 or approved
equal.
5) Check Valves (2-1/2" and larger) Cast iron body, switching
type, renewable disc, 125 psi working pressure.
a) Threaded Ends - Nibco Model F-918 or approved
equal.
46. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform trenching and backfilling associated with the work of this Section in strict
accordance with other sections of these Specifications.
B. On cold water lines, the lines should be buried a minimum of 6" below finished
grade and shall be insulated.
C. Bedding and backfilling:
1. Install piping promptly after trenching. Keep trenches open as short a
time as practical.
2. Under the building, install pipes on a 6" bed of approved material. Refer
to the design on drawings.
3. Outside the building, install underground piping on a 6" bed of damp
sand. Backfill to within 12" of finish grade with damp sand. Backfill
remainder with native soil.
4. Do not backfill until installation has been approved, until Project Record
Documents have been properly annotated and until properly inspected
and successfully tested.
47. INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL
A. General:
1. Proceed as rapidly as the building construction will permit.
2. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude
dirt until fixtures are installed and final connections have been made.
3. Cut pipe accurately, and work into place without springing or forcing,
properly clearing windows, doors, and other openings. Excessive cutting
or other weakening of the building will not be permitted.
PLUMBING - 15400-44
6. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install an air tight 48" diameter,
fiberglass basin with cement flange. "Weil" Series 8804 and 53" round
steel basin cover, complete with hinged access door, switch plate and all
necessary vent pipe and pump discharge openings, minimum basin depth
to be 6-0" deep.
7. Water tight connections shall be provided for all pipes entering or exiting
basin.
8. Purchasing of duplex sewage ejector pumps, basin cover, controls and
accessories shall be coordinated with Weil Pump representative, Thomas
Farrell of T.J. Farrell Sales Corporation, telephone number (781) 344-
1988.
9. The Plumbing Contractor shall allow for a minimum of eight (8) weeks
lead time when ordering the duplex sewerage ejector pumps, controls
and accessories specified herein.
10. The Plumbing Contractor shall allow for a minimum of two (2) weeks lead
time when ordering the ejector basin and for a minimum of eight (8)
weeks lead time when ordering the basin cover plate specified herein.
11. The sewage ejector shall be designed and installed so as to have basin
cover installed flush with the finished floor.
12. Special consideration shall be given to the specification, location, size,
number, type and invert elevation of basin inlets required to suit building
conditions. All piping penetrations shall be coordinated with Weil Pump
representative, Thomas Farrell.
13. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide full sized unions, check valves and
gate valves mounted 451 from normal on discharge piping from each
ejector pump upstream of a double wye fitting prior to connecting to the
Sanitary system.
14. The Plumbing Contractor shall mount the control cabinet on the exterior
masonry wall 4'-0" above finished floor, adjacent to the ejector pit.
15. The Plumbing Contractor shall notify the Stop & Shop Project Manager
and Engineering Department upon final installation of all electrical and
piping connections to the duplex sewage ejector and in turn notify Weil
Pump Representative, Thomas Farrell, T.J. Farrell Sales Corporation,
P.O. Box 459, 11 Dale Street, Stoughton, Massachusetts 02072,
telephone number (781) 344-1988 (5 days lead time) for start up
procedure, mounting mercury float switches inside ejector basin, verifying
float elevations, checking pump rotation, pump test runs, etc.
16. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a full sized 4" pumped discharged
from each sewage ejector pump connecting to a 4" gravity line.
a. Materials: (All materials shall be selected in accordance with
State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations)
Pump Discharge - Sanitary &Waste (copper tubing)
1) Pipe: (Above Slab) Type "K" copper tubing, annealed.
2) Fittings: (Above Slab) Wrought copper and cast brass,
fittings, brazed.
b. Joints:
Pump Discharge - Sanitary &Waste (steel piping)
1) Pipe: (Above Slab) Galvanized steel, standard weight.
2) Fittings: (Above Slab) Galvanized steel, screwed or
flanged.
C. Joints: (Above Slab) Threaded or flanged.
PLUMBING - 15400-43
45. SEWAGE EJECTOR AND PIT
A. General
1. Where shown on the drawings, the Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and
install the following : one (1) "Weil" Series 2523, Submersible Type,
Duplex Sewage Ejector system capable of passing 2-1/2" solids with 4"
discharge, yoke/wedge type coupling to mate with "Weil" Series 2613
removable system. Each pump shall be rated to suit estimated system
design capacity requirements of flow rate (125 GPM), total dynamic head
(40. ft.).
a. Pump Construction: Heavy duty, one-piece, cast iron pump
casing and impeller housing, non-corrosive, open type, statically
and dynamically balanced impellers, Series 3000 stainless steel
shafts, ball type, upper and lower permanently lubricated, single
row, double sealed bearings, carbon ceramic faced mechanical
seals with stainless steel and buna-n components.
b. Motors: Dry running, hermetically sealed submersible motors,
NEMA 6 rating, class "F" insulation, capacitor start with built-in
thermal/overload protection and 30-foot power cables. 1.5 hp,
208 volt, three-phase, 60 cycle, AC, 1750 RPM.
2. Accessories shall include two (2) "Weil" series 2613 "Quick Removal
Systems" to allow each pump to be raised or lowered without disturbing
the discharge piping or entering the basin. Each system shall consist of
the following:
(1) 4" cast iron floor discharge elbow with wedge type mount, plain inlet
and flanged outlet to support pump, discharge piping and guide pipes.
(1) Non-corrosive stainless steel lift cable.
(1) Upper guide pipe support bracket.
(2) 2" diameter, schedule 40, galvanized guide pipes (furnished, cut to
length and installed by the Plumbing Contractor).
3. Controls shall consist of the following:
(4) "Weil' Series 8230 mercury float switches with 30 ft. of cable secured
with polypropylene/steel cable clamps to a 1" diameter galvanized
steel vertical support pole attached to a steel switch plate cover with
compression type cable grips "Weil" Fig. 823D, from which suspended
into the ejector basin.
4. Alarm system consisting of the following:
(1) NEMA 4 duplex control cabinet with hinged and bolted door, Model
8131, containing:
(2) Circuit breakers.
(2) Contactors.
(1) Alternating relay.
(1) Control circuit transformer(required for three phase motors only).
(2) Test/Off/Auto selector switches.
(1) Alarm light, horn and silencer switch, mounted on door to indicate
"High Water Alarm" in pump basin.
(2) Set of isolated contacts to signal (digital input to Stop & Shop
Energy Management System).
5. Pump motors less than 1/2 hp shall be specified for 115-volt single phase
operation. Pump motors 1/2 hp or greater shall be specified for 208-volt,
three phase operation.
PLUMBING - 15400-42
41. JOINTING COMPOUNDS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide approved pipe dope, Teflon tamp with
wax rings, neoprene gaskets and other jointing compounds as required by best
standard practice and only on service as recommended by manufacturer.
42. JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. All joints and connections shall be permanent and shall be gas and water tight.
B. Jointing shall be type specified for service indicated.
C. Joints and connections shall meet requirements of manufacturers best
recommended practice.
D. All transitions between different piping materials shall be made using approved
adapters.
E. Adapters for transitions between two types of piping materials shall be selected
as manufactured for that purpose intended.
F. The Plumbing Contractor shall utilize only lead free solder and flux when
sweating copper water piping specified herein.
G. Heat bending copper piping shall not be permitted in lieu of sweat and/or
threaded pipe fittings.
43. OTHER MATERIALS
A- Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of
the Architect.
44. UNIONS, FLANGES & DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Plumbing Contractor shall provide union connections to fixtures and equipment
such as water filters, misters, backflow preventers, etc., specified herein. Union
connections shall include, but shall not be limited to, unions, flanges,
compression fittings, grooved couplings, compression couplings and flared
fittings. Union connections on domestic water piping shall be bronze with
minimum cold working pressure of 200 psi. Union connections on iron and steel
shall be ferrous with working pressure matching service pressure.
B. Contractor shall provide flanges in accordance with ANSI standards for
construction and working pressure. Flange material shall be ferrous for ferrous
piping systems and bronze for non-ferrous systems.
C. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install approved Dielectric couplings
wherever domestic water piping system comes in contact with ferrous pipe,
fittings, valves, equipment, etc., which makes up the domestic water system.
PLUMBING - 15400-41
23. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install reducing elbows off
each full sized branch supply prior to connecting to each roof top gas fired
unit and/or equipment.
24. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install reducing tees off each
full sized branch supply prior to connecting to each gas-fired unit or
equipment located inside the building.
25. All gas valves specified herein shall be provided with full port openings or
equivalent areas with respect to corresponding pipe size.
26. Minimum gas pipe size through the roof shall be 1" unless sized larger on
the Plumbing construction drawings.
27. The Plumbing Contractor shall give special attention to providing gas
piping to gas-fired equipment serving emergency corridors, exterior
stairwells, exterior Sprinkler Rooms and Enclosed Dock Receiving areas.
28. The Plumbing Contractor shall install a mechanical gas valve (supplied by
the Hood Fire Suppression Contractor) on each gas supply drop serving
the Deli/Prepared Foods rotisserie, pizza oven and the bakery fryer
specified herein. Each gas valve shall be installed approximately 9"
below the finished ceiling with a separate gas shut-off valve (provided by
the Plumbing Contractor) located V-0" upstream of each mechanical gas
valve.
29. The Gas line serving the Bakery ovens shall be run and dropped exposed
approximately 2'-0" below the Bakery ceiling situated to the side of the
last oven and manifolded with three (3) separate gas shut off valves, tee's
and drip leg before rising up against the wall through the ceiling to feed
each oven separately.
30. Drip legs for gas-fired HVAC rooftop units shall be located inside the
building below the roof, where not subject to freezing for all stores with
interior low pressure gas systems, as specified herein and noted on
Plumbing drawings.
B. Materials
(All materials shall be selected in accordance with State Plumbing Code and
Local Regulations).
1. Pipe - (above Slab): Black Steel, Schedule 40, standard weight (all pipe
sizes) - (below slab): wrapped black steel, schedule 40, standard weight,
AGA approved (all pipe sizes).
2. Fittings - above slab): (2" and smaller) black malleable iron fittings,
screwed, 150 psi (2-1/2" and larger) black steel, Schedule 40 standard
weight fittings welded.
3. Joints - (above slab): (2" and smaller) screwed with locally approved pipe
joint material - (above slab): (2-1/2" and larger) welded - (below slab):
all sizes welded.
4. Plug Valves - (2" and larger): All iron, full port, lubricated plug, flanged
ends, 125 psi working pressure. (2" and smaller): all iron full port
lubricated plug, screwed ends, 125 psi working pressure, (2" and Smaller)
all bronze flat tee head, top check, 125 psi working pressure.
5. Ball Valves - (2" and smaller): Bronze body, full port bronze chrome
plated steel tee handle, reinforced Teflon seats and seals, 600 psi
working pressure (Threaded ends -Apollo 70-100-32 Series).
PLUMBING - 15400-40
10. No horizontal or vertical runs of gas piping shall be allowed to pass
through Electric, Telephone, Energy Management, and/or Compressor
Room Areas and, where possible, shall be routed around these areas as
shown on the Plumbing Construction Drawings.
11. All pipe penetrations shall be water tight.
12. Plumbing Contractor shall install mechanical gas valves associated with
hood fire suppression systems (Furnished by Hood Fire Suppression
Contractor) in addition to standard gas shut off and solenoid valves on
gas supplies to the Bakery fryer and Deli/Prepared Foods rotisserie,
fryers and pizza oven.
13. Location of indicating mechanical gas solenoid valves and gas shut-off
valves in Bakery, Deli Areas shall be exposed below the finished ceiling
and meet with the approval of Local Authorities.
14. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a flexible gas supply to
movable Deli/Prepared Foods rotisserie, fryers and pizza oven, as
specified herein and/or where required by State Code, Local Regulations
and/or Gas Supplier permit.
15. Gas supply piping serving the Prepared Foods rotisserie and fryers shall
be run offset and run exposed with the mechanical gas valve (Furnished
by the Hood Fire Suppression Contractor) and shutoff valve situated in
the Deli Back Room area approximately 9" below the finished ceiling
located against the partition wall and before dropping down exposed with
a drip leg and tee directly behind the Prep Foods rotisserie before
penetrating the wall, 30" above finished floor, to feed the rotisserie and
fryers with a gas pipe manifold exposed on the wall directly behind the
rotisserie and fryers.
16. All mobile gas fired equipment, specified herein, shall be provided with a
1" diameter flexible gas connectors, Dormont Model #SSC-16000-BP
Series or approved equal, with stainless steel corrugated tubing,
reinforcing braid, permanent PVC plastic coating, flared (non-welded)
tubing fittings with male and female ends and restraining cable of size
and length as specified herein, installed so as to avoid sharp bends,
twisting, fatigue, and be self-draining, including a restraining device
permitting safe cleanup around equipment.
17. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 1" diameter 5'-0" L, flexible gas
connector, Dormont Model SSC-16100-BP Series or approved equal, with
5'-0" L, restraining cable for the Deli/Prepared Foods rotisserie unless
specified otherwise herein. Flexible gas connectors and cables shall not
exceed 3'-0" in length for Massachusetts stores.
18. Ball valves may be provided in lieu of plug valves for sizes specified
herein where approved by State Codes, Local Codes and/or Local
Authorities.
19. Gas piping shall not penetrate flues, ductwork and/or exhaust hoods.
20. All gas piping branches shall be taken from top or sides of horizontal
mains.
21. Individual branch piping sizes shall not be reduced upon final rise or drop
to individual gas fired equipment, etc.
22. The Plumbing Contractor shall offset all gas supply piping downstream of
full sized branch riser and/or drop with reducing elbow and/or reducing
tee fittings prior to connecting to each individual fired unit and/or
equipment specified herein.
PLUMBING - 15400-39
D. Finish and escutcheons:
1. Smooth up rough edges around sleeves with plaster or spackling
compound.
2. Provide 1" wide chrome or nickel plated escutcheons on all pipes
exposed to view where passing through walls, floors, partitions, ceilings,
and similar locations.
a. Size the escutcheons to fit pipe and a covering.
b. Hold escutcheons in place with set screw.
40. GAS PIPING SYSTEM
A. General
1. Natural Gas System
a. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide complete alterations and
additions to the gas distribution system running within the building
to all gas fired rooftop equipment and all gas-fired equipment
located within.
2. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all work to make a complete
gas system from building side of gas regulator to all gas-fired bakery
equipment (ovens and donut fryers), deli equipment (Rotisserie, fryers
and pizza oven), HVAC equipment (unit heaters, rooftop units, duct
heaters, furnaces, etc.), and hot water heater in accordance with the
Plumbing Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
3. Plumbing Contractor shall verify the exact orientation and location of gas
connections and on each piece of gas fired equipment with HVAC
Contractor (for HVAC equipment), and Stop & Shop Engineering
Department (for Bakery and Prepared Foods equipment) before running
any pipe.
4. Exact location of all gas fired HVAC equipment shall be field coordinated
with the General Contractor and the HVAC Contractor and shall not be
scaled off the plumbing construction drawings, as they are diagrammatic.
5. A gas valve and union coupling shall be installed in each gas fired unit
and/or equipment specified herein. The gas valve shall be the full size of
the branch line indicated on the drawings and not the final unit or
equipment connection size, unless specified otherwise herein.
6. All gas connections to equipment and piping within and on the building
shall be installed by a licensed gasfitter so as to prevent gas seepage into
building.
7. All gas piping shall pitch towards drip pockets located at system low
points. Sediment traps shall be provided at all equipment locations as
required by State Gas Code and Local Regulations. All drip pockets and
sediment traps shall be at least 6" long with removable caps. All drip
pockets and traps shall be located inside the building.
8. All materials and methods used in fabrication of gas system shall be
approved by State Plumbing Code, Local Codes, Gas Supplier and/or
authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Piping shall be installed by a licensed gas fitter in a neat manner with
lines straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines and
with risers plumb, run piping so as to avoid passing through duct work or
directly under electric light outlets, and/or interfering with other lines. All
work shall be accomplished using the best methods and procedures of
recognized pipe fabrication in a good and workmanlike manner in
accordance with the State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations.
PLUMBING - 15400-38
19. All polyethylene tubing shall be cut smooth to the desired length with
hand shears. Tubing cut with any type of saw blade shall not be
permitted.
B. Materials: (All materials shall be selected in accordance with State Plumbing
Code and local regulations).
1. Nutrient Feed/Non-Potable Water Piping: (Cross-linked polyethylene
tubing "Aquapex" Engle method chemically cross-linked polyethylene
without oxygen barrier)
a. Pipe (above slab): Cross linked polyethylene tubing ASTM F876 &
F877
b. Fittings (above slab): Brass propex barb by M.P.T. fitting and
propex ring collar with memory (above slab): Polybutylene fittings,
fusion with brass stiffener inserts, fusion weld chemically.
2. Joints: (Tubing shall be joined by the following methods and materials in
accordance with the State Plumbing Code and local regulations).
a. Plain end pipe (above slab): Brass propex barb by MPT fitting and
propex ring collar with memory.
b. All joints shall be fabricated with a manufacturers approved
expansion tool.
3. Nutrient Feed/Non-Potable Water Piping: (Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe)
a. Pipe (above slab): PVC pipe, Schedule 80.
b. Fittings (above slab): PVC pipe, Schedule 80, fittings, socket,
screwed.
C. Pipe (above slab): Polyethylene tubing.
4. Valves:
, +. a. Ball valves: True union PVC body, PVC ball, tee handle, EDPM
seat and seals, 150 psi working pressure.
5. Nutrient Feed/Non-Potable Water Piping Conduit: (Electrical Metallic
Tubing - EMT)
a. Pipe (above slab): Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), zinc coated
tubing, ANSI C80.3.
b. Fittings (above slab): Steel set screw type fittings, ANSI/NEMA FB1.
39. SLEEVES
A. Where pipe pass through concrete, masonry, or stud walls, or pass through
ceiling, provide "Sperzel" rust-proof"Crete-Sleeve" of the size required.
B. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and
ceilings.
1. Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is placed.
2. For uninsulated pipe, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe
passing through, or provide a minimum 1/2" clearance between inside
and outside of the pipe.
3. For insulated pipe, provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the
full thickness of pipe covering, with clearance for packing and caulking.
C. Caulk the space between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering, using a
noncombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining compound which
leaves a smooth finished appearance, or pack with noncombustible rope, or
fiberglass to within 1/2" of both wall faces, and provide the waterproof compound
described above.
PLUMBING - 15400-37
shall be accomplished using the best methods and procedures of
recognized pipe fabrication in a good and workmanlike manner in
accordance with the State Plumbing Code and local requirements.
9. Pitch all piping sufficient so that it will drain to low points at the ends of
each system.
10. All changes in direction for shielded nutrient feed and non-potable
supplies under this Section shall be made with long sweep EMT bends.
11. All EMT conduit shall be cut square using a saw or pipe cutter with ends
deburred before joining.
12. EMT conduit shall be joined to the shoulder of each fitting and securely
fastened with set screws.
13. Piping runs for each designated nutrient feed and non-potable water
supplies shielded with 1-1/2" EMT conduit shall be each made of
unbroken lengths of 3/4" cross-linked polyethylene tubing as indicated on
the plumbing construction drawings and details.
14. All piping shall run concealed above ceilings or in walls of finished areas
where possible.
15. 3/4" cross-linked polyethylene tubing runs serving nutrient feed and non-
potable water supplies shall terminate with manufacturers approved 3/4"
brass barb by 1/2" MPT fittings immediately upstream of ball valve
shutoffs serving florist refrigerated cases and hose connection fitting in
the Florist Department and ball valve shutoffs on nutrient feed and non-
potable water supplies immediately downstream of the reduced pressure
backflow preventer and the "Dosatron" floral preservative dispensing unit
as indicated on the plumbing construction drawings and details.
16. All nutrient feed and non-potable water piping in the Florist Department
located immediately downstream of 3/4" brass barb x 1/2" MPT fittings
including ball valve shutoff to corresponding florist refrigerated cases shall
be fabricated with 1/2" diameter Schedule 80 PVC piping and ball valves
with final transitions and connections to refrigerated cases made in
flexible 3/8" polyethylene piping with 1/2" I.P.S. x 3/8" compression fittings
to each corresponding solenoid valve with 3/8" MPT connection atop
each refrigerated case as indicated on the plumbing construction
drawings and details. The cross-linked polyethylene tubing serving the
nutrient feed supply piping to the 3/4" hose connection located directly
below the Florist work sink shall terminate with a 3/4" brass barb x 1/2"
MPT fitting in the ceiling directly above the Florist work sink and shall be
fabricated with 3/4" diameter Schedule 80 PVC pipe and ball valve to the
hose connection. The 3/4" PVC ball valve shall be mounted 4" above
finished floor directly below the Florist work sink immediately upstream of
hose connection.
17. All nutrient feed and non-potable water piping immediately downstream of
the reduced pressure backflow preventer and immediately upstream of
the 3/4" brass barb x 1/2" MPT fittings including ball valve shutoffs on
nutrient feed and non-potable water supplies shall be fabricated with 3/4"
diameter Schedule 80 PVC pipe, ball valve shutoffs and check valves as
indicated on the plumbing construction drawings and details.
18. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide one (1) hose bibb (non-potable
water) with vacuum breaker located immediately downstream of the 3/4"
reduced pressure backflow preventer on the non-potable water supply as
indicated on plumbing construction drawings and details. •fts.
PLUMBING - 15400-36
38. NUTRIENT FEED/NON-POTABLE WATER SYSTEM
A. General
1. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a complete Nutrient
Feed/Non-Potable Water System including all roughing and final
connections to all Florist Department accessories, specialties,
components and equipment in accordance with Plumbing Construction
Drawings, Details and as specified herein.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a Nutrient Feed/Non-
Potable Water System from and including a 3/4" common reduced
pressure backflow preventer connecting to a potable water supply.
3. The Nutrient Feed/Non-Potable Water System shall be comprised of the
following two (2) separate systems:
a. A designated Nutrient Feed System (containing floral
preservative) running uninterrupted from the reduced pressure
backflow preventer location specified herein to the Florist
Department connecting to a designated nutrient feed connection
at each refrigerated florist case and to a 1/2" brass quick
disconnect fitting serving a 12'-0" long, 1/2" I.D. rubber hose with
spray nozzle (supplied by Stop & Shop) located directly below
florist work sink.
b. A designated Non-Potable Water System running uninterrupted
from the reduced pressure backflow preventer location as
specified herein to the Florist Department connecting to a
designated non-potable water (flushing) connection at each
refrigerated florist case.
4. The 3/4" reduced pressure backflow preventer shall be installed upstream
of the floral preservative dispensing panel (supplied by Stop & Shop).
5. The Plumbing Contractor shall mount a floral preservative dispensing
panel (supplied by Stop & Shop) comprised of a ball valve, pressure
reducing valve, pressure gauge and "Dosatron"/floral dispensing unit
"Floralife" Model #D1150, (prefabricated in series) on the finished wall (4'-
6" above the finished floor) located directly above and downstream of the
reduced pressure backflow preventer mounted 3'-0" above the finished
floor as indicated on the Plumbing drawings, details and as specified
herein.
6. The reduced pressure backflow preventer shall be provided with an air
gap fitting and drain pitched to a floor drain nearby.
7. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a designated nutrient
feed and non-potable water supply each running separately downstream
of the backflowpreventer and "Dosatron" (floral preservative dispensing
unit) to their respective refrigerated florist case connections and hose
connection locations in the Florist Department. Each supply shall be
fabricated with a 3/4" cross-linked polyethylene tubing running shielded
within a continuous 1-1/2" diameter EMT (electrical metallic tubing)
conduit over the entire length of each supply as indicated on the plumbing
construction drawings and details.
8. Install all piping specified under this Section in a neat manner with lines
straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines with risers
plumb, run piping so as to avoid passing through ductwork or directly
under electrical light outlets and/or interfering with other piping. All work
PLUMBING - 15400-35
covers. An alternate vapor proof canvas, glass cloth jacket with a
vapor mastic (insulating cement) and/or fiberglass duct wrap shall
not be used in lieu thereof.
5. Condensate Drainage (Above Ceiling):
a. Condensate piping above Meat and Produce Pre-Pak Room
ceilings from room cooling units shall be insulated as specified for
Cold Water Piping (Above Slab).
6. Condensate Drains (From HVAC Units):
a. Condensate drains from Sanyo unit, condensate pumps in the
Cash Room, Computer Room, Computer Work Room, Security
Room, Bottle Return and Sales area shall be insulated as
specified for Cold Water Piping (Above Slab).
7. Condensate Drains (Fish, Juice and Salad Bar Cases):
a. Condensate drains shall be insulated as specified for Cold Water
Piping (Above Slab).
8. Handicapped Lavatories (Exposed Piping):
a. Handicapped lavatory supplies and waste (exposed) shall be
insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard" insulation kits Model
#102W, a white, fully molded, flexible, vinyl insulation system
complete with nylon fasteners for "P" trap and angle valve
assemblies and accessory#105 for 5" offset strainer assembly.
C. Insulation Thickness
1. All minimum pipe insulation thickness shall be selected in accordance
with ASHRAE Standard 90A-1980 (as specified below) and/or State and
Local Ordinances governing such work, of which the more stringent
standard shall apply.
SERVICE NORMAL PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
1. Hot Water piping (Supply& Recirculation):
a. None Circulating Runouts up to 1" 1"
b. Circulating Main & Runouts up to 1-1/4" 1"
C. Circulating Main & Runouts 1-1/2" to 2" 1"
2. Cold Water Piping (Above Slab):
a. Main & Runouts all sizes 1/2"
3. Hot and Cold Water Piping (Below Slab):
a. Mains & Runouts all sizes 1/2"
4. Filtered Cold Water(Above Slab):
a. Mains & Runouts all sizes 1/2"
5. Filtered Cold Water(Above Slab):
a. Horizontal & Vertical Runs all sizes 1/2"
6. Storm Drainage Piping (Above Slab):
a. Horizontal & Vertical Runs all sizes 1"
7. Condensate Drainage (Above Ceiling):
a. Horizontal & Vertical Runs all sizes 1/2"
8. Condensate Drains (Above Slabs):
a. Horizontal & Vertical Runs all sizes 1/2"
9. Central Water Filtration System:
a. Water Filtration Tank 1-1/2"
10. Handicapped Lavatories (Exposed Piping):
a. Supplies and Waste as specified herein
PLUMBING - 15400-34
3. All insulated pipe with temperatures below ambient temperature shall
have a continuous vapor barrier. All joints, seams, and fittings must be
sealed to prevent condensation.
4. Before pipe covering is applied, all pressure tests shall have been
performed and been approved, with all piping surfaces to be covered
having been cleaned.
5. Valves, fittings, flanges and piping accessories shall have the same
thickness of pipe insulation as adjacent pipe.
6. All valves shall be insulated up to packing gland.
7. All water piping running above and below refrigerated cases shall have
insulation as specified herein.
8. All pipe insulation jackets specified herein shall have a continuous
pressure sealing adhesive cap along its entire length. Staples, tacks
and/or bands shall not be acceptable methods of sealing or fastening
insulation jackets and/or PVC covers specified herein.
9. Insulate all handicapped lavatory supplies and waste piping with flexible
molded vinyl coverings as specified herein. Elastomeric, fiberglass
and/or foam pipe insulations or coverings shall not be permitted in lieu
thereof.
B. Materials:
1. Hot Water Piping (Supply & Circulation):
a. Hot Water piping shall be insulated with molded, rigid, sectional
fiberglass, 3-1/2 lbs. pr cubic feet density, (K valve of .23 at 75
degrees mean temperature) composed of Kraft bonded to
aluminum foil, reinforced self-sealing lap.
W b. Fittings and Valves shall be covered with insulating material equal
in thickness to that of the adjoining pipe insulation and jacket with
approved white, preformed PVC covers. An alternate vapor proof
canvas or glass cloth jacket with a vapor proof mastic (insulating
cement shall not be used on fittings and valves in lieu thereof).
2. Cold Water, filtered cold water and condensate (Above Slab):
a. Cold water piping, valves, and fittings shall be insulated with
materials as specified for Hot Water Piping (Supply & Circulating).
In addition, all joints shall be sealed with a white or colorless
vapor adhesive.
3. Hot and Cold Water and filtered cold water (below slab):
a. Cold Water piping, fittings, and valves shall be insulated with a
flexible, elastomeric, tubular pipe insulation (K valve of .27 and 75
degrees F. mean temperature and water vapor permeability of .17
perm-in). All joints shall be glued with an approved adhesive
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
b. All fittings and valves shall be covered with tubular pipe material
equal in thickness to that of the adjoining pipe insulation, mitered
or size to suit.
4. Storm Drainage (Above Slab):
a. All horizontal runs of storm drainage and fittings including all
horizontal and vertical piping and fittings above finished ceilings
shall be as specified herein for Hot Water Piping (Supply &
Circulating). Roof drain bodies and fittings shall be covered with
insulating material equal in thickness to that of the adjoining pipe
insulation and jacketed with approved white preformed PVC
PLUMBING - 15400-33
36. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install backflow devices as specified
herein and/or denoted on the plumbing drawings, and where required by and in
accordance with applicable State Codes, Local Codes and/or authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. All backflow devices and associated trim (valves) shall be FM and USC
approved.
C. All backflow devices installed in domestic water service shall be furnished and
installed with two (2) OS&Y valves, test cocks, and associated spare parts kit.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall file all required applications, forms, diagrams,
plans, details, etc. with the State and/or Local Authorities having jurisdiction prior
to the installation of all backflow devices and shall secure and pay for all
necessary permits, inspections, tests and costs associated with all backflow
devices.
E. The backflow preventers shall be located so as to permit easy access and
provide adequate and convenient space for maintenance, valves shall be
installed horizontally between 3 and 4 feet from the floor and a minimum of 6
inches from any wall.
F. All reduced backflow preventers specified herein shall be furnished and installed
with left or right hand relief ports to allow for ease of maintenance and air gap
fitting as supplied by the Manufacturer.
G. The spare parts kit associated with each backflow device shall be securely
fastened to the body of said devices with nylon tie straps.
H. Plumbing Contractor shall provide a drain line full size from all backflow
preventers with relief ports and/or vents to nearest floor drain, increaser drain,
case drain, condensate drain or waste receptacle.
I. Vacuum breakers specified herein shall be furnished and installed on single
faucets located above service sinks/drip sinks in indirect waste pit.
J. Plumbing Contractor shall provide a pressure type vacuum breaker on cold water
supply to Sales Area mister system and hose reels as specified.
37. INSULATION
A. General:
1. All insulation coverings specified herein for piping systems and equipment
shall be continuous and with side joints staggered and end joints tightly
butted, installed per manufacturers recommendations, in a workmanlike
manner, by a pipe covering contractor employing skilled workmen
regularly engaged in this type of work.
2. All pipe insulation covering, PVC covers, tape and accessories shall have
a composite smoke and fire rating not exceeding that of NFPA 90a (flame ^00%k
spread - 25, smoke developed - 50).
PLUMBING - 15400-32
3. Cable provided for seismic systems shall be color coded and prestressed.
4. All beam clamps shall be secured with retaining straps for all piping
systems requiring seismic restraints.
33. CLEANOUTS
A. Provide floor and wall cleanouts as scheduled and shown on the plumbing
drawings and as required to satisfy the State Plumbing Code.
B. All floor cleanouts shall have cast iron bodies with flush, heavy duty, scoriated,
polished nickel bronze tops.
C. Accessible cleanouts shall be provided for all sanitary, waste, indirect waste,
storm and condensate drainage piping, at the base of all stacks (above slab), all
changes in direction, the ends of lines, where leaving the building, and not more
than 50 ft. apart in runs of horizontal and vertical pipe.
D. Wherever concealed cleanouts for horizontal or vertical soil, waste, and storm
drainage piping occur behind finished wall, they shall be extended to the back of
the finished wall and be provided with a threaded bronze plug, round stainless
steel access cover and screw. The access cover and screw. The access cover
shall be sized to permit removal of cleanout plug.
E. Where possible, dandy cleanouts or test tee fittings shall be provided at the base
of all roof conductors (above finished floor). Wye branch cleanouts fitting shall
not be used in lieu thereof.
34. ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS
A. All work by Plumbing Contractor shall be performed so as to provide proper
access to equipment and materials, which may need inspection, replacement,
repair or service. If proper access cannot be provided confer with Architect as to
best method of approach and effect of reduced access which may result.
B. Furnish access panels where any traps, valves, specialties, and/or other items
specified herein which require access are concealed in floors, walls, furred
spaces or above ceilings.
C. Ceilings consisting of lay-in or removal spline tiles do not require access panels.
Valves above ceiling shall have locations marked with red thumb tacks on
finished ceiling.
D. Access panel finish shall be coordinated with Architect.
35. TRAPS
A. All handsink "P" traps shall be Sanitary-Dash Model #R827-6BD, 1-1/2" x 1-1/4,"
17 gauge, polished chrome, tubular brass, swivel sink trap with cleanout, captive
swivel brass nut, 6" sweat extension, cast brass nuts, and deep escutcheon or
Sanitary-Dash Model #810-613D, 1-1/2" x 1-1/4" polished chrome, cast brass,
"New York Regulation" trap with cleanout, 6" sweat extension, cast brass nuts,
and deep escutcheon or approved equal.
PLUMBING - 15400-31
"Holdrite" or approved equal. Hole sizes drilled through metal studs shall
accommodate the proper insulator insert and pipe size.
24. All metal or galvanized steel brackets used for rough-in of water piping
shall be copper plated or provided with standard polybutylene insulator
inserts manufactured by "Holdrite" or approved equal.
25. Piping at equipment locations shall be supported so as to allow for the
removal of the equipment, valves, components and specialties with a
minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional support after
these items are removed.
26. All suspended horizontal piping shall be suspended from the building
structure by approved, continuously threaded, mild steel rods connecting
the pipe hangers to beam clamps, angle brackets, lag screws and/or
inserts. Rods shall be sized in accordance with the following:
Pipe Size Rod Size
(dia.) (dia.)
3/4" - 2" 3/8"
2-1/2" - 3-1/2" 1/2"
4" - 5"
5/8"
6" 3/4"
27. Beam clamp retaining straps shall be provided when required by State
Code, local codes, Seismic Codes and/or local authorities.
28. The Refrigeration Contractor shall provide corrosion resistant hanger
assemblies when supporting 6" PVC refrigeration conduit below grade for
site subject to poor soil conditions.
29. The Plumbing Contractor shall remove all wooden supports, concrete
blocks, bricks, etc. from beneath all piping joints where allowed by Code
prior to backfilling and compacting of soils around piping.
30. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide wood blocking (oak wedges) for
support of clevis hangers located below grade prior to backfill of
underground piping for sites with poor soil conditions requiring pipe
support from slab above.
31. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide supply pipe support assemblies
with each water closet and urinal carrier used for securing water supply
piping serving each flush valve in lieu of wood blocking.
32. The Plumbing Contractor shall utilize expansion bolts for the securing of
all fixture carriers specified herein; powder actuated fasteners, expansion
shields and/or inserts shall not be used in lieu thereof.
33. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide hangers, supports and
supplemental steel for all piping systems, fixtures, equipment, drains,
accessories and components suspended over basement areas.
B. Seismic Restraints
1. All pipe hangers and equipment support to be constructed and installed
with Zone requirements as outlined in the State Building Code.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of the shop drawings
and calculations detailing seismic hanger restraints to the local building
authority, Engineer and Stop & Shop Engineering Department along with
a letter of compliance stamped and signed by a registered structural
engineer confirming that the piping hangers meet the State seismic Code
requirements.
PLUMBING - 15400-30
supports (firmly attached to the building structure and to the pipe) or steel
riser clamps (install above slab and resting on the floor sleeve). The foot
"' of each stack and/or leader shall be firmly supported.
11. Horizontal pipe runs (sanitary, indirect waste, vent, storm, gas) shall be
supported from the structure above by steel bank and clevis hangers
which provide a vertical adjustment of approximately 1-1/2" after the pipe
is in place by means of a suspended steel hood and two (2) locking hex
nuts. They shall be attached to the structure by suitable expansion bolts
to concrete wall. At steel joist, for pipes over 2," support from two (2)joist
by adding supplementary steel between the joist at panel points, along
top cord.
12. Where pipes are supported from the side wall, hangers shall be clevis
type '(as specified above) with steel angle-iron brackets, bolts and
expansion shields.
13. Horizontal runs of water piping (hot, cold and hot water (circulating) shall
be supported from the structure above by clevis hangers, split ring
hangers, one piece band hangers or by adjustable gang hangers fitted
with individual supporting clips.
14. Ceevis hangers, split ring hangers, band hangers and gang hanger
supporting clips in contact with copper pipe shall be isolated or finished in
copper to match the piping and/or of brass construction.
15. All hangers and supports provide for all piping materials specified herein,
shall be in accordance with State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations.
16. Plumbing Contractor shall provide hangers at a maximum distance of 2 ft.
from all changes in direction horizontal and vertically on both sides of
concentrated loads independent of piping.
17. All hangers and supports shall be spaced at intervals in accordance with
State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations.
18. Exposed condensate drainage in refrigerated chest, freezers and rooms
shall be supported along walls and ceiling with copper plated, stamped
steel, split ring hangers "Carpenter & Paterson" Fig. #66CT and along
ceilings with copper plated, malleable iron, split ring or band hangers
"Carpenter & Paterson" Fig. #81CT, or Fit #1ACT with galvanized steel
rods, washers and nuts.
19. Shop drawings detailing supplementary steel between joist for pipes over
2" and support for exterior gas riser shall be submitted to the Engineer
and Stop & Shop Engineering Dept. for approval prior to fabrication.
20. Horizontal runs of filtered water piping to refrigerator case quick
disconnectors shall be supported below refrigerated cases with copper
plated, malleable iron, split ring or band hangers "Carpenter & Paterson"
Fig #1ACT and copper plated hanger plates "Carpenter & Paterson" Fig.
#81 CT with galvanized steel rods, washers and nuts and supported inside
refrigerated cases with stamped split ring hangers "Carpenter& Paterson"
Fig. #66CT.
21. Horizontal runs of hot water piping to hose bibbs atop Frozen Food cases
and filtered water piping to misters atop single deck refrigerated Produce
cases in Sales Area shall be supported with copper plated, stamped, split
ring hangers "Carpenter& Paterson" Fig. #66CT.
22. All pipe hanger rods, locking nuts and screws installed in refrigerator
chests, freezer, cases and rooms shall be galvanized steel.
.., 23. All copper water piping penetrating through metal studs shall be fitted with
a standard polybutylene metal stud insulator inserts manufactured by
PLUMBING - 15400-29
2. Storm Drainage (Copper tube)
a. Pipe - (Above slab): Type "L" copper tubing (maximum pipe size -
3"
b. Fittings - (Above slab): Wrought copper and cast brass drainage
fittings, sweat.
C. Joints - (Above and below slab)
1. Cast iron soil pipe shall be joined by the following methods and materials
in accordance with State Plumbing Codes and Local Regulations.
a. Hub and Spigot Pipe - (Above and below slab): Resilient
compression gasket or new block lead poured over oakum gasket.
2. Soldered Joints - (Above slab): Approved lead free solder and flux.
D. Valves
1. Backwater Valves - (4") Cast Iron Body, bronze swing type check
threaded bronze cover.
a. Hub and Spigot Ends - Josam #67524
32. HANGERS AND SUPPORT
A. General
1. Plumbing Contractor shall support all new piping from building structure
by means of approved hangers and supports. Piping shall be supported
to maintain required grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and
to secure piping in place, and shall be so arranged as to provide for
expansion and contraction.
2. No work shall be installed using hangers or supports of other trades.
3. Hangers and supports shall be designed and installed so that no load will
be transmitted to equipment connections.
4. Chain, strap, perforated bar or wire hangers will not be acceptable, no
hangers or supports shall be attached to steel deck, wood deck or duct
work.
5. Drilling of building structural steel for attachment of hangers of supports is
not permitted under any circumstances. Welding to building structural
steel is permitted only where specified or specifically indicated on the
drawings. When special conditions arise, shop drawings and/or other
descriptive information detailing proposed methods of written approval by
Engineer prior to welding.
6. Supports shall originate or transmit the load to/or near panel points along
top cord of trusses, girders or roof joist when hung from such members.
7. Where overhead construction does not permit fastening of hanger rod in
required location, provide additional steel required to properly transmit the
load to the building structural frame of floor and to meet spacing
requirements. Supplementary (support) steel shall be in accordance with
AISC specification for Building For Design Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel For Buildings.
8. Floor stands may be used on piping running close to floor. Threaded rod
alone will not be acceptable for support of said piping.
9. Piping buried in ground shall have a firm bearing along its entire length on
undisturbed or compacted earth or supported from slab above.
10. All vertical piping throughout the building shall be securely fastened and A"k
supported at each floor, ceiling and roof by means of approved steel
PLUMBING - 15400-28
total roof areas of 10,000 sq. ft or less. For larger roof areas, a minimum
of one (1) roof drain shall be provided for each 10,000 sq. ft of roof area,
except the roof area per drain may be increased to 15,000 sq. ft. with a
minimum drain diameter of 6".
31. Roof drains serving the main roof directed to a site storm drainage
system located to the rear of the building typically are located at the low
points of the main roof, approximately 5'-0" away from the rear wall of the
facility. Please verify and coordinate all storm drainage system design
requirements specified herein for any deviations in site specific
architectural, structural or site design with the Architect, the Site Engineer
and the Stop & Shop Plumbing Engineer prior to finalizing the design.
32. All storm drainage systems specified herein as extending 10'-0" outside
the building shall refer to the outer most point of the building and its
appendages (i.e. outer edge of canopies, outer edge of exterior chests,
outer edge of enclosed loading docks, outer edge of platforms, ramps,
stairs, etc.)
33. Floor drains shall be provided for sidewalk areas below front and/or side
canopies with carriage areas and/or grades subject to the accumulation of
surface water and/or curbing restricting runoff as specified herein.
34. Floor drains serving front and/or side canopy areas shall be connected to
a closed storm drainage system and shall be provided with back water
valves as specified herein.
35. Floor access covers shall be provided for the back water valves serving
the floor drains situated below front and side canopies as specified
herein.
36. Floor cleanouts shall be provided for all storm drains at exterior walls prior
to exiting the building.
37. All metal roof drain pans shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor
and installed by the steel erector. All drain pan locations shall be
coordinated with the General Contractor, Steel Erector and the
Architectural Drawings.
38. Storm drainage from gutters and downspouts from the greenhouse shall
not be allowed to discharge onto finished grade in lieu of connecting to a
closed storm drainage system 10'-0" outside of building.
39. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a cast iron receiver (boot) Smith
Fig. No. 1785 as a transition piece for connecting an aluminum
downspout from the greenhouse.
B. Materials: (All materials shall be selected in accordance with State Plumbing
Code and Local Regulations). Plastic pipe and fittings shall be provided in lieu of
all other piping specified herein under this section when permitted by State
Plumbing Codes and Local Regulations.
1. Storm Drainage— (Cast iron soil pipe).
a. Pipe - (Above slab): Cast iron soil pipe, service weight (minimum
pipe size — 3").
b. Pipe - (Below slab): Cast iron soil pipe, service weight hub and
spigot (minimum pipe size—4").
C. Fittings: - (Above slab): Cast iron, service weight, hubless and/or
hub and spigot. (Below slab): Cast iron service weight, hub and
spigot.
d. Coating -(Above and below slab): Pipe and fittings shall have two
(2) coats of tar or asphaltum.
PLUMBING - 15400-27
drains by Plumbing Contractor. Roofing Contractor shall connect roof
membrane to roof drain body with clamping ring (Supplied by Plumbing
Contractor) and seal with an approved water proof caulking and trim the
membrane back to within 1" of the roof and drain body.
18. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install an increaser drain (4" "P"
trap with 4" x 8" plain increaser fitting) in sprinkler room located adjacent
to sprinkler risers connecting to storm drain system with backwater valve
to accommodate test drains from sprinkler alarm valves. Where not
practical to connect to storm drainage system, the Plumbing Contractor
shall terminate pipe out through side of loading dock or sprinkler room
wall draining to grade.
19. Storm drainage conducted from main roof shall be served by a minimum
of two (2) rain water leaders.
20. Horizontal runs of storm drainage piping shall be kept as high as possible
to roof steel.
21. Overflow drains shall be installed at roof elevations above those set for
conventional roof drains, so as to become active and relieve water
storage on main roof within safe roof design load limits in the event
conventional roof drains become inoperable, in accordance with Factory
Mutual Data Sheet 1-54.
22. Storm drainage from canopies and greenhouse shall not be allowed to
discharge onto finished grade in lieu of connecting to a closed storm
drainage system 10'-0" outside the building.
23. Storm drainage systems serving front canopies shall be collected and run
concealed above each canopy ceiling to separate rain water leaders in
boxed-out chases situated at the front exterior wall of the building.
24. Rainwater leaders serving front canopies concealed in boxed-out chases ••
shall drop vertically to a depth of 4'-6" below grade before running
horizontal to prevent freezing of piping located below grade. Footings
shall be slotted or notched to accommodate storm drain drops below
grade and extending 10'-0" outside the building connecting to a closed
storm drainage system.
25. Canopy rainwater leaders concealed in boxed-out chases within the
building shall be provided with threaded bronze cleanout plug and
stainless steel round access covers and screws situated so as to be
accessible from within the building.
26. Storm drainage from aluminum gutters and downspouts (by others) from
exterior refrigerated chests located in docking areas shall not be allowed
to discharge onto finished grade in lieu of connecting to a closed storm
drainage system 10'-0" outside of building.
27. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide cast iron receivers (boots) Smith
Fig. 1785 as a transition piece for connecting aluminum downspout from
exterior chests to a closed storm drainage system.
28. Each exterior refrigerated chest located in dock areas shall be provided
with a minimum of one (1) storm drain connection.
29. Storm drains serving exterior refrigerated chests shall drop vertically to a
depth of 4'-6" below grade before running horizontally to prevent freezing
of piping below grade.
30. Building storm drainage systems (maximum roof drains area) shall be
designed in accordance with Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-54-Roof Loads
for New Construction. At least two (2) roof drains shall be provided for A00,,
PLUMBING - 15400-26
31. STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A. General
1. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install complete storm drainage
system alterations and additions in accordance with the Plumbing
Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
2. Storm Drainage serving the main roof shall be directed to the site storm
drainage systems as indicated on the drawings.
3. Storm drainage serving front canopies and the greenhouse shall be
directed to the site storm systems located in the front of the building,
where possible.
4. All storm drainage serving the main roofs, front canopies and the
greenhouse shall be run concealed in ceilings, soffits, walls, chases, box-
outs and/or exterior columns.
5. Main roof, canopy and enclosed dock roof drains shall be located at low
points on roof only.
6. A separate storm drainage system with overflow drains shall be provided
for main roofs (without scuppers) subject to potential water storage
depths exceeding roof design load limits. Overflow drainage system shall
be designed in accordance with State Building Code, Plumbing Code,
local regulations and/or Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-54-Roof Loads for
New Construction.
7. All storm drainage serving main roof shall be collected and run tight to the
joists in rear of the building before dropping down. (Roof conductors shall
not occur in any part of the Sales Area).
8. Dandy cleanouts or tee fittings shall be provided at the base of all
look rainwater leaders (above finished floor). "Y" branch cleanouts fittings
shall not be used in lieu of tee fittings for pipe sizes over 10" to suit
building conditions
9. Storm drainage piping shall be run in a neat manner with lines straight
and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines with roof
conductors plumb.
10. Where possible, all piping 4 inches and larger, unless otherwise noted,
shall pitch 1/8 of an inch per foot within the building.
11. No horizontal or vertical runs of storm drainage piping shall be allowed to
pass through and/or over Electrical, Telephone, or Compressor Areas,
and shall be routed around these areas as shown on Plumbing
Construction Drawings.
12. All roof and canopy drains shall be installed with rough bronze domes
(plastic domes shall not be used in lieu thereof).
13. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all roof and canopy drains
with drain receivers and deck clamp assemblies.
14. Each canopy shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) canopy drains.
15. Where possible, storm drainage serving over flow drains on the main roof
shall be separately directed to the rear of the building and shall discharge
1'-0" above grade through wall and/or connected to a closed site storm
drainage system, in accordance with State Codes, Local Regulations or
authorities having jurisdiction.
16. Rain water leaders serving main roof shall be located where shown on
Stop & Shop Fixture Plan (F-1). Verify exact location of all building
rainwater leaders with the Stop & Shop Plumbing Engineer.
17. General Contractor shall provide all materials and work necessary to
prepare roofing systems to allow for installation and proper setting of roof
PLUMBING - 15400-25
34. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 3/4" drain (plastic tubing) form
the lobster tank in the Fish Department to the 3" indirect waste drain
located below the unit.
B. Materials
(All materials shall be selected in accordance with State Plumbing Code and
Local Regulations)
1. Indirect Waste and Vent (Cast Iron Soil Pipe)
a. Pipe (Above Slab): Cast iron soil pipe, service weight (minimum
pipe size - 2") (Below Slab): Cast iron soil pipe, service weight
(minimum pipe size 3") sanitary and waste, 2" vent).
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Cast iron, service weight, hub and spigot
or hubless. (Below Slab): Cast iron, service weight, hub and
spigot.
C. Coating - (Above & Below Slab): Pipe and fittings shall have two
(2) coats of tar or asphaltum.
2. Indirect Waste & Vent (copper tube)
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): Type "L" copper tubing (maximum pipe size -
2")
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Wrought copper and cast brass drainage
fittings, sweat.
3. Indirect Waste & Vent (Steel Pipe)
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): Galvanized steel, standard weight, screwed
(minimum pipe Size - 1-1/2")
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Galvanized steel, screwed
4. Indirect Waste (Brass Pipe) . ,
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): I.P.S. Brass, screwed (minimum pipe size 1-
1/4")
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Recessed pattern brass, screwed.
C. Joints
1. (Cast iron soil pipe shall be joined by the following methods and materials
in accordance with State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations)
a. Hub & Spigot Pipe - (Below Slab): New block lead poured over
oakum gasket.
b. Hub & Spigot Pipe - (Above & Below Slab): Resilient compression
gasket.
C. Hubless Pipe - (Above Slab): Approved elastomeric sealing
sleeve and stainless steel clamp, clamp screw and housing.
d. Screwed joints - (Above Slab): Approved joint compound applied
to male threads only.
e. Soldered Joints - (Above Slab): shall be made with 95/5 solder
(95% tin, 5% antimony)
D. Valves
1. Backwater Valves - (6" max pipe size): Cast iron body, bronze swing type
check, bolted cover.
a. Hub and Spigot Ends -Josam #67400
PLUMBING - 15400-24
Regulations should there be any discrepancies the more stringent
AOW requirements shall govern.
20. All vents shall pitch toward the drain they serve.
21. Plumbing Contractor shall not sweat drainage fitting connection to outlet
on cooling unit evaporator drain pans located in all refrigerated chests
and freezers.
22. Plumbing Contractor shall provide PVC "P" traps and drains for all HVAC
rooftop units with drain pans and/or evaporators. All drains shall be
terminated 6" above roof. "P" traps shall be omitted where required by
manufacturer of HVAC unit and 90-degree elbows shall be used in lieu
thereof.
23. Plumbing Contractor shall provide full sized plastic deep seal "P" trap with
cleanout plugs for all HVAC rooftop units, unless specified otherwise by
the manufacturer and/or so noted on the unit.
24. The Plumbing Contractor shall vent all individual branches or branch
mains 15 feet or greater in length serving the indirect waste system.
25. The Plumbing Contractor shall rough the 2" "P" trap with 2" x 3" increaser
located within the beverage counter, 1'-6" above the finished floor, 1'-0" in
from the edge of the partition wall from the Bakery Work Room side. The
Plumbing Contractor shall give special attention to the installation of a
continuous waste and vent with wall cleanout serving the 2" "P" trap
located within the Beverage Counter and being careful not to double trap
below grade.
26. All exposed condensate drains serving refrigerated chests and freezers
specified herein terminating directly above each 3" condensate drain shall
be mitered at a 45-degree angle.
27. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide chrome plated 3/8" Type "K"
annealed copper tubing for exposed sections of discharge piping from
condensate pumps serving cooling units in cooled rooms and/or air
conditioning units as specified herein. Plastic tubing and barbed fittings
shall not be permitted in lieu thereof.
28. The indirect waste main serving the refrigerated island produce cases
shall be located so as to run (below slab) directly on center below each
island produce case.
29. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 3/4" condensate drain from each
refrigerated island/counter unit in the Cheese, Juice, Deli and Prep Foods
Departments to each 3" cast iron indirect waste drain located in the floor
below the unit or adjacent refrigerated case.
30. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 3/4" condensate drain from the
Dunkin Donuts ice machine bin to the floor sink located directly below the
unit.
31. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 1/2" condensate drain from the
refrigerated counter unit located in Dunkin Donuts to the floor sink directly
below the unit.
32. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide 1/2" drain from the produce case
mister discharging to and including an 1-1/2" stand pipe terminated at the
top of the refrigerated case and connecting to the case condensate
drainage below.
33. The Plumbing Contractor shall run 3/4" condensate drain from the Bakery
ovens, Proof Box, Beverage Dispenser and ice case maker to a 3"
indirect waste drain and/or floor sink, as specified herein.
PLUMBING - 15400-23
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for providing condensate
drainage from cooling units (evaporator drain pans) in all refrigerated
cases, chests, freezers, rooms and equipment to all drain receivers
specified herein.
3. Indirect waste system shall be installed in a neat manner with lines
straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines, with risers
plumb, run piping so as not to interfere with other lines.
4. All drainage connections to case and condensate drains (hub drains)
shall be made (open or closed) in accordance with State Plumbing Code
and Local Regulations.
5. Special attention shall be given to the pitch and invert elevations of
indirect waste piping to drip sinks (located in the indirect waste pit) and
from drip sinks to the building drain.
6. Plumbing Contractor shall seal all chest penetrations with an approved
white silicon caulking filling the entire void surrounding pipes and finished
flush with chest construction.
7. Plastic pipe shall not be used, except inside Refrigerated Sales and
Display Cases supplied by Stop & Shop with plastic "P" traps or
galvanized steel running traps and where approved by State Codes,
Local Codes, Regulations and Local Authorities.
8. For standard details of drainage piping for equipment and drains specified
herein see Stop & shop "Standard Refrigeration and Plumbing Details
Drawing for Chests & Cases" (R-1).
9. Indirect floor drains shall be provided in all refrigerated chests and food
processing areas as required by State Codes, Local Codes, Regulations
and Local Authorities.
10. All exposed condensate drainage traps shall be provided with cleanout
plugs.
11. Under no circumstances are pipes of any type to be run inside chests
and/or chest partitions unless specified otherwise herein.
12. Plumbing Contractor shall substitute short sweep fittings in place of 1/4
bends where utilized in indirect waste drainage system (below slab).
13. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install wye fittings with 45 degree
elbows when making piping transitions from horizontal to vertical (in lieu
of tee's crosses and 90 degree elbows for all condensate drainage inside
chests, freezers and above finished ceilings.
14. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install cleanouts with plugs at all
changes in directions for all condensate drainage inside refrigerated
chests, freezers and above finished ceilings.
15. Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Stop & Shop "Refrigeration Sleeve
Plan" (R-1) for exact location of condensate and case drains. Each drain
shall be installed to within a tolerance of 1" of dimensions noted on
Refrigeration Sleeve Plan (R-1).
16. All 3" cast iron case drains located below refrigerated cases in Sales Area
shall be cut or snapped level 1" above finished floor.
17. All 3" cast iron condensate drains located inside refrigerated chests shall
be cut or snapped level 1" above finished floor.
18. Furnish and install unions on condensate drainage piping to cooling units
inside all refrigerated chests and freezers as specified herein, in
accordance with Stop & Shop "Standard Refrigeration and Plumbing
Details Drawing for Chests & cases" (R-4).
19. Indirect waste system shall be drained and vented so as to be in
agreement with State Codes, Local Codes, Authorities, Rules and
PLUMBING - 15400-22
61. The Plumbing Contractor shall adjust all mixing valves associated with
automatic flush valves and faucets.
62. All hand sinks provided with automatic gooseneck faucets shall be
Brasscraft model # SCS 400A, brass construction with polished chrome
finish, copper sweat inlet, 5" extension tube, loose key angle valve with
3/8" O.C. riser and bell escutcheon.
63. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install flow control valves and
flow balancing valves, as specified herein and/or shown on plumbing
drawings.
B. Materials
(All materials shall be selected in accordance with State Plumbing Code and
Local Regulations)
1. Water Piping (Copper Tube)
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): Type "L" copper tubing, hard drawn hard
temper: (Below Slab) Type "K" copper tubing, annealed.
b. Fitting - (Above Slab & Below Slab): Wrought Copper and Cast
Brass fittings, sweat.
C. Joints - (Above Slab): Sweat Joint 95/5 solder (lead-free) - (Below
slab): No joints allowed.
2. Valves
a. Gate Valves - 12" and smaller: Bronze body, solid wedge, inside
screw, non rising stem, 125 psi working pressure.
b. Soldered Ends - Jenkins fig. 1210 or approved equal.
C. Threaded Ends - Jenkins Fig. 370 or approved equal.
3. Globe Valves - (2-1/2" and smaller): bronze body, renewable composition
disc, 150 psi working pressure.
4. Ball Valves - (2-1/2" and Smaller): bronze chrome plated ball, steel lever
handle with vinyl grip and hole penetration for valve tag, reinforced teflon
seats and seals, 400 psi working pressure.
a. Soldered ends-Apollo 70-200 series or approved equal.
b. Threaded ends -Apollo 70-100 series or approved equal.
5. Check Valves - 2-1/2" and smaller): Bronze body, bronze disc, swing
type, 150 psi working pressure.
a. Soldered ends - Jenkins Fig. 1222 or approved equal.
b. Threaded ends - Jenkins Fig. 92-a or approved equal.
6. Balancing Valves - (2" and smaller): Bronze body, bronze chrome plated
ball, steel tee handle reinforced teflon seats and seals, 2-1/2" extended
stem (for insulated pipe only), balanced stops, 400 psi working pressure.
a. Soldered ends -Apollo 70-200 series or approved equal.
b. Threaded ends -Apollo 70-100 series or approved equal.
30. INDIRECT WASTE SYSTEM
A. General
1. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install complete alterations and
additions to the existing indirect waste drainage system (indirect waste
and vent piping) from the following equipment connections and drains as
specified herein, back to drip sinks located in indirect waste pit, in
accordance with Stop & shop "Refrigeration Sleeve Plan" (R-1), Stop &
k Shop Refrigeration and Systems Plan" (R-3), Stop & Shop "Standard
Refrigeration and Plumbing Detail Drawings for Chest and Cases" (R-1)
and Plumbing Construction Drawings.
PLUMBING - 15400-21
44. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a cold water supply out to
mister system panel atop refrigerated single deck produce case including
ball valve shut off with pressure reducing valve and pressure type
vacuum breaker.
45. All water piping below slab to all fixtures, refrigerated cases and
equipment specified herein shall be insulated and run with unbroken
lengths.
46. The Plumbing Contractor shall mount all faucets securely to the work sink
backsplashes with 90 degree flanged sink ells.
47. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide spring loaded check valves in lieu
of swing type check valves when installed in-line on vertical piping, as
specified herein.
48. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 1/2" cold water supply to each
eye wash station located in Receiving Docks, Grocery Storage and
Janitor's Rooms areas.
49. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a ball valve with a latch lock type
handle on the cold water supply serving each eye wash station specified
herein.
50. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide 3/8" flexible chrome supplies for all
handsinks extending from each double pedal foot valve to each goose
neck spout. No copper pipe or tubing sprayed chrome or silver shall be
used in lieu thereof.
51. The Plumbing Contractor shall utilize only lead free solder and flux when
sweating copper water piping specified herein.
52. The Plumbing Contractor shall rough a 1/2" cold water supply located
within the beverage counter 1'-6" above the finished floor, 1'-9" in from
the edge of the partition wall from the Bakery Workroom side with three ,
(3) 1/2" ball valves spaced 6" apart, rolled up vertically against the
partition side of the cabinet,
terminated with 1/2" copper x 3/8" female adapters to accept beverage
counter equipment connections.
53. Flush valves for all water closets and urinals specified herein shall be
roughed with the cold water supply situated to the right-hand side of said
fixture (with flush valve lever to the left) in accordance with proper
mounting heights, unless specified otherwise herein.
54. The Plumbing Contractor shall give special attention to see that flush
valves serving handicapped water closets specified herein are installed
with the flush valve lever extending toward the wide side of the stall.
55. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 1/2" cold water supply and ball
valve with final connections to the vacuum bottle return system.
56. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide a cold water supply to the Dunkin
Donuts ice machine and Beverage counter.
57. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all electronic control
modules associated with automatic flush valves and faucets serving
plumbing fixtures specified herein.
58. The Plumbing Contractor shall adjust all electronic infrared sensors
associated with automatic flush valves and faucets serving plumbing
fixtures specified herein.
59. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install batteries for all
automatic/electronic flush valves and faucets serving plumbing fixtures
specified herein.
60. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install mixing valves for all
plumbing fixtures with automatic/electronic faucets specified herein.
PLUMBING - 15400-20
26. All lavatories, handsinks, and worksinks shall be furnished and installed
with aerator flow rates as required by State Building Code, Plumbing
Code, Local Regulations and/or Authorities.
27. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install hot (120 degrees F) water
supply to hose reels (supplied by Stop & Shop) located at ceiling in the
Bakery, Dairy Chest and Meat Cutting Room with ball valves and
backflow preventers.
28. The Plumbing Contractor shall install a ceiling mounted hose reel
(supplied by Stop & Shop) in the Meat Room adjacent to the door (on the
hinged side) leading directly into the Sales Area.
29. The Plumbing Contractor shall install a ceiling mounted hose reel
(supplied by Stop & Shop) located immediately inside the Dairy chest
adjacent to the door toward the chest wall on the Sales Area side.
30. The Plumbing Contractor shall install a hose reel (supplied by Stop &
Shop) concealed above the Bakery ceiling with the roller guides mounted
flush with the ceiling tile directly above the Bakery managers desk located
so as the hose, when retracted, cannot be seen from the Sales Area.
31. All hot water hose bibbs specified herein shall be supplied with 120
degrees F water only.
32. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a hot water supply (120
degrees F)with ball valve to dishwasher in Bakery area.
33. All pipe joints shall be made above slab, only unbroken lengths of water
piping shall be run below slab.
34. Water mains running parallel with rear mezzanine shall be run through
perpendicular roof joists and near rear mezzanine above Sales Area
ceiling.
35. The Plumbing Contractor shall give special attention to the roughing of all
hose bibbs allowing for a hose bibb cast with a female connection
resulting in the bibb flange mounting tight to the finished wall.
36. Provide shock absorbers on hot water supply (120 degrees F) to Bakery
dishwasher. Shock absorber shall be located V-0" above finish ceiling
directly above dishwasher.
37. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide pressure type vacuum breakers on
all hose reels specified herein as required by State Codes, Local Codes
and Authorities.
38. Plumbing Contractor shall refer to Stop & Shop "Self Service Beverage
Counter" plan for details of cold water piping layout and drains required
for beverage counter equipment specified herein. Equipment vendor
shall make all hole penetrations through counter top and final connections
(water, drains, process piping) to and from all beverage counter
equipment specified herein.
39. Pressure reducing valves shall be installed and/or furnished (as specified
herein) on hot water supplies to Bakery dishwasher.
40. All lavatory supplies shall be Brass Craft, Model #SCS-400A, brass
construction with polished chrome finish, copper sweat inlet 5" extension
tube, loose key angle valve with 3/8" o.d. x 12" riser and bell escutcheon.
41. Flow controls shall be provided where required by State Codes, Local
Codes, and Local Authorities.
42. All lavatories shall be provided with aerators with flow rates in accordance
with State Codes, Local Codes and Local Authorities.
43, Plumbing Contractor shall provide pressure gauges down stream of all
pressure reducing valves.
PLUMBING - 15400-19
11. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide one (1) pair hose bibbs (hot and
cold water) with vacuum breakers roughed in wall below the drain board
of each work sink in the following areas: Bakery and Deli. All hose bibbs
shall be mounted 7" apart, on center below drainboard and 16" above
finished floor.
12. Plumbing Contractor shall install cold water hose bibb on wall in Florist
Area as shown on Stop & Shop "Fixture Plan" (F-1) and Plumbing
Construction Drawings, (1'-0") above finished floor, Stop & Shop shall
provide Plumbing Contractor with a quick disconnect fitting in place of a
hose bibb connection.
13. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install pressure reducing valves for
all equipment specified herein, requiring operation pressures below
building pressure.
14. Water supply piping serving the Deli, Bazaar, Florist Areas, etc., shall be
racked on the wall above Deli Chest, Cheese Chest, and Florist chest
running approximately 13'-0" above finished floor.
15. All piping shall be concealed in chases, partitions and above ceiling
where possible.
16. Horizontal or vertical runs of piping shall not be allowed to pass over
and/or through Electric, telephone, Elevator, Machinery or Equipment
rooms.
17. Ball valves shall be substituted in lieu of gate and globe valves where
State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations allow unless specified
otherwise herein.
18. Where possible water mains shall be routed around Compressor and
Electrical Room Areas.
19. No water piping shall be run in outside walls where subject to freezing •.,
conditions. Plumbing Contractor shall refer to Plumbing Construction
Drawings, Architect Drawings and Stop & Shop "Fixture Plan" (F-1) and
notify Engineer should and additional chase or pipe space be required.
20. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) set of bronze angle
stop valves (Nibco Fig. No. 777) on hot and cold water supplies roughed
in wall, centered below compartments, for all work sinks specified herein.
21. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a wall-mounted hose reel
with exposed ball valve shutoff and cold water supply at each compactor
location approximately 7'-0" above finished floor (bottom of hose reel
mounting plate equal in elevation to top of compactor door frames and,
where possible, mounted to opposite side of door swing.
22. All plumbing fixtures along exterior walls shall be provided with pipe
chases to protect water supplies from freezing.
23. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install backflow preventers and
vacuum breakers where required by State Plumbing Code and Local
Regulations at his own expense, unless specified otherwise herein.
24. Plumbing Contractor shall provide a hot water supply out to and running
atop the refrigerated frozen food case line in Sales Area with three (3)
sets of hot water hose bibbs and vacuum breakers located opposite each
other at the mid point and each end of the frozen food case line.
25. Hot water hose bibbs located atop the refrigerated frozen foods and
produce case lines shall be recessed 18"-20" back from the front edge of
the refrigerated case and rotated 90 degrees about its axis so as to
maintain a low profile and be inconspicuous from the aisle below. ,..
PLUMBING - 15400-18
29. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
A. General
1. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install complete alterations and
additions to the existing hot and cold water system (supply and
recirculating), including all roughing and final connections to all new
plumbing fixtures, accessories, specialties, components and equipment in
accordance with Plumbing Construction Drawings and as specified
herein.
2. Provide a stop valve on each water supply directly under and/or in the
same room as each plumbing fixture, specialty and/or accessory unless
specified otherwise herein.
3. All hot and cold water branch supplies shall have ball valves installed on
each branch line off main where possible. Ball valves shall be located 1'-
0" above fixture or fixture group, specialties, components and/or
equipment unless specified otherwise herein.
4. Install piping in a neat manner with lines straight and parallel or at right
angles to walls or column lines and with risers plumb, run piping so as to
avoid passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets,
and/or interfering with other lines. All work shall be accomplished using
the best methods and procedures of recognized pipe fabrication in a good
and workmanlike manner in accordance with the State Plumbing Code
and Local Regulations.
5. All water piping located in the building shall be pitched sufficiently so that
it will drain and shall have drain cocks at low points for complete drainage
of system.
6. Allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe branch
connections taken from mains. Risers shall be made with swing joints
and offsets to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Straight
horizontal runs of pipe over 50 ft. in length shall be provided with
expansion loops. Expansion fittings shall not be provided in lieu thereof.
7. Provide shock absorbers on all hot and cold water branch lines serving
any individual fixture, fixture group and miscellaneous equipment
specified herein sized and installed in accordance with Plumbing and
Drainage Institute Standard "PDI-WH201" and manufacturers
recommendations. Where possible shock absorbers shall be located 1'-
0" above finished ceiling directly above fixture, fixture group, specialties,
components and/or equipment unless specified otherwise herein.
8. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide one (1) cold water hose bibb with
vacuum breaker below the lavatory fixture located in the Pharmacy Toilet
mounted 12" above finished floor for wash down purposes.
9. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide one (1) pair of hose bibbs (hot and
cold water) with vacuum breakers, located directly below the hand sink
compartment of the Bazaar Hand Sink/Refrigerated Island Cheese case.
The hose bibbs shall be mounted 7" apart and 1'-4" above the finished
floor and positioned so as to be accessible and not obstructed by the
waste and water supply piping below the sink compartments.
10. All wall mounted hose bibbs specified herein shall be roughed in walls
with 90-degree drop elbows, C x F, Nibco #707-3-5 fitting and secured to
a 2" x 6" wood blocking so as to accommodate a threaded pipe nipple
necessary for joining to the hose bibb with female threads and flanged
body tightly against the wall.
PLUMBING - 15400-17
55. All grease traps specified herein shall be vented immediately
downstream of each trap, no vents shall be permitted upstream
located between the grease trap and the fixture(s) served. ,
56. All work sinks shall be provided with air gaps on waste piping with 2" x
4" increaser fittings directly below each twist lever outlet of each work
sink compartment where required by State Codes, local codes and/or
authorities having jurisdiction in lieu of direct connections to the
grease waste system as specified herein.
B. Materials
(All materials shall be selected in accordance with State Plumbing Code and
Local Regulations).
1. Sanitary, Waste and Vent (Cast Iron Soil Pipe)
a. Pipe (Above Slab): Cast iron soil pipe, service weight (Minimum
Pipe size-2"); (Below Slab): Cast iron soil pipe, service weight;
minimum pipe size 3" for sanitary and waste, and 2 forwent.
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Cast iron, service weight, hub and spigot
or hubless. (Below Slab): Cast iron, service weight, hub and
spigot.
C. Coating - (Above & Below Slab): Pipe and fittings shall have two
(2) coats of tar or asphaltum.
2. Sanitary, Waste & Vent (copper tube)
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): Type "L" copper tubing (maximum pipe size
2").
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Wrought Copper and Cast Brass drainage
fittings, sweat.
3. Sanitary, Waste &Vent (Steel Pipe) "
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): Galvanized steel, standard weight, screwed
(minimum pipe size 1-1/2")
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Galvanized steel, screwed
4. Sanitary & Waste (Brass Pipe)
a. Pipe - (Above Slab): I.P.S. Brass, screwed (minimum pipe size 1-
1/4").
b. Fittings - (Above Slab): Recessed pattern brass, screwed.
C. Joints
1. (Cast Iron soil pipe shall be joined by the following methods and materials
in accordance with State Plumbing Code and Local Regulations)
a. Hub & Spigot Pipe - (Below Slab): New block lead poured over
oakum gasket.
b. Hub & Spigot Pipe - (Above & Below Slab): Resilient compression
gasket.
C. Hubless Pipe - (above Slab): Approved elastomeric sealing
sleeve and stainless steel clamp, clamp screw and housing.
d. Screwed Joints - (Above Slab): Approved joint compound applied
to male threads only.
e. Soldered Joints - (Above Slab): Shall be made with 95/5 solder
(95% tin, 5% antimony)
D. Valves
1. Backwater Valves - (6" max pipe size) - Cast iron body, bronze swing
type check, bolted cover.
a. Hub and Spigot Ends - Josam #67400
PLUMBING - 15400-16
38. Floor cleanouts shall be provided on inlet side of all grease
interceptors.
39. All plumbing fixtures, drains, equipment, etc. shall be drained and
vented so as to be in agreement with State Codes, Local Codes,
Regulations and authorities. Should there be any discrepancies, the
more stringent requirements shall govern.
40. All lavatory and hand sink "P" traps shall be Sanitary-Dash model
#R827-6BD, 1-1/2" x 1-1/4," 17 gauge, polished chrome, tubular
brass, swivel sink trap with cleanout, captive swivel brass nut, 6"
sweat extension, cast brass nuts, and deep escutcheon of Sanitary-
Dash Model #810-613D, 1-1/2" x 1-1/4" polished chrome, cast brass,
"New York Regulation" trap with cleanout, 6" sweat extension, cast
brass nuts, and deep escutcheon or approved equal.
41. Plumbing contractor shall not provide floor access covers in lieu of
floor cleanouts specified herein.
42. Plumbing Contractor shall provide push in stainless steel hole covers
in lieu of center adapter plate regularly supplied with stainless steel
hand sinks specified herein.
43. Plumbing Contractors shall provide concrete pads below all grease
interceptors specified herein.
44. Plumbing Contractor shall provide clear silicone sealant bead around
all plumbing fixtures specified herein, in contact with finished wall
and/or floor surfaces.
45. All floor drains, trench drains and floor sinks shall be provided with
sediment baskets.
46. All floor drains and floor sinks shall be provided with polished bronze
frames and grates unless specified otherwise herein.
47. Plumbing Contractor shall seal all penetrations through mezzanines
and raised floors in association with work under this Section.
48. Plumbing Contractor shall fasten all stainless steel work sink and
hand sink back splashes and/or arms securely to finished wall with 1"
stainless steel phillips head screws.
49. The Plumbing Contractor shall adjust all grease traps with integral
cleanouts flush with the finished floor elevation prior to slab pour.
50. Floor outlet water closets specified herein shall be sealed to the floor
with a white silicone caulking above the base of the fixture.
51. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide air gaps on waste piping with
2" x 4" increaser fittings directly below each twist lever drain outlet of
the three-compartment produce work sink compartment.
52. The Plumbing Contractor shall give special attention to the installation
of all Bakery floor drains, trench drains, floor sinks, floor cleanouts
and grease traps (including their integral cleanouts) to insure they are
set flush with the finished floor within the Bakery Area.
53. The Plumbing Contractor shall open, inspect and clean out all grease
interceptors removing all packing slips, shipping slips, instructions
and/or flow controls, etc. prior to installation. Upon final installation,
the Plumbing Contractor shall then reopen and inspect each grease
interceptor and reset all interior baffles and/or components, etc.
dislodged during installation as required.
54. All floor drains, trench drains, floor sinks, etc. shall be provided with
resilient gaskets and/or caulked with lead and oakum prior to slab
pours. No drains shall be installed ungasketed and/or uncaulked
during slab pours.
PLUMBING - 15400-15
14. All exposed copper waste and supply piping below work sinks shall be
cleaned and spray painted with a metallic sliver paint finish.
15. All fixture mounting heights shall be in conformance with State Codes,
Local Regulations and Authorities governing such work.
16. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install fixture carriers to suit
building conditions and/or as specified herein.
17. Furnish and install floors drains (Sanitary, Grease and Indirect Waste)
as located per Stop & Shop "Fixture Plan" (F-1), Architectural and
Plumbing Construction Drawings, and as specified herein.
18. All floor drains shall be set at elevations designated on Stop & Shop
"Fixture Plan" (F-1).
19. All floor drains shall be furnished with a cast iron body 3" pipe size
outlet, nickel bronze (Nikoloy) top, and sediment bucket unless
otherwise specified herein.
20. Floor drain located in Floral Preservative Dispensing Panel Location
shall be provided with a 1/2" tapping in body for use with trap seal
primer seal.
21. All exposed "P"traps shall be provided with a clean out plug.
22. Furnish and install grease interceptor with 2" flow control for work sink
in Bakery and Deli Areas, as specified herein.
23. All grease interceptors shall be installed flush with finished floor,
located in front of work sink drainboard to allow for greater
accessibility and maintenance.
24. All Grease traps shall be furnished with extended rims.
25. Cover plates shall be provided for grease interceptors with handles.
26. All work sink waste and "P" traps shall be collected directly below sink
compartments (not under or behind sink drain board). ,
27. All exposed waste from work sink outlets shall be 2" copper pipe as
specified herein.
28. Roughing cuts for all work sinks shall be supplied to Plumbing
Contractor by Stop & Shop prior to underground work performed
under this section.
29. All lavatories and hand sinks shall have waste and traps installed
perpendicular to back of fixture and on center with fixture outlet.
30. All vents shall be concealed in walls, partitions, chases, above
ceilings, etc. throughout entire store including storage areas (both
finished and unfinished areas).
31. All floor drains shall be set to proper elevation, caulked and secured in
place with concrete around drain body prior to pour.
32. All floor cleanouts shall be installed as specified herein for floor drains
although floor cleanouts with adjustable housing may be sleeved prior
to pour thus adjusted and grouted thereafter.
33. Plumbing Contractor shall note work sink compartment number and
drain board side indicated on Stop & Shop "Fixture plan" (F-1) and
modify roughing cuts supplied to Stop & Shop and Plumbing
Construction Drawings to suit.
34. All floor drains with adjustable strainer may be sleeved prior to pour
thus adjusted and grouted thereafter.
35. All rectangular floor drains shall be orientated opposite that of the total
area for which they serve, with hinged side located typically
throughout building.
36. Sanitary System shall be vented as required by Local Plumbing
Inspector.
37. All vents shall pitch toward the drain they serve.
PLUMBING - 15400-14
of the systems specified herein and all apparatus pertaining thereto including
furnishing maintenance manuals on all associated equipment.
28. SANITARY AND GREASE WASTE SYSTEMS
A. General
1. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install complete alterations
and additions to the existing sanitary drainage system (Sanitary
waste, Grease waste and vent piping) from and including all new
plumbing fixtures, drains, equipment and accessories in accordance
with Plumbing Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
2. The building sanitary and grease waste systems shall be installed in a
neat manner with lines straight and parallel or at right angles to walls
or column lines, with risers plumb and run piping so as not to interfere
with other lines.
3. All piping shall be run concealed where possible.
4. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be factory coated, standard weight,
American manufactured and free from defects.
5. All piping within building, sized 4" and larger, shall pitch 1/8 of an inch
per foot minimum unless otherwise noted.
6. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all plumbing fixtures,
floor drains, accessories, specialties and components as located per
Stop & Shop "Fixture Plan" (F-1), Architectural and Plumbing
Construction Drawings, and as specified herein.
7. All exposed piping and trim to plumbing fixtures in finished areas shall
be polished chrome plated over brass construction (faucets drains,
supplies, fittings, valves, traps, escutcheons and any other metal
parts) unless specified otherwise herein.
8. Exact location of all plumbing fixtures, floor drains and trench drains
shall be scaled off the Stop & Shop Fixture Plan (F-1), unless
otherwise noted on the Stop & Shop Refrigeration Sleeve Plan (R-1),
the architectural drawings, and/or specified herein. The Plumbing
Contractor shall not scale said fixtures and drains off the plumbing
construction drawings as they are diagrammatic.
9. All connections to plumbing fixtures, floor drains, trench drains, floor
sinks, grease interceptors, etc. shall be sized as specified herein and
indicated on drawing schedules.
10. All stainless steel compartment work sink and hand sinks (supplied by
Stop & Shop) as specified herein shall be uncrated, assembled, and
set into place by the Plumbing Contractor.
11. All stainless steel compartment work sinks specified herein shall be
secured by the Plumbing Contractor to the finished wall along the top
edge of the work sink backsplash with #10 or #12, 1-1/2" Phillips
flathead stainless steel wood screws and #10 or #12 stainless steel
finish washers spaced 12" apart.
12. The Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate the exact heights, lengths
and location of 2" x 6" wood blocking to be furnished and installed by
the Carpentry Contractor necessary to properly fasten all worksinks,
handsinks, electric water coolers and eye wash stations specified
herein securely to the wall.
AOW 13. Fixture carriers shall be provided for all vitreous china water closet,
urinals, lavatories, and hand sinks specified herein.
PLUMBING - 15400-13
prior to signing of the Contract. If such action is not taken, the various Trades
shall furnish such items as part of their work for complete and operable systems
and equipment, as determined by the Architect.
H. Where contract documents are in conflict and where sizes of the same item run
are shown to be different between plans, specifications and sections or details,
the most stringent requirement will be included in the Contract. Systems and
equipment called for in the specification and/or shown on the drawings shall be
provided under the Contract of each trade as if it was required by both the
drawings and specifications. However, prior to ordering or installation of any
portion of work which appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought to the
Architect's attention for direction as to what is to be provided.
26. SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall submit to Stop & Shop for approval, before
placing orders for material, six (6) complete bound sets of equipment submittals
listing corresponding mark and pertinent data, highlighted and checked for the
following fixtures and equipment included under this Section denoting name of
manufacturer, Model #, composition, finish, grade, size, capacity, etc:
1. Plumbing Fixtures, Carriers and Trim.
2. Floor Drains, Floor Sinks and Roof Drains.
3. Grease Interceptors and Flow Controls.
4. Floor and Wall Cleanouts.
5. Hose Bibbs and Hose Reels.
6. Shock Absorbers and Trap Primer Valves.
7. Backflow Preventers, Vacuum Breakers and Air Gap Fittings.
8. Water Filters (as required).
9. All Ball Valves, Gas Valves, Check Valves, etc. specified herein.
10. All pipe and fittings specified herein (sanitary, grease waste, indirect
waste, hot and cold water, filtered water, nutrient feed/non-potable water
and gas.
11. All hangers, rods, clamps and/or pipe insulation shields specified herein
(sanitary, grease waste, indirect waste, hot and cold water, filtered water,
nutrient feed/non-potable water and gas.
12. Seismic restraints (as required).
13. All pipe insulation, PVC covers, tape, metal and/or rewettable cloth
coverings, mastic coatings (hot water, cold water, filtered water (above
and below slab).
14. Pressure reducing valves.
15. Escutcheons.
16. Flexible gas connections and restraining cables.
B. Upon completion of the work of this Section, and as a condition of its acceptance,
deliver to the Architect three copies of operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Upon completion of water line sterilization, deliver to the Architect two copies of
an acceptable "Certificate of Performance" for that activity.
27. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the completion of the work, the Plumbing Contractor shall instruct such
person or persons as the Owner may designate regarding the care and use
PLUMBING - 15400-12
and he shall not encumber the premises with his materials. The Plumbing
Contractor will be held responsible for repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from
any unauthorized use of the premises by him.
B. Not withstanding any approvals or instructions which must be obtained by the
Plumbing Contractor from the Architect in connection with use of premises, the
responsibility for the safe working conditions at the site shall remain that of the
Contractor. The Engineer, Architect or Owner shall not be deemed to have any
responsibility or liability in connection therewith.
C. All building security and directives shall apply as set forth by the Owner.
25. COORDINATION OF WORK
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall compare his drawings and specifications with
those of other trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect
and General Contractor and obtain from the Architect written instructions to make
the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shall be installed in
cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, all
Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interference in a manner approved
by the Architect. All changes required in the Plumbing and/or work of other
Trades caused by the Plumbing Contractor's neglect, shall be made at his
expense, to the Architect's and/or Engineer's satisfaction.
B. Locations of piping and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work
with interference anticipated and encountered. The Plumbing Contractor shall
determine the exact routing and location of his systems prior to fabrication or
installation.
C. Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For -
example, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose
elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose
elevations can be changed.
D. Offsets and changes of direction in all piping systems shall be made as required
to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated
on the drawings. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide elbows, boxes, etc., as
required for his work to allow offsets and changes to suit job conditions.
E. All work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to other
parts) of all other system components provided under this Contract requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance. All piping shall be arranged in a manner
to clear the openings of swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling tiles.
F. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs
and locations of piping and equipment, and not necessarily showing all required
offsets, details and accessories and equipment to be connected. All work shall
be accurately laid out with other Trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat
and workmanlike installation which will afford maximum accessibility for
operation, maintenance and headroom.
G. Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Trade provides items
such as starters, controls, etc., such conflicts shall be reported to the Architect
PLUMBING - 15400-11
B. Wherever the terms "shown on drawings" are used in the specifications, they
shall mean "noted," "indicated," "scheduled," "detailed" or any other
diagrammatic or written reference made on the drawings.
C. Wherever the term "provide" is used in the specifications it shall mean "furnish"
and "install," "connect," "apply," "erect," "construct" or similar terms, unless
otherwise indicated in the specifications.
D. Wherever the term "material" is used in the specifications it will mean any
"product," "equipment," "device," "assembly" or "item" required under the
Contract, as indicated by trade or brand name, manufacturer's name, standard
specification reference or other description.
E. The terms "approved" or "approval" shall mean the written approval of the
Architect and Engineer.
F. The terms "specification" shall mean all information contained in the bound or
unbound volume, including all "Contract Documents" defined therein.
G. The terms "directed," "required," "permitted," "ordered," "designated,"
"prescribed" and similar words shall mean the direction, requirement, permission,
order, designation, or prescription of the Engineer; the terms "approved,"
"acceptable," "satisfactory" and similar words shall mean approved by,
acceptable or satisfactory to the Engineer; and, the terms "necessary,"
of responsible, "proper," correct, and similar words shall mean necessary,
reasonable, proper or correct in the judgment of the Engineer.
H. "Piping" includes, in addition to pipes, all fittings, hangers and other accessories
relative to such piping.
I. "Concealed" means hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung
ceilings, embedded in construction or in crawl spaces.
J. "Exposed" means not installed underground or concealed as defined above.
K. "General Contractor" and "The Contractor" shall refer to the Contractor
responsible for all work of this project, as defined under Supplementary
Conditions.
L. "Plumbing Contractor" shall refer to the Contractor responsible for furnishing and
installation of all work indicated on the Plumbing Contract Drawings and the
Plumbing Specifications.
M. The Plumbing Contractor shall be a "Subcontractor" as designated by the
General Conditions.
N. Reference to "his" is not intended to mean gender but in fact refers to the
contractor in this section or specific referenced sections.
24. USE OF PREMISES
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall confine all apparatus, storage of materials and
construction to the limits indicated on the drawings and directed by the Architect
PLUMBING - 15400-10
Each section shall be clearly divided from the other sections. A sub index for
each section shall also be provided.
D. The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by the Architect and
include but not limited to the following:
1. Introduction:
a. Explanation of Manual and its use.
b. Summary description of Plumbing Systems.
C. Purpose of systems.
2. System:
a. Detailed description of all systems.
b. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other
exhibits.
3. Operations:
a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all
phases of operation for all portions of the systems, including start
up, shutdown and balancing. Include all posted instruction charts.
4. Maintenance:
a. Parts list and part numbers.
b. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's
recommendations for preventive maintenance.
C. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components.
d. Instructions for testing each type of part.
e. Recommended list of on-hand spare parts.
f. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire systems.
g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes.
5. Manufacturer's Literature:
a. Complete listing for all parts.
b. Names, addresses and telephone numbers.
C. Care and operation.
d. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins,
technical data, certified performance charts and other literature
with the model actually furnished to be clearly and conspicuously
identified.
e. Internal wiring diagrams and engineering data sheets for all items
and/or equipment furnished under each Contract.
f. Guarantee and warranty data.
22. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide all piping connections to equipment
provided under other sections of the Specifications including final connections to
equipment to result in complete, fully operational systems. Coordinate
installation diagrams and methods of installation of all equipment, from
manufacturers. Follow instructions strictly. If additional information is required,
obtain same from the appropriate Authorities.
23. DEFINITIONS
A. Words in the singular shall also mean and include the plural, wherever the
context so indicates, and words in the plural shall mean the singular, wherever
the context so indicates.
PLUMBING - 15400-9
H. The following color-coding shall be used with names in black letters on
background as specified herein:
Service Legend Background Color
Cold Water Cold Water Green
Hot Water Hot Water Yellow
Hot Water Return Hot Water Return Yellow
Gas Gas Yellow
Sanitary Sanitary Drain Green
Vent Vent Yellow
Storm Storm Drain Green
I. Upon completion of work, attach stamped, brass, black filled tags to all valves.
Tags shall be 19 gauge, 1-1/2" diameter with numerals at least 1/2" high and
attached by "S" hooks or chains.
J. A framed "Valve Chart" shall accompany such work and be mounted in Boiler or
Mechanical Room.
20. NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identification shall be securely attached
to all new plumbing equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives, stick on labels
or cements will not be permitted. The Plumbing Contractor shall not attach their
name and address labels on any equipment or structure at this project.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide for his work all charts, including
Contractor's name and telephone numbers; date of chart; name and telephone
number of Architectural firm.
21. PARTS LIST AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. The Plumbing Contractor, for the work under his Contract, shall thoroughly
instruct the Representative of the Owner, to the complete satisfaction of the
Architect and Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems and equipment
provided by him. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all arrangements, via the
Architect, as to whom the instructions are to be given in the operation of the
basic and auxiliary systems and the period of time in which they are to be given.
The Architect shall be completely satisfied that the Representative of the Owner
has been thoroughly and completely instructed in the proper operation of all
systems and equipment before final payment is made.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval three typed
sets, bound neatly in loose-leaf binders, of all instructions for the installation,
operation, care and maintenance of all equipment and systems, including
instructions for the ordering and stocking of spare parts for all equipment
installed under this contract. The list shall include part number and suggested
suppliers. Each set shall also include an itemized list of component parts that
should be kept on hand and where such parts can be purchased.
C. Information shall indicate possible problems with equipment and suggested
corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for each type of equipment.
PLUMBING - 15400-8
18. MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL
POW A. Except where specifically indicated for the General Contractor to provide
supports, The Plumbing Contractor shall provide all steel supports and hangers
as shown on the drawings or required to support all equipment or materials
provided under his contract. All secondary and any additional supports required
for any equipment to be installed, shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. All work shall be cut, assembled, welded and finished by skilled mechanics.
Welds shall be ground smooth. Stands, brackets and framework shall be
properly sized and strongly constructed.
C. Measurements shall be taken on the job and worked out to suit adjoining and
connecting work. All work shall be done by experienced metal-working
mechanics. Members shall be straight and true and accurately fitted.
D. Welded joints shall be ground smooth where exposed. Drilling, cutting and
fittings shall be done as required to properly install the work and accommodate
the work of other trades as directed by them.
E. Members shall be generally welded except that bolting may be used for field
assembly where welding would be impractical. Welders shall be skilled certified
and licensed.
F. All shop fabricated iron and steel work shall be cleaned and dried and given two
(2) coats of weatherproof primer paint on all surfaces and in all openings and
crevices.
19. IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS
A. All new equipment used in the Plumbing System shall have a permanently
attached nameplate identifying the manufacturer, service, size, serial number or
model number, etc. The nameplates shall be kept clean and readable at all
times.
B. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers on all new piping, furnish and
install as specified herein. Pipe markers shall be snap-on and laminated plastic
protected by clear acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall be applied to face of pipe
insulation after architectural painting, where such is required.
C. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow.
D. Mains shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from Boiler and Mechanical
Rooms, adjacent to each valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of
entrance an exit from building, at least once in each room, and at intervals no
longer than 20 feet both above finished ceilings and below where exposed.
E. In general 2" high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4" diameter and larger and
3/4" high legend shall be used for pipe lines 3" diameter and smaller.
F. Markers shall be "Setmark" by Seton Name Plate Corp. or approved equal.
G. Color banding shall meet ANSI A13.1-1981 and OSHA.
PLUMBING - 15400-7
information to allow for the final installation to conform to the drawings and
specifications.
13. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Equipment and materials shall be new and shall be delivered to the site and
stored in original sealed containers, where directed by the General Contractor,
suitably sheltered from the elements but readily accessible for review by the
Architect and/or Engineer until installed. All items subject to moisture damage
such as controls shall be stored in dry, heated spaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have his equipment tightly covered and protected
against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical injury and theft. At the
completion of the work, equipment and materials shall be cleaned, polished
thoroughly and turned over to the Owner in a condition satisfactory to the
Architect and/or Engineer. Damage or defects of work developing before
acceptance of the work shall be made good at the Plumbing Contractor's
expense.
C. Provide plywood covers on top of the drain grates secured with wire, in a safe
manner, to protect the finish of the floor drain.
14. DAMAGE OF OTHER WORK
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible and shall pay for all damages
caused by his work to the building structures, equipment, all work and finishes at
the expense of the responsible Plumbing Contractor to the Architect's '
satisfaction.
15. CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall promptly correct all work provided under this
Contract and rejected by the Architect or Engineer as defective or as failing to
conform to the Contract Documents whether or not fabricated, installed or
completed.
16. EXTRA WORK
A. No claim for extra work will be allowed unless it is authorized by the Architect in
writing before commencement of said extra work.
17. TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and systems
provided under this Contract from rust, splatters and other foreign matter of
discoloration, leaving every part of each system in an acceptable prime condition.
The Plumbing Contractor shall refinish and restore to the original condition all
equipment and piping which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime
and finish coats of paint and/or enamel.
B. All exposed copper piping below work sinks shall be cleaned, primed and spray olow.,
painted with a metallic silver finish.
PLUMBING - 15400-6
will be provided by the General Contractor using dimensions, templates, bolts,
anchors, as shown on the drawings or as required and as furnished by the
OOW Contractor installing the equipment.
9. FIREPROOFING
A. It shall be the General Contractor's responsibility to fire proof all openings in
slabs and or in firewalls provided for the passage of this equipment except as
noted on the drawings.
B. Fireproofing shall be done by the use of Dow Corning 3-654-8 R.T.V. silicone
foam installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain
a rating equal to that of the component penetrated.
10. PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
A. All materials shall be properly protected and all piping openings shall be
temporarily closed by the Plumbing Contractor to prevent obstruction and
damage. Post notice prohibiting the use of all systems provided under this
Contract, prior to completion of work and acceptance of all systems by the
Owner's representative. The Plumbing Contractor shall take precautions to
protect his materials from damage and theft.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards
for the prevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship,
materials, equipment or systems provided under his Contract.
C. Keep the job site free from all debris and rubbish. Remove all debris and rubbish
from the site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis.
11. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish his own cords and sockets, as may be
required for the work, and shall also pay for the cost of all temporary wiring of
construction offices and shanties used by them.
B. The Owner shall pay for the cost of all energy consumed by all trades. Any
temporary wiring of a special nature for light and power required other than
mentioned above shall be paid for by the Contractor using same.
C. All extension cords shall be GFCI protected or shall be fed from GFCI circuit
breakers.
12. GIVING INFORMATION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the shape, size
and position of all openings required for his apparatus and shall give information
to all other Contractors sufficiently in advance of the work so that all openings
may be built in advance.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements to
ascertain space requirements, for equipment and connections to be provided
under this Contract and shall furnish such sizes and shapes of equipment and
PLUMBING - 15400-5
6. RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The General Contractor will provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white
drawings to maintain and submit record as-built drawings, one set of which shall
be maintained at the site and which shall, at all times shall be accurate, clear,
and complete, showing the actual location of all equipment and piping as
installed. The Record Drawings shall show actual locations of all the plumbing
lines. Systems marked in colored pencil "As Installed". The "As-Built" drawings
shall show all the Plumbing work installed complete to the present stage of
progress. These drawings shall be available to the Arch itect/Engineer's field
representative at all times.
B. At the completion of the Contract, transfer onto the Second set and a sepia
drawing all changes marked in colored pencil and submit to the Architect. These
drawings shall be field verified by the Engineer. The "As-Built" drawings and the
original Contract Documents shall be used to make the final punch list of the
work completed under the Contract.
C. Upon Contractor's completion of the Engineer's final punch list, transfer all "As-
Built" conditions and all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible mylar set
of drawings and submit for approval.
7. APPROVED EQUALS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Equality of Materials and Substitutions for additional
information. The Plumbing Section shall take precedence for interpretations.
B. It is the intent of these specifications to establish quality standards of installed
materials and equipment. Hence, specific items are identified by manufacturer,
trade name and catalog designation.
C. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to approval
by the Stop & Shop Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Plumbing
Contractor shall submit for inspection samples of both the specified and the
proposed substitute items.
D. The Engineer shall determine the manufacturers which are equal to those
specified. When three manufacturers are listed the Contractor shall utilize one of
those manufacturers listed. Stop & Shop reserves the right to request submittal
on any materials or equipment under this Section.
8. CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling for holes up to 6"
in diameter, as required for work under his Contract, but in no case shall the
Plumbing Contractor cut into any structural elements without the written approval
of the Architect.
B. All cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided by the General
Contractor.
C. All concrete and masonry equipment bases and pads, curbs, chases, pockets
and openings (except core drilling) required for the proper installation of the work
under this Contract
PLUMBING - 15400-4
E. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of any systems or
equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be
replaced by the Plumbing Contractor for his respective work, as applicable, at no
additional cost.
F. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish, before the final payment is made, a
written guarantee covering the above requirements.
5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Plumbing Construction Drawings and
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical plans for a full comprehension
of the extent of the detail of the work to be performed.
B. Work installed by the Plumbing Contractor which interferes with or modifies the
architectural design as shown on the contract drawing, shall be changed as
directed by the Engineer and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by
the Plumbing Contractor.
C. In any and all cases of discrepancy in figures, plans or specifications, the matter
shall be immediately submitted to the Plumbing Engineer for a decision.
D. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not allow for all offsets, fittings, valves,
etc., which may be required to complete the work. This Contractor shall study
the drawings denoting structural and finish design of the building to allow for the
proper installation of all fittings, valves, fixtures, trim, traps, carriers, etc.,
necessary to fully complete the plumbing work to give a fully operational, trouble-
free system.
E. Provide and install, as approved by the Engineer, all subparts for all main
equipment, such as: tempering valves, check valves, backflow preventers,
vacuum breakers, shock absorbers, trap primers, etc. A careful study of all plans
shall be made in order to determine all of the plumbing items required to make a
complete system. Not all items are shown or called for herein, but this will not
relieve this Contractor from supplying a complete system approved by the proper
authorities at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Where valves cannot be placed in an accessible area, approved covers and
frames shall be provided and built into the work. These are not indicated on the
drawing, but are required.
G. Stop & Shop will prepare a dimensioned "Refrigeration Sleeve Plan" (R-1)
denoting exact locations of condensate drains and other lines to equipment they
supply, which are to be installed and/or connected by the Plumbing Contractor.
H. Stop & Shop will prepare an Underground Refrigeration Plan" (R-2) denoting the
layout of refrigeration conduit (PVC Pipe, SDR 35) to be furnished by Plumbing
Contractor and installed by Refrigeration Contractor (see also Refrigeration
section).
I. Stop & Shop will prepare a "Standard Refrigeration and Plumbing Detail Drawing
for Chests and Cases" (R-4) denoting standard condensate drainage piping
schematics.
PLUMBING - 15400-3
D. Give all notices, file all plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvals from
authorities having jurisdiction for this Work. Include all fees in the Bid Price.
3. CODES, ORDINANCES AND AUTHORITIES
A. Perform all work in accordance with all rules, regulations, standards, codes,
ordinances or laws of local, state and federal governments having jurisdiction.
Such authorities shall include but not limited to the Following:
1. Local and State Building Codes.
2. Massachusetts Plumbing Code.
3. Massachusetts State Fuel Gas Code.
4. American Water Works Association (AWA)
5. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
7. Commercial Standards, Department of Commerce (CS).
8. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
10. NFPA, AGA, ASHRAE, ASME, CISPI, MSS, NEC, PDI, PFC, UL, FM,
USC
B. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and the Requirements of any
code or Authorities having jurisdiction, the most stringent requirements of the
aforementioned shall govern.
C. All work shall also conform to the latest editions of applicable Factory Mutual
Data Sheets.
4. GUARANTEE
A. Attention is directed to the provisions of the General Conditions regarding
guarantees and warranties for work under this Section.
B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under the
plumbing trade; however, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu
of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and the Plumbing Contractor may
have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. In any case, such
guarantees and warranties shall commence when the Owner accepts the
plumbing systems, as determined by the Engineer, and shall remain in effect for
a period of one year thereafter. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide free
supervision and adjustment for a period of one year, within four (4) hours after
notice, as per Stop & Shop criteria.
C. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Section
shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and
workmanship. Any fault under the Contract, due to defective or improper
material, equipment or workmanship which may develop shall be made good
forthwith, by and at the expense of the Plumbing Contractor for the work under
his Contract, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other
systems resulting from this failure.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems which "
are to be provided under his Contract, are of sufficient capacity to meet all
requirements specified herein or as indicated.
PLUMBING - 15400-2
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements affecting this Section. Include in and make part of this Section all
work related under other Sections and required on all Drawings and Documents.
B. Before submitting bid, visit the site and examine conditions under which the work
has to be performed. Report to the Owner any conditions which might adversely
affect the work to be performed.
C. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited
to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of
this Specifications. When a conflict occurs between Section 15400 and the
aforementioned sections, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. Coordinate work with all other trades affecting work of this Section. Cooperate
with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work of this Contract.
2. SCOPE
A. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and installation of the
following;
1. Alterations and additions to domestic hot water, hot water return and cold
water piping systems.
2. Alterations and additions to drain, grease waste and sanitary waste and
vent systems.
3. Alterations and additions to storm drainage system.
4. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
5. Shut off and stop valves.
6. Insulation.
7. Testing, flushing and disinfection of piping.
8. Hangers, supports, supplementary steel and seismic restraints.
9. Alterations and additions to condensate drain system.
10. Alterations and additions to indirect waste system.
11. Nutrient Feed System
12. Alterations and additions to gas distribution system.
B. The work under this Contract shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
transportation, insurance, temporary protection, supervision and incidental items
essential for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically
mentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper
installation and operation of all Plumbing Systems as indicated on the Drawings
and specified herein.
C. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must
be met by the Plumbing Contractor for the installation of all work as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
PLUMBING - 15400-1
48. DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS .......................................................................45
49. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS..............................................................................46
50. TESTS AND STERILIZATION.......................................................................................49
51. WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE .................50
52. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING.......................................................................................51
52. PHASING OF WORK.....................................................................................................52
PLUMBING - INDEX-2
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
INDEX
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................1
2. SCOPE............................................................................................................................1
3. CODES, ORDINANCES AND AUTHORITIES ................................................................2
4. GUARANTEE ..................................................................................................................2
5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.............................................................................................3
6. RECORD DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................4
7. APPROVED EQUALS .....................................................................................................4
8. CUTTING AND PATCHING.............................................................................................4
9. FIREPROOFING .............................................................................................................5
10. PROTECTION AND CLEANUP.......................................................................................5
11. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER ...............................................................................5
12. GIVING INFORMATION ..................................................................................................5
13. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS......................................................................................6
14. DAMAGE OF OTHER WORK..........................................................................................6
15. CORRECTION OF WORK...............................................................................................6
16. EXTRA WORK.................................................................................................................6
17. TOUCH-UP PAINTING....................................................................................................6
18. MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL ...........................................................................7
19. IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS.................................................................................7
20. NAMEPLATES.................................................................................................................8
21. PARTS LIST AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .............8
22. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT..................................................................................9
23. DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................9
24. USE OF PREMISES......................................................................................................10
25. COORDINATION OF WORK.........................................................................................11
26. SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS .................................................12
27. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS......................................................................................12
28. SANITARY AND GREASE WASTE SYSTEMS ............................................................13
29. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM ......................................................................................17
30. INDIRECT WASTE SYSTEM ........................................................................................21
31. STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM ......................................................................................25
32. HANGERS AND SUPPORT..........................................................................................28
33. CLEANOUTS.................................................................................................................31
34. ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS.................................................................................31
35. TRAPS...........................................................................................................................31
36. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS .........................................................................................32
37. INSULATION .................................................................................................................32
38. NUTRIENT FEED/NON-POTABLE WATER SYSTEM..................................................35
39. SLEEVES.......................................................................................................................37
40. GAS PIPING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................38
41. JOINTING COMPOUNDS .............................................................................................41
42. JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS......................................................................................41
43. OTHER MATERIALS.....................................................................................................41
44. UNIONS, FLANGES & DIELECTRIC FITTINGS...........................................................41
45. SEWAGE EJECTOR AND PIT......................................................................................42
46. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING.................................................................................44
47. INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL........................................44
PLUMBING - INDEX-1
mom a
E. Flow Test Date shall be plotted on N-1.85 graph paper and submitted with shop
drawings and hydraulic calculation for approval, review and/or comment.
F. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide a site plan (8-18/2" x 11") depicting flowed
and read hydrants including sized underground mains in addition to flow test data
specified herein.
G. The Sprinkler Contractor shall pay for al fees and/or permits, etc. required by the
Water Supplier associated with the water flow test.
32. SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide a small scale plan of
the building indicating zones, with locations of all control valves, low point drains,
and Inspector's test drains. Plans shall be neatly drawn and color coded to
indicate the portion of the building protected by each system, framed under glass
and permanently mounted on the wall adjacent to the header.
33. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Factory Mutual approved fire extinguishers shall be furnished and installed by
Stop & Shop Company in such a way as not to exceed limits of travel in
accordance with NFPA 10. Type "A," "B," or "C" extinguishers should be
provided as deemed necessary by the hazards introduced in accordance with
NFPA 10 and Stop & Shop Fire Extinguisher Plan (FE-1).
34. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Upon completion of the Fire Protection System the Contractor shall clean and
remove all oil and debris resulting from the Work, clean, polish and leave bright
all equipment and metal work intended to be exposed, clean out all piping
systems and equipment; and insure that all work is in perfect operating condition.
B. The Contractor shall adjust all equipment associated with the Work under this
section for proper operation at the completion of the Work.
35. PHASING
A. The existing facility will remain in operation while the majority of the work of this
contract is being performed. This Contractor shall coordinate all aspects of the
installations of all new systems so that they are complete and operational before
any previously existing system is removed and/or abandoned. Coordinate the
extent of work in each phase of the construction with all Stop & Shop
Representatives.
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-29
30. FLUSHING AND TESTING PIPE
A. Above Ground Piping:
1. All above ground piping shall be tested for a period of 2 hours, at a
hydrostatic pressure of 200psi in accordance with NFPA 13. All piping,
valves, sprinklers, etc. shall be watertight.
B. No sodium silicate or water additives shall be used during hydrostatic testing.
C. All above ground piping shall be flushed and tested prior to concealing any
section of pipe from view.
D. Flushing and testing of above ground piping shall be witnessed by the GC, Local
Authorities and Stop & Shop's Engineering Department Representative. Notice
shall be given at least 48 hours in advance of all tests.
E. Upon successful completion of flushing and testing of piping, the Contractor shall
complete and submit the corresponding Contractor's Material and Test
Certificates to FM with copies to the GC and Stop & Shop's Engineering
Department.
F. The Contractor shall write the GC, the Architect and Stop & Shop's Engineering
Department as soon as the sprinkler system is connected and operational.
31. FLOW TEST
A. The Contractor shall obtain new flow test data required for hydraulic design of the
sprinkler system for the LWS for the hydrant locations, closest to Stop & Shop,
found to be acceptable to both FM and LWS, having had water test conducted
within one (1) year prior to date of award of the Contract for the sprinkler work.
The Contractor shall include the cost of the test in his bid.
B. The Contractor shall record the following data:
1. Time and date of the test.
2. Persons performing the test.
3. Persons witnessing the test.
4. Amount of water flowed.
5. Static and residual pressures.
6. Pilot pressure.
7. Discharge coefficient.
8. Number of nozzles flowed.
9. Location of hydrant flowed and hydrant gauged.
10. Elevation pressure differential (hydrant/finish floor).
C. The Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate all flow tests with the LWS, FM, Stop &
Shop and Local Authorities, notifying each a minimum of two (2) weeks in
advance to allow for their representatives to witness the test. FM Middletown
District Office Telephone No. (781) 255-4231 and FM N.J. District Office (210)
822-2010.
D. All flow tests shall be based upon a maximum discharge coefficient of 0.8 when ""Ok,
calculating flows from open nozzleless hydrant butts in accordance with Factory
Mutual standards.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-28
C. The Contractor shall provide chrome sprinkler guards on all heads located in all
refrigerated chests and freezers.
28. ESCUTCHEONS
A. Brass, chrome plated securing type escutcheons shall be provided at all exposed
interior finished surfaces pierced by sleeves or pipes. They shall fit around pipe
snugly and shall extend against the finished wall, floor or ceiling surface and be
of sufficient outside diameter so that the sleeve is completely concealed.
B. Heavy duty galvanized steel securing type escutcheons shall be provided at all
exterior surfaces pierced by sleeves or pipes in lieu of chrome plated brass.
29. SIGNS
A. New identification signs shall be furnished and permanently installed at the base
of all risers indicating the following to account for the alterations and additions to
each risers and shall be specified to include the following information:
1. Zone
2. Location
3. Number of sprinklers
4. Basis of design
5. Density
6. Areas of coverage
7. System demand at base of riser (flow and pressure required for design
density).
B. All inspector's test locations shall be clearly marked with identification signs
permanently installed on the wall directly below the ceiling tile.
C. All main and auxiliary drains shall be clearly marked with identification signs
permanently installed at all drain valves.
D. All antifreeze system loop locations shall be clearly marked with identification
signs permanently installed on wall directly below ceiling the where applicable. In
addition, each sign shall stipulate with no exceptions, "Refill Antifreeze System
with Non-Toxic Antifreeze Solutions Only" as specified herein.
E. Identification signs shall be composed of a non-corrosive material.
F. Sprinkler Contractor shall furnish and permanently install an 8-1/2" x 11"
schematic drawing depicting building zones mounted and framed in plexiglass on
the sprinkler room wall adjacent to risers.
G. All control valves and zones valves shall be clearly marked with identification
signs permanently installed at all valves.
H. "Stick-on" labels or signs will not be acceptable in lieu of signs as specified
herein.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-27
Split ring escutcheons shall not be acceptable in lieu thereof.
E. All exterior refrigerated chests and freezers shall be provided with chrome plated
sidewall heads less escutcheon plates.
F. All dry pendant heads furnished and installed as specified herein for all chests
and freezers shall be provided with a dry stem section a minimum of 18" long.
G. The following sprinkler heads are approved by FM for"Ordinary Hazard Group 2"
buildings:
Central Grinnell/Gem Reliable Star
Recessed Heads
Chrome
(1/2"/165°F or Model H F916 G LD-2
212°F
Pendant Heads
Chrome
1/2"/212°F Model A F916 G LD-2
Upright Heads
Brass
(1/2"/212°F) F916
17/32"/286EF Model A Issue C G LD-2
Sidewall Heads
Chrome
1/2"/286°F Model H F916 G/HSW-1 H-LD-2
Dry Pendant
Heads
Chrome S170(DSI) S170(DSI) F3 FS170(SD1)
(1/2"/212-F)
26. SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Provide one (1) reserve sprinkler head cabinet per riser complete with special
wrench and spare heads inside sprinkler room on wall adjacent to risers. The
number and assortment of heads shall be in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 13. The number and type of spare sprinkler heads furnished with each
cabinet shall be indicated on the shop drawings and equipment submittals.
B. The Contractor shall provide two (2) spare dry pendant heads complete with
cabinet in addition to the number of heads and assortment required by NFPA 13.
27. SPRINKLER GUARDS
A. Provide guards on sprinkler heads located within 7'-0" of the finished floor and
wherever sprinkler may be subject to mechanical damage and where specified.
B. Sprinkler guards with a red finish shall be provided on sprinkler heads in all 1,.,0*1
Compressor and Mechanical areas, including trash compactor walkways and
chutes.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-26
C. Check Valves:
1. 2" and smaller: Bronze body, check, renewable disc, threaded ends, 200
psi working pressure, "Nibco model #KT-403-W".
2. 2-1/2" and larger: Iron body, swing check, renewable seat and disc,
flanged ends, 175 psi working pressure, "Nibco model #F-908-W".
D. All valves used in the Sprinkler System shall be provided in accordance with
NFPA 13, section 2-7 and shall be listed in the latest edition of the FM "Approved
Guide".
E. Butterfly valves shall not be allowed in the construction of the sprinkler systems
unless specified otherwise herein.
F. Ball valves, globe valves and butterfly valves shall not be permitted in lieu of
OS&Y valves on antifreeze loops and/or elevator shafts and machine rooms
specified herein.
23. FLUSHING CONNECTIONS
A. All sprinkler systems shall be arranged to allow for flushing as specified in NFPA
13.
B. All crossmains shall be provided with flushing connections consisting of
removable fittings as specified in NFPA 13.
C. All branch lines on grided systems shall be detachable at one end of each branch
"* line to facilitate flushing.
24. DRAINS
A. Provide auxiliary drains where necessary and extend to safe locations. Plugs
used for auxiliary drains shall be brass.
B. Pipe all drains and auxiliary drains so as not to discharge onto loading areas,
stairways, ramps, sidewalks where water drained could cause damage to planted
areas, stock, vehicles, equipment, etc. or inflict personal injury.
25. SPRINKLER HEADS
A. All sprinkler heads provided by the Contractor shall be automatic pendant,
upright or sidewall type with temperature rating as specified herein and approved
by FM. All sprinkler heads provided shall be fusible type. No bulb type shall be
allowed.
B. All areas with finished ceilings and/or soffits shall be provided with chrome plated
recessed type sprinkler heads with recessed, two piece, polished chrome
escutcheon plates.
C. All areas with exposed construction shall be provided with brass upright heads.
D. All interior refrigerated chests and freezers shall be provided with chrome plated
dry pendant heads with flush, one piece polished chrome escutcheon plates.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-25
FF. Branch outlets from grooved couplings or grooved fittings which extend any
direction except vertically downward shall be securely supported.
21. SLEEVES
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install separate sleeves for penetrations through
all floors and partitions.
B. Pipe sleeves shall be schedule 10 steel pipe.
C. Size sleeves two (2) sizes larger than the nominal diameter of the pipe.
D. Sleeves for concealed pipes in cases, passing through basement or depressed
floors and/or in equipment spaces shall project 2" above the finished floor.
Sleeves for pipes exposed to view shall project 1" above the finished floor.
Sleeves passing through walls shall terminate flush with the wall surface.
E. Fire service riser entering the building with slab on grade construction shall be
cast in place without a sleeve.
F. Pack and seal the space between the pipe and sleeve or insulation and sleeve
with an approved, non-shrinking, non-combustible packing material maintaining
an air-tight seal.
G. Sleeves through floors and foundation walls below grade shall be schedule 40
black steel pipe with 150-pound black steel slip-on welding flanges, welded at
center of the sleeve, painted with one (1) coat of bitumastic paint inside and out.
Space between sleeve and pipe shall be packed with oakum to within two (2)
inches of wall face. Remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with
a waterproof mastic.
H. Every precaution shall be taken to place sleeves for all pipes before concrete is
poured and masonry is finished. Any subsequent cutting and repair of finished
construction due to neglect or oversight by the Contractor in carrying out these
instructions will be done at the Contractor's expense.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of all sleeves with the GC.
22. VALVES
A. Gate Valves:
1. 2" and smaller: Bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,
threaded ends, 175psi working pressure, "Nibco model #T-104-0."
2. 2 1/2" and larger: Iron body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,
flanged ends, 175psi working pressure, "Nibco model #F-609-RW."
B. Globe Valves:
1. 1" and smaller: Bronze body, rubber disc, rising stem, threaded ends,
175 psi working pressure, "Nibco model #KT-65".
2. 1-1/4" and larger: Bronze body, renewable disc, rising stem, threaded
ends, 200 psi working pressure, "Nibco model #KT-211-W".
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-24
S. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide not less than one (1) hanger on each
section of pipe with exceptions as noted per NFPA 13 Section 4-14.2.
T. The distance between a hanger and the centerline of an upright sprinkler head
shall be not less than 3".
U. The unsupported length between the end sprinkler and the last hanger on the
line shall not be greater than 3'-0" for 1" pipe or 4'-0" for 1-1/4" pipe or 5'-0" for 1-
1/2" pipe or larger. When any of these limits are exceeded, the pipe shall be
extended beyond the end sprinkler and shall be supported by an additional
hanger with exceptions as noted per NFPA 13 Section 4-14.2.
V. Cross mains shall have at least one (1) hanger between each two branch lines
with exceptions noted per NFPA 13 Section 4-14.2.
W. The length of an unsupported armover to a sprinkler head shall not exceed 2'-0"
for steel pipe with exceptions noted per NFPA 13 Section 4-14.2.
X. Wall mounted sidewall sprinkler heads shall be restrained to prevent movement.
Y. No piping shall be installed using hangers, supports or supplementary steel of
other trades.
Z. Chain, strap, perforated bar or wire hangers shall not be acceptable. No hangers
or supports shall be attached to steel floor or roof decks, ductwork, piping,
conduit and/or equipment of other trades.
AA. Drilling of building structural steel for attachment of hangers or supports is not
permitted under any circumstances. Welding to building structural steel is
permitted only where specified or specifically indicated on the drawings. When
special conditions arise, shop drawings and/or other descriptive information
detailing proposed methods of welding hangers, supports or anchors shall be
submitted for written approval by the Project Structural Engineer prior to welding.
BB. Hangers, supports and/or pipe requiring bridging shall originate at or transmit the
load to/or near panel points along the top chord of trusses, girders and/or roof
joists when hung from such members. Do not hang from bottom chord of such
members.
CC. Where overhead construction does not permit fastening of hangers rods in
required locations, provide additional steel required to properly transmit the load
to the building structural frame or floor and to meet spacing requirements.
Supplementary (support) steel shall be in strict accordance with the AISC
specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings.
DD. Floor stands may be used on piping running close to the floor. Approved saddle
type supports shall be provided, threaded rod along and/or flanges with steel
pipe and couplings will not be acceptable for support of said piping."
#04, EE. In addition to complying with hanger spacing requirements of NFPA 13, each
pipe section joined by grooved couplings shall have a minimum of two (2)
hangers per pipe section.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-23
H. Sprinkler lines under ducts shall not be supported from ductwork but shall be
supported from building structure with trapeze hangers where necessary or from
steel angles supporting ductwork as specified in NFPA 13 Section 2-6.
I. Floor stands may be used on piping running close to floor.
J. All vertical piping throughout the building shall be securely fastened and
supported at each floor by means of approved supports firmly attached to the
building structure and to the pipe or riser. Clamps installed above slab shall be
welded to floor sleeves and firmly attached to pipe.
K. Clamp and block all underground piping where required and in accordance with
the requirements of NFPA 24.
L. All hangers and supports shall be spaced at intervals in accordance with NFPA
13, Section 14-2.
M. Exposed Schedule 40, galvanized steel piping inside refrigerated exterior chests
and freezers shall be supported with galvanized hangers, plates, rods, washers
and nuts or coach screw rods with white plastic ceiling plates fitting tight to
finished ceiling.
N. All pipe hangers and equipment support shall be constructed and installed in
accordance with Seismic Zone requirements as outlined in the State Building
Code.
O. The Sprinkler Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of shop drawings and
calculations detailing seismic hanger restraints to the local Building Authority,
Engineer and Stop & Shop Engineering Department along with a letter of
compliance signed by a registered structural engineer confirming that the piping
hangers meet state seismic code requirements.
P. Cable provided for seismic systems shall be color coded and pre-stressed.
Q. It shall not be acceptable to raise and/or lower hangers supporting sprinkler
piping mains or branches from elevations indicated on the shop drawings to allow
for final adjustment of sprinkler heads with respect to ceiling construction, such
adjustment shall be achieved through proper installation (length and assembly) of
each drop which shall include an adjustable drop nipple for each head herein
specified.
R. Maximum distance between hangers shall not exceed the following:
Nominal Pipe
Size (in) 3/4 1 1- 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6
1/4
Steel pipe
exc.
threaded
lightwall N/A 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-22
Drawings. The approval of the Structural Engineer must be obtained before any
such cutting.
G. Penetrations through the mezzanine decks shall be allowed only at designated
locations.
18. PIPING
A. Overhead Piping:
1. All overhead piping used in the sprinkler system fabrication shall conform
with NFPA 13, section 2-3, table 2-3.1 ANSI and ASTM standards as
modified by FM with exceptions as specified herein.
2. All piping 2" and smaller shall be Schedule 40 pipe with screwed joints.
All piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be Schedule 10 pipe (min.) with rolled
grooved and/or flanged joints.
3. Use of plain end pipe shall not be permitted for construction of sprinkler
systems specified herein.
19. FITTINGS
A. Joining of pipe and changes in direction shall be accomplished in the use of
fittings suitable for installation in sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA 13,
section 2-4 and shall be listed in the latest edition of the FM "Approval Guide"
with exceptions as specified herein.
B. All mechanically bolted pipe couplings approved for use with grooved pipe and
fittings shall be installed with bolts aligned plumb for horizontal pipe and fittings
and installed with bolts aligned perpendicular to vertical pipe and exterior walls.
20. HANGERS
A. Sprinkler Contractor shall support piping from building structure by means of UL
listed and FM approved hangers, components and supports in accordance with
NFPA 13, Section 2-6. Piping shall be supported to maintain required grading
and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place.
B. No work shall be installed using hangers or supports of other trades or roof deck.
C. Pipes running parallel with a beam may be hung from the bottom flange of the
beam.
D. Pipes 4 and larger when running parallel with joists are to be supported from
trapeze hangers suspended from top chord of two bar joists.
E. All piping running at right angles to open web steel joists shall be supported from
the top chords of the joists with hangers spaced a maximum of 10'-0" on center.
F. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide beam clamps and hang from top chord of joists
only.
G. Sprinkler Contractor shall not hang piping anywhere along bottom chord of joists
including panel points, but hang from top chord of joists at panel points only.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-21
in accordance with state codes, local codes and/or local authorities, where more
stringent than NFPA and/or FM standards.
EEEE. All Schedule 10 pipe shall be rolled grooved construction only (not threaded).
FFFF. All Schedule 40 piping shall be threaded, rolled grooved and/or cut grooved
construction.
GGGG.Pipe sizes less than or equal to 2" shall be Schedule 40. Pipe sizes greater than
or equal to 2-1/2" shall be Schedule 10.
HHHH.The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide a minimum clearance of 5'-0" for mains
and branches running parallel with the Rear Mezzanine/Sales Area wall to allow
for the installation of gas-fired unit heaters in the Mezzanine Storage Area.
IIII. Sprinkler heads below open non-combustible metal roof deck and joist
construction shall be within 1" to 12" of the deck or 1" to 4" below the joist, when
obstructed a maximum of 1'-4" below the roof deck, with exceptions noted per
NFPA 13, Section 4-4.1.
JJJJ. Sprinkler heads below open non-combustible metal deck and beam construction
shall be within 1" to 16" of the deck or 1" to 4" below the beam when obstructed
for a maximum of V-10" below the deck, with exceptions noted per NFPA 13,
Section 4.
KKKK. Sprinkler coverage shall be provided below all soffits 2'-0" wide and/or greater
with a maximum head spacing of 14'-0" on line, located throughout the Sales
Area.
17. CUTTING AND WELDING
A. No field welding of sprinkler piping shall be permitted.
B. Join all inside piping by means of screwed, flanged or flexible gasketed joints or
acceptable fittings.
C. Cross mains and branch lines may be shop welded using acceptable welding
fittings with screwed branch outlets. Welding and brazing shall conform to ANSI
B31.10-1967, with Addenda ANSI B31.10a-1971 and ANSI B31.10b-1971.
Welding and torch cutting shall not be permitted as a means of installing or
repairing sprinkler systems.
D. Provide a blind flange at each end of welded headers.
E. Certify welders and braziers as being qualified for welding and/or brazing in
accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders,
Braziers and Welding and Brazing Operators 1968 Edition.
F. Where field cutting of holes in the webs of beams is necessary, all such holes
shall be coordinated with the Structural Engineer and shown on the Shop ..
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-20
RRR. ELO (extra large orifice) design coverage of storage areas shall be proven
insufficient prior to the consideration of fire pump system design specified herein.
SSS. All branch piping above the rear mezzanine shall be run through and
perpendicular to roof joists where possible. Where roof joist construction is
interrupted by shallow beam construction, framing at HVAC rooftop units, rooftop
condensing units and elevator shaft locations, every effort shall be made to run
sprinkler piping at a continuous elevation through and perpendicular to roof joist
construction above the rear mezzanine. Where roof foist construction is
interrupted by deeper beam construction and framing the sprinkler branch piping
shall not be allowed to offset below the beams creating pockets of low points in
the branch piping system(s) spanning across the rear mezzanine and shall be
designed to suit the structural conditions Low point drains will not be accepted
as an alternate design for offset branch piping.
TTT. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide upright heads above and/or below rear
mezzanine in storage, compressor and mechanical room areas of obstructed
and/or unobstructed open construction. Pendant heads in said areas shall not be
allowed in lieu thereof.
UUU. Sprinkler piping below rear mezzanine in storage areas of obstructed open
construction shall be run tight to the bottom of the steel.
VW. All upright sprinkler heads located below roof decks and/or mezzanine decks with
exposed and/or open construction shall extend to within the proper distance of
said construction as required by NFPA 13 and Factory Mutual.
XXX. All upright sprinkler heads located above chests (coolers and freezers) specified
herein shall extend to within the proper distance below roof deck and/or
mezzanine as required by NFPA 13 and Factory Mutual.
YYY. All upright sprinkler heads located above acrylic ceiling tiles shall extend to within
the proper distance below roof deck as required by NFPA 13 and Factory Mutual.
ZZZ. Sprinkler branch piping shall not originate from the bottom of mains.
AAAA. In sprinkler systems requiring multiple zones, in accordance with state codes,
local codes and/or local authorities, each such zone shall be provided with
individual control valves (indicating butterfly type), tamper switches and
inspector's test connections as specified herein.
BBBB. Saddle type clamp fittings mechanically fastened with U bolts and/or wire type
clamps for use with perforated pipe shall not be permitted in lieu of threaded
and/or grooved fittings unless specified otherwise herein.
CCCC.The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide separate zones for the sprinkler system as
required by state codes, local codes and/or local authorities, where more
stringent than NFPA and/or FM standards.
DDDD.The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide individual inspector's test connections for
each zone for sprinkler systems requiring multiple zones
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-19
Refrigerated Chest Nominal Outside Nominal Inside Nominal Roof
Chest or Freezer Height Height Thickness
Fish Chest 8'-8" 8'-2" 6"
Meat Chest (interior) 9'-6" 9'-2" 4"
Meat Chest (exterior) 10'-0" 9'-0" 1'-0"
Frozen Foods Freezer 9'-6" 9'-0" 6"
Ice Cream Freezer 9'-6" 91.019 611
Dairy Chest 9'-6" 9'-0" 4"
Bakery Retarder 9'-6" 8'-10" 8"
Bakery Freezer 9'-6" 8'-10" 8"
Beer Chest 9'-6" 9'-2" 41.
NOTE: All dimensions specified herein are nominal dimensions.
MMM. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the coordination of all
cooled room dimensions with respect to the design and construction of all
sprinkler systems specified herein. NOTE: The following list of cooled rooms is
subject to change and is to be used as a guide only. See the latest architectural
drawings for specific dimensions and locations of cooled rooms:
Nominal Outside Nominal Inside Nominal Roof
Cooled Room Height Height Thickness
Meat Cutting Room 9'-6" 9'-4" 4"
(Front)
Meat Cutting Room 8'-6" 8'-4" 4"
(Rear)
NOTE: All dimensions specified herein are nominal dimensions.
NNN. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide upright sprinkler heads in all areas with
open construction, unless specified otherwise herein. Pendant heads shall not
be allowed in lieu thereof.
000. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the coordination of
sprinkler piping with all other trades so as to maintain a nominal ceiling height of
10'-0" above the finished floor in the Meat Cutting and Produce Pre-Pak rooms.
Any deviation from the ceiling heights specified herein shall be subject to
approval by the Stop & Shop Construction and Engineering Departments prior to
installation.
PPP. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide heads above combustible acrylic ceilings
of the deli awning construction of prismatic and/or smooth milk white lenses as
specified herein under Sales Area/Florist, Juice Bar, Pharmacy and Checkout
Areas/above combustible acrylic ceilings. All heads above acrylic lenses of the
deli awning shall extend to within the proper distance below the roof deck.
QQQ. ELO (extra large orifice) design criteria specified herein shall be attempted for
coverage of storage areas where available water supply has been proven
insufficient to support standard sprinkler system design and when approved by
Factory Mutual and the Stop & Shop Engineering Department.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-18
CCC. All piping shall be Schedule 10 or greater. Pipe walls less than Schedule 10
and/or "lightwall pipe" shall not be approved for construction of sprinkler systems
specified herein.
DDD. All mains shall be Schedule 10 or greater. All branches shall be Schedule 40 or
greater.
EEE. Use of plain end pipe couplings and fittings shall not be permitted for
construction of sprinkler systems specified herein.
FFF. All fittings and couplings used to join in grooved pipe specified here shall be of
the same manufacturer, and that this one (1) manufacturer of groove fittings and
couplings shall be used solely throughout the entire sprinkler system for joining
all grooved piping.
GGG. All fittings and couplings used to join all sprinkler system piping specified herein
shall be approved by Factory Mutual.
HHH. All fittings and couplings used to join threaded pipe specified herein shall be of
the same manufacturer, and that this one (1) manufacturer of threaded fittings
and couplings shall be used solely throughout the entire sprinkler system for
joining all threaded piping.
III. Threaded ends of all dry pendant heads specified herein shall connect to
threaded tee fittings and/or couplings in lieu of threaded elbow fittings.
JJJ. Butterfly valves shall not be allowed in the construction of the sprinkler systems
unless specified otherwise herein.
KKK. The Sprinkler Contractor shall not use upright type sidewall heads inside exterior
chests in lieu of horizontal sidewall heads specified herein.
LLL. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the coordination of all
refrigerated chest and freezer dimensions with respect to the design and
construction of all sprinkler systems specified herein. NOTE: The following list
of refrigerated chests and freezers is subject to change and is to be used as a
guide only. See the latest architectural drawings for specific dimensions and
locations of refrigerated chests and freezers:
Refrigerated Chest Nominal Outside Nominal Inside Nominal Roof
Chest or Freezer Height Height Thickness
Florist Chest 10'-0" 9'-8" 4„
Florist Display Chest 10'-0" 9'-8" 4"
Bazaar Freezer 8'-8" 8'-211 6"
Cheese Chest 8'-8" 81-2" 6
Deli Chest 8'-6" 81-211 4"
Produce Chest (interior) 9'-6" 91-211 411
Produce Chest (exterior) 10'-0" 9'-0" 1'-0"
Salad Chest 8'-6" 81-211 4"
Fish Freezer 81-8" 81-2" 6
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-17
with respect to designated runs of electrical conduits running parallel to the
exterior masonry wall along the total length of the rear mezzanine.
SS. Sprinkler systems located in compressor room areas shall have a minimum
clearance of 3'-0" from all electrical switch, gear panels, raceways, etc.
TT. Where possible, sprinkler mains shall be routed around the compressor room
areas, except when approved by the Engineer and Stop & Shop Construction
and Engineering Departments.
UU. Sprinkler heads shall not be omitted from compressor and/or mechanical rooms
without written confirmation from the State Fire Marshall or local authorities, and
where omitted shall be plugged at proposed head locations as specified here.
Piping shall be allowed to remain unless the Contractor obtains written
confirmation from the State Fire Marshall or local authorities for piping to be
removed from these areas.
W. Sprinkler mains shall not be allowed to run through elevator machine rooms.
WW. The Sprinkler Contractor shall maintain a minimum 2'-0" clearance above ceiling
to allow for installation of recessed halide lights and recessed fluorescent lights in
sales and work areas unless specified otherwise herein.
XX. In Sales, Florist, Juice Bar, Pharmacy and Checkout Areas where luminous
(translucent plastic) ceiling tiles are present, all horizontal sprinkler piping shall
be at least 2'-6" clear of finished ceiling line to avoid shadows. Only vertical
drops to heads may be located within the 2'-6" space. No heads shall be
installed in the luminous ceiling tile above the Checkout Counters in Sales Area.
YY. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the spacing, location,
position and clearances of heads required for proper cover inside all refrigerated
chests, freezers and cooled rooms (meat and produce pre-pack) with respect to
fluorescent and incandescent lighting.
ZZ. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the layout of sprinkler
heads in the Sales Area with respect to awnings situated along soffit lines in the
Deli Department (41'-0" long by 2'-0" deep x 2'-8" high), the Fish/Meat
department (53'-0" long by 3'-9" deep x 2'-8" high) and the Pharmacy (44'-0" long
x 2'-0" deep x 2'-8" high). A uniform rectangular pattern of sprinkler heads in
straight lines shall be maintained throughout the sales area, offsetting only
specific heads conflicting with the awnings shall not be an acceptable practice in
lieu thereof.
AAA. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide additional sprinkler coverage inside all awnings
as specified herein for sales areas with heads spaced 12 ft. apart only when
required by local authorities.
BBB. Roof and decks constructed of combustible construction shall be protected as
required by Factory Mutual.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-16
II. Sprinklers shall be installed beneath HVAC ducts over 4 ft. wide.
JJ. Sprinkler heads shall be kept remote from ventilation louvers in exterior walls and
ceiling combustion air intakes where freezing could result even though the rooms
are heated.
KK. Sprinkler Contractor shall comply with NFPA 13, Chapter 4 and FM Data Sheet
2-8N, Chapter 4 for the proper spacing, location, position and clearances of
sprinkler heads with respect to building construction (decks, ceilings, walls,
beams, girders, joists, etc.).
LL. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the use of sprigs to obtain
the proper spacing, location, position and clearances of sprinkler heads with
respect to areas of obstructed and/or unobstructed open construction, such as
storage areas above and below mezzanines and areas above chests, freezers
and ovens, etc. as specified in NFPA 13, Chapter 4 and FM Data Sheet 2-8N,
Chapter 4.
MM. Sprinkler piping running exposed in rear mezzanine storage areas shall be run at
elevations as high as possible and so as not to obstructed elevator openings,
door openings, roof hatch openings and roof top unit hatch openings (below
compressor sections).
NN. The Sprinkler Contractor shall given special attention to the coordination of
sprinkler piping (main and branches) on the rear mezzanine with respect to the
unit heaters located 2'-0" off the inside sales area wall, suspended 12" below the
roof deck and the 8" gas main crossing the mezzanine and offsetting down below
the roof steel before entering the area over the sales area ceiling. Sprinkler
mains running parallel with the inside or sales area wall of the rear mezzanine
shall be located as close to the gas main dropping below the roof steel as
possible so as to avoid conflict with the unit heaters and their respective flue
piping.
00. F.M. approved, adjustable drop nipples shall be furnished and installed to allow
for the final adjustment of sprinkler heads and escutcheons with respect to all
areas, chests and freezers with finished ceilings and/or surfaces.
PP. Installation of telescoping or deep escutcheons shall not be allowed. Desired
sprinkler coverage shall be maintained through proper number, placement and
clearances of sprinkler heads as specified herein.
QQ. Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the spacing, location, position
and clearances of sprinkler heads required for proper coverage of all areas
specified herein with respect to all electrical equipment, surface mounted and
recessed lighting fixtures. The Sprinkler Contractor shall review electrical
drawing for a complete understanding as to the dimension, depth and location of
all electrical fixtures and equipment (switchgear, transformers, panels, surface
mounted fluorescent and incandescent lighting fixtures, recessed halide and
fluorescent lighting fixtures, etc.).
mow, RR. The Sprinkler Contractor shall give special attention to the coordination and
location of sprinkler piping (mains, branches and risers) on the rear mezzanine
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-15
W. All piping used in construction of the sprinkler systems specified herein shall be
certified by Factory Mutual and UL and be manufactured in the U.S.
X. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide sprinkler heads in both high and low bay
ceilings located above refrigerated Produce Low Boy Island Cases located in
Sales area.
Y. The distance from sprinkler heads to walls shall not exceed one-half the
allowable distance (spacing) between sprinkler heads as specified herein.
Sprinkler heads shall be located a minimum of 4" from any wall.
Z. The Sprinkler Contractor shall maintain the following minimum spacing
requirements between heads so as to prevent cold soldering of heads:
1/2" orifice sprinkler heads shall maintain a minimum 50-sq. ft. spacing
17/32" orifice and .64" orifice (ELO) sprinkler heads shall maintain a minimum 70
sq. ft. spacing.
AA. The Sprinkler Contractor shall not exceed a maximum spacing and distance
requirement of 15'-0" between branch lines and sprinklers on the branch lines for
areas of Ordinary Hazard Occupancy (i.e., sales and office areas). The Sprinkler
Contractor shall not exceed a maximum spacing and distance requirement of 12'-
0" between branch lines and sprinklers on the branch lines for areas of Extra
Hazard Occupancy (i.e., storage areas). The Sprinkler Contractor shall not
exceed a minimum spacing and distance requirement of 7'-0" between branch
lines and sprinklers on the branch lines for all occupancy hazards.
BB. Sprinkler protection shall be provided inside canopies constructed of combustible
material and/or open to adjacent retail areas. Sprinkler heads shall be provided
for coverage below canopies of combustible material when required by local
authorities.
CC. Sprinkler protection shall not be provided inside and/or below canopies
constructed of non-combustible materials, except where required by local
authorities.
DD. Sprinkler heads shall not be required inside front vestibules except when
required by local authorities.
EE. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide 286°F or 350°F sprinkler heads in all elevator
shafts and machine rooms in conjunction with rate of rise heat detectors rated
130-150°F provided by Electrical Contractor, except where not allowed by local
authorities.
FF. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide sprinkler coverage below stairwell areas
subject to access and/or storage.
GG. Sprinkler heads shall be provided in all closets unless specified otherwise herein.
HH. All sprinkler heads located near any unit heaters shall be of head temperature in AO
accordance with NFPA 13.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-14
M. The Contractor shall provide sprinkler coverage above all refrigerated interior
chests (coolers and freezers)with tops constructed of combustible materials prior
to their construction. Sprinkler coverage shall be omitted above refrigerated
interior chests when fabricated with metal tops and upon written confirmation
from Stop & Shop's Engineering Department.
N. All sprinkler work performed above and inside all refrigerated chests, including all
pipe penetrations, shall be coordinated with the Chest Contractor prior to chest
construction.
O. The Contractor shall obtain one (1) complete set of approved chest (cooler and
freezer) shop drawings from the Chest Contractor for coordination of sprinkler
pipe elevations and penetrations required for proper sprinkler coverage above
and inside chests as specified herein.
P. The Contractor shall give special attention to the spacing, location, position and
clearances of sprinkler heads required for proper coverage inside all refrigerated
chests, freezers and cooled rooms (Meat and Produce Pre-Pack) with respect to
ceiling mounted refrigeration fan coil units and gravity coil units approximately
19" deep. For refrigeration unit locations see Stop & Shop's Refrigeration
System Plan (R-3).
Q. Produce Pre-Pak and Meat Cutting Rooms areas, when provided with ceilings
composed of combustible construction, shall be protected both above and below
the ceiling as specified herein for Sales Areas. The Contractor shall verify type
of ceiling construction with Stop & Shop's Engineering Department.
R. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary pipe penetrations
through refrigerated chests required for proper sprinkler coverage inside.
S. The Sprinkler Contractor shall seal all penetrations through chests, freezers
and/or rooms with insulated paneled ceiling construction with an approved
urethane foam filling the entire void surrounding pipes and finished with an
approved white silicone caulking flush with the adjacent finished surfaces.
T. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide heads above combustible meat room ceilings
in addition to heads located below as specified herein. All sprinkler heads above
meat room ceiling shall extend to within the proper distance below the
mezzanine.
U. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide heads above combustible acrylic ceilings
constructed of prismatic and/or smooth milk white lenses for sales and work
areas (florist, juice bar, pharmacy and checkout areas) in addition to heads
located below ceilings as specified herein. All heads above acrylic ceilings shall
extend to within the proper distance below the roof deck. Acrylic ceilings used
for perimeter wall wash up to V-0" and less in width shall be exempt from the
coverage above.
V. The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide sprinkler heads above the refrigerated
cases in the florist department as specified herein for coverage above interior
chest.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-13
D. "Special Hazard" occupancy conditions such as rack storage, flammable liquids,
aerosols, etc. must be protected in accordance with the current FM Standards
covering those hazards.
16. SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate the location and elevation of all
sprinkler heads and piping with all refrigeration, plumbing, HVAC and electrical
work. The Contractor shall modify the sprinkler system design as necessary to
avoid all lights, equipment, units, ducts, grilles, diffusers, registers, hoods, flues,
piping, conduits, etc. and shall establish exact elevations for all sprinkler piping.
Such design shall be acceptable to the Architect, all associated Engineers and
Approving Authorities.
B. Design velocities for pipe sizes 2" and below in grid systems shall not exceed a
maximum velocity of 20 ft/sec
C. The sprinkler system shall be designed as an independent system, with all
associated heads, piping, valves, components, appurtenances, etc. located
within the Stop & Shop premises.
D. Areas with finished ceiling shall have all piping concealed above the ceilings.
E. The building sprinkler system shall be installed in a neat manner with piping
straight and parallel, at right angles to walls or column lines, with risers plumb,
run pipe so as not to interfere with other piping.
F. A uniform rectangular pattern of sprinkler heads in straight lines, symmetrical in
two (2) directions shall be maintained throughout all areas.
G. Sprinkler heads located in areas with finished ceiling tiles shall be considered
satisfactory if they are within six (6) inches either way from exact center of the
ceiling tile in the short direction (24") and with one (1) foot either way of exact
center of the ceiling tile in the long direction (48") and shall be located as such on
the Reflected Ceiling Plans and Sprinkler Shop Drawings.
H. The Contractor shall reference the Plumbing Drawings to establish the proper
layout of the sprinkler system required inside the sprinkler room.
I. Recessed sprinkler heads shall be provided in all areas with finished ceilings as
specified herein.
J. Upright sprinkler heads shall be provided in all areas with exposed construction
as specified herein.
K. Dry pendant heads shall be provided in all refrigerated interior chest (coolers and
freezers) as specified herein.
L. Antifreeze systems with sidewall heads shall be provided inside all exterior
refrigerated chests (coolers and freezers) as specified herein.
Amok
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-12
either 165°F or 212°F, located centered between the exterior wall
of the building and the edge of the canopy, with a maximum on-
line spacing of 12'-0" between heads.
7. Interior Refrigerated Chests and Freezers
a. Interiors of refrigerated chests and freezers shall be protected with
a wet pipe system employing dry pendant heads designed to
deliver a minimum density of 0.15gpm/sf over the most
hydraulically remote 2,500sf or entire area. Sprinklers shall be
1/2" orifice, rated at 212°F with a maximum of 120sf/head spacing.
b. Exteriors of refrigerated chests and freezers with tops constructed
of combustible materials shall be protected with a wet pipe system
designed to deliver a minimum density of 0.20 gpm/sf over the
most hydraulically remote 2,OOOsf or entire area. Sprinklers shall
be 1/2" orifice, rated at 212°F with a maximum of 120sf/head
spacing.
8. Exterior Refrigerated Chests and Freezers
a. Interiors of refrigerated chests and freezers shall be protected with
an antifreeze system designed to deliver a minimum density of
0.15 gpm/sf over the most hydraulically remote 2,500sf or entire
area. Sprinklers shall be 1/2" orifice, rated at 212°F with a
maximum of 120sf/head spacing.
9. Sales Areas/Deli/Florist, Juice Bar, Pharmacy & Checkout Areas/Above
Combustible Acrylic Ceilings
a. Shall be protected with a wet pipe system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. over the hydraulically most
remote 2,000 sq. ft. or entire area. Sprinklers shall be 1/2" orifice,
elk rated at 212°F with a maximum 120 sq. ft. spacing, in addition to
protection provided below ceilings as specified herein for sales
and work areas.
10. Compactor Walkways and Chutes
a. Shall be protected with an antifreeze system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.15gpm/sf over the most hydraulically remote
2,000 sf or entire area. Sprinklers shall be 1/2" orifice, rated at
212°F with a maximum of 130sf/head spacing (ten feet apart in
walkways).
11. Bakery Equipment/Ovens and Proof Box
a. Shall be protected with a wet pipe system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.20gpm/sf over the entire area. Sprinklers
shall be 1/2" orifice, rated at 50°F above the maximum predicted
ambient temperature for that area with a maximum of 100-
200sf/head spacing.
B. Calculated sprinkler systems should anticipate a demand of 250gpm for hose
streams. The hydraulics of the system should be calculated on the basis of the
available water supply. The system water demand shall be 10psi less than the
available water supply at the demand flow, a margin of safety required by FM,
allowing for future deterioration of the water supply.
C. FM Data Sheet #3-26, "Fire Protection Water Demands for Sprinklered
Properties shall supersede NFPA Group Hazard Classification graphs for
determining sprinkler demands. This would apply to sprinkler design criteria not
already specified herein.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-11
a. Shall be protected with a wet pipe system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.20gpm/sf over the most hydraulically remote
2,OOOsf area. Sprinklers shall be 1/2" orifice, rated at either 165°F
or 212°F with a maximum of 130sf/head spacing.
2. Storage Areas and Enclosed Receiving Dock Areas
a. Shall be protected with a wet pipe system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.30gpm/sf over the most hydraulically remote
2,OOOsf area. Sprinklers shall be 17/32" orifice, rated at 286°F
with a maximum of 100sf/head spacing for sprinklers in storage
areas where applicable for up to 12-ft. high shelf or palletized
storage. Should rack storage be used or if storage is higher than
12 feet, protection specifications should be determined by
consultation with Factory Mutual.
3. Bottle Building Customer and Storage Areas
a. Customer areas shall be protected with a wet pipe system
designed to deliver a minimum density of 0.30gpm/sf over the
most hydraulically remote 2,OOOsf or entire area. Sprinklers shall
be 1/2" orifice, rated at 212°F with a maximum of 100sf/head
spacing. Storage areas shall be protected with a wet pipe system
designed to deliver a minimum density of 0.30gpm/sf over the
most hydraulically remote 2,OOOsf of entire area. Sprinklers shall
be 17/32" orifice, rated at 286°F with a maximum of 100sf/head
spacing.
4. Compressor Room, Mechanical Room, Elevator Shaft and Machine
Room areas
a. Shall be protected with a wet pipe system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.20 gpm/sf over the most hydraulically "
remote 2,OOOsf or entire area. Sprinklers shall be 1/2" orifice,
rated at 212°F with a maximum of 100-120sf/head spacing
(sprinklers shall be rated at 286°F or 350°F for elevator shafts and
mechanical rooms).
5. Aerosol Room Areas
a. Shall be protected with a wet pipe system designed to deliver a
minimum density of 0.60 gpm/sf over the entire room area.
Sprinklers shall be 17/32" orifice, rated at 286°F with a maximum
of 100sf/head spacing. This protection is adequate for palletized
storage less than five (5) feet high. Should storage be five (5) feet
or higher, protection specifications shall be determined by
consultation with FM.
6. Canopy and Vestibule Areas
a. Interiors of canopies shall be protected with an antifreeze system,
design based on Ordinary Hazard Pipe Schedule. Sprinklers shall
be 1/2" orifice, upright heads rated at 212°F, located within a
maximum of 3'-0" of the peak of the canopy and a minimum of 2'-
0" horizontally away from the sloping roof deck, with a maximum
on-line spacing of 12'-0" between heads.
b. Exteriors of canopies (below soffit) shall be protected with an
antifreeze system, design based on Ordinary Hazard Pipe
Schedule. Sprinklers shall be 1/2" orifice, recessed heads rated at
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-10
E. The Contractor shall confine his storage/handling of materials and his
construction operations to such limits as directed by the Architect and/or the
General Contractor.
F. The Contractor shall do all carting, handling and hoisting for his materials and
equipment in a safe and satisfactory manner. Any damage resulting there from
shall be repaired or paid for by this Contractor to the satisfaction of all parties
concerned.
G. All respective materials and equipment shall be by same manufacturer, identified
by the maker's name, mark, rating and approved standards where applicable.
H. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest edition of NFPA Codes
and Standards as modified by FM.
I. The Contractor shall be responsible during the installation and testing periods of
the sprinkler system for any damage to the Work of others, to the building, its
contents, etc. caused by leaks in any equipment, by unplugged or disconnected
pipes, fittings, etc., or by overflow and shall pay for the necessary replacements
or repairs to the work of others, damaged by such leakage.
J. All fire protection devices shall be FM and UL listed. All fire protection materials
and equipment shall be installed in conformance with FM Standards.
14. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Sprinkler Heads
1. Central Sprinkler Corporation
2. Grinnell
3. Reliable
4. Star
5. GEM
B. Hangers, Rods and Clamps
1. Carpenter& Peterson
2. ITT Grinnell
3. B-Line
4. Michigan Hanger Corporation
5. Empire
C. Valves
1. Kennedy
2. Muller
3. Nibco
4. United
15. DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Factory Mutual has established the acceptable installation requirements for
sprinklers in the following store areas:
1. Sales, Office, Work, Prep, Employee, Customer, Corridor and Stairwell
Areas
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-9
2. Architect - Five (5) sets distributed for approval and review with combined
comments to:
a. General Contractor
b. Sprinkler Contractor
C. Architect
d. Fire Protection Engineer
e. Stop & Shop Engineering Department
B. All equipment submittal sets shall be bound listing all pertinent data, checked and
highlighted for all materials and equipment denoting name of manufacturer,
model number, composition, finish, grade, size and capacity.
C. The naming of manufacturers in the specifications shall not be construed as
eliminating the materials, products or services of other manufacturers and
suppliers having equivalent items approved by FM.
D. The substitution of materials or products other than those herein specified are
subject to proper review and approval by Stop & Shop and when granted in
writing by Stop & Shop.
E. Stop & Shop Engineering Department reserves the right to request equipment
submittals on any material and equipment not specified herein under this
Section.
12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Maintain at the site an up-to-date marked-up set of as-built drawings which shall -mow
be corrected and delivered to Stop & Shop Construction Department upon
completion of the Work.
B. The Contractor shall furnish Stop & Shop Construction Department with one
reproducible sepia print of each approved shop drawing, revised to show as-built
conditions.
13. WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS HANDLING AND DELIVERY
A. The Contractor shall see that all his materials and equipment are delivered to the
building when required, so as to allow the Work to progress in the most efficient
manner.
B. All equipment and materials must be new, unused, and free from any
imperfections.
C. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. The Contractor
shall make good all damage caused by his workmen either directly or indirectly.
All pipe opening shall be closed with caps and/or plugs during installation. All
equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or
mechanical injury.
D. All work shall be done by skilled workmen in accordance with the best practices
of the trade.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-8
J. All hydraulic calculations shall include all requirements specified in NFPA-13,
chapter 6. Exceptions are as noted in FM Data Sheet #2-8N, section 7 shall be
followed.
K. The hydraulic calculations shall note the pressure losses for all types and sizes
of meters, detector checks, backflow preventers, strainers, gate valves, check
valves, fittings and pipe (types, sizes, length, and condition), etc. from the
effective point of the flow test to the base of each riser located inside the building.
L. The hydraulic calculations shall clearly denote the differential and specific
elevations for all flow test hydrants, finished floor of the building, and resulting
pressure loss at the base of the riser entering the building.
M. The Sprinkler Contractor shall submit hydraulic calculations for the hydraulically
most remote area for each sprinkler system zone, as specified herein.
N. Hydraulic calculations shall include FMRC listed pressure loss values for
corresponding backflow devices as specified herein (not manufacturer's data).
O. The Sprinkler Contractor shall submit three (3) sets of hydraulic calculations, for
three (3) different remote areas, for each grid sprinkler systems as described in
NFPA 13 paragraph 6-4.4.2 and identified on Sprinkler Shop Drawings with
exceptions as noted in F.M. Data Sheet 2-8N addendum in proofing the
hydraulically most remote area of each respective grid system.
P. Should the Sprinkler Contractor have any questions concerning the Fire
Protection Specifications and/or Insurance carrier requirements, either during
bidding, while preparing shop drawings and/or during construction, they shall be
directed to the Fire Protection Engineer and Stop & Shop Engineering
Department in writing for the necessary interpretation from the Insurance carrier.
Q. No work shall commence until the Sprinkler Contractor has a set of shop
drawings stamped "Approved" by Factory Mutual, the Architect and/or Fire
Protection Engineer and Stop & Shop Engineering Department and the written
approval of the local Fire Marshall and Building Department.
R. The Sprinkler Contractor shall submit all documents as specified herein to the
appropriate Factory Mutual District Office with respect to the location of the
project.
S. The Sprinkler Contractor shall submit the sprinkler system hydraulic calculations
simultaneously with the shop drawings for approval as specified herein.
11. EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall within thirty (30) days after the award of the sprinkler
contract and prior to placing any orders for material, submit seven (7)
complete sets of equipment submittals for approval and review to the following:
1. Factory Mutual (Stop & Shop's Insurance Carrier) - Two (2) sets to the
FM District office having jurisdiction for approval and review.
OOW
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-7
B. Shop drawings shall be based on the latest revisions to the Architectural,
Structural, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical Drawings and Stop & Shop Fixture Plan
(F-1) prior to award of the Sprinkler Contract.
C. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a certified NICET design engineer and
stamped by a licensed professional Fire Protection Engineer.
D. Shop drawings shall include all requirements specified in NFPA-13, section 6-1 in
making shop drawings and/or as specified herein and shall be prepared to
include but not limited to the following:
1. Building Plans - 1/8" = V-0" scale (minimum scale).
2. Site Plans - 1" = 40'-0" scale (minimum scale).
3. Cross Sections - 1/8" = 1'-0" scale (minimum scale).
4. Riser Elevations - 1/4" = 1'-0" scale (minimum scale).
5. Details - 1/4" = V-0" scale (minimum scale).
6. Flow Test Data as specified herein.
E. Shop drawings shall indicate all sections of pipe to be shop welded and type of
welded fittings used.
F. Shop drawings shall also be prepared to include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Riser plans, elevations and sections.
2. All hanger and seismic restraint details.
3. Anti-freeze loop details.
4. Sprig details for open web joist construction.
5. Sprig details for steel beam construction.
6. Recessed wall indicator posts.
7. Inspector's test and drain details.
8. Auxiliary drain details.
9. Front canopy details.
10. Arm over details for sprinkler heads above and below the ceilings of
refrigerated Meat Rooms, and all refrigerated chests and freezers.
G. Shop drawings shall indicate the following items out of function to show the
proper relationship of the sprinkler system to the building.
1. All walls, partitions, elevators, stairwells, soffits, awnings, chests,
freezers, cooking hoods, ovens, retarders and ceiling the patterns.
2. All HVAC registers, grilles, flues, vent hoods, major mechanical
equipment and ducts.
3. All recessed halide, fluorescent and incandescent lighting in areas with
finished ceilings and/or inside chests (coolers and freezers).
4. All major structural elements.
5. All ceiling and wall mounted refrigeration fan and gravity coil units inside
chests, freezers and cooled rooms.
H. Shop drawings shall name all areas, rooms, chests, freezers, cooking hoods,
ovens and retarders.
I. The Contractor shall prepare a separate reflected ceiling plan showing the exact
location of all sprinkler heads (without denoting piping) indicating the items out of
function specified here in paragraph G.1, G.2, G.3 and G.S.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-6
9. GUARANTEE
A. Attention is directed to the provisions of the General Conditions regarding
guarantees and warranties for work under this Section.
B. All sprinkler system alterations and additions, as specified under this section
shall be guaranteed for one (1) year against defective equipment, materials
and/or workmanship. The Sprinkler Contractor under this guarantee shall repair
and replace any defective equipment, materials and/or workmanship at no cost to
the Owner. The guarantee period shall begin on the date a successful
acceptance test is made.
C. The guarantee shall not be construed as requiring the Contractor to render
service or maintenance required in the normal operation of the equipment, or to
make repairs that may be needed due to the Owner's negligence, abuse or
breakage.
10. SHOP DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days after the award of the sprinkler
contract and prior to any fabrication, submit complete shop drawings with
hydraulic calculations to the following for approval, review, comment and/or
coordination:
1. Factory Mutual (Stop & Shop's Insurance Carrier) - Eight (8) complete
sets of shop drawings with hydraulic calculations to the FM District Office
having jurisdiction for review and comments (plan review letter) with
distribution to:
a. Factory Mutual
b. General Contractor
C. Sprinkler Contractor
d. Architect (3 copies)
e. Fire Protection Engineer
f. Stop & Shop Engineering Department
g. Local Fire Department
h. Local Building Department
2. Architect - Six (6) complete sets of shop drawings with hydraulic
calculations (unapproved by FM) distributed for approval and review with
combined comments to:
a. General Contractor
b. Sprinkler Contractor
C. Architect (3 copies)
d. Fire Protection Engineer
e. Stop & Shop Engineering Department
3. General Contractor - A minimum of five (5) complete sets of shop
drawings for coordination to:
a. General Contractor
b. Sprinkler Contractor
C. Plumbing Contractor
d. HVAC Contractor
e. Electrical Contractor
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-5
D. "Install': install materials, equipment or assemblies furnished by other trades or
the Owner. ...,,,
E. "Concealed": where used in connection with the installation of piping and
accessories, shall mean that which is hidden from sight as in chases, furred
spaces, pipe shafts or above suspended ceilings.
F. "Exposed": shall mean not"concealed" as defined above.
G. "UL": Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
H. "FM": Factory Mutual "Approved" shall refer to approval by Factory Mutual.
I. "NFPA": National Fire Protection Association.
J. "Listed": shall refer to materials or equipment included in a list published by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory that maintains periodic inspection of
production of listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states either that
the equipment or material meets nationally recognized standards or has been
tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.
K. "Chests" shall mean all coolers and freezers.
L. "LWS": Local Water Supplier.
M. "GC": the Project General Contractor.
N. "PC": the Project Plumbing Contractor.
O. "EC": the Project Electrical Contractor.
8. DESIGN INFORMATION
A. Upon award of the contract for the Work under this section, the Contractor shall
contact Arkwright Insurance representative Howard Marshall, Senior Account
Executive, Arkwright Mutual Insurance, 225 Wyman Street, P. O. Box 9198,
Waltham, MA 02254-9198, Telephone Number (781) 906-3020, extension 3010;
Fax (781) 906-3025 for purpose of filing for a FM Index Number and assignment
to the proper Factory Mutual District Office having jurisdiction and a Loss
Prevention Consultant associated with this Project.
B. For interpretation and/or consultation of FM standards, insurance requirements
and/or specifications under this section, the Contractor shall contact Arkwright
Insurance representative Howard Marshall, Arkwright Mutual Insurance, 225
Wyman Street, P. O. Box 9198, Waltham, MA 02254-9198, Telephone Number
(781) 906-3020, extension 3010; Fax (781) 906-3025. For further clarification
and/or approvals for substitutions or changes associated with the Work under
this section, the Contractor shall contact Stop & Shop Fire Protection Engineer,
Marc Wall, 1385 Hancock Street, 9th floor, Quincy, MA 02169, Telephone
Number (617) 770-7148.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-4
Mutual, Alarm Company, General Contractor, Stop & Shop representatives
(Construction, Engineering Departments and Store Manager) prior to doing so.
C. The Contractor shall resubmit on all documents (shop drawings, hydraulic
calculations, equipment submittals, etc.) specified herein, which after initial
review are returned marked "Not Approved".
D. The sprinkler system shall be maintained in operation at all times when system is
not being worked on. System shall be operational all nights and weekends.
5. CODES, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS
A. All work shall conform to all applicable State and Local Codes, and the latest
editions of the following National Fire Protection Association Codes and
Standards, as modified by Factory Mutual.
NFPA Standards: FM Data Sheet:
1. 13 - Sprinkler Systems #2 -8N
2. 231 - General Storage, Indoor #8 - 0 & #8 - 9
3. 231 C - Rack Storage of Materials #8 - 9
4. 17A- Liquid Agent Extinguishing System None
5. 96 - Cooking Equipment Vapor Removal None
6. 30 - Flammable & Combustible Liquids Code #7 -29
7. 30B - Storage & Manufacture of Aerosol Products #7 - 29S
8. 654 Fire & Dust Explosion Prevention in Chemical Dye,
Pharmaceutical & Plastics Industries #7 - 76
"^ 9. 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems #4 -4N
10. 13 - Protection of Piping Against Damage Where #2 - 8
Subject to Earthquakes
B. Where the requirements of this section are more stringent than the said
standards, the requirements of this section shall govern.
C. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements cited by the Local Authorities
and/or the LWS and shall provide any additional requirements at his own
expense. Consultation with said authorities prior to submitting a bid is strongly
advised.
6. PERMITS AND FEES
A. Sprinkler Contractor shall file all required notices and plans with proper
authorities and shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, inspections, tests
and costs incidental to his work. No work shall commence prior to this.
7. DEFINITIONS
A. "Contractor": the Fire Protection Contractor and/or of his Subcontractors,
Vendors or Suppliers.
B. "Provide": furnish and install.
C. "Furnish": purchase and deliver to another trade or the Owner for installation.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-3
15. All sprinkler heads, sprinkler guards and escutcheons.
16. Wet pipe systems alterations and additions.
17. Chest penetrations and sealing of same.
18. Pipe escutcheons
19. Sprinkler Guards
20. All work specified herein
21. Phasing of all work to allow new systems to replace existing while the
facility remains in operation.
C. Refer to reflected ceiling plans for all areas having lighting alterations and
relocate existing sprinkler heads at all locations in conflict. Contractor must field
review, prior to submitting bid.
D. The work under this Contract shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
transportation, insurance, temporary protection, supervision and incidental items
essential for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically
mentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper
installation and operation of all Fire Protection Systems as indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein.
E. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must
be met by the Fire Protection Contractor for the installation of all work as shown
on the Drawings and as specified herein.
F. Give all notices, file all Plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvals from
authorities having jurisdiction for this Work. Include all fees in the Bid Price.
3. WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. The following items of work are to be done by others and shall not be included in
the Work of this section. However, it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor
to supply the Subcontractors with the necessary information, drawings and
supervision so that they can properly complete their phase of the installation.
1. Electrical wiring and connections to all flow switches, supervisory
switches, pressure switches, bells and alarms associated with the
sprinkler system and hood fire suppression systems.
2. Fire extinguishers in the building.
3. Excavating and backfilling.
4. Cutting, patching, box-outs and holes through metal deck.
5. Alarm systems.
6. Hood fire suppression systems.
7. Cutting holes in ceiling tiles.
4. COORDINATION
A. All work under this section shall be coordinated with all other disciplines involved
with the Project. Any request for deviation from the requirements of this section
shall be submitted to Stop & Shop Engineering Department in writing for review
and approval prior to the start of any Work under this section.
B. The Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate all valve closures which may impair
existing building fire protection systems with the local Fire Department, Factory
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-2
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements affecting this Section. Include in and make part of this Section all
work related under other Sections and required on all Drawings and Documents.
B. Before submitting bid, visit the site and examine conditions under which the work
has to be performed. Report to the Owner any conditions which might adversely
affect the work to be performed.
C. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited
to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of
this Specification. When a conflict occurs between Section 15300 and the
aforementioned sections, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. Coordinate work with all other trades affecting work of this Section. Cooperate
with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work of this Contract.
2. SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall provide complete hydraulically designed sprinkler system
alterations and additions for coverage of all store areas affected, as shown on
the latest Architectural Drawings and Stop & Shop Fixture Plan (F-1). Areas
shall include portions of the first floor and mezzanine levels. All new roofs,
awnings, canopies, below canopies, electrical closets, refrigerated chests and
freezers, etc. shall be sprinklered where required by NFPA, FM, State and Local
Codes and/or Local Authorities at the expense of the Sprinkler Contractor.
B. The following items of work are to be included in the responsibility of the
Contractor as Work of this section:
1. Complete building sprinkler system alterations and additions based on the
latest Architectural Drawings and Fire Protection Specifications.
2. Flow Tests
3. Shop drawings.
4. As built Drawings.
5. Equipment Submittals.
6. Coordination of the Work of all other trades.
7. Sleeves and inserts.
8. Application, securing and payment for all permits, certificates, taxes, fees,
inspections, tests and approvals required in connection with the Work
under this section.
9. Testing and flushing of sprinkler system piping.
10. Pre-Bid site visit to determine existing conditions and extent of the Work.
11. All work shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
12. Hangers, clamps and rods.
13. Seismic restraints.
14. Pipe, pipe escutcheons and fittings.
FIRE PROTECTION SECTION - 15300-1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
INDEX
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................1
2. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................1
3. WORK NOT INCLUDED..................................................................................................2
4. COORDINATION.............................................................................................................2
5. CODES, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS ..................................................................3
6. PERMITS AND FEES......................................................................................................3
7. DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................3
8. DESIGN INFORMATION.................................................................................................4
9. GUARANTEE...................................................................................................................5
10. SHOP DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS...............................................5
11. EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS............................................................................................7
12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS....................................................................................................8
13. WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS HANDLING AND DELIVERY........................................8
14. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:...............................................................................9
15. DESIGN CRITERIA .........................................................................................................9
16. SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS........................................................................12
17. CUTTING AND WELDING.............................................................................................20
18. PIPING...........................................................................................................................21
19. FITTINGS.......................................................................................................................21
20. HANGERS.....................................................................................................................21
21. SLEEVES.......................................................................................................................24
22. VALVES.........................................................................................................................24
23. FLUSHING CONNECTIONS.........................................................................................25
24. DRAINS .........................................................................................................................25
25. SPRINKLER HEADS .....................................................................................................25
26. SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS........................................................................................26
27. SPRINKLER GUARDS ..................................................................................................26
28. ESCUTCHEONS ...........................................................................................................27
29. SIGNS............................................................................................................................27
30. FLUSHING AND TESTING PIPE ..................................................................................28
31. FLOW TEST ..................................................................................................................28
32. SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .........................................29
33. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ................................................................................................29
34. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING.......................................................................................29
35. PHASING.......................................................................................................................29
FIRE PROTECTION - INDEX-1
DIVISION 15
MECHANICALS
SECTION 10160 — PRECAST CONCRETE BOLLARDS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Furnish Precast Concrete Bollard indicated on drawings or specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing & Material
1. ASTM C33
2. ASTM C150
3. ASTM C31
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, shop drawings and samples.
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data edited specifically for proposed
system, including the following specific information:
a. Detailed specification of construction fabrication.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions
c. Maintenance literature
d. Product warranty
2. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, general construction, component connections,
anchoring methods, hardware, and installation procedures.
3. Samples as requested by Architect.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Manufacturer to be pre-qualified by Owner prior to bidding. Failure to
comply will result in disqualification of bid. Manufacturer to have at least five years experience in the
manufacturer of precast concrete bollards field proven for at least five years.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall submit a written warranty for precast products for the period of two years upon
acceptance of products.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer for Precast Concrete Bollards:
1. Thunderstone- Lincoln, Nebraska as distributed by Consolidated Brick, Manchester, NH
Mold#STO-C1, Color#T-01, hammered finish, 12"dia., 7'-0" long (3'-0"exposed)
2. or equal as approved by S&S
B. Other manufacturers shall comply with minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on
drawings or specified herein.
C. All Precast products for this project shall be of one manufacturer
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:ASTM C150 specifications for Portland Cement.
B. Aggregates. All aggregates to meet ASTM C33 specifications, to be cleaned of foreign matter and
properly graded to size.
C. Coloring. Pigments used shall be inorganic, resistant to alkalinity and used as per manufacturers
recommendations.
ew
END OF SECTION
Precast Concrete Bollards— 10160 - 1
SECTION 10150 -TOILET PARTITIONS & ACCESSORIES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install toilet partitions and accessories as shown on the Drawings and/or herein
specified.
1.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and
exposure to the elements.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All toilet partitions, urinal screens, doors, etc. shall be "Academy"as manufactured by
Sanymetal of Somerset, KY. All toilet partitions, urinal screens, doors, etc. shall receive the
"Sanyacrylic"finish. The Sanymetal color shall be"#57—Dark Beige". Equal Products from All
American Metal Corp. of Freeport, NY shall be acceptable. The All American Metal Corp. color
shall be"#90—Terra Cotta". NO OTHER SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE ACCEPTED.
1. All partitions and urinal screens shall be floor mounted and overhead braced. Provide all
necessary blocking, miscellaneous iron, etc. for support of the partitions and screens.
2. All toilet stall doors shall be self-closing as required to satisfy handicapped accessibility
requirements.
3. All wall anchors shall be continuous (56 1/2" long)aluminum brackets. Plastic is not
acceptable.
4. Include guards, door coat hook/bumper and all necessary hardware.
5. Provide shop drawings for approval before start of fabrication.
6. Plastic, plastic laminate, etc.type partitions are not acceptable.
B. Provide mirrors at each sink equal to "Bobrick#13165-2436".
C. Remove and re-install existing grab bars.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all toilet partitions, urinal screens, doors, grab bars, accessories, etc. in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions and the Drawings.
B. Adjust doors as required.
C. Install mirrors at each toilet room sink location, mounted to comply with all handicapped
requirements.
D. Leave all partitions, doors, dispensers, etc. in perfect working order.
END OF SECTION
e
Toilet Partitions &Accessories—10150 - 1
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight.
G. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6-inches from outside corners and 3 inches
from inside corners. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
H. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern or numerical
sequence from roll, whichever is applicable.
I. Apply wall covering to electrical, telephone and other wall plates prior to replacing.
J. Where wall covering tucks into door frame reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops,
apply covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination.
Ensure full contact bond.
K. Install termination trim where vinyl does not stop at a comer.
L. Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering
sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth.
M. Continue wall covering through jambs and heads of drywall openings.
N. At completion of wall covering application, replace all accessories, plates and similar
items to original position.
O. During application of wall coverings, protect the work of other surfaces against soilage
and damage.
3.3 DEFECTS
A. Replace wall coverings applied to defective substrate surfaces. Correct defects in
completed wall coverings.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Wall Covering Schedule for Mezzanine:
1. Wall Covering for Manager's Office shall be Wall Covering No.4.
2. Wall Covering for Conference/Community Room shall be Wall Covering NoA.
3. Wall Covering for Hallway and General Office shall be Wall Covering No. 4.
B. Wall Covering Schedule for The Customer Service Area:
1. Wall Covering for Customer area shall be Wall Covering No.4.
END OF SECTION
Vinyl Wall Covering—09950-3
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl-coated wall covering shall meet or exceed FS-CCC-W-408A for Type 1, II, or III,
and CFFA-W-101-A Quality Standard for Vinyl Coated Fabric Wall Covering. Material
shall contain mildew and germicidal inhibitors, and shall meet cleanability tests.
B. Vinyl wall covering material shall be based on those wall coverings as indicated below,
as scheduled on the drawings, and as indicated in the Stop&Shop Decor Drawings.
Wall Covering NoA:
Distributor: D.L. Couch
Product Name: Etchwork LA
Product Description: Pattern No.114619A
Contact: (800)433-0790
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to
substrate. Water based types, mildew resistant, non-staining,
B. Substrate Filler:As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers,
compatible with substrate.
C. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Type as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
2.3 WALL MOULDING
A. See drawings and Stop and Shop Decor drawings for wall transition mouldings.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler, sand smooth.
B. Wash impervious surfaces with trisodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry.
C. Sand glossy surfaces. Shellac marks that may bleed.
D. Remove electrical, telephone, and other wall plates and covers.
E. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.
F. Apply two coats of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand
smooth. Vacuum clean.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply adhesive to back of wall covering with brush or roller in thin, even coats over
entire panel surface immediately prior to application of wall covering. Smooth wall
covering to eliminate bubbles and wrinkles and ensure adhesion to wall covering
C. Use wall covering in roll number sequence or in pattern sequence, whichever is
applicable.
D. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached
to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/2-inch
below top of resilient base. Run fabric behind cabinets and splashes 2 inches.
E. Hang wall covering by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns as
applicable. Hang non-matched patterns by overlapping the edges and double cutting
through both thicknesses with zinc or aluminum strip back-up to prevent cutting the
substrate (Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces). It is preferred to razor trim
edges on a flat work table.All ceiling-to-wall and wall-to-adjacent material cuts shall be
true to lines and conform to adjacent outline.
F. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets
Vinyl Wall Covering—09950-2
SECTION 09950 -VINYL WALL COVERING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, and Division I General
Requirements.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Section includes surface preparation, prime painting and wall covering, including
application materials and incidental services but not limited to the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01200—Submittals and Substitutions
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical
characteristics, durability,fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
C. Submit two samples of each type, color,texture, finish, and pattern wall covering 8
inches by 10 inches in size.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in installing wall fabrics with three
years documented experience.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-
burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Flame Spread 25
Fuel Contribution 35
Smoke Development 50
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the
temperature ranges required by the adhesive or vinyl covering product manufacturer.
B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before during and after installation of adhesive wall
covering.
1.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 25 lineal feet of each color and pattern of wall covering. Material shall be from
the same production run and dye lot as material installed.
B. Package and label each roll; store where directed.
C. Extra material shall be furnished as part of the Work of this Section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.
B. Do not store roll goods on end.
Vinyl Wall Covering—09950-1
3.7 Paint colors
A. For information sake, the following is a listing of the miscellaneous paint colors required:
Sherwin Williams#SW1661 - Silent Yellow LRV 81%
Benjamin Moore#2152-70 - Mayonnaise
Benjamin Moore Interior Ready Mix—Decorators White
Benjamin Moore#2065-20—Dark Royal Blue
Benjamin Moore#2152-60—Mannequin Cream —Semi-gloss Finish
Benjamin Moore#AC-10—San Clemente Rose
Benjamin Moore#2173-30—Salmon Stream
Benjamin Moore Exterior Ready Mix—Montgomery White
END OF SECTION
Painting—09900 -8
3.6 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The following Painting Schedule shows the number of coats required for walls and ceilings.
Doors, door frames, pipes, structural steel members in ceiling or walls and elsewhere,
miscellaneous metals, etc. which are not itemized in this Schedule shall be painted as specified
elsewhere in this Section. See also the Decor Plans and the Room Finish Schedule on the
Drawings for specific requirements.
AREA CEILING WALLS
GRADE LEVEL
Sales Area (includes No paint on acoustic 3 coats -see paragraph 3.13
Pharmacy, Bottle Return ceilings Painting Supermarket Sales Area
Customer area &carriages
Vestibules 2 Coats on GWB 3 Coats on GWB
Bakery& Bakery Work Area No paint No paint
incl. Retarder& Freezer
Customer Area No paint on acoustic 3 coats where exposed
ceilings 1 coat primer behind Wallcovering
Storage, No paint on acoustic 3 coats
Closet, Areas to be ceilings
Determined
Stairs No paint on acoustic 3 coats, except at FRP, 2 coats at
ceilings risers, rails and other parts of
stairs
Service Department No paint on acoustic Same as Sales Area
ceiling
Corridor to Toilets No Paint No Paint
Florist Department No paint on ceiling Same as Sales Area
Deli and Fish Service No paint on acoustic No paint at FRP or ceramic the
Areas ceiling
Deli-Back Room/Work Area No Paint No paint at FRP or ceramic tile
All Chests No Paint No Paint
Meat Cutting Room No Paint No paint, 3 coats enamel on trim
Bottle Return No Paint No Paint
Storage Area
Receiving Areas No Paint Paint GWB & Plywood 3 coats
Painting—09900 -7
F. Final Paint finish shall be applied over shop or field applied primer if not shop primed. All door -
frames at the front mezzanine shall be painted with two (2)finish coats of Interior Latex Gloss
Enamel over shop or field applied primer if not shop primed. All toilet room door frames shall
receive Benjamin Moore#AC-10—San Clemente Rose on the inside face of the frame to the
door stop.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING DETAILS
A. See the Painting Schedule below for specifications as to which interior walls and ceilings require
painting.
B. See other parts of this specification for painting requirements for exterior surfaces, doors, pipes,
miscellaneous metals, structural steel, etc.
C. Paint plywood panelboards in various rooms to which electrical, telephone and/or similar
equipment will be attached one coat of black semi-gloss enamel before the equipment is
attached.
D. Paint the visible portions of the interior of all supply or return ducts in the Sales Area one coat of
flat black enamel.
E. The surfaces behind one-way glass shall receive two coats of flat black paint.
F. Should items of miscellaneous metals, structural steel, etc. be delivered without shop primer,
this Contractor shall provide primer as specified and the supplier of such materials shall pay all
costs.
G. The following items shall be painted one coat of"Pittsburgh 'Metaleaf Aluminum Paint"and one
coat of finish paint to match the finish in the adjacent area, in finished areas only:
i. All exposed soil, drain and waste ferrous piping, etc.
ii. All copper and galvanized pipes.
iii. All conduits, pipes, etc.
iv. If pipe or conduit of any kind requires painting then valves, fittings, pipe hangers and
related accessories shall receive the same treatment.
H. All pipe coverings exposed in finished areas shall receive two coats of paint to match the la w%
adjacent area.
I. Paint parallel 4"wide strips in one heavy coat of safety yellow 12"o.c. on the floor between
doors as indicated for Emergency Exits.
J. Paint all concrete filled steel pipe bollards two coats of yellow enamel.
K. Paint floor pallet positions in storage areas, as directed by Stop&Shop, in one heavy coat of
safety yellow.
L. In food preparation areas with FRP wall finish, paint all exposed metal frames.
M. In food preparation areas with FRP wall finish, paint all exposed wood frames with clear varnish.
N. Paint 3"high letters in safety yellow on the exterior of each emergency exit door, to read
"EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR". Other doors to be painted to read "NOT AN EXIT".
O. Paint the top edge of all sidewalk curbs (6"wide)as well as the front face of the curbs one
heavy coat of safety yellow. Stop the yellow paint where the sidewalk ramp meets the pavement
grade.
P. If metal is galvanized, first coat with SW Galvite Primer or approved equal. Then apply, after
proper drying time, finish coats as above.
Q. Omit prime coat where item is shop primed.
Painting—09900 -6
I. CONCRETE & MASONRY: Remove all dirt, dust, oil, grease, stains and efflorescence.
Roughen when needed to provide good adhesion for paint. DO NOT PAINT ANY MASONRY
UNTIL MASONRY CONTRACTOR HAS COMPLETED HIS WASH DOWN.
3.2 SCHEDULE OF PAINT TYPES, FINISHES& COVERAGE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior:
1. Concrete Masonry(Where not pre-finished):
a. One coat of"VIP 1200"acrylic alkali resistant surfacer conditioner
b. Two coats of"VIP Last-O-Coat 8100"ter-polymer elastomeric high-build waterproof
coating
c. Color for both products to be "Stop& Shop Beige". The VIP products are
manufactured by the VIP Division, VIP/Lighthouse Products, PO Box 1253, New
Smyrna Beach, FL 03270, tele: (800)228-5537.
2. Metal Doors, Frames, Louvers, Bollards, Pipe Rails, and Miscellaneous Metals, etc.:
a. One prime coat of SW Kromik Metal Primer
b. Two finish coats of SW Industrial Enamel
B. Interior:
1. Wood, Natural Finish: (Trim, Window Casings, including back sealing of any wood which will
be in contact with the floor, with one coat of varnish)
a. One prime coat of Clear Polyurethane Varnish, Gloss Finish
b. Two finish coats of Clear Polyurethane Varnish, Dull Finish
2. Drywall: (Flat or eggshell enamel as directed by Stop & Shop)
a. One prime coat of Latex Primer
b. One or two finish coats (see Schedule below)of Interior Latex Eggshell for Sales
Area walls, all other areas Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel
3. Masonry& Concrete:
a. One prime coat of Block Filler
b. Two finish coats of Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel
4. Wood, Painted Finish &Metal Doors, Frames, Pipe Rails, Bollards, etc.:
a. One prime coat of Enamel Undercoater
b. Two finish coats Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel (See Decor Plan for color)
C. If item is shop primed, field applied primer coat can be omitted.
3.3 PAINTING MASONRY
A. Exposed exterior concrete masonry block shall be painted (except at colored block)as specified
above.
B. Materials shall be applied according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Latex or similar paints will not be considered an acceptable substitute for the specified paint.
D. Before any materials are ordered for the exterior, the Contractor shall prepare a 3'x 6' sample
panel using the specified (or approved equal) products.
B. Obtain approval of the sample from Stop &Shop before proceeding further.
E. All raked joints shall be brushed to insure proper coverage.
F. No paint shall be applied to the interior of the exterior masonry walls until the exterior painting is
complete and the walls have been given adequate time to completely dry out.
3.4 PAINTING THE SALES AREA
A. The entire Sales Area shall be given three (3)coats on all walls, gypsum wallboard ceiling drops
and soffits.
B. Hollow metal doors and all door frames (new&existing)shall be painted to the floor as specified
above.
C. Sales Area columns shall be painted 2 coats of Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,over shop
primer.
D. Wood doors to have a clear natural finish.
e"k E. All Sales Area metal doors and frames, including the interior faces of the emergency exit doors
that exit directly from the Sales Area, shall be painted with 2 finish coats of Interior Latex.
Painting—09900 -5
G. All wallcoverings shall be as specified in the decor drawings and the Stop & Shop Decor
Drawings. It is strongly suggested that the wallcoverings be purchased through Stop & Shop for
quality control.
2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS
A. A space shall be designated by the Construction Manager/General Contractor for the storage of
all paint, materials, and tools. The storage space shall be kept clean and adequately protected
from damage at all times and all reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent fire.
B. All materials shall be stored in sealed and labeled containers.
C. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials shall be of the highest quality and shall be
approved by the Architect.
D. Necessary materials not specifically covered by this specification shall be subject to approval by
the Architect. The Contractor shall submit product data to the Architect prior to ordering any
such materials.
E. Substitutions from Decor Plans will not be permitted.
F. Resin-emulsion and similar water thinned paints are not acceptable.
2.5 MATERIAL STANDARDS
A. Raw Linseed Oil:ASTM D-234.
B. Boiled Linseed Oil: ASTM D-260.
C. Turpentine:ASTM D-13.
D. Shellac: Pure, white or orange gum, cut in pure denatured alcohol, using 5 pounds of gum to 1
gallon of alcohol.
E. Putty: White lead whiting putty.
F. Patching Plaster: White, non-shrinking, containing no lime; uniform set and quality.
G. Tinting Colors: Where required for oil paint, shall be ground in pure linseed oil. Colors shall be
non-fading.
H. Colors: Selected by Stop &Shop. Verify and obtain approval of colors before starting any work.
The Contractor shall prepare samples at the job site, as required, until colors and textures are
satisfactory to Stop& Shop.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING, PREPARATION AND PRETREATMENT OF SURFACES
A. All hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, sprinkler
heads, fire detection elements, diffusers and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and
which are not to be painted, shall be removed, masked or otherwise protected prior to surface
preparation and painting operations.
B. Exposed nails and other ferrous metal on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water
thinned paints shall be spot-primed with zinc dust, zinc oxide, basic lead silicon chromate or zinc
chromate primer.
C. Surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to painting. Cleaning solvents shall be
of low toxicity and shall have a flash point above 100°F.
D. Cleaning and painting shall be scheduled so that dust and contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
E. WOOD: Sandpaper to provide a smooth, uniform surface and then dust off with a tack cloth.
After priming coat has dried, apply putty as previously specified.
F. STEEL& IRON: Remove grease, scale, rust or dust and touch-up any chipped or abraded
places on items which have been shop primed. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or other
means as necessary to produce a satisfactory surface for paint.
G. GYPSUM WALLBOARD:All taping, spackling and sanding of gypsum wallboard shall be done
by the Drywall Contractor.
H. GYPSUM WALLBOARD TO RECEIVE WALLCOVERINGS: Provide wall sizing per the
wallcovering manufacturer's standards prior to wallcovering installation.
Painting—09900 .4
1.7 CLEANING
A. Cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers
or destroyed at the end of each day.
B. Upon completion of the work, all staging, scaffolding and containers shall be removed from the
site and/or disposed of in an approved manner.
C. Upon completion, remove all paint, oil and stains where it has been spilled, splashed or
spattered on adjacent surfaces, and the entire job shall be left clean and acceptable.
1.8 MAINTENANCE STOCK FOR THE OWNER
A. At the completion of the work, supply to the Owner the following quantities of each different type
of paint and of each different color used on the project for his use in maintaining the project:
1. Exterior masonry paint-5 gallons.
2. Interior sales area drywall paint-5 gallons.
3. Exterior wood trim stain - 1 gallon.
4. Exterior fiber-cement siding paint-2 gallons.
5. Each other type and color of paint- 1 gallon.
B. Paint for maintenance purposes shall be in new unopened cans.
1.9 GUARANTEE
A. All work of this section shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1)year from the date of final
acceptance of the entire building. The Contractor will be required to repair or repaint any
surfaces which become defective.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The term "paint"as used herein shall include enamels, paints, stains, varnishes, sealers,
cement-emulsion filler and other coatings, whether used as a prime, intermediate or finish coat.
The term "wallcovering as used herein shall include wallpaper, vinyl wallcoverings, carpet type
(Hemp)wallcoverings, etc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All material shall be delivered to the building in the original containers, with labels intact and
seals unbroken. Each container shall clearly show the manufacturer's name, product name,
formula or specification number, batch number, color, quantity involved, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's formulation number and manufacturer's directions.
B. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers of no larger than 5 gallons.
C. Materials shall conform to the specifications shown in the painting schedule herein and to the
requirements hereinafter specified.
D. Contractor inspection responsibility shall be as specified in paragraph "2.4 Quality Assurance
Provisions".
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Except as specified, painting and finishing materials for use in the work shall be first quality of
type and brands produced for each particular kind of material required and shall be products of
Benjamin Moore(BM), Pittsburgh Paints (PP), and Sherwin Williams (SW), unless otherwise
noted.
B. Materials for all coats on any one surface shall be of the same manufacturer, except where a
metal primer is used.
C. All paints shall be ready mixed.
D. Thinning of paints shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Job mixing and tinting may be done only with the express written approval of the Architect.
F. All paints to be used on the project shall be "No Odor, Zero VOC" products.
Painting —09900 -3
B. The following work is also not part of the work of this section:
1. Painting of concealed work.
2. Factory finishing.
3. Shop painting and/or field touch-up of shop primer on structural steel, steel joists and
steel deck.
4. Shop painting of materials as specified in various sections.
1.4 SCHEDULE AND COLORS
A. Before ordering materials, each manufacturer and each type of paint and color shall be
approved by the Architect.
B. Within 45 days after award of the Contract, submit a schedule to the Architect for approval
listing manufacturer and exact product description for each coat specified under 3.2 and 3.6
below.
1.5 WORKMANSHIP IN GENERAL
A. All work shall be done by skilled mechanics in a workmanlike manner. All materials shall be
evenly applied, so as to be free from sags, runs, crawls, or other defects. All coats shall be of
the proper consistency and well brushed out or rolled so as to show the minimum of brush or lap
marks, except varnish and enamel, which shall be uniformly flowed on. All brushes and rollers
shall be clean and in good condition.
B. All spaces shall be broom clean before painting is started and all surfaces to be painted shall be
dry.
C. Temperature of spaces in building where painting is being done or where it is drying shall be
maintained above 50°F.
D. No exterior painting shall be performed in damp or rainy weather or until the surface has
thoroughly dried from the effects of such weather or when temperature is below 50°F.
E. Before painting, all dust, dirt, plaster, rust, corrosion, grease, and other extraneous matter which
would affect the finished work shall be removed. Finish hardware shall be removed prior to
painting, replaced when painting is completed. Access doors shall be opened while painting and
left open to dry.
F. No work shall be done under conditions that are unsuitable for the production of good results.
Commencement of any painting work shall indicate unqualified approval of surface conditions by
this contractor and acceptance of responsibility for correcting any defects.
G. Finish work shall be uniform in appearance, of approved color and with sharp, straight edges
where it butts other materials or colors.
H. All coats of paint shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
I. Adequate drying time shall be allowed between coats. As a general rule, use the following
times, unless the manufacturer's written instructions require longer times:
1. For exterior work, allow 2 -4 days.
2. For interior work, a minimum of 24 hours.
J. Apply shellac to all knots, pitch spots and sapwood in wood to be painted.
K. Putty all nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects. Putty for natural finished woodwork
shall match finish as closely as possible.
L. All parts of molding and ornaments shall be left clean and true to details.
M. Sides, tops and bottoms of all doors shall be painted same as surfaces.
N. Spray painting shall be allowed on this project.
O. Tint all primers to match finish coats.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide, install and maintain all drop cloths, barricades and other forms of protection as required
to safeguard and keep clean all adjoining work and equipment of others that will not be painted.
B. Freshly painted surfaces shall be legibly posted as such immediately following their completion.
C. Protect all painted surfaces until the final acceptance of the building by the Owner, correct any
damages occurring prior to that acceptance.
Painting—09900 -2
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all painting as shown on the drawings,
reasonably implied and/or herein specified. All work done under this section shall be in
accordance with the Architectural and Decor Plans.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this section shall include careful examination of the Drawings (including the Decor
Plans)to determine quantities, locations, types and details of Painting work and related work
described in this section, including but not limited to the following as scheduled or noted on the
Drawings:
1. Exterior ferrous metals including hollow metal doors and frames, channel iron frames,
pipe rails, bollards, galvanized metals, louvers, exposed lintels, pipes extending through
the roof and walls, roof mounted equipment support frames, etc.
2. Exterior EIFS siding.
3. Exterior concrete masonry units.
4. Interior drywall surfaces (including prime coat only at all walls which are to be covered
by various wallcoverings).
5. Interior concrete masonry units where exposed to view.
6. Interior, exposed, ferrous metals including steel, doors, frames, metal pan stairs, pipe
rails, access doors,etc.
7. Mechanical and electrical equipment.
took, 8. Interior wood surfaces, millwork,wood doors, frames, trim, etc.
9. Lettering of emergency exit doors.
10. Interior walicoverings as shown on the plans.
1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. The following surfaces will not require painting (unless specifically noted otherwise):
1. Glass.
2. Exterior concrete.
3. Colored Concrete Block Masonry.
4. Brick Masonry.
5. Brass.
6. Metal Roofing panels.
7. Aluminum storefront work.
8. Anodized aluminum.
9. Spun aluminum exhaust fans.
10. Membrane roofing.
11. Roof top HVAC units.
12. Refrigeration equipment(except for steel support frames).
13. Stainless steel.
14. Ceramic tile
15. Concrete floors (except for exit striping and pallet positions).
16. Acoustical ceilings.
17. FRP finishes.
18. Roof or mezzanine framing including concrete, metal deck, steel joists and structural
steel.
19. Refrigerators, freezers and other walk-in chests.
20. Sprinkler and gas piping above ceilings and in unpainted areas.
21. Copper waterpiping and refrigeration piping, unless in a painted or prefinished area.
22. Backroom and Sales Area furniture, fixtures and equipment furnished by Stop & Shop.
Painting-09900 - 1
D. Fill all holes, depressions and cracks greater than 3/16"deep with polymer concrete (or wear ^"*
coat where applicable by"flash patching"). Saw cut and/or"key-in"all terminations to a
minimum 1/4"thickness at edges of all patches. Fill holes, depressions and cracks to within 1/8"
of surrounding grade and let cure.
E. Re-prime all polymer concrete with primer/sealer.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Epoxy floors are to be installed over steel troweled concrete slab. Provide integral 5" high cove
base (with metal top edge"J" molding)at perimeter of all walls. Epoxy base shall be installed
after the FRP paneling.
B. Provide aluminum edge"L" moulding at all junctures between epoxy flooring and VCT.
C. Epoxy floor to be run into a 1"x 1"groove at the Bakery Freezer door.
D. 6"x 6"samples showing the actual color, texture and thickness shall be submitted to Stop &
Shop for approval prior to placing of final material order.
E. Epoxy flooring system installer shall be approved by the system manufacturer. Installer shall
provide technical qualifications, certified in writing, and shall have facilities to properly install the
specified system. Approval of the installer by Stop& Shop will not be given to any installer with
poor performance history.
3.6 INSPECTION
A. Request acceptance of the primer/sealer coat before application of the Wearcoat commences;
likewise for the Wearcoat before application of the Topcoat.
B. All work that is not acceptable to Stop& Shop and/or the Architect must be corrected before
consideration of final acceptance.
3.7 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove any material spatters and other material that is not where it should be. Remove
masking and covers, taking care not to contaminate surrounding area. 4"%
B. Repair any damage that should arise from either the application effort or from the clean-up
effort.
3.8 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all work for a period of one (1)year from the date of final acceptance of the entire
building by Stop& Shop.
END OF SECTION
*"*#.
Special Floor Coating System—09700 -4
4"k B. Do not proceed with surface preparation and application until surface is acceptable or
authorization is given by the Architect.
C. Ensure that floor drains, proximate equipment and any other items sensitive to dust and
contamination are properly and adequately masked and protected.
D. Commencement of any work under this section shall be construed as evidence that such
inspection has been performed and all surfaces are acceptable and in satisfactory condition to
receive the required surfacings.
E. Any corrective or remedial work required after this acceptance by the Contractor, shall be done
by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Initially, dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, old loose paint and other dry surface
accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming or blow-
down with compressed air.
2. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated with petroleum or other process products shall
be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent or other effective
cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove
accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove
deposits, but only drive them deeper.
3. All concrete floor surfaces shall be visibly dry, especially cracks and other deep
discontinuities, prior to commencing mechanical cleaning and preparation.
B. Mechanical Surface Preparation & Cleaning:
1. All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically cleaned using a Scabbler or
approved equal.All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened
concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes and other similar surface characteristics
shall be removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a minimum profile of 30 mils
and exposing the upper facades of concrete aggregate.
2. Floor areas that are inaccessible to the cleaning machine shall be mechanically
abraded to the same specified degree of cleanliness, soundness and profile using
vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, grinders, needle guns or other suitable
equipment.
3. Cracks in the floor 3/16" and wider, shall be routed out to a minimum 3/4"deep V-
groove of sound concrete and filled with a polymer mortar recommended by the MMA
material manufacturer. Other significant surface discontinuities such as holes, pits,
depressions and exposed aggregate areas (from chemical attack or erosion)shall be
filled with similar material as recommended by the MMA material manufacturer to within
1/2"of surrounding grade level.
4. Allow surface to dry or force dry with heat and circulating air to ensure that all surfaces,
especially discontinuities, are visibly dry.
5. Conduct bond tests on a representative sampling of the surface area and surface
characteristics, especially those areas that had penetrating accumulation of petroleum
products or other chemical contamination. Successful bond tests indicate proper and
adequate cleanliness, soundness, profile and dryness. If bond tests do not break 100%
concrete, repeat surface preparation efforts until successful bond tests have been
achieved. Consult with the manufacturer if problems persist. Do not apply floor coating
system over concrete surfaces where bond tests have failed.
6. Leveling required if depressions in concrete slab surface exceed 1/8" in 10 feet.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. This material shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Open only the containers of components to be used in each specific application. Refer to
manufacturer's data sheets for pot life/temperature relationship to determine size of batches to
mix.
C. Allow for proper curing between coats.
Special Floor Coating System—09700-3
PART 2: PRODUCTS ,..,,k
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Epoxy Floor Systems shall be by"Dur-A-Flex, Inc."Tele: (800)253-3539.
B. Equal materials of other manufacturers may be substituted, with the approval of Stop & Shop.
Requests for substitution will be considered, if submitted a minimum of five (5)days prior to the
date for submittal of bids. Submittal must include all necessary data, samples, etc. required by
Stop & Shop to make an accurate comparison.
C. Floor patching and/or leveling at all Construction and Control Joints within epoxy floor areas
shall be accomplished using either of the following products:
1. "Masco & Speed Top"as manufactured by Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc. of Ayer, MA
(508-772-4444).
2. "Ardex"as manufactured by Ardex, Inc. of Pittsburgh, PA(412-264-4240).
Technical data sheets and samples shall be submitted to Stop &Shop for approval prior to
commencing the Work.
Under no circumstances shall any gypsum based products be used as floor patching and/or
leveling materials.
D. Seal all Construction and Control joints that occur in the epoxy flooring with "Elast-O-Coat"
semi-rigid joint filler by Dur-A-Flex, Inc. over a backer rod. Joint material shall be tinted with Dur-
A-Gard resin to match the adjacent epoxy flooring color.
2.2 APPROVED MATERIALS
A. "Dur-A-Quartz Q-28-33, Standard Finish" multiple component, seamless, decorative,
commercial duty flooring system as manufactured by"Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Nominal thickness shall
be 3/16". Color shall be#33.
B. Greenhouse area only shall be"Dur-A-Quartz Q-11-16, Standard Finish" multiple component,
seamless, decorative, commercial duty flooring system as manufactured by"Dur-A-Flex, Inc.
Nominal thickness shall be 3/16". Color shall be#16.
2.3 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Compressive Strength ASTM D-695 17,500 psi
Tensile Strength ASTM D-638 4,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D-790 6,250 psi
Hardness (Shore D) ASTM D-2240 75-80
Abrasion Resistance, Taber
Abrader, CS17 Wheels,
1000 gm load, 1000 cycles ASTM D-4060 0.024 gm loss
Bond Strength to Concrete ACI-403 335 psi, concrete fails
Tensile Elongation ASTM D-638 7.5 %
Thermal Shock MIL F-52505 No cracking or adhesion loss
Impact Resistance MIL D-3134 No cracking or delamination
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. This subcontractor shall program and perform his work in keeping with the Construction
Manager/General Contractor's projected schedule and shall coordinate his work and cooperate
with all other trades as required to allow for completion of all the work in a timely fashion
allowing for proper curing times and protection of the finished surfaces.
3.2 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED
A. Examine all surfaces to be coated with these materials and report, to the Construction
Manager/General Contractor and the Architect, any conditions that may adversely affect the ,
appearance or performance of the coating systems and which cannot be put into acceptable
condition by the preparatory work specified in Paragraph 3.3.
Special Floor Coating System—09700 -2
SECTION 09700 -SPECIAL FLOOR COATING SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all special floor coating system as shown on the Drawings and/or specified
herein, including but not limited to the following:
1. Special floor coating system in the Bakery Area, Retarder, Deli, Deli Work Area, Deli
Storage, Kitchen Table, Greenhouse, and elsewhere as shown on the floor tile plan.
2. Seamless, integral base in all areas receiving the floor coating system.
3. Control joint epoxy filler
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The finished floor coating system shall be uniform in color, texture and appearance. All edges
that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform
and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edge. The Contractor shall work out an
acceptable masking technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all edges.
B. Surface preparation efforts shall be confirmed by conducting"bond tests" on prepared surfaces
as specified by Paragraph 3.3. Consult with material manufacturer for specific procedure.
C. Reference Standards:
1. ACI 308-Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
2. ACI 302.1 R-80 -Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
3. United States Department of Agriculture Acceptance.
D. Contractor Pre-qualification Requirements:
1. Each bidder shall be a pre-qualified and approved applicator of the specified
manufacturer at the time of bid submittal.
2. Each approved applicator shall have been pre-qualified in all phases of surface
preparation and application of the specified floor coating system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptive data and specific recommendations for initiating, mixing,
application and curing.
B. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)for each respective product being used.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered in original manufacturer's sealed containers,with all pertinent
labels intact and legible.
B. Store materials in a protected area at a temperature between 351 and 80°F.
C. Follow manufacturer's specific instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and
handling.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The material, air and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 351-85°F during application
and curing.
B. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85% and the
surface temperature shall be at least 5°F above the dew point.
C. The surfaces to be coated shall have been prepared as specified in Paragraph "3.3 SURFACE
PREPARATION".
D. Protect all adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and covers.
Special Floor Coating System—09700 - 1
3.7 REPLACEMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Replace all flooring damaged during the construction, prior to store opening.
B. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from resilient flooring, using neutral
type cleaners as recommended by the the manufacturer. Protect installed flooring from damage
by use of heavy kraft paper or other covering.
C. Finishing: After completion of the project and just prior to the final inspection of the work,
thoroughly clean tile floors and accessories.
3.8 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all work for a period of one(1)year from the date of final acceptance of the entire
building by Stop& Shop. Guarantee shall include bleeding through of mastic.
B. Finished VCT floors shall be smooth, flat and free from imperfections of any kind.
END OF SECTION
Resilient Flooring & Carpet Tile—09650 - 5
D. Place tile units with adhesive cement in strict compliance with the manufacturer's ''""k
recommendation. Butt tile units tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings.
Scribe around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and in straight, parallel
lines. Extend tile units into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closet and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future
cutting by repeating on the finish tile as marked on the subfloor. Use chalk or other non-
permanent marking devices.
F. Install tile on covers for such items as occur within the finished resilient tile floor areas. Maintain
the overall continuity of color,joints, and pattern with tile installed in these covers. Tightly
cement edges of tile to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
G. At doors and other unprotected edges where tile is discontinuous, except at walls, partitions,
and storage areas with metal transition strips specified herein, install 1 1/2"x 1/8" polished
rubber strip with 1 bullnose edge, black.
H. Resilient tile must be laid before store fixtures are installed. DO NOT OMIT tile below Stop &
Shop's shelving, casework or fixtures.
I. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable.
J. Tightly cement tile to sub-base without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks through tile, or other surface imperfections.
K. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to the and secure with adhesive.
L. Neatly scribe the to walls, columns and other protruding surfaces.
M. The Electrical Contractor will be responsible to provide adequate lighting for the floor tile
installation. A minimum of 30 footcandles at the floor is required.
N. Scrape and vacuum clean all control joints. Fill all joints with black cut-back adhesive prior to
laying tile.
O. Where two or more different VCT products meet, flash the concrete slab so that VCT surfaces
maintain a smooth transition.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STAIR TREADS
A. Install all stair treads in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Use only those adhesives as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific project
conditions.
C. The stair landings at all stairs shall receive the same tile as the main field of the Sales Area.
D. Where the upper level floors meet the stairs, install a full stair tread and floor tiles to it.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE
A. Apply base to all walls, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in room or areas where
base is required. Install base in as long lengths as practicable. Tightly bond base to backing
throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
Do not stretch base material during installation.
B. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
C. Provide and install two thousand five hundred (2,500) lineal feet of 6", 4"and/or 2 1/2" high cove
base for use around equipment as directed by Stop &Shop. This is in addition to all base
required at all walls, partitions, etc.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CARPET TILE
A. Install all carpet tile in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions
B. Use only those adhesives as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific project
conditions.
C. The carpet tile shall be installed over the vinyl composition tile.
D. Reducer edge strips shall be supplied by the carpet tile manufacturer.
Resilient Flooring & Carpet Tile—09650 -4
ek F. Adhesives shall be waterproof, black cut-back type as recommended by the resilient flooring
manufacturer for the type of service indicated. Use adhesives as recommended by the carpet
tile manufacturer for same.
G. Leveling and spot patching materials for use in the filling of Construction and Control joints shall
be either of the following products:
1. "Masco& Speed Top"as manufactured by"Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc."of Ayer, MA
(508-772-4444).
2. "Ardex"as manufactured by"Ardex, Inc."of Pittsburgh, PA(412-264-4240).
Technical data sheets and samples shall be submitted to Stop&Shop for approval prior to
commencing the work."
Under no circumstances shall any gypsum based products be used as floor patching or leveling
materials.
H. Carpet Tile for the carriage areas shall be "Cathedral"as distributed by"The Matworks" 11900
Old Baltimore Pike, Beltsville, MD 20705, Tele: (800)523-5179. The color shall be charcoal.
1. The backing for the carpet the shall be "Tac-Fast". Tile size shall be 19 1/2"x 19 1/2".
i. The product shall meet the following requirements:
Total Weight: 155 oz./sq.yd.
Face Weight: 65 oz./sq.yd.
Tile Backing: "Tac-Fast" bituminous -90 oz./sq.yd.
Denier: 300
Fiber Blend: 100% Polypropylene
Total Thickness: 1/2"
Pile Depth: 13/64"
2. Tiles shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Adhesive for use in the installation of the carpet tiles shall be"MW-REL-100"as
distributed by'The Matworks'.
4. Provide aluminum reducer strip at the joint between carpet tile and VCT(supplied by
Matworks).
5. Carpet tile to be installed over VCT flooring.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring work is to be placed and correct
all conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Surface must be smooth, level, at the required finish elevation,without more than 1/8" in 10'-0"
variation from level or slopes shown. If depressions or unevenness exceed 1/8"in 10'-0",
leveling will be required.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Subfloors: Prior to laying resilient flooring, broom clean or vacuum all surfaces to be covered
and inspect the subfloor. Start of laying resilient flooring will indicate acceptance of subfloor
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Use leveling compound as specified above for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors,
construction and control joints, etc.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Install tile as shown on the Stop&Shop Floor Tile Layout Plan for the Sales Area. Lay tile
square to room axis, unless otherwise shown.
B. Install approximately 8'x 8'additional areas from Sales Area to Back Room Area at all double
acting doors, on the back room side of the door. Provide aluminum transition strip specified
herein.
C. Cleaning of mastic smears shall be done as the work progresses.
Resilient Flooring &Carpet Tile—09650 -3
B. Provide adequate lighting for installation of all floor finishes (minimum of 30 footcandles
maintained at all work surfaces).
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stop and Shop has procured a national account for VCT and vinyl cove wall base with
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. attn: Christopher Easier Tele: (603)664-7561. All VCT and
vinyl cove wall base must be purchased thru this account and the CM shall confirm to S&S in
writing that his subcontractor's material costs were obtained thru S&S's national account pricing.
Vinyl Composition Tile shall be 12"x 12"x 1/8" meeting Federal Specification SS-T-312B(1),
Type IV, Composition 1, such as "Armstrong Imperial Texture Standard Excelon". Colors shall
be:
1. Field the at all areas (except the Produce, Pharmacy, Florist, Bakery, & Natural Food
portion of the Sales Area),Armstrong Canvas Excelon#50305- Limestone White (NO
SUBSTITUTIONS).
a. All field the is to be laid in the same direction with the grain running from the
front to the rear of the Sales Area.
2. Diagonal feature strips at the Main Sales Area and square features the pattern at the
checkout area, located per Stop & Shop Tile Layout Plan, Armstrong Stonetex Excelon
#52156—Bamboo Yellow, #52142—Slate Green (omit at checkout area accent
pattern), and#52151 —Terra Stone, 12"x 12"tile, (NO SUBSTITUTIONS).
3. Produce area & Dunkin Donuts field tile, Armstrong Safety Zone#57002—Weathered
Alabaster(NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
4. Produce area feature tile, Armstrong Safety Zone#57009— Forest Floor and #57001
Axelon Shale Grey(NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
5. Vinyl Cove Base shall be 0.80"thick, 6" high at the Sales Area, 4" high elsewhere, color
to be Black.
6. Provide tapered stainless steel checkered plate transition strip, 4"wide, at the joint
between VCT and concrete flooring at the Produce Pre-Pak and Grocery Storage areas.
Mitre corners.
B. Stop and Shop has procured a national account for simulated wood and slate vinyl flooring with
Amtico, Inc. Contact Andy Aldo, Tele: 203-924-2186 to obtain quotes.All simulated wood and
slate vinyl flooring must be purchased thru this account and the CM shall confirm to S&S in
writing that his subcontractor's material costs were obtained thru S&S's national account pricing.
1. Field tile at the Florist Area shall be 12"x 18"x 1/8"Amtico Slate Tile#SN36—
Norwegian Slate Silver(NO SUBSTITUTIONS).
2. Border strips at the Florist Area and Sales Area the transition, Amtico#US-111202A—
Stop & Shop Custom Maple, 36"x 3"wide Vinyl Strip Wood (NO SUBSTITUTIONS).
Use double strips at tile transitions for a 6"total thickness.
3. Field tile at the Natural Foods portion of the Sales Area and the Sales Area side of the
Bakery cases, Amtico#US-111202A—Stop & Shop Custom Maple, 12"x 12" (top
routed 3")Vinyl Wood flooring (NO SUBSTITUTIONS). This product is to be installed in
a basket weave pattern to resemble parquet flooring.
4. All tiles for any one color shall be from the same production run, including extra tile
supplied under 1.4C above.
C. Vinyl Cove Base shall be 0.80"thick, 6" high at the Sales Area, 4" high elsewhere, Roppe TV-
8P100. Color to be Black.
D. Rubber Stairs Treads (for use on all concrete filled stairs)shall be "Endura"as manufactured by
American Biltrite. They shall be color#72, Black, and shall have integral nosings. (NO
SUBSTITUTIONS)
E. All edging strips, carpet to vinyl transitions, etc. shall be#EG-XX-G by Johnsonite (800)899-
8916. Color is to be Black. Edge strips at Matworks carpet tile are to be supplied by Matworks.
Resilient Flooring &Carpet Tile—09650 -2
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING & CARPET TILE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all resilient flooring and accessories as shown on the Drawings and the Stop
& Shop Floor Tile Layout Plan for the Sales Area (which will be supplied to the Construction
Manager)and/or herein specified, including but not limited to the following:
1. Spot patching and leveling of floors as required, including but not limited to grinding
down high points and filling cracks, tapers at construction joints, control joints and low
points, etc.
2. Vinyl composition field and feature tile.
3. 4"and 6"high vinyl or rubber cove and straight base, in all areas required whether this
Flooring Contractor installs the flooring material or not.
4. Rubber stair treads.
5. Carpet tile and transition strips.
6. Cleaning of finished surfaces.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Cast-in-Place Concrete—Section 03000.
B. Electrical—Section 16000.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer, including
recommended primers, adhesives, edging strips etc.
1.4 COLORS& LAYOUT
A. Confirm all floor tile selections with Stop& Shop prior to placing any orders. Floor Tile Layout
Plan for the Sales Area will be completed and supplied by Stop&Shop to the Construction
Manager at appropriate time during the construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Within 45 days of contract award, submit samples of each type of resilient
flooring and accessories. Sample submittals will be reviewed for color,texture and pattern only.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Flooring Contractor.
B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit three (3)copies of manufacturer's written instructions for
recommended maintenance practices for resilient tile work.
C. Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to the Owner, two percent(2%)or
twenty(20)cases minimum of the predominant color floor tile and two (2)cases of each color
feature tile for maintenance use by the Owner. Furnish replacement materials from the same
manufactured lot as the materials installed, properly boxed and identified. Material shall be in
new unopened cases.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturers'original unopened containers, clearly
marked to indicate pattern, gauge, lot number and sequence of manufacture.
B. Carefully handle all materials and store in original containers at not less than 70°F. for at least
48 hours before start of installation, in the room to receive tile.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Continuously heat spaces to receive tile to a temperature of 70 0F., for at least 48 hours prior to
installation whenever project conditions are such that heating is required. Maintain 70°F.
00*1 temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by the tile manufacturer,
but for not less than 48 hours. Maintain a temperature of not less than 60°F. in areas where
work is completed.
Resilient Flooring &Carpet Tile—09650 - 1
to the metal deck, ductwork, bottom chord of steel joists or other mechanical or electrical
equipment or pipes. Hanger wire shall be delivered straight, not in coils.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION WORK
A. Installer must examine the conditions under which the acoustical ceiling work is to be performed
and notify the Architect and Construction Manager in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and to comply with
governing regulations, industry standards and this section.
B. Arrange acoustical units in the manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.
C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported only as
noted above. Locate hangers near each end and spaced 4'-0"along each main beam tee.
D. Install edge moldings of the type indicated at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at
locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of work. Secure
moldings to building construction by fastening with screw-anchors into the substrate,
through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3"from each end and not
more than 16"o.c. along each molding. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a
level tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter comers of moldings accurately to provide hairline
joints, securely connected to prevent dislocation. Finish on the partitions, soffits, walls, etc.,
where required, must be installed and extended above the ceiling before attachment of
perimeter angles.
E. Cope exposed flanges of intersecting suspension system members, so that flange faces will
be flush (cope flange of member supported by other member).
F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by
support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels neatly to fit accurately at all sprinkler
heads, columns, grilles, diffusers, loud speakers, pipes, recessed incandescent lighting
fixtures, ceiling outlets, emergency lights and other penetrations.
G. Install extra hanging wires at each corner of all lighting fixtures. Coordinate with the
Electrical Contractor for exact location of fixtures.
H. Install extra hanger wires in the Florist area to provide wires on a 2'x 2' pattern.
I. See the Drawings for special vaulted ceilings above the Produce Area.
J. Coordinate installation of luminous ceiling panels with the Electrical Contractor. Install clear
prismatic acrylic ceiling panels in the lighted valances. (Material shall be supplied by
Electrical Contractor under Section 16000 and installed by the ceiling contractor). Panels
shall be cut to fit as necessary by this Contractor. Clean and wash panels prior to store
opening.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension
members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned or repaired as directed
by Stop &Shop's Project Manager to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
B. The Installer shall advise the Construction Manager of required protection for the acoustical
ceilings, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be
without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Suspended Ceilings—09500 -4
2.3 MATERIALS, METAL/ACRYLIC CEILING PANELS
A. Metal ceiling panels at the main entrance area shall be"Linar L-150-L", 5"linear metal ceiling
system by Simplex Ceiling Systems, Charlotte, NC. Color is to be white with black closed cell
trim cap between planks. Provide all associated pieces required from the manufacturer for a
complete installation.
B. Aluminum eggcrate ceiling panels (for use above transformer closets and in other areas as
required)shall be 24"x 48"x 1/2"thick(1/2"x 1/2" pattern).
C. Acrylic ceiling panels for valance luminous ceilings shall be clear prismatic acrylic plastic as
manufactured by A.L.P. Lighting and Ceiling Products, Inc. of Chicago, IL or equal. Panels shall
be .125"thick.
2.4 MATERIALS, CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. 2'x 4'ceiling grid system consisting of main beams, cross tees, edge angles, etc., shall be
manufactured by Chicago Metallic Inc. of Chicago, IL (708)563-4600 "500 Snap-Grid Heavy
Grid System",Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Tele: (800-448-1405), or USG Interiors, Inc. of
Newburgh, NY(914) 567-0059 with the depths,weights and catalog numbers indicated. All
exposed members shall have a durable white baked enamel finish and all visible flanges shall
be 15/16"wide. Comply with ASTM C635 heavy duty application, as to the type of suspension
system required for the type of ceiling units indicated. Coordinate with other work supported by
or penetrating through the ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment. Minimum system
requirements as follows:
Chicago USG Armstrong
Part Spacing No. No. No. Ht. Thk.
Continuous
Main Beam 4'-0" 200 DX 26 7301 1.50" .024"
Beam Cross 1.375"/
Tee 4'-0" 204 DX 424 XL7341 1.50" .018"
4'-0" Long 1.375"/
Cross tee 2'-0" 226 DX 216 XXXL7328 1.50" .018"
1. Thickness of members are for steel stock. Therefore, the overall web thickness shall be
twice the figure given, since all beams and cross tees must have double webs and a
bulb.
2. 5-1/2" long universal beam splices, by Chicago, Armstrong, or USG or equivalent, shall
be used at all splices in main tee beams.A hanger wire shall be at or within V-0"or
splices.
C. Direct-hung, aluminum suspension system (for use where vinyl faced ceiling tile are called for)
shall be 6063T5 with alumilite anodizing on all exposed surfaces of the tees and aluminum
perimeter angles, and shall be manufactured by Gordon, Inc., P.O. Box 4347, Shreveport, LA
(318)747-8954. Main tees shall be#MT-6, 4'and 2' long cross tees shall be#CT-4 and wall
angles shall be#WA-2. Equally strong and attractive extruded aluminum of another
manufacturer will be considered if samples are submitted for comparison with the material
specified. Use at Bakery, Service Fish, Service Meat, and Deli Areas, Kitchen table, Deli
Storage, and elsewhere as indicated on the reflected ceiling plan.
D. Hanger Wire shall be galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, prestretched, yield-
stress load of at least three(3)times design load, but not less than 12 gauge (0.106"). The
connection of wire to tees and wire to roof construction shall have an ultimate strength of 250
pounds. Hangers shall be attached to the TOP CHORD OF STEEL JOISTS only by going
through the flutes of the metal deck or to any location on a structural steel beam. Hanger wires
shall be vertical, except where specifically noted to the contrary. Hanger wires may be attached
to structural steel beams either by running the wire through the metal deck flutes or by use of an
approved flange clip that will sustain a load of 250 pounds. Hanger wires shall not be attached
Suspended Ceilings—09500 -3
C. Provide twelve (12) 10'-0"long sections of the metal ceiling material. _"N
D. Upon completion of the installation, deliver all maintenance stock of each type of ceiling tile
installed for use by the Owner. Furnish full size units matching the units installed, packaged with
protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space has been enclosed and weathertight, and
until wet-work in the space has been completed and is nominally dry, and until work above
ceilings has been completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS,ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS
A. Acoustical ceiling tile (for all finished rooms shown on the Room Finish Schedule, except where
vinyl faced tiles are called for)shall be 24"x 48"x 5/8" NON-DIRECTIONAL fissured mineral
board. Tiles shall be square edged, lay-in panels (pre-finished in white), for use with exposed
tee type suspension system. Ceiling tiles must have a flame spread rating of 25 or less (per
ASTM Fire Test E84).Approved tiles shall be one of the following:
a. #2310— Radar as manufactured by USG Ceilings; Tele: (800)950-3839, or
b. #BET-197- Non-Directional Fissured Baroque as manufactured by BPB
America/Celotex, Tele: (800-235-6839).
c. #769 -Cortega Fissured as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Tele:
(800-448-1405);
B. FIBERGLASS CEILING MATERIAL IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
C. Acoustical ceiling tile for use at the high ceiling area of the Produce Department, shall be 24"x
48"x 3/4"fissured mineral board. Tiles shall be beveled tegular edged, lay-in panels
(prefinished in white), for use with exposed tee type suspension system. Ceiling tiles must have
a flame spread rating of 25 or less (per ASTM Fire Test E84). Approved tile shall be the
following:
a. #CDS-448—Cashmere Designer Series—Tegular as manufactured by BPB
America/Celotex, Tele: (800-235-6839).
b. #514 -Cirrus Second Look III as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.,
Tele: (800-448-1405).
D. Vinyl faced ceiling tile (for use in the Bakery, Fish and Meat Service, Deli, Deli Storage, Kitchen
Table, Deli Work Room, Cheese Bar, toilet rooms and elsewhere as indicated on the reflected
ceiling plan)shall be 24"x 48"x 5/8" unperforated, square edge lay-in panels, pre-finished
white. Approved tile shall be one of the following:
a. #56091 —Clean Room Clima Plus Class 100 as manufactured by USG Ceilings;
Tele: (800)950-3839, or
b. #VG-197—Vinyl Guard as manufactured by BPB America/Celotex, Tele: (800-235-
6839).
2.2 MATERIALS, FRP CLAD CEILING PANELS
A. Ceiling of the Produce Prep Area is to be 2'x 4'white FRP insulated panels. The panels shall be
fabricated with a 2'x 4' FRP panel, with a 2'x 4'x 2"thick polystyrene insulation panel adhered
to the FRP panel. A 3'x 5' piece of 6 mil polyethylene shall be adhered to the polystyrene
(arranged to provide 6"overlap of poly in all directions). The adhesive for adhering the
polystyrene to the FRP panels shall be "Henry 444 FRP Panel Adhesive"as manufactured by
the W.W. Henry Co. of Huntington Park, CA, Tele: (213) 583-4961. The panels shall be installed
in the existing grid. These panels shall be prefabricated prior to installation and are available
from Walk-In Cooler manufacturers (see also Section 06000). Note:Polystyrene insulation is
not acceptable.
Suspended Ceilings—09500 -2
SECTION 09500 -SUSPENDED CEILINGS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all suspended ceiling systems as shown on the Drawings and/or herein
specified, including but not limited to the following:
1. Acoustical ceiling tile.
2. Vinyl faced ceiling tile.
3. FRP clad ceiling tile.
4. Aluminum eggcrate panels.
5. Suspended metal ceiling system
6. Cutting and installation only of the acrylic luminous ceiling panels at the valances,
supplied by the electrical contractor, installed by the ceiling contractor. See Reflected
Ceiling Plan for locations.
7. Extra ceiling tile for replacements.
8. Steel grid suspension systems.
9. Aluminum grid suspension systems for all vinyl faced ceiling tile areas.
10. Special acoustical ceiling tile and grid at the Produce Department vaulted ceiling.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The installation of suspended ceiling systems shall be by an experienced installation firm that is
acceptable to the manufacturer of the system, as shown by current written statement from the
manufacturer.
B. Standards for Terminology and Performance: Applicable publications by the Acoustical and
Insulating Materials Association (AIMA), including "Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical
Materials".
C. FM Compliance: Class 1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data:
1. For information only, submit two (2)copies of manufacturer's product specifications and
installation instructions for each ceiling tile material required, and for each suspension
system including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show
compliance with these specifications. Distribute one additional copy of each installation
instruction to the Installer.
2. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units,
including precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes
and acoustical performances.
B. Samples:
1. Submit three(3)sets of 12" square samples for each ceiling material required. In each
set of samples show the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the
completed work. Sample submittal and Architect's review will be for color and texture
only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
2. Submit three(3) 12" long samples of each runner and molding. Architect's review will be
for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Six (6)cases of ceiling tile of the type installed in the main sales area and three (3)cases each
for the other types of ceiling tiles installed throughout the remainder of the building shall be left
at the job site for replacement use by Stop& Shop. Tile shall be in unopened cases, bearing the
same lot numbers as the tiles installed.
B. Provide twelve (12)full size panels of the plastic lenses installed in the store.
Suspended Ceilings—09500 - 1
C. Workmanship:
1. Supply first-class workmanship in all tile work.
2. Use all products in accordance with latest ANSI Standard specifications.
3. Be sure all the work is clean of grout film upon completion.
D. Setting Methods:
1. Ceramic Floor Tile On Dimensionally Stable Concrete,ANSI A108 1 Reference TCA
Method F112. Cement Mortar Bonded.
2. Ceramic& Glass Wall tile: ANSI A108.4, Reference TCA Method 242, Organic
Adhesive.
E. Grouting: Follow grout manufacturer's recommendations as to grouting procedures and
precautions.
F. Caulking:After wall tile is complete and grouted, clean any grout out of any inside corner joints,
wall/ceiling angle junctures and around door frames. Caulk all such joints with silicone caulking
compound.
3.2 CURING
A. Ceramic tile floors shall be kept clear for 2 days and subsequently covered with heavy-duty,
non-staining construction paper, masked in place.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean and wash all ceramic and glass wall the and polish after completion.
B. Thoroughly clean and wash all ceramic floor tile and once cleaned, apply a coat of sealer and
buff for a smooth, polished, protected surface.
3.4 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC
A. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways for 7 days where use of newly tiled floors
with cement type grout is unavoidable.
3.5 REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED FLOORS
A. Replace all flooring that is damaged during construction prior to store opening.
3.6 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all work for a period of one(1)year from the date of final acceptance of the entire
building by Stop& Shop.
END OF SECTION
Aawk
Ceramic& Glass Tile—09300 -4
4. In the Florist Area:
Type Size Manufacturer Model Number and Color
Field Tile 6"x 6" Roma Tile Azelgera Blanco Wall Tile
Bullnose Field Tile 6"x 6" Roma Tile Azelgera Blanco Wall Tile
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C21 (764)-Lilac
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C15 (774)—Cherry Blossom
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C51 (686)—Deep Rose
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C27 (673)—Magenta
5. Around the Meat Room Window Area:
Type Size Manufacturer Model Number and Color
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C25(677) - Pumpkin
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C31 (689)-Orange
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C43(598)—Tomato
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C49(397)—Deep Red
G. Provide all needed trim pieces, bullnose outside corners, etc..
H. Thinset adhesive for ceramic floor tile shall be dry-set portland cement system meeting ANSI
N118.1.
I. Adhesive for ceramic wall tile shall be organic adhesive, heavy duty CTA#11 (solvent type)for
use over"Wonderboard walls or approved equal. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for
adhesive and backing of the glass wall tile.
J. Epoxy grout for ceramic floor and wall tile at the toilet rooms shall be Hydoment Natural Grey.
K. Grout for all other ceramic wall tile shall be Mapei"Kerapoxy"#0-White.
L. Water shall be clean and drinkable.
M. Sealer for ceramic the floors shall be Hillard Co. "Super-Onex-Seal".
N. Heavy-duty, non-staining construction paper for protection of floors after completion with
compatible masking tape.
O. Caulking compound for use at interior corners, at wall/ceiling angle juncture and around door
frames in ceramic tile wall surfaces shall be a silicone caulk, color to match the tile grout.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Acceptability of Surfaces:
1. Before tiling, be sure variations of surface to be tiled fall within maximum variations
shown below:
a. Floors with Thin Set Mortar 1/8" in 10'
b. Walls 1/8" in 8'
2. Report all unacceptable surfaces to the Architect and do not tile such surfaces until they
are leveled enough to meet above requirements. Leveling coat is included in this
section.
3. Before tiling, be sure surfaces to be tiled are free from coating,curing membranes, oil,
grease,wax and dust. Report any unacceptable surfaces to the Construction Manager
for correction.
4. Starting of tile work will imply acceptance of the surfaces to be tiled by this Contractor
and no claims for bad substrate as a cause for unacceptable tilework will be allowed
after that acceptance.
B. Layout:
1. Layout all tile work so as to minimize cuts less than one half tile in size.
2. Locate cuts so as to be least conspicuous.
3. At Restrooms, cut tile shall occur at interior corners and be of equal length at each end
of wall.
4. Align all floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines, parallel with walls.
5. All outside corners shall begin with a full course of the field tile.
Ceramic&Glass Tile—09300 -3
C. Ceramic Wall Accent Tile(for use in Toilet Rooms)shall be:
a. Provenza, Energia Ernst—Riposo#D16902 glazed porcelain with matt finish as
distributed by Roma Tile, Watertown, MA. Tile size shall be 6"x 16".
b. Provenza, Energia Ernst—Lineare#D16802 glazed porcelain with matt finish as
distributed by Roma Tile, Watertown, MA. Tile size shall be 6"x 16".
c. See the architectural drawings for the layout.
B. Ceramic Base(for use in Toilet Rooms)shall be the standard straight wall field tile specified
above.
C. At outside corners of wall the in the various department areas(except at the glass the and
restroom tile), provide a PVC edge trim "Schulter-RONDEC-PRG"or equal in lieu of bullnose the
corners. Color to be white.
D. Marble saddle at doors shall be 1/2"x width of door with beveled edges.
E. Glass Wall Tile for use in the various departmental areas shall be "Glasstyle"as manufactured
by the Interstyle Ceramic and Glass Ltd. of Burnaby(Vancouver), B.C. Canada, unless
otherwise noted. Provide any and all necessary trim pieces and bullnose tiles. See the interior
elevations for layouts and patterns of the various tiles at each department. Confirm colors,
patterns, and start points of all the with the Stop& Shop's Design Department prior to
installation. All glass tile shall be mesh mounted.
F. Wall the for various departments are as follows:
1. In the Deli/Kitchen Table Area:
Type Size Manufacturer Model Number and Color
Field Tile 6"x 6" Roma Tile Azelgera Blanco Wall Tile
Bullnose Field Tile 6"x 6" Roma Tile Azelgera Blanco Wall Tile
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C21 (764)-Lilac
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C53 (462)-Lavender
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C57 (275)—Plum
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C59 (272)—Amethyst
Accent Tile 6"x 6" Interstyle #C57 (275)—Plum
2. In the Bakery Area:
Type Size Manufacturer Model Number and Color
Field Tile 6"x 6" Roma Tile Azelgera Blanco Wall Tile
Bullnose Field Tile 6"x 6" Roma Tile Azelgera Blanco Wall Tile
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C20 (667)-Camel
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C25 (677)-Pumpkin
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C50 (478)—Caramel
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #C56 (276)—Chestnut
Accent Tile 6"x 6" Interstyle #C56 (276)—Chestnut
3. In the Seafood/Service Fish Area:
Type Size Manufacturer Model Number and Color
Field Tile Existing to remain
Bullnose Field Tile Existing to remain
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #(534)—Copper Green
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #(343)—Blue Green
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #(333)—Teal
Accent Tile 1"x 1" Interstyle #(734)—Aqua
Accent Tile 4"x 4" Interstyle #(343)— Blue Green
Ceramic& Glass Tile—09300 -2
SECTION 09300 — CERAMIC AND GLASS TILE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Supply and install all ceramic tile as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified, including
but not limited to the following:
1. Ceramic tile floors.
2. Ceramic the walls at restrooms.
3. Glass tile walls in the various departments.
4. Marble thresholds.
5. Caulking of all inside corners, wall/ceiling angle junctures and around door frames in
any ceramic wall tile surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Master Grade Certificate signed by both tile manufacturer and tile subcontractor.
B. Submit three(3)sample tiles for each pattern and type to be used.
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade seals unbroken
and labels intact.
B. Keep all materials dry and protect from damage.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature at 50°F. minimum during tile work and for 7 days after completion.
B. Vent temporary heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new the work.
C. Provide adequate lighting for good grouting and clean-up.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Supply two percent(2%)or two (2)cases, whichever is greater, of each tile used in clean
unopened marked cartons for owner's emergency use.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Tile Council of America, Inc. specifications for further requirements for all Work under
this Section.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ceramic Floor Tile (for use in Toilet Rooms)shall be:
a. Provenza Series Coto Eramo, Energia (light terra cotta)glazed porcelain with matt finish
as distributed by Roma Tile, Watertown, MA. Tile sizes vary as follows:
i. 12"x 12"— 57.14%
ii. 6"x 12"— 28.57%
iii. 6"x 6"— 14.28%
b. See the architectural drawings for tile layout.
B. Ceramic Wall Field Tile (for use in Toilet Rooms)shall be:
a. Provenza Series Cotto D'Eremo Forza (beige)glazed porcelain with matt finish as
distributed by Roma Tile, Watertown, MA. Tile size shall be 12"x 12".
b. See the architectural drawings for tile layout.
c. Wall tile shall extend full height to ceiling (except where broken by accent strip).
A "'► d. Provide all needed trim pieces, bullnose outside corners, etc..
Ceramic&Glass Tile—09300 - 1
D. All acoustical sealant work shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions in
order to obtain the required rating. Caulking shall be an acoustical sealant as recommended by
the manufacturer. Caulk the top and bottom of all gypsum board tight to the floor or roof deck.
END OF SECTION
Gypsum Wallboard—09250 -4
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL
A. Apply all gypsum wallboard with lengths perpendicular to the studs. Center abutting edges over
the stud flanges. No two joints shall occur at the same stud and no joints shall occur between
studs.
B. Screws for attachment of wallboard shall be spaced at 8" o.c. at the edges and 12"o.c. in the
field of the sheet.
C. Sheets shall be held in firm contact with the framing member while fasteners are being driven.
D. Fastening shall start from the center portion of the sheet and proceed outward to the edges.
E. Fasteners shall be set with the head slightly below the surface of the wallboard in a dimple
formed by the power screwdriver. Take care not to break the paper face of the wallboard.
F. Improperly driven screws shall be removed.
G. Metal casing strip shall be used as detailed and as specified in Gold Bond Specification. Casing
strip shall be used where drywall construction joins walls or ceilings or other materials, except
where joint is concealed by wood or other trim member. Flange of casing strip,
expansion/control joint strip and similar accessories shall be concealed with feathered joint
cement.
H. Casing beads, corner beads, and similar metal trim members shall be used at all locations
which are standard in best commercial practice, whether or not indicated on the drawings (the
drawings are diagrammatic, and do not in all cases indicate such items). Corner beads shall be
securely anchored.
I. Gypsum surfaces shall be left perfectly flat, plumb, clean, and free of defects. There shall be no
bowing or"scallop"effect visible to the unaided eye when sighting parallel to the face of the
partition. Surfaces shall be clean and ready for application of finishes with no additional
preparatory work required.
J. Install expansion/control joint strip over jambs of double acting doors, at 30'-0"o.c. (20'-0"o.c. at
dropped soffits), at masonry control joints, and elsewhere as required to prevent cracks in the
gypsum wallboard.
3.3 JOINT, SCREW HEAD AND CORNER FINISHING
A. Joint and topping compound shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. A uniform thin layer of joint compound shall be applied over the wallboard joints, approximately
4"wide. The tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded into the compound, leaving
sufficient compound under the tape to provide proper bond.
C. After the compound is dry, the tape shall be covered with a coat of joint compound
approximately 3"each side of the tape and feathered out at the edges.
D. After the compound is dry, a coat of topping compound shall be applied with a slight, uniform
crown approximately 3" each side of the previous coat and feathered out at the edges.
E. Wall angles and inside corners shall be reinforced with tape folded to conform to the angle and
embedded in the compound.
F. All angles and inside corners shall be coated with one coat of joint compound and one coat of
topping compound feathered out at the edges.
G. All screw heads shall receive a total of three coats (two coats of joint compound and one coat of
topping compound)allowing proper drying time between each coat.
H. Flanges of wallboard corner bead shall be concealed by at least one coat of joint compound and
one coat of topping compound,feathered out approximately 9"each side of the exposed metal
nose, allowing proper drying time between coats.
I. All joints, corner beads, angles, inside corners, screw heads, etc. shall be wet sanded between
coats and after last coat. Take care not to roughen wallboard paper.
3.4 SOUND RETARDANT PARTITIONS
A. Install gypsum wallboard vertically,with staggered joints on opposite sides of partitions,
attached to metal studs with 1"type "S" screws spaced at 22"o.c. along vertical joints and at 1/4
and mid points of panel height.
B. Fasten panels around perimeter with 1 5/8"type "S"screws spaced at 12" o.c.
C. Note that the space between the studs is to be filled with sound attenuation blankets as called
for under Section 07200.
Gypsum Wallboard—09250 -3
D. Moisture resistant, firecode gypsum wallboard shall be "Firecode MR Board"(ASTM C-630).
The board shall be 5/8"thick with tapered edges. The board shall be 4'-0"wide x various lengths
as required to minimize joints.
E. Gypsum sheathing board for use at the exterior wall shall be 1/2"thick"Dens-Glass Gold" by
Georgia Pacific. The board shall be 4'-0"wide x various lengths as required to minimize joints.
F. Glass-fiber reinforced gypsum (GRG)cove mouldings for use at the Check-out raised ceilings
shall be as manufactured by DecoForm Corp., Etobicoke, Ontario
Tel: (416) 745-4970 or approved equal. See drawings for radius required.
G. Screws shall be rustproof, "S Bugle Head"type, size and quantity as recommended by the
manufacturer for each application. Length as shown below:
1. Anchoring single layer 1/2"or 5/8"wallboard - 1" long minimum.
2. Anchoring second layer in multi-layer applications- 1 5/8" long minimum.
H. Casing bead shall be USG#200-A or Gold Bond#100.
I. Comer bead shall be USG 'Dur-A-Bead'or GB 1 1/4"x 1 1/4".
J. Control Joints shall be USG #093 or Gold Bond 'E-Z Strip'.
K. Joint treatment products conforming to ASTM C-475. Joint tape for gypsum soffits shall be
paper.
L. Adhesives conforming to ASTM C-557.
M. Hanger wire shall be 8 gauge, galvanized wire.
N. Tie wire shall be 16 gauge, galvanized wire.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Work shall be fully coordinated with other trades affected, particularly with metal studs and light
gage framing, insulation, wall finishes, mechanical, electrical work, etc. Provide all necessary
cutting and patching, etc.
B. Completed work of this and other trades shall be properly protected from any stain, damage and
defacement.
C. All partitions shall be carried from the floor to 6"above the finish ceiling (except rear Sales Area
wall, Pharmacy perimeter walls, walls located under the mezzanine floor slabs, mezzanine
partitions, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings), and shall be finished both sides, unless
specifically shown otherwise. Partitions that do not extend full height to the structure are to be
braced back to the structure at 4'-0"o.c.. Gypsum wallboard shall be cut back 112"from the deck
or slab and the joint shall be filled with sealant.
D. All partitions running at an angle to beams, steel joists and other objects extending down from
the slab or deck above, shall be carried between such objects. Gypsum wallboard shall be cut
back 1/2"from the structural member and the joint shall be filled with sealant.
E. Where a partition runs directly below and parallel to a steel joist, the steel joist shall be furred
(under Section 05400)and gypsum board shall be applied to both sides of the joist.
F. Unless otherwise noted, all gypsum wallboard mounted on furring shall extend from floor to a
minimum of 6"above the ceiling line.
G. Install expansion/control joints at 30'-0"o.c., over the jambs of all double acting doors, at
masonry control joints and elsewhere as required to prevent cracks in the gypsum wallboard
surfaces. Dropped soffits shall have control joints at 20'-0"o.c..
H. After installation, partitions, ceiling drop walls, ceilings, etc. shall be free of exposed screws or
other fasteners. Damaged panels or other material shall be replaced with undamaged items.
I. Refuse and waste material shall be removed daily, or more often if required.
J. In all cases, use the maximum practical length sheets to minimize joints.
K. In all cases, stagger all sheets so as not to align joints.
L. At areas where the new finish ceiling height is above the height of the existing ceiling to be
demolished, provide additional GWB and alter studwork as required to achieve new ceiling
height. Typically this occurs at the rear and right sidewalls of the Sales area. AWN
Gypsum Wallboard—09250 -2
SECTION 09250 -GYPSUM WALL BOARD
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all gypsum wallboard work as shown on the drawings and/or specified
herein, including but not limited to the following:
1. All interior gypsum board, using "Firecode" and "Moisture Resistant" boards where
applicable or where called for in the drawings.
2. All exterior gypsum sheathing board.
3. Glass-fiber reinforced gypsum (GRG) mouldings
4. Taping, spackling and finishing.
5. Joint and corner reinforcing, casing beads, control joints, etc.
6. All adhesives, fasteners, etc.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. To establish level of quality required, products manufactured by the United States Gypsum
Company, have been specified. Products from the National Gypsum Company and the Manville
Company or other nationally distributed equivalent products of other manufacturers will be
acceptable.
B. Fire-Resistant Rating: Where gypsum drywall systems are indicated for fire-resistance ratings,
including those required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and
installations identical with applicable assemblies that have been tested and listed by recognized
authorities, including UL and the American Insurance Association. Comply with FM "Approval
Guide"where applicable.
C. Industry Standard: Comply with the requirements of"Standard Specifications for Gypsum
Wallboard Interior Finishes",American National Standards Institute (ANSI A97.1), except as
may be modified by these specifications, applicable laws and ordinances, including the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's Data including anchoring and finishing products submit six(6)copies of
manufactured product. Indicate that copy of each applicable instruction has been distributed to
the Gypsum Wallboard Installer.
B. Submit certified test reports on STC Ratings, Fire Resistant, and Load/Deflection tests.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials in unbroken packages bearing the name of the manufacturer.
B. Keep all materials dry and protected from the weather.
C. Materials shall be stored and handled carefully, to avoid damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
D. All materials shall be stored inside the building.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Regular gypsum wallboard shall be 1/2"and 5/8"thick, as required, with tapered edges (ASTM
C-36). Boards shall be 4'-0"wide x various lengths as required to minimize joints.
B. Fire code gypsum wallboard shall be 518"thick Firecode "C"with tapered edges(ASTM C-36).
Board shall be 4'-0"wide x various lengths as required to minimize joints.
C. Moisture resistant gypsum wallboard shall be "MR Board" (ASTM C-630). The board shall be
1/2"or 5/8"thick, as required, with tapered edges. The board shall be 4'-0"wide x various
ew lengths as required to minimize joints.
Gypsum Wallboard—09250 - 1
A
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
SET#19:
NOT USED
SET#20:
NOT USED
SET#21:
#19 Sales Area to Pharmacy(Field Verify Width x 8'-6" H)(side coiling metal security grille)
2- Cylinder- 1 E72S2 x US26D x CC (install in grille side bar)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all scheduled hardware in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Set thresholds in caulking.
C. Protect all hardware from damage and paint.
3.2 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove all debris.
B. Leave all hardware in perfect working order, adjust as necessary.
END OF SECTION
low
Finish Hardware—08700 -5
SET#10:
#10 Sales Area to Customer Service Area (3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4") (SC WD x EX)
#12 Customer Service Area to Cash Office (3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4") (SC WD x EX)
1 1/2 pairs- Butts - FBB179 x 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"x US26D
1 - Lockset-93K7D15C x S3 x US26D x CC
1 -Closer-4011 x Aluminum
1 -Viewer-698 x US26D
2 - Kickplates -8"x 34"x .050"x US32D
1 -Stop-407 1/2 x US32D
3- Silencers- GJ64
SET#11:
NOT USED
SET#12:
NOT USED
SET#13:
NOT USED
SET#14:
NOT USED
SET#15:
#20 Pharmacy to Toilet Room (3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4")(SC WD x PM)
#23 Bottle room Customer Area to Lavatory(3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4") (SC WD x PM)
1 1/2 pairs- Butts - F179 x 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"x US26D
1 - Privacy Lock- 73KOLl5C x S3 x US26D
1 - Closer-4011 x AL
1 -Stop-407 1/2 x US32D
2 - Kickplates -8"x 32"x .050"x US32D
3- Silencers-GJ64
SET#16:
#28 Corridor to Men's Room (3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4")(SC WD x PM)
#29 Corridor to Ladies Room (3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4")(SC WD x PM)
1 1/2 pairs -Butts- FBB179 x 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"x US26D
1 - Closer-4011 x AL
1 - Push Plate- 70C x US32D x (4"x 16")
1 - Pull Plate - 132 x 70C x US32D
2 - Kickplates -8"x 34"x .050"x US32D
3-Silencers - GJ64
SET#17:
#22 Bottle Building to Bottle Storage Area (3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4") (HM x PM)
1 1/2 pairs- Butts- F179 x 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"x US26D
1 - Lockset-93K7D15C x S3 x US26D x construction core
2- Kickplates -8"x 30"x .050"x US32D
3 - Silencers- GJ64
SET#18:
NOT USED
Finish Hardware—08700 -4
SET#2:
#1 Exterior to Vestibule (overall unit 8'-0"x T-6") (auto sliding AL)
#2 Vestibule to Sales Area (overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6") (auto sliding AL)
#3 Sales Area to Vestibule (overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6") (auto sliding AL)
#4 Vestibule to Exterior(overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6") (auto sliding AL)
#13 Vestibule to Exterior(overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6")(auto sliding AL)
#14 Sales Area to Vestibule (overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6") (auto sliding AL)
#15 Exterior to Vestibule (overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6")(auto sliding AL)
#16 Vestibule to Sales Area (overall unit 8'-0"x 7'-6") (auto sliding AL)
1 - Best Cylinder(keyed outside x CC)#1 E74HC181 with thumb turn inside#6410 x US26D
(Supply additional cores)
SET#3:
NOT USED
SET#4:
NOT USED
SET#5:
NOT USED
SET#6:
#21 Bottle Storage to Exterior(3'-6"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4") (HM x Cl)
1 1/2 pairs- Butts- FBB167 x 5"x NRP x USP (weld jamb leaf)
1 - Lockset-93K7YD15C x S3 x US26D x CC (key outside)(no exterior trim)
1 - Rain Drip- 16AD x 40" (46" at#19)x AL
1 - Door Pull- 132 x US32D (mount outside)
1 -Chain Stop- 11 5B26 x 20"
1 - Door Sweep- DB062 x 42"x AL
1 -Threshold -TH040 x 42"x AL
1 set-Weatherstripping - Head &Jambs WS003 x AL
SET#7:
NOT USED
SET#8:
NOTUSED
SET#9:
#11 Area to be Determined to Storage (2'-6"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4") (SC WD x EX)
#37 FE Brooms to Sales Area (2'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4") (SC WD x EX)
1 1/2 pairs- Butts- F179 x 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"x US26D
1 - Deadbolt-83T7K x S3 x US26D x CC
2- Pull Plates- 132 x 70C x US32D
2 - Kickplates-8"x 32" (28"at door No. 31)x .050"x US32D
1 -Stop-407 1/2 x US32D
3 - Silencers - GJ64
Finish Hardware—08700-3
2.2 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Where pressed metal or wood door frames are called for on the Schedule, the hardware set is
for pressed metal frames and must be adjusted for wood frames.
B. Exterior surface mounted butts shall be welded to channel frames.
C. All floor mounted door stops shall have risers as required.
D. See Door Schedule for applicable set numbers.
E. Adjust butt hinge sizes to accommodate door sizes.
F. Battery eliminator and battery box on alarm lock shall be keyed alike.
G. Provide strap hinges for all doors 4'-0"wide or wider. All thru-bolted strap hinges shall have the
nuts tack welded in place after completion of installation.
H. A small "NOT AN EXIT"sign shall be provided on any door not used as a means of egress.
Signs shall be routed, laminated plastic with letters showing as a different color from the
background.
I. Manufacturer of bi-fold doors shall provide all hardware for same.
J. Provide lever handles where required by the Architectural Barriers Code.
K. All exterior hinges shall be equipped with non-removable pins (NRP).
L. All sliding doors shall have floor guides.
2.3 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE SETS
A. See attached "Hardware Sets"for required hardware items for each door or pair of doors as
listed according to door opening numbers.
B. The contractor is cautioned that the hardware sets listed are for a single door opening (a door
opening is a single door or a pair of doors). For example, since there are four(4)door openings
listed under Hardware Set No. 1, the contractor will supply four(4)complete sets of Hardware
Set No. 1.
C. The following abbreviations are used in the Schedule of Hardware sets:
1. "auto"-automatic
2. "HM" - hollow metal (insulated, if in an exterior wall)
3. "Cl"-channel iron frame
4. "SC WD" -solid core wood door
5. "PM" -pressed metal
6. "AL/GL"-aluminum/glass
7. "AL"-aluminum
8. "CC" -construction core
D. The Hardware Schedule is arranged to list the following items:
1. Door Number-Area to Area (Door size) (Door material x Frame material)
2. Quantity- Item - Model Number x Finish and other requirements
SET#1:
#24 Exterior to Customer Area (3'-0"x 7'-0") (narrow stile auto swing AL)
#25 Greenhouse to Exterior(pair 3'-0"x 7'-0") (narrow stile swing AL)
1 - Best Cylinder(keyed both sides x CC)#1 E74HC181 x US26D
1 - Deadlock Adams Rite#MS1850S x 628
Finish Hardware—08700 -2
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all finish hardware shown on the drawings and/or herein specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 5 copies of shop drawings detailing: Manufacturer, Model numbers (with spec. sheets),
material color, finish, etc, installation details and any other information required to show full
compliance with the specifications.
B. The Finish Hardware Subcontractor shall not deviate from the Architect's Door or Hardware Set
numbering system. If the shop drawings are submitted with a different numbering system, they
will be rejected as"not acceptable" and will require re-submittal with the proper numbering
system. THIS REQUIREMENT WILL BE RIGIDLY ENFORCED.
C. See the Supplementary General Conditions for full requirements for submittals.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Carpentry & Millwork- Section 06000.
B. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100.
C. Wood Doors- Section 08200.
D. Special Doors -Section 08300.
E. Aluminum entrances- Section 08400.
F. Automatic Entrances- Section 08460.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate all work of this section with that specified under all other sections.
B. Verify all door sizes with the drawings.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS
A. For the purpose of establishing a quality standard, certain manufacturers have been specified
under this section. Other manufacturers may be used, except where specifically noted "No
Substitutions", provided the product is nationally distributed and completely equal in all respects.
B. Manufacturers Used in Schedule:
Item Manufacturer
1. Strap Hinges Richards-Wilcox
2. Hinges, Hasps, Pull Handles Stanley
3. Locksets, Latchsets, Cylinders, Padlocks Best(No Substitutions)
4. Closers, Electromagnetic Closers LCN (No Substitutions)
5. Stops & Holders, Silencers, Chain Stops,
Flush Bolts Ives or Rockwood
6. Push Plates, Pull-On Plates, Kickplates Rockwood
7. Sliding Door Assemblies Stanley or Lawrence Brothers
8. Viewer Ives or Rockwood#620
9. Exit Locks Alarm Lock Corp.
10. Detex x VRA Double Doors only
Battery Pack Alarm Lock Corp.
11. Louvers, Vision Panels Leslie Lock
12. Weather Seals, Door Bottom Seals, Rain Ultra Industries or
13. Drips, Thresholds with Door Bottom Hook National Guard Products
14. Automatic door opener/switch Horton
15. Latch Guards Latch Guard Co.
Finish Hardware—08700 - 1
OPI* I. Provide a decal that reads "IN EMERGENCY, PUSH TO OPEN"on the inside
face of all vestibule automatic sliding doors. Decal shall be affixed to the direction
of travel and mounted directly between 36"and 60"above the floor surface to the
centerline of the decal.Also provide a decal that reads"AUTOMATIC DOOR"on
all automatic sliding doors. Decal shall be affixed to the direction of travel and
mounted directly above the push bar.
M. Doors shall be UL listed as an exitway.
n. Bi-Parting doors shall be equipped with automatic recycle feature.
o. Glass for use in the automatic entrances shall be 1/4"thick tempered and shall be
supplied and installed by the Storefront Contractor under Section 08400.
D. Frames:
2. Frames for all automatic swinging, sliding and bi-parting doors and their transoms shall
be"Kawneer Tri-Fab 451" or equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of automatic swinging and sliding bi-parting door assemblies shall be by authorized
representatives of the door manufacturer.
B. Supply and installation of all glass for the automatic swinging, sliding and bi-parting doors and
transoms shall be by the Storefront Contractor, under Section 08400.
3.2 WEATHERSTRIPPING
A. Provide adjustable astragal with double mohair weather stripping on all strike rails of all doors.
B. Joining of vertical panel rails shall have complimentary mohair weatherstripping, and horizontal
rails shall be weather stripped with mohair type fabric.
END OF SECTION
Automatic Entrances—08460 -3
h. All hardware shall match finish of doors. .•
i. Provide a decal that reads "AUTOMATIC DOOR"on all automatic swinging
exit doors. Decal shall be affixed to the push side of the door in the direction
of travel and mounted directly above the push bar.
C. Automatic Sliding and Bi-Parting Doors: Shall consist of the following:
1. Automatic Sliding Door System (at Vestibules): Shall be Stanley DURA-GLIDE Series
3000 Bi-Parting Door system. The system shall consist of narrow stile sliding aluminum
doors, transom (at exterior doors only, unglazed), header, operator, threshold track, and
actuating controls. The system shall be completely engineered, manufactured and
assembled by Stanley Access Technologies. All components shall be factory
assembled in the header, adjusted and tested. No field wiring or operator adjustment
shall be required other than the connection to job-site power and fine-tuning of door
speeds to compensate for various door sizes and weights.
2. Automatic Sliding Door System (at Bottle Room): Shall be Stanley DURA-GLIDE Series
3000 Single Slide Door system. The system shall consist of narrow stile sliding
aluminum doors, header, operator, threshold track, and actuating controls. The system
shall be completely engineered, manufactured and assembled by Stanley Access
Technologies.All components shall be factory assembled in the header, adjusted and
tested. No field wiring or operator adjustment shall be required other than the
connection to job-site power and fine-tuning of door speeds to compensate for various
door sizes and weights. Entire assemblies shall be supplied as complete units including
sensor type operators, header, track,jamb, sliding doors, threshold, lock, and 2 crash
bars (each leaf)on approach side of doors.
3. Automatic Sliding Door System (at Beer Chest, where applicable): Shall be Stanley
DURA-GLIDE Series 5200. The system shall consist of three-panel telescopic
aluminum doors, header, operator, and actuating controls. The system shall be
completely engineered, manufactured and assembled by Stanley Access Technologies.
All components shall be factory assembled in the header, adjusted and tested. No field
wiring or operator adjustment shall be required other than the connection to job-site
power and fine-tuning of door speeds to compensate for various door sizes and
weights.
4. All door systems shall adhere to the following:
a. Assemblies shall be constructed of 6063-T5 aluminum alloy in specified finish.
b. Opening control shall be Stanley Microwave Door Actuator detector for opening
and safety controls. Mount overhead sensors at center of sliding door frame with
fixed anti-vandal cover. Each sliding door package shall have two (2)motion
sensors per unit, one unit for exterior door actuator and one for interior door
safety that shall hold the door open or return the door to the open position when
approached from the interior(per ANSI standards).
C. Operator shall be concealed in the header that includes the track. Header shall be
designed to include antiderailment means.
d. Checking of the door movement shall be within the operator to allow controlled
deceleration of the doors.
e. Doors shall be adequately weatherstripped and shall have a threshold width not
exceeding 2"
f. Closing force of door shall not exceed 30 lbs. to stop the door.
g. All control circuits shall be low voltage.
h. Operator master switch shall have an adjustable time delay of 1 to 28 seconds.
i. Operation shall instantly convert to manual operation when power is off.
j. Vestibule doors shall include Adams-Rite MS-1850S Deadbolt lock and Best
cylinders keyed to store locking system,with a#6410 thumb turn inside.
k. All Sliding doors shall be of the swing-slide type, constructed to allow the entire
sliding door assembly to swing out from any point of travel and the sliding door to
be the exterior of the sidelight or wall, to qualify for as a legal means of exit.
Automatic Entrances—08460 -2
SECTION 08460 -AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install automatic entrances as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Automatic Swinging, Sliding and Bi-Parting Doors.
2. Frames for Automatic Swinging, Sliding and Bi-Parting Doors and their Transoms.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Supplementary General Conditions for submittal and shop drawing requirements.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stop and Shop has procured a national account for automatic doors with The Stanley Works—
Access Technologies Product Group. Contact Ron Bohigian, Stanley Access Technologies,
Project Manager—Select Accounts, Tele: 860-679-6406 to obtain quotes for Stanley products.
The GC shall confirm to S&S in writing that his subcontractor's material costs were obtained thru
S&S's national account pricing.
B. Automatic Swinging Doors: Shall consist of the following:
1. Swinging Door Operator: Shall be Stanley Magic-Force TM Swinging Door Operator—
Concealed Application—Low Energy. The system shall consist of electro-mechanical
swinging door operator and electrical controls, aluminum header, connecting hardware,
actuating controls, guide rails, and on/off/hold open switch.All components
shall be factory assembled, adjusted and tested. Color shall be Clear Anodized
Aluminum finish.
2. Railings: By Stanley, size as shown on Drawings. Railings shall be floor and wall
supported with solid panels. Open type rails will not be accepted.
3. Door Actuator: Stanley SU-050 Motion Sensor for opening control. Mount overhead at
center of door with a fixed anti-vandal cover.
4. On-Off Hold Switch: Transom mounted switch for each door.
5. Operators shall operate manually by spring action in case of loss of power,without
adjustment.
6. Aluminum/Glass Doors shall be shall be fabricated and delivered by"Stanley Access
Technologies". Doors to be heavy duty, medium stile with 2" muntin bar.Aluminum
finish shall be Clear Anodized finish. All doors shall be prepared at the factory for upper
and lower pivots. Doors shall have two (2) lines of Cart Bumpers.All doors shall be
prepared to receive hardware as per Section 8F- Finish Hardware. Hardware for each
door shall include the following:
a. One (1) push bar, one each side of each "out"door at standard height.
b. One (1) pull handle, one on the exterior side of each "out"door at standard
height.
c. Two (2)Crash Bars on each side of each door.
d. Neoprene Finger Protectors on the pivot side of the doors.
e. One (1)Adams-Rite MS1850A Deadlock for each door with Best mortise
cylinders and cams. Provide cylinders both sides of exterior doors and at the
inside only for interior doors. Provide construction cores with the doors and
final cylinders when directed by Stop &Shop.
AOW f. Provide thresholds at each door.
g. Glass for doors shall be 1/4"tempered and shall be supplied and installed by
the Storefront Contractor under Section 08400.
Automatic Entrances—08460 - 1
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Hardware for aluminum entrances shall be the manufacturer's standard hardware. Removable
core cylinders shall be supplied under Section 8F.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF ALUMINUM FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
A. Aluminum shall be prevented from direct contact with dissimilar materials.
B. Provide insulation where aluminum is in direct contact with dissimilar metals consisting of strips
of bituminous impregnated felt or fiber, or a heavy shop coat of zinc chromate primer made with
a synthetic resin vehicle of the phenolic or alkali type. Paint shall be allowed to dry before
assembly of parts.
C. Where aluminum is in direct contact with cement mortar, concrete or masonry, said contacting
surfaces shall be heavily coated with an approved asphaltic paint.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All items under this section shall be set in their correct locations as shown in the details and
shall be level, square, plumb, and at proper elevation and in alignment with other work in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. All
joints between entrance framing and the building structure shall be sealed in order to secure a
watertight installation.
B. After erection and glazing, the Contractor shall check and readjust, as necessary, all items of
operating hardware on doors installed under this section.
C. Entrance Vestibule Divider Partitions: Furnish and install aluminum sections for vestibule areas
per drawings. Upper section of divider to be glass. Lower section of divider to be insulated
panel. Height of insulated panel to be 2'-6" above finish floor for protection against damage by
carriages.
D. Furnish and install glass in all swinging, sliding and bi-parting entrance and exit doors.
E. Furnish and install all vision panels.
F. Interior Windows: Install all aluminum tube framing and glass.
3.3 PROTECTION OF ALUMINUM WORK&GLASS
A. All aluminum metal work shall be protected at all times from damage of any kind, and shall be
so protected until final acceptance by the Owner.
B. Glass which has cracked as a result of improper tension of aluminum components or from any
other cause related to the improper installation of the framing system, shall be replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
C. Tape all entrance and other aluminum metal work to completely protect metals before any
plastering, masonry or concrete work adjacent to same is performed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After the work of this section is complete, and when directed by the Owner, clean all exposed
and finished metal in accordance with Alcoa Handbook"Care of Aluminum in the Building
Industry", as approved by the Architect.
B. Clean all glass installed under this section.
END OF SECTION
Aluminum Entrances, Storefront, and Glazing—08400 -3
shall be done. Bolts, anchors, other work embedded in masonry and/or concrete shall, as far as
practicable, be installed as work progresses.
D. Workmanship and finish shall be free from blemishes and defects.Any marred, defaced,
scratched or otherwise defective items shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
E. All aluminum doors and frames shall be reinforced to receive specified hardware.
F. Aluminum metal and components shall be extruded aluminum stock as manufactured by
Kawneer, U.S. Aluminum, or Vistwall and shall be furnished in the stock numbers indicated. For
the purposes of this specification, Kawneer model numbers are listed.
G. All steel stiffeners in tubes at doorjambs and wherever required are to furnished and installed
by this Contractor.
H. All aluminum metals, exposed fasteners and hardware shall be furnished in Clear Anodized
finish or equal, unless otherwise noted or specified.
I. All concealed screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components shall be
stainless steel, plated or corrosion resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the
functions for which they are used.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum framing shall be TRI-FAB 450/451 (for 1/4"and 1"glass thickness):
1. Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with through sight
lines and no projecting stops or face joints.
2. The system shall provide full resilient setting for glass and panels by use of Neoprene
gaskets on both sides of the glass.
3. Trim moldings and face materials shall be designed to permit the installation of these
products in their regular manner and shall not interfere with the normal assembly of the
framing.
B. Aluminum framing at the Meat Cutting room window shall be a "Smoke Screen Baffle" Model
RG-200, two piece aluminum base with pre-drilled countersunk holes at 12"o.c. by Blumcraft of
Pittsburg or equal as approved by Stop& Shop.
2.3 ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Supplied under Section 08460-Automatic Entrances.
2.4 GLASS
A. Storefront Glass:All exterior storefront windows and glass shall be 1"thick Low"E"insulating
glass in accordance with the Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association (SIGMA)
Standards and Requirements. Glass shall be equal to "American Flat Glass Low'E' Heat
Reflective"type.
B. Meat Room window glass shall be ''/z"thick frosted (Meat Room side), laminated, safety glass by
Blumcraft of Pittsburg as a part of the framing system.
C. Door Vision Panels shall be 1/4"thick clear, safety glass. See drawings for sizes and coordinate
with door suppliers.
D. Interior Windows shall be 1/4"thick clear, float glass. See drawings for sizes.
E. Sliding & Bi-Parting Door& Transom Glass shall be 1/4" thick, clear, tempered glass. See
drawings for sizes and coordinate with door suppliers.
F. Vestibule Divider Partition Panels shall be 1"thick, metal clad, masonite with an insulated core,
color to match aluminum sections. Provide finished surfaces on both sides.
G. Vestibule Divider Partition Glass shall be 1/4"thick, clear, tempered glass.
H. All glass adjacent to entrances shall be tempered. Provide tempered glass at other locations as
may be required by applicable codes, whether specifically called for or not.
A"
Aluminum Entrances, Storefront, and Glazing—08400 -2
SECTION 08400 -ALUMINUM ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS &GLAZING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all aluminum entrances, storefronts, glass and glazing required by the plans
and/or specified herein, including but not limited to the following:
1. All storefront aluminum tube framing, side jambs, sill members, division bars, insulating
glass and glass to be installed in other doors and/or door units.
2. All required vinyl glazing gaskets for dry glazing of all aluminum items,whether supplied
under this section or not.
3. All required accessories such as anchors, fasteners, flashings, reinforcing, caulking, stops,
clips, closures and trim as required for a complete installation of the work under this section.
4. Furnish and install 1/4"thick tempered glass at all automatic sliding and bi-parting doors
and transoms, which are installed by the automatic door contractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Caulking and Sealing -Section 07900.
B. Hollow Metal Doors-Section 08100.
C. Wood Doors- Section 08200.
D. Automatic Entrances-Section 08460.
E. Finish Hardware-Section 08700.
1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Take all necessary field measurements of work previously executed as required for proper
fabrication and installation of the work of this section to verify drawings with actual field
conditions and assume complete responsibility for accuracy of such measurements. Inspect
related work and adjacent surfaces.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings showing complete details, all information required for fabrication, finishing
and installation of the work of this section. See the Supplementary General Conditions for
complete requirements for shop drawings and submittals.
B. Any omission of an item or items which require the Contractor's compliance under the Contract
Documents does not relieve the Contractor from such responsibility.
C. Shop drawings shall indicate elevations of all work under this section, full size thickness of
metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring, size and spacing of anchors, details of
construction, method of glazing, details of operating hardware, mullion details, weatherstripping
materials and details of installation.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and specifications are based upon products and materials of the Kawneer Company,
Inc. Whenever substitute products are to be considered, supporting technical literature,
samples, drawings and performance data must be submitted for approval prior to submission of
shop drawings. Test reports certified by an independent test laboratory must be made available
upon request.
B. Materials, hardware, aluminum alloys, construction, weatherstripping, infiltration and structural
performance tests and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's current
standard specifications and details, except as modified herein or in the drawings.
C. Anchors, screws, bolts, inserts, connecting members necessary for securing items specified
herein to other adjoining, adjacent work, angles and other reinforcement shall be provided.
Cutting, drilling, modifying of adjoining, adjacent work where necessary for proper installation
Aluminum Entrances, Storefront, and Glazing—08400 - 1
2.2 ACCESS DOORS
A. Doors for access to "in wall"or"in ceiling"plumbing, HVAC or other concealed installations shall
be Milcor Style "M"24"x 24" painted steel access doors or equal. They shall be furnished and
installed in locations required for access to mechanical or plumbing equipment, enclosed
canopy soffits, access to sign panel and elsewhere as necessary.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Doors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Door installations shall be by trained mechanics, approved by the door manufacturer.
C. Doors shall be in perfect operating condition after installation. The general contractor shall
provide protection of the completed doors until acceptance of the Project by the Owner. Any
damages occurring during this period shall be immediately corrected at no expense to the
Owner.
D. Coordinate installation with all other trades affected by the work of this section.
END OF SECTION
Special Doors—08300 -2
SECTION 08300 -SPECIAL DOORS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all special doors and related items as shown on the drawings and/or herein
specified, including but not limited to the following:
1. Hand operated side coiling aluminum security grille at the Pharmacy Department.
2. Access doors.
1.2 WARRANTIES
A. Access Doors, and Security Grilles shall be warranted by the door distributor for quality,
workmanship, materials and installation for one (1)full year from the date of acceptance of the
completed installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Supplementary General Conditions for complete details on shop drawings and submittal
requirements.
PART 2: PRODUCTS(See Drawings for door sizes)
2.1 HAND OPERATED SIDE COILING ALUMINUM SECURITY GRILLES
A. Hand operated side coiling aluminum Security Grille for the Pharmacy shall be Model SFG-H2
VisionGlide as supplied by Cornell Iron Works Inc., Mountaintop, PA and as distributed by
Desco Door Sales, Marshfield, MA or equal approved by Stop & Shop.
a. Door/Curtain construction shall be as follows:
i. Grille curtain: 5/16"diameter vertical tubes, 5056 H32 aluminum alloy, 2"o.c..
ii. Tube spacers: 7/16"outside diameter x 0.049"thick wall. Aluminum tubes to
maintain chain spacing at each hanger tube.
iii. Horizontal chains: %"wide aluminum eyelet links at 3"o.c..
iv. Hinge panels: 6" high,0.052"thick continuous interlocking extruded aluminum
panels between top and bottom two chain sets.
v. Vertical End and Intermediate Members: 1 5/16"x 2 3/8"x 1/8"thick extruded
aluminum tube with recess for attachment of curtain sections.
1. Leading end member: Provide dual concealed master-key-able,
cylinder operated, hook-bolt lock operable from Sales area side, locking
into adjacent lead member.
2. Intermediate members: Spacing not to exceed 10'-0". Provide
concealed master-key-able, cylinder operated, drop-bolt lock assembly
operable from Pharmacy side. Include dust-proof floor socket.
3. Trailing end member: Floating in pocket.
b. Trolleys: 1 1/8"diameter nylon tired ball bearing wheels, two (2)assemblies at each
hanger, four wheel assembly at all vertical members.
c. Track: 1 '/z"x 1 7/8"x 0.093"thick extruded aluminum section with continuous recess for
splice tongues and pins.
B. Pocket door and frames (for concealment of door in it's open position)shall be 12 ga. A36 steel
with 3" non-mortise type hinges and concealed master key-able, cylinder operated, hook-bolt
lock. Door, Frames, and hardware (except cylinder)shall be provided by the door supplier.
C. Provide locking device at the center of the locking bar. Cylinder to be provided by the Hardware
Supplier.
D. Finish for curtain, guides, bottom bar, and coil enclosures for grilles shall be clear anodized
aluminum. Pocket door to be furnished primed and suitable for painting.
E. For size of doors, refer to Tenant's Layout, Door Schedule, and Tenant's Blow-Up Details.
F. Submit shop drawings for Architect's review.
Special Doors—08300 - 1
8. Door clearances shall be 1/8"at jambs& head, 3/8" maximum at finished floor and ^'*
3/16" maximum at raised saddles.
9. Provide 1" undercut at doors where called for, unless otherwise noted.
2.2 FRAMES
A. Wood frames, where applicable, shall be cut from solid White Birch, unless other special stock
is noted on the Drawings.
B. Cut interior wood door frames to sizes and shapes indicated on the Door Schedule.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of door and frames is under Section 06000.
END OF SECTION
Wood Doors & Frames—08200 -2
"* SECTION 08200 -WOOD DOORS & FRAMES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all wood doors, wood mesh doors and wood door frames as shown on the
drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to the following:
1. Interior wood door frames for wood-wire mesh swinging and sliding doors.
2. Solid core birch doors.
3. Hollow core birch doors
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Carpentry-Section 06000.
B. Pressed metal frames-Section 08100.
C. Glass&Glazing - Section 08400.
D. Painting -Section 09900.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings to the Architect for approval.
1.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each door shall bear a stamp, brand, or other identifying mark indicating quality and
construction of the door. The identifying mark shall include name of the inspection organization,
identification of the standard on which the construction of the door is based and a declaration of
compliance by the plant.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide protection against physical damage, soilage and moisture during transit and at the site.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS
A. Doors shall be of the types, sizes, and designs shown in Door Schedule.
B. Top and bottom edges of door shall be sealed with a clear water-resistant varnish or a clear
water-resistant sealer prior to shipment.
C. Doors shall be stored in fully covered, well ventilated areas and protected from extreme
changes in temperature and humidity.
D. Where shown, doors shall be prepared for the reception of glass.
E. Glass requirements are specified in Section 08400.
F. Doors shall be prepared to receive all finish hardware.
G. Adhesives and bonds shall be in accordance with NWMA Standard I.S.1, using requirements for
Type II interior doors. Adhesives for doors to receive a natural finish shall be non-staining.
H. Warp tolerances shall be in accordance with NWMA Standard I.S.1.
I. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Shall be 1 3/4"thick, select white birch, and shall conform to Commercial Standard
DS171, Premium Grade Type II.
2. Shall have continuous wood block or wood strip core.
3. Shall have center-matched birch face veneer, matched for grain and color.
4. Stiles shall be hardwood. Mill option edges not acceptable. Stiles to be compatible in
color with face veneers. Edge treatment as required.
5. Door to be furnished with vision panels and louvers as shown in the Door Schedule.
6. Louvers to have 50%free air opening.
7. All doors to be pre-finished with a clear polyurethane varnish, gloss finish.
Wood Doors & Frames—08200 - 1
C. Louvers: Doors (where shown) shall receive factory installed welded blade type louvers.
Louvers pierced into the face sheets will not be permitted. Louver blades are to be 20 gauge
and the frames are to be of 18 gauge welded steel construction.
D. Glazing: Doors (where shown) shall be furnished with factory installed hollow metal mouldings
to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass opening sizes shown on approved shop
drawings. Fixed mouldings shall be securely welded to the door on security side. Loose stops
shall be not less than 20 gauge steel, with mitered corner joints, secured to the frame opening
with cadmium or zinc coated countersunk screws. Snap-in type attachments will not be allowed.
2.3 PANELS
A. Hollow metal panels, where indicated, shall be made of the same materials, constructed and
finished in the same way as specified for hollow metal doors.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Furnish and install pressed steel combination buck and trim type frames for doors, transoms,
sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels and similar type openings where indicated on the
Drawings. NOTE: All glass window frames are aluminum.
B. Provide welded or knock-down unit type frames, designed with integral stop and trim. Mitered
corners shall be reinforced with 18 gauge channel shaped reinforcements. Corners shall be
mitered, continuously arc-welded and ground smooth on the frame face.
C. All frames shall be fabricated in accordance with SDI 111A.
D. Exterior frames shall be 14 gauge minimum.
E. Interior frames shall be 16 gauge minimum.
F. Frame Anchors: Frames shall be equipped with one welded-in floor anchor and three (3) field
insertion steel lock-in anchors (maximum of 24" o.c.) per jamb.
1. Anchors shall be of the proper type for the particular construction involved (i.e., wood
frame, masonry, concrete or steel stud).
2. Floor anchors shall be a minimum of 14 gauge steel,with two holes provided for floor
anchorage.
3. Where called for, adjustable floor anchors, providing a minimum of 2" height adjustment,
shall be provided.
4. Field insertion anchors shall be a minimum of 18 gauge steel strap or 3/16" diameter
wire, adjustable or'T' shaped.
5. Provide minimum 18 gauge ceiling struts when required.
E. Coordinate frames with wood door supplier.
PART 3: EXECUTION
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of door and frames is under Section 06000.
END OF SECTION
Hollow Metal Doors & Frames —08100 - 3
I. All exposed surfaces of exterior hollow and pressed metal work shall receive one coat of baked
on prime paint in addition to the galvanizing process. Concealed surfaces of exterior hollow and
pressed metal work shall receive one coat of shop primer, baked on, and a second coat of
bituminous paint.
J. Interior hollow and pressed metal work shall be shop primed with one coat of primer.
K. Paint shall be a zinc chromate primer conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-57, Type III.
L. SDI 118 will apply to finish or all hollow and pressed metal work.
M. Hardware Preparations: Doors and frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at
the factory for fully templated hardware only, in accordance with the approved hardware
schedule, with templates to be provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted
hardware is to be applied, doors and frames shall have reinforcement plates only, all drilling and
tapping for surface mounted hardware shall be done in the field by others. Plaster guards shall
be installed on all applicable hardware cutouts in the frames. Strike jambs of frames shall
receive three rubber silencers.
N. Hardware Locations: Unless otherwise specified, the location of locks, hinges, latches, push-pull
plates and bars, exit devices handle sets, roller latches, closer reinforcings, and arm pulls shall
conform to the recommendations of the Door and Hardware Institute.
O. Labeled Doors & Frames: Where noted or required by codes, provide doors and frames with
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. labels with appropriate fire resistance and temperature rise
ratings for the class of opening indicated. Construction details and hardware applications
authorized by the Underwriters' Laboratories shall take precedence over project details or
specifications.
P. Workmanship: All work shall be shop fabricated to required profiles by forming and welding with
corners, angles and edges straight and sharp unless covered by bull nose, etc. Fit and fabricate
accurately with corners,joints, seams and surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle or other
defects. Insofar as possible, execute fitting, fabricating of work at shop. Ship work ready for
installation at building.
Q. Storage: All doors shall be individually packaged in cartons completely covering entire door to
prevent damage or marring of the finish. Doors shall be stored in an upright position under cover
on the building site on wood sills or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.
Avoid creating a humidity chamber by using a plastic or canvas shelter and venting the area
covered.
2.2 DOORS
A. Exterior Doors: Shall be insulated, 1 3/4" thick, Type II, Heavy Duty, Style 2, Full Flush, Hollow
Steel Construction in accordance with SDI 100 and meeting the following requirements:
R. Shall be fabricated of 16 gauge cold rolled steel. The material shall be treated in the mill to
insure superior prime paint adhesion.
S. Shall be flush with vertical mechanical interlocking seams on the hinge and lock edges.
T. Shall have 14 gauge top and bottom inverted steel channels spot welded within doors.
U. Provide out swinging exterior doors with rigid vi nyl top caps.
V. Shall be insulated with polyurethane, either foamed in place or laminated to each panel.
Compressive strength of the polyurethane shall be 20 psi minimum. The strength of the bond
between the foam and the steel panels shall exceed the strength of the foam. Voids in the foam
shall not exceed 1/2" in any direction. Foam density shall be 1.8#/cf minimum.
B. Interior Doors: Shall be 1 3/4" thick, Type I, Standard Duty, Style 2, Full Flush, Hollow Steel
Construction in accordance with SDI 100 and meeting the following requirements:
1. Shall be fabricated of 18 gauge cold rolled steel. The material shall be treated in the mill
to insure superior prime paint adhesion.
2. Shall be flush with vertical mechanical interlocking seams on the hinge and lock edges.
3. Shall have 14 gauge top and bottom inverted steel channels spot welded within doors.
4. Shall be reinforced, stiffened and sound deadened with impregnated kraft honeycomb
core completely filling the inside of, and laminated to the inside faces of the door.
Honeycomb material shall have a crushing strength of 4000 psf minimum and the ,.
lamination shall stand not less than 1000 psf in shear.
Hollow Metal Doors & Frames —08100 -2
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.3 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all metal doors, frames and related items as indicated and herein specified,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install all Grade I, Model I, Standard Duty Level C Interior and Grade ll,
Model I, Heavy Duty Level B Exterior hollow metal doors as shown on the Drawings and
in accordance with the Door Schedule, including fire-rated label doors where called for.
2. Furnish and install all pressed metal frames where shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with the Door Schedule, complete with reinforcement, anchors and
accessories, including fire-rated label frames where called for.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Glass and Glazing -Section 08400.
B. Finish Hardware - Section 08700.
C. Painting -Section 09900.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the General Conditions for complete details on submittal requirements.
B. Shop drawings shall fully describe and locate all items being furnished and shall include large
scale details of all principal construction features.
C. Approved shop drawings shall constitute final contract requirements, and no work shall
commence until shop drawings for that work have been approved by the Architect.
D. Certify compliance with the Standards of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Project
Specifications.
1.4 STANDARDS
A. Hollow metal doors and pressed metal frames shall be manufactured in accordance with the
latest Standards of the Steel Door Institute. Doors shall be equal to "SteelCraft'L' Series".
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Sheet steel for hollow and pressed metal items shall be commercial quality, level, cold rolled
steel conforming to ASTM A366-68.
B. The following are minimum gages (LISS) for hollow and pressed metal items:
Item Gage
Exterior Doors 16
Interior Doors 18
Exterior Door Frames 14
Interior Door Frames 16
Removable Door Stops 16
Adjustable Jambs Anchors 18
Clip Angles at Bottom of Door Jamb 14
Structural & Hardware Reinforcing 10
Vision Panel Frames & Transom Frames 16
C. Exterior hollow and pressed metal work shall be galvanized steel.
D. Steel reinforcements, supports, bracing and subframing shall be in accordance with ASTM A-
366.
E. Shop Painting and Finishing of Hollow and Pressed Metal Work:
look F. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, grease, oil and other foreign substances.
G. Phosphate treat (to assure maximum paint adhesion)
H. Fill all defects with an epoxy putty, sand to smooth and even surface.
Hollow Metal Doors& Frames —08100 - 1
DIVISION 8
DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS
3. Report all unsatisfactory conditions existing at the time of the inspection in writing to the
Architect.
4. Notify the manufacturer at least 72 hours prior to the time the inspection is required.
5. Failure or refusal of the manufacturer to provide the inspection and supervision as
required constitutes grounds for declaring the manufacturer's materials non-acceptable,
even though such materials have been specified and approved.
6. Start of work on any joint will be considered acceptance of conditions and dimensions of
the joint.
B. Preparation of Joints:
1. Joints shall be clean and thoroughly dry, and shall be primed where and as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. All joints shall be backed with joint backing material to eliminate back bond. Joint
proportions shall be as recommended by manufacturer.
3. All concrete and masonry shall be completely cured.
4. All existing masonry control joints shall be stripped, cleaned, and re-sealed.
C. Application:
1. All work of this section shall be in strict accordance with the sealant manufacturer's
printed instructions for the various materials and conditions.
2. Compound shall be applied by hand guns, without smearing of adjacent surfaces, and
with sufficient pressure and proper nozzle size to solidly fill all voids and joints. Beads
shall be tooled to insure smooth finish and firm, full contact with sides of joints and a
concave shaped surface.
3. No caulking shall be placed when the temperature is below 40°F.
3.2 CLEAN-UP
A. Immediately after application of sealants,thoroughly clean all adjacent surfaces that may have
been soiled.
B. Leave work neat and clean condition to full satisfaction of Architect.
END OF SECTION
Caulking &Sealing—07900 -3
3. Tremco- "THC-901".
B. Two part polyurethane for vertical use: as manufactured to meet ASTM C-920 by one of the
following:
1. Pecora - "GC-5 Synthacalk".
2. Sonneborn Division of ChemRex, Inc. - "Sonolastic Two-Part Sealant".
C. Silicone: for sealant conditions, except on grade as manufactured to meet the specified
requirements by one of the following:
1. Dow Corning - V795".
2. G.E. Silpruf Sealant.
D. Fire Stop Systems: For thru-wall, thru-floor and thru-roof penetrations as manufactured to meet
the specified requirements by one of the following:
1. Dow Corning Fire Stop System.
2. G.E. Pensil 851 Silicone Foam Penetration Sealant.
E. Caulking compounds at vertical and horizontal building joints, interior and exterior shall be of no-
sag consistency, non-staining by migration through adjacent building materials.
F. Primers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use in conjunction with the sealant
for application on the various types of materials to which the sealer is applied.
G. Sealant Colors:All colors shall be selected by the Architect and approved by the Owner.
H. Bond Breaker: As recommended, in writing, by the sealant manufacturer.
I. Backer Rods/Joint Fillers:
1. Joint filler material in back of caulking shall be a closed cell polyethylene or a closed cell
neoprene non-staining material.
2. Filler materials shall be closed cell, compressible, resilient, free from tar, asphalt, oil and
other foreign substances.
3. Filler shall be approved expanded polyethylene foam in rod shape, rectangular shape or
other approved filler(no polystyrene will be allowed)which shall not bond with the
sealant.
4. If chemical or mechanical bond may occur, provide an approved bond breaker or
release material at the surface of the filler.
5. Filler shall be at least 30%wider than the width of the joint, to which it is applied.
6. Compression of installed filler shall be sufficient so as to allow no movement of backer
rod/joint filler.
J. All caulking and sealant materials shall be delivered to the job site in unopened containers,
bearing the manufacturer's name, date of manufacture, instructions for mixing, storage,
handling, etc., copies of which shall be submitted to the Architect along with the samples for
approval and be made available on the job site at all times.
K. Manufacturer's label shall indicate the date of manufacture or the manufacturer shall otherwise
attest to the date of manufacture. For polyurethanes, the elapsed time from date of manufacture
to date of installation shall not exceed six (6) months.
L. Structural steel columns that are embedded within the exterior masonry walls shall be treated
with a fluid applied waterproofing material approved for this use to prevent corrosion.
M. Caulking compound for use in the installation of aluminum cove base and aluminum corner
guards shall be a silicone caulk such as "Dow Corning#795".
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Joint Inspection:
1. Provide manufacturer's inspection of conditions prior to start of the Work and initial
supervision at the start of each application, in order to insure that any physical
conditions which would result in defective work are properly corrected before materials
are applied, that properly instructed personnel are available to do the work, and that * .
proper procedures are being followed.
2. Provide such inspection and supervision by qualified personnel.
Caulking & Sealing —07900 -2
SECTION 07900 -CAULKING AND SEALING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish materials and install all caulking and sealing work, as required to complete the work as
indicated. Including, but not limited to the following:
1. Caulking of control joints in masonry work(both new&existing Masonry).
2. Caulking of door frames, window frames, louver frames, and other items occurring in
openings in exterior walls.
3. Caulking of thresholds of exterior doors.
4. Caulking the perimeter of all interior door and window frames at the juncture with the
wall finish.
5. Sealant for thru-wall, thru-floor and thru-roof fire stops.
6. Caulking of all exposed construction joints, control joints, and cracks in the concrete
slabs &sidewalks. Expansion joints to be a maximum of 3/8"wide.
7. Waterproofing of columns within exterior masonry walls.
8. Any other exterior or interior caulking or sealing shown, or reasonably required to
complete the work.
1.2 SAMPLES AND PRODUCTS DATA
A. Submit to Architect for approval two (2)samples and manufacturer's product data for each type
of specified product.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A. Provide written guarantee for all sealant work against defective material or workmanship for a
period of five(5)years, commencing on the date of final acceptance by the Owner.
B. The guarantee shall further state that sealants are guaranteed against:
1. Adhesive or cohesive failure in joints where movement is under maximum of 30%
extension or 20% compression.
2. Any crazing greater than 3 mils in depth developing on surfaces of material.
3. Any staining of surfaces adjacent to joints by sealant or primer by migration through
building materials in contact with them.
4. Any puncture, abrasion or tear failure due to pedestrian or vehicular traffic in self-
leveling polyurethane sealant installed at horizontal surfaces.
5. Chalking or visible color change on surface of cured sealant.
6. Increase or decrease of Shore"A"durometer hardness (5 second reading)of sealant of
more than 30% of value of 7 day value of Shore"A"durometer hardness of sealant.
C. Guarantee provisions shall include agreement to repair or replace at Contractor's expense all
sealant defects as listed above which develop during guarantee period.
1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Specification A116.1.
B. Federal Specification TT-S-00227 with additional requirements that for standard color range of
black,white and grey, said sealant's weight loss after heat(Paragraph 3.5.5): no more than 8%
instead of 15% as called for in said specifications.
C. All caulking used in food processing areas shall be USDA/FDA approved.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Two part polyurethane for horizontal use: as manufactured to meet ASTM C-920 by one of the
00** following:
1. Pecora -"NR-200 Urexpan".
2. Sonneborn Division of ChemRex, Inc. -"Sonolastic SL-2".
Caulking &Sealing—07900 - 1
END OF SECTION
Roofing & Insulation—07500 -7
3.7 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE ,00%
A. The following personnel shall be requested to attend:
1. The Stop &Shop Project Manager or his representative.
2. The Landlord or his representative.
3. The Architect or his representative.
4. The Testing Company's Representative.
5. The General Contractor and his Superintendent.
6. The Roofing Contractor and his Job Foreman.
7. Roofing Material Manufacturer's Representative.
8. The Mechanical Subcontractor and his Job Foreman.
B. The General Contractor's Representative shall record all decisions made at the meeting and
they shall become a part of the permanent job record.
C. Items to be reviewed, discussed and resolved:
1. Review specifications, roof plans, roof and flashing details.
2. Manufacturer's specifications, differences and deviations (if any)from the Architect's
Specification.
3. Underwriter's Laboratories and/or Factory Mutual requirements and conflicts (if any)
with the Architect's and/or the Manufacturer's Specification.
4. Review plans for roof slope, deck type, drainage, membrane attachment and the like. If
a conflict exists between what is considered "good roofing practice"and the
specifications, resolve all objections and make final decisions a part of the permanent
job record.
5. Limitations imposed by weather or other special requirements shall be discussed and
understood by all.
6. Examine all plans to determine whether different roof areas receive different roof
membranes, where different thicknesses or types of roof insulation occur, changes in
roof membrane and/or other situations peculiar to the project.
7. Establish which areas of the site will be available to the Roofing Contractor for storage
and working areas.
8. Clarify all specifications, details and application requirements, including what work
should be completed before the roofing operation begins.
9. Roofing inspection and testing schedule shall be discussed.
10. Review coordination with other trades, material storage, construction traffic, etc.
11. Review air/vapor barrier requirements and tie in responsibilities with wall air/vapor
barriers provided under Section 07220.
12. Review of temporary protection: Clarify temporary protection methods and material of
completed roof system to assure warranty compliance. Topics of discussion shall
include traffic from other trades, material storage protection from other trades, and any
other potentially damaging activities such as mechanical ductwork welding which may
affect the finished system.
3.3 ROOF WARRANTY
A. At completion of the roofing work and after his final inspection, the Roofing System
Manufacturer shall deliver his written Warranty to the Landlord with copies to Stop& Shop, the
Architect, the General Contractor and the Roofing Contractor.Also supply an original and copies
of the warranty for the metal roofing system.
3.4 ROOFING SYSTEM APPROVALS
A. The entire roofing system shall be approved as follows:
1. By Underwriters Laboratories as a "Class A"system
2. By Factory Mutual as a Class 1A/90 system.
Roofing & Insulation—07500 -6
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch with insulation.
G. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
H. Attached Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical
fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to
deck type indicated.
I. Fasten insulation according to requirements of FM's "Approval Guide"for specified Windstorm
Resistance Classification and the insulation and roofing system manufacturers'written
instructions.
J. Fasten insulation according to the insulation and roofing system manufacturers'written
instructions.
3.4 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of 30 minutes.
B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Perimeter Sheets (in accordance with FM 1-28 data sheet):
E. Provide three (3')foot wide half sheets at perimeter parallel with deck flutes.
F. Provide six(6)foot wide half sheets at perimeter perpendicular with deck flutes.
G. All perimeter half sheets are to be fully lapped, alternating, at outside corners.
H. Install fasteners with seam plates within seam at rates indicated on the Drawings. Seam
fasteners shall be HPX#15 screws with piranha plates attached at 6 in.o.c..
I. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
J. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing sheet in
place with clamping ring.
3.5 SEAM INSTALLATION
A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets and flashings
according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Weld
seam as follows:
B. Weld Method: Hot air.
C. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam caulk to seal cut edges of
sheet membrane.
D. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and
end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of sheet flashing terminations.
F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
Roofing & Insulation —07500 -5
following rows 12"o.c. above the first(staggered). Guards shall be model#PS-6 as
manufactured by Roofer's Edge, Chicopee, MA Tele: (413) 568-4446 or equal. Color shall be a
Copper Fluoropolymer(Kynar 500)finish to match the metal roofing.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. The entire roofing system must comply with the requirements of Factory Mutual for a Class 1A-
90 roof. System shall also meet UL Class A Fire Resistive Rating and FM 1A-90 requirements
for wind and uplift.
B. All wood blocking is to be supplied and installed under Section 06000 of these Specifications,
and shall be mechanically fastened to the steel deck with sheet metal screws of sufficient length
to penetrate the deck at least 1/2".
C. Install roof insulation in accordance with the insulation board manufacturer's written instructions.
The insulation shall be laid and mechanically fastened to the steel roof deck so as to meet
Factory Mutual 1-90 Wind/Uplift standards.
D. Roof membrane shall be installed in strict accordance with Carlisle's written instructions and
details for the mechanically fastened system. Membrane field sheets shall be run perpendicular
to the steel decking.All seams shall be mechanically fastened at a rate of 6"o.c. as per FM 1-90
requirements.
E. Flashings, gravel stops/fascias, special protective roofing, roof walkway treads, pitch pockets,
vent flashings, stub column flashings, etc. shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and published details and FM Class 1, insulated roofing
requirements.
F. The Owner supplied and installed exterior coolers, at the rear of the building, shall be roofed
with the single-ply membrane in a fully adhered fashion.
G. All metal roofing shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and details. The finished system shall be watertight.
H. Install insulation around the full perimeter of all roof-top HVAC curbs.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Contractor shall close off deck flutes carefully with Froth-Pak Nightseal to eliminate
water penetrations. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining
roofing.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated and to Shop
Drawings.
D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.
When installed in 2 or more layers, place joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints
of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
Roofing & Insulation—07500 -4
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Roof Insulation: Shall be dense isocyanurate rigid board insulation equal to"Carlisle, "Apache
Whiteline PyroPly", or"NRG Barriers". Roof insulation shall be FM approved for use on metal
decks, shall be compatible with and approved by the roofing system manufacturer, and shall
conform to ASTM C 1289-01, Grade 2.
B. Minimum roof insulation thickness or"R"value must meet the requirements of Local, State, or
Federal Energy Conservation Codes. Thickness is 3.5"with a minimum aged R-value of R-21.7.
Provide tapered insulation where shown on the drawings (i.e. crickets, etc.).
C. Roof Membrane: Carlisle Sure-Seal MRFS .045"thick pre-cleaned reinforced EPDM
membrane is used for this system. Membrane shall be 10'wide max. x 100' length or less.
a. Perimeter edge enhancements shall conform to Factory Mutual data sheet FM I-
28.All half sheets shall be:
i. Two (2)6'-0"wide half sheets on all edges running perpendicular to the
metal decking.
ii. Four(4)3'-0"wide half sheets on all edges running parallel to the metal
roof decking.
iii. Provide additional enhancements as required per Local codes.
b. All half sheets shall be criss-crossed at all outside corners.
D. Fasteners for Membrane: All seam fasteners shall be HPX fasteners with piranha plates.
Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FM
4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
E. Fasteners for Insulation Board: As required by Factory Mutual. Provide"Insulfast"screws with
3"stress plates in the following pattern:
Field roof area 12 fasteners
Perimeters 18 fasteners
Corners 21 fasteners
F. Fully adhered roof areas shall be required to have sixteen (16)fasteners per 4'x8' insulation
board.
G. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with membrane roofing material. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet
VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Furnish Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type,thickness, and color as
sheet membrane.
I. Furnish Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. Night sealer shall be as recommended by
membrane manufacturer. Provide Froth-Pak Nightseal, as manufactured by Insta-Foam
Products, Inc.
J. AirNapor Barrier: Low-density polyethylene sheet reinforced with a HDPE monofilament grid
equal to Relex 275.All seams must be taped and all perimeters/penetrations appropriately
sealed and terminated. Roof vapor barrier must lap and seal to the wall surface vapor barrier
system.
K. Flashings: Shall be compatible products from the Carlisle Co.
L. Metal Edging: .040"aluminum, color to be Anodized Aluminum or selected by Architect. Color
at brick masonry shall be dark bronze to match existing. Gravel stops, fascias, etc. shall be
"Carlisle Secure Edge 3000"or equal in sizes as indicated on the drawings.All materials shall
be approved for use by Factory Mutual.
M. Counterflashings, reglets, etc. shall be compatible with the specified roofing system.
N. Special protective sheet for use at high heat or grease areas shall be "Epichlorohydrin".
O. Necessary caulkings, adhesives, etc. shall be either Carlisle products or approved by them.
P. Standing seam metal roofing: Atas International, Inc. model number PCB001.Panels shall be
nominal 16"width, with 1" high snap-on battens. Panels shall be 24 gauge G90 steel. Texture
shall be smooth. Color shall be V23-Coppertone" Fluoropolymer(Kynar 500)finish. Provide all
necessary trim pieces, closures, caulking tapes, etc.
Q. Underlayment for metal roofing shall be an Ice and Water shield over the entire sloped roof
area.
OOW R. Provide snow guards at the base of the roof slope. Space guards at 24"o.c. (or every other
metal roofing"pan"). Provide three (3)rows of guards starting at 8"from roof edge with the
Roofing & Insulation—07500 -3
C. The Manufacturer's Representative shall inspect the roof deck,job conditions, roofing materials,
etc. prior to the start of the work. He shall inspect the work in progress to insure compliance with
the manufacturer's standards of practice.
D. Upon completion of the roofing system work, the Contractor, the Roofing System Subcontractor,
the Manufacturer's Representative, the Testing Company's Representative and the Architect
shall fully inspect the roofing system for compliance with the manufacturer's standards and
acceptableness to the manufacturer for warranty purposes. Any defects noted shall be corrected
immediately to insure delivery of the manufacturer's written warranty.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Construction Manager shall provide shop drawings and technical information to the
Architect for approval prior to installation. Submittal shall consist of, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Samples and/or technical data on all components of the roofing system proposed. Technical
data must be clearly marked as to which product is to be used when data sheets indicate
more than one product on a sheet. Sizes of components must be clearly marked where
varying sizes, thicknesses, etc. of a product is listed.
b. Factory Mutual (FM)report number verifying compliance with the specific EPDM
mechanically attached system with vapor barrier.
c. Evidence of FM approved fastening pattern for rigid insulation attachment.
d. Verification of FM 1-28 compliance regarding number and size of perimeter half-sheets and
fastening pattern.
e. Evidence of compliance with FM fastening pattern for corner enhancements.
f. NES Report Number verifying code compliance.
g. Evidence of compliance with FM requirements for layout of sheet membrane.
h. Written certification from membrane manufacturer that a Warranty Reserve Fund financially
supports the warranty.
i. Written evidence from the Roofing Contractor of a roof work safety plan and compliance
with OSHA Standards.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall be delivered to the project site in new and unopened containers.
B. All insulation materials shall be stored in a dry place, raised on pallets above the roofing
surface, and double wrapped before and during application of the roofing system. Pre-packaged
shrink-wrap on insulation bundles will not be sufficient to satisfy this requirement.
C. Any materials damaged in shipment or which is exposed to the elements shall be immediately
replaced with new materials.
D. Roofing materials shall be stored in a designated dry space, raised on pallets, and covered
before and during use.
E. This specification is based on the products of the Carlisle SynTec Systems. If the Roofing
Contractor proposes to attempt a substitution of the roofing system, he shall so state in his bid
and shall also state the proposed savings to Stop & Shop for accepting a roofing system other
than Carlisle. Other manufacturer's products would be considered, provided they meet all
requirements of this specification. If a roofing substitution is not clearly indicated and requested
in the bid process, Stop&Shop will assume that the bidder intends to provide a Carlisle system
as specified herein. Later requests for consideration of a substitution, will not be considered or
accepted.
F. Membrane roofing shall meet the requirements of UL Class "A" Fire Resistive Rating and
Factory Mutual Class 1A/1-90.
G. Membrane roofing system design shall meet the minimum wind uplift rating requirements of
Factory Mutual 1-90.
Roofing & Insulation —07500 -2
SECTION 07500— ROOFING AND INSULATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install, complete roofing system consisting of 8'wide white .045"thick scrim-
reinforced EPDM membrane. Insulation is mechanically fastened to an acceptable roof deck.
Perimeter sheets(4'wide)are installed along the building edges and field membrane sheets are
mechanically fastened to the roof deck with the appropriate fasteners and fastening plates.
Adjoining sheets of membrane are overlapped and joined together with a minimum 1-1/2"wide
hot air weld. Furnish and install, complete, all membrane, roof insulation, flashings, gravel
stops,fascias, roof walkway treads, Metal Roofing Panels, etc. as shown on the drawings
and/or specified herein. The Work of this Section includes but is not limited to:
1. Roof Insulation, included tapered where shown.
2. Vapor Barrier over metal roof decking.
3. Single-ply mechanically fastened EPDM membrane roofing system,with a fifteen (15)
year warranty.
4. All roofing flashings.
5. All metal work, such as fascias, gravel stops, finish metal profiles, etc.
6. All metal roofing materials and trim pieces.
7. Pre-roofing conference.
8. Fully adhered single-ply EPDM roofing and tapered insulation at front canopies.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's written "Total System Warranty"with No Dollar Limit signed by
manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, covering both labor and material and agreeing to repair
or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship for a period of fifteen (15)
years after date of Substantial Completion. "Defects" is defined to include, but not limited to,
leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration, and failure to perform as required.
a. Warranty shall be 15 year, total system warranty, no dollar limit coverage.
b. Membrane manufacturer shall provide an enhanced wind speed coverage of 72 mph.
B. The warranty shall be submitted to the Architect in writing, for delivery to the Owner.
C. Warranty to include all insulations/underlayments, air/vapor barriers, and metal edge trim.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. The Roofing Contractor shall have a minimum quality rating of 9.0 with project references of the
installation of a minimum of 500,000 square feet of EPDM roofing systems.
B. Stop &Shop shall mandate job starts and in-progress inspections by the membrane
manufacturer and shall require written documentation and digital photography. All
correspondence shall be directed to the Stop & Shop Construction Project Manager.
C. As a measure of quality assurance, the contractor's foreman and/or detail mechanic shall have
specifically attended the manufacturer's training program and shall provide a certificate of
attendance, to be forwarded with the submittal package.
D. All gravel stop details using pressure-sensitive flashings shall utilize sealant at all perimeter
edges.
E. All warranties shall be officially documented describing the warranty reserve fund via an annual
report or notarized letter from the manufacturer.
F. Building products that contain asbestos or other hazardous materials shall not be allowed.
Common products that contain asbestos are, but not limited to:
Roofing tars, patching compounds, and flashing materials/tars.
Roof shingles/tars.
1.4 INSPECTION &TESTING:
A. The Owner shall engage the services of a qualified Inspection and Testing Company.
B. The Contractor shall cooperate and assist the testing company in the completion of their work.
Roofing & Insulation—07500 - 1
SECTION 07240 - SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Supply and install all exterior synthetic stucco as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 5 copies of manufacturers material specifications and application instructions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be "Sto Essence NExT "by"STO Industries, Atlanta, GA". Materials from other
manufacturers will be considered by the Architect only if they demonstrate that the product is listed
as an approved manufacturer by Factory Mutual (FM) or that the product conforms to and passes
Factory Mutual's code and testing criteria as set forth in FM data sheet 1-63. For the purposes of
this specification, model and system numbers from Sto Industries shall be used as the basis.
B. Provide "Sto Guard" system over the gypsum sheathing consisting of:
1. "Sto Gold Fill" and reinforcing mesh.
2. "Sto Gold Coat" air/vapor barrier.
C. Adhesive shall be "STO Primer/Adhesive-B Adhesive" placed vertically.
D. Insulation board shall be Sto EPS expanded polystyrene with less than 25 flame spread, 1.0 Ib./cf
nominal density; U = 0.25/inch; ASTM C 578-87a, Type 1. Board must be manufactured and
packaged by a STO approved and licensed EPS board molder. Insulation shall be the thickness
and profiles shown on the drawings. The thicker sections of insulation may, at the contractor's
option, be built-up, provided that proper adhesion of the layers is provided.
took, E. Mesh shall be "Sto Mesh"glass fiber fabric. Use "STO Corner Mat" at all corners. Use "STO Mesh
—C" at all areas which are less than 8'-0" above finish grade.
F. Base coat shall be "STO RFP".
G. Finish coat shall be "Sto Essence Finish" —Sto Fine Sand. See the drawings for colors.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the system in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and
specifications.
B. Provide all necessary aluminum flashings.
C. Provide all necessary expansion joints in the system.
D. See the drawings for the various insulation profiles required. The insulation shall be precut and
shaped to the required profiles.
END OF SECTION
Synthetic Stucco System —07240 - 1
"* SECTION 07220—AIR &VAPOR BARRIERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all building air and vapor barriers as shown on the drawings and/or herein
specified, including but not limited to the following:
1. Exterior wall air barrier behind masonry.
2. Exterior wall vapor barrier.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR&VAPOR BARRIER MATERIALS
A. Air Barriers where indicated on the drawings and required by local codes for use on the exterior
face of the wall assembly shall be 40 mil CCW-705 AirNapor Barrier by"Carlisle". Barrier is to be
placed over the exterior gypsum sheathing at masonry veneer walls.
B. Vapor Barriers where indicated on the drawings and required by local codes for use on the
interior face of the wall assembly shall be 6 mil polyethylene sheeting.
C. Refer to Section 07500 for roof vapor barrier requirements/specifications to be provided by the
roofing contractor.
D. Refer to Section 07240 for air/vapor barrier that is provided as a component of the EIFS system.
B. Furnish and Install a 6 mil. polyethylene vapor barrier in all partitions separating the Meat
Cutting, Produce Pre-Pack Room and Produce Work Room from the Sales Area or other non-
refrigerated rooms.
P" PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air&vapor barriers in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions and in
adherence to local codes.
B. Air&vapor barriers shall overlap at the roof level to provide a continuous barrier to the outside
air.
END OF SECTION
Air&Vapor Barriers—07220 - 1
SECTION 07200 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all building (thermal and acoustical)insulation as shown on the drawings
and/or herein specified, including but not limited to the following:
1. Interior wall insulation.
2. Interior wall acoustical insulation.
3. Exterior wall insulation at all Masonry furred out walls.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
B. Thermal insulation shall be foil-faced fiberglass roll type complying with Federal Specification
HH-1-521 F, Type II, Class C, as manufactured by Johns-Manville. Size shall be full thickness of
wall into which the insulation is to be installed, as called for on the drawings.
C. Acoustical insulation for the interior walls shall be"Fiberglass Sound Control Batts"as
manufactured by Johns-Manville and meeting Federal Specification HH-1-521 F, Type I. Size
shall be 4"x 24"x 96"L.
D. Thermal insulation (rigid)at masonry furred-out walls shall be 1"thick Styrofoam Z-Mate by
"Dow"
E. Thermal insulation (rigid)at exterior masonry veneer cavity shall be 1 1/2"thick Styrofoam
Cavity-Mate by"Dow"
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
B. Furnish and install full thickness (4" minimum)roll type thermal insulation with a foil faced vapor
barrier in all partitions separating refrigerated with non-refrigerated areas.
C. Batt insulation exposed to the air in the area above the acoustical ceiling shall be unfaced or
faced with a non-combustible faceing.
END OF SECTION
Building Insulation—07200 - 1
opw
DIVISION 7
THERMAL & MOISTURE
PROTECTION
low
2. FRP (fiberglass reinforced plastic) is to be installed in areas including, but not limited to,
the Meat Cutting Room, Deli Storage, In-Store Bakery, Florist Area, corridors to Toilet
Areas, behind Storage area slop sinks, Bottle Room, Sales area at doors to Storage
areas and casework ends, and elsewhere where shown on the drawings. Material is to
be Class 1 or Class A (Fire-Rated).
3. The following listing of rooms and specific paneling required:
a. White FRP with an embossed finish, "Kal-Lite LF&S" or Sequentia (White)
shall be used in:
(1) Meat Cutting Room
(2) Deli Storage Room
(3) Bakery/Bakery Work Area
b. Thick Ivory FRP with an embossed finish, "Kai-Lite LF&S" (Thick Ivory)shall
be used in:
(1) 320 square feet for installation on walls behind the slop sinks and
elsewhere as directed by Stop & Shop.
c. "Kai-Lite LF&S Smooth Matte" (Thick Ivory) (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) shall be
used in the following areas:
(1) Corridor leading to the Mezzanine and Sales Area Toilet Rooms
(2) Near Main Entry Vestibules (2'-10" high)
(3) Bottle room (8'-0" high)
(4) Bottle Storage Area
(5) Front end at register area (2'-10" high)
4. It is recommended that the material be purchased through Stop& Shop to insure
product color uniformity with FRP that is to be provided by Stop & Shop's Millwork
Carpenter. Verify the color, finish and location with Stop& Shop Project Manager prior
to installation. Submit samples. (See the Room Finish Schedule for details)
J. Install structural stiffeners at low partitions as furnished under Section 5A.
K. Furnish and install all soffit panels and trim pieces. DO NOT locate ventilated panels
immediately adjacent to a canopy light fixture.
L. Furnish and install all miscellaneous millwork as required by this and other sections of the
Specifications, including but not limited to:
1. Wood trim per Room Finish Schedule.
2. Birch casings and sills around Front Mezzanine open rail areas.
3. Maple cap at low walls as called for on the Drawings and at vertical wall ends at stair
hall edges and other locations at wall ends at the front end area.
4. All trim & casings are to have mitered corners and nail holes depressed and concealed
with putty.
5. All running joints in trim pieces too long for a single piece shall be 450 lap cuts.
M. The Carpentry Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous millwork as required
including, but not limited to:
1. Trim around Meat Cutting Room window on Meat Room Area side and the window
head,jambs and sill shall be white "Saniboard".
2. Provide and install 3/4""SaniBoard" cap at low wall and at wall ends in Deli.
N. Install all doors (wood & metal)as shown on the Door Schedule including all finish hardware.
O. Install Owner supplied double acting doors (Durus)including hardware, according to
manufacturer's written instructions. The side of the doors with the black window trim shall face
the Sales Area.
H. Install 1/2"CDX exterior grade plywood to 5 3/4"above the finished floor at all gypsum wall
board partitions in areas that are to receive VCT flooring.
END OF SECTION
Carpentry& Millwork—06000 -4
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. The rough carpentry work required shall include all work of rough carpentry nature required
throughout the project to complete the entire intent of the work.
B. Furnish and install solid wood blocking/plywood at metal stud walls at the following locations:
a. Stair halls for attachment of handrails.
b. At all interior window jambs at Meat Cutting Room and elsewhere as necessary.
c. Behind all toilet partitions and accessories.
d. Behind all decor items to be provided by fit-up contractor such as valances, signage,
cabinetry, etc.
e. Provide plywood in lieu of gypsum sheathing behind the main exterior store sign
(provided by others).
f. Behind all wall mounted plumbing, HVAC, and electrical equipment as required by their
respective trades. Coordinate with all trades to determine the extent of the blocking
required.
g. Behind all wall mounted equipment to be provided by Stop &Shop including but not
limited to:
i. Shelving
ii. Sinks
iii. Hose Reels
C. Provide double 2 x 4 or 2 x 6 fire retardant treated reinforcing (including at head also)at all
double acting doors between the Sales Area and Back Rooms.
D. Construct all rough carpentry work called for on the Drawings, plumb, level, and true, with tight,
close-fitting joints, securely attached and braced to surrounding construction, all in a first-class
workmanlike manner.
E. Furnish and install pressure treated wood blocking on top of roof curbs of all small HVAC units
to level the units.
3.2 FINISH CARPENTRY, GENERAL
A. All finish carpentry (including Millwork items)shall be installed in accordance with the drawings.
B. All materials shall be installed in an approved manner, using the best of workmanship.
C. All items supplied under Millwork shall be installed as directed by the Millwork Supplier.
D. Supply all hardware, brackets, supports, etc. required to complete the work.
3.3 FINISH CARPENTRY, INSTALLATION
A. Install 3/4"CDX exterior grade plywood backer boards for all electrical panels,telephone
panels, the time clock, refrigeration panels and other miscellaneous panels as required.
B. Furnish and install "sanded 3/4" BD, interior grade" plywood behind wall supported Owner's
shelving and fixtures in the Florist Area.
C. Furnish and install cementitious tile backer board to 2'-0"A.F.F.with moisture resistant GWB
above behind all ceramic tile.
D. FRP- (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic):
1. All FRP shall be installed over gypsum wallboard. Note: Many areas where FRP is to
be applied have areas that require wood blocking for the support of Stop&Shop
provided shelving or equipment.At these locations the gypsum wallboard is to be
replaced with %" plywood.All FRP is to be 3/32"thick, smooth on back, mottled on
front(unless otherwise noted), as manufactured by the Kai-Lite Division of the Kalwall
Corp., 1111 Candia Road, Manchester, NH 03109.All joints in FRP panels shall
receive specially made vinyl battens, corner and edge pieces (to match color of FRP)
and they shall also be carefully caulked with G.E. silicone. Battens strips shall be cut at
the base and at the ceiling.Adhesive for FRP paneling to be approved brand of contact
cement.
eowl
Carpentry & Millwork—06000 -3
4. All rough framing lumber shall be Douglas Fir or West Coast Hemlock.
5. All lumber shall have fire retardant treatment of"NCX or Non-Com" by Koppers Co. or
equal.
6. Wood Preservative Treatment: All lumber to installed on the roof or other wet areas
shall be preservative treated "Osmose K-33"or equal.
B. Finish Lumber:
1. All lumber for interior trim, which is to be stained/sealed, shall be birch (see below for
specific locations of each)free from all knots, (except that small, sound knots that can
be covered with a five-cent piece will be allowed), pitch or pitch pockets, checks,
shakes, wane and excess of sap.
2. All miscellaneous interior wood trim, which is to be painted, shall be ponderosa pine,
poplar or equal approved by the Architect. It shall be free from all knots, (except that
small, sound knots that can be covered with a five-cent piece will be allowed), pitch or
pitch pockets, checks, shakes, wane and excess of sap.
C. Plywood:
1. Plywood for interior use both exposed and behind other finish materials shall be fire
retardant treated. See below for specific grades, thicknesses, etc.
D. Fasteners:
1. All nails, screws or other types of fasteners for exterior use or interior use in 'damp'or
'wet' areas shall be hot-dipped galvanized or'no-rust'alloy.
2. Adhesives for applying plywood, FRP, etc. shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer and shall be noncombustible. Use of"stay-put"adhesives is NOT allowed.
E. Substrates:
1. Cementitious tile backer board shall be 7/16"thick "Wonderboard", "Durock"or equal.
Tile backer board shall extend from floor to 2'-0"with moisture resistant GWB
(Greenboard)above.
F. Finishes:
1. "FRP" is to be fire rated and fire retardant 3/32"thick. See below for specific
manufacturer's, types and locations.
2. Aluminum soffit panels shall be Alcoa "Alums-guard"#SAS10219, color White. Provide
ventilated panels#LFAS10219 at 6'-0"o.c. Do not locate ventilated soffit panels within
2'-0"of canopy light fixtures. Provide all necessary trim pieces.
G. Silicone sealant for use with FRP shall be by GE.
2.2 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide all rough hardware required to complete this work and to attach this work in a secure
and rigid manner to work of other trades, including all inserts, anchors, anchor bolts, lag bolts,
screws, washers, nails, and other rough hardware. All rough hardware items for exterior use; for
use at roof-blockings, curbs, cants, etc. or to be exposed in the finished interior work shall be
hot-dip galvanized or non-ferrous. Concealed interior rough hardware may be unplated. Rough
hardware shall be of appropriate type and of proper capacity and size as required for each
specific application.
,
Carpentry& Millwork—06000 -2
SECTION 06000 -CARPENTRY & MILLWORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all carpentry and related items, as required or incidental to complete the
work, including but not limited to:
1. All rough lumber, rough plywood, blocking, hardware, inserts, related metal
components, etc., including preservative treated and fire retardant treated wood
materials.
2. All blocking, bracing, etc.which may be required by other trades.
3. All blocking at metal studs at all areas where shelving or wood finish is to be installed,to
provide proper anchorage for same.
4. All items of finish carpentry and millwork, interior and exterior, shown on the Drawings
and/or specified herein, including but not limited to the following:
a. All finish millwork and wood trim.
b. Installation of all hollow metal doors, wood doors, door frames and trim, and
Owner supplied double acting doors.
c. Install all finish hardware.
d. Furnish and install all interior plywood and cementitious tile backer board.
e. Furnish and install plywood substrate & FRP (fiberglass reinforced plastic)
f. Furnish and install all exterior front canopy soffit panels, trim, etc..
g. Other items of normal carpentry work whether or not indicated, but necessary
for the proper completion of the project.
1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute are hereby made a part of this
Specification. Terms of quality and construction are as indicated in the Quality Standards and
apply in all cases, unless noted otherwise.
B. All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with Standard Details and Timber
Construction Standards (AITC 100-65)of the American Institute of Timber Construction.
1.3 MATERIAL HANDLING
A. All materials under this Section shall be protected from any dampness and damage during and
after delivery. This is especially true for fire retardant treated materials.
B. Do not store or install any finish carpentry or millwork items in any part of the building until the
concrete and masonry are completely dry.
C. During cold weather, provide heat and ventilation as required for proper protection of the
materials.
1.4 WORKMANSHIP
A. All work shall be built in accordance with scale drawings, full size details and approved shop
drawings.
B. All work shall be erected plumb and true to line and shall be cut, fitted, coped, scribed and
finished to present a clean,well-worked appearance.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Rough Lumber:
1. Lumber shall be of sound stock, new, straight, of consistent size, free of stains and
mildew, and kiln-dried to a moisture content of not more than 19%.
2. Lumber shall be surfaced-four-sides and shall bear grade and trade marks.
3. Lumber shall be furnished in longest practical lengths with respect to each intended
use, and single length pieces shall be used wherever possible.
Carpentry& Millwork—06000 - 1
DIVISION 6
CARPENTRY
I. All door frames shall have metal or wood stud reinforcing.
1. If metal stud reinforcing is used, it shall consist of two (2)20 gauge studs, full height,
next to the jamb anchor clip.
2. If wood stud reinforcing is used, it shall consist of one (1)fire retardant treated wood
stud, full height, next to the jamb anchor clip.
3. Doors over 4'-0"wide shall have both the double 20 gauge metal stud and the wood
stud reinforcing.
J. Install reinforcing plates for all wall mounted objects,where shown on the drawings. Secure to
steel studs with 1 1/4" drywall screws.
K. Carefully coordinate the work of this section with that of Section 06000 -Carpentry& Millwork
and other applicable trades to facilitate installation of all required blocking, etc.
L. Carefully coordinate the work of this section with that of all other trades in the location and
installation of their work. Provide all necessary bridging, bracing, etc.
M. Attach metal furring channels vertically or horizontally spaced at 2'-0"o.c. to masonry or
concrete surfaces as called for on the Drawings.
1. Channels shall be attached by power driven fastener, hammer set or concrete stub
nails, at 2'-0"o.c. on opposite flanges.
2. Nest channels 8" minimum at all splices and secure with two (2)fasteners in each
flange.
3. If channels are placed vertically, attach a horizontal channel between each vertical
channel at 4"above the floor.
4. If channels are positioned horizontally, place a channel at no more than 4"from both the
floor and the ceiling.
5. Unless otherwise noted, all furring shall extend from floor to a minimum of 4" above the
ceiling line.
6. Furring shall be mitered around all openings in masonry or concrete surfaces. Follow
the manufacturer's directions for mitering.
N. Provide for vertical control joints in all gypsum wallboard surfaces where a straight run exceeds
thirty(30')feet.At dropped soffits, provide control joints at 20'-0" o.c. See also Section 09250-
Gypsum Wallboard for other locations.
O. Remove all trash, rubbish, debris, etc.from the job daily.
P. The Contractor shall submit connection details for all stud work that is to be suspended from the
roof structure prior to installation for the Architect's and Engineer's review and approval.
END OF SECTION
Metal Studs& Light Gauge Framing—05400 -3
materials. Such fastenings shall be the minimum number possible to provide a secure and
satisfactory installation. Fasteners shall be spaced in a uniform pattern.
D. Track shall be fastened to wall, ceiling, or floor with power-driven fasteners or concrete stub
nails. Fasteners for channels shall be driven at 24 inches o.c., in alternate flanges.
E. Studs shall be spaced as shown on the drawings, not more than 16"o.c. Studs adjacent to door
frames, at wall intersections and at corners shall be secured with drywall screws through track.
F. Bracing studs shall be used at doorjamb and at end of wall where not fastened to a cross-wall
or partition. Bracing stud shall extend from floor to ceiling track at doors, and to structural
framing or sub-framing members at unsupported doorjamb. The drawings are diagrammatic
and do not always indicate such studs where required. Where necessary to obtain a rigid, solid
partition, additional diagonal or lateral bracing shall be provided above ceiling.
G. Completed work of this and other trades shall be properly protected from damage, stain and
defacement.
H. Holes, openings, blocking, and reinforcing required to accommodate items that the drawings
indicate are to penetrate or be supported by the wallboard construction shall be provided under
this section of the specification.
I. Electrical panels, cabinets, etc. which are to be fastened into the wall and shelf brackets and
similar items which may exert transverse or bending forces on the wall, shall be backed inside
the wall by a steel stud, or by a horizontal 16 gauge steel channel or 2x wood member
extending between two studs and securely fastened to each. The reinforcing member shall be
capable of withstanding the loads to which they may be expected to be subjected. Such forces
shall be assumed to be not less than 300 lbs. applied in both the vertical and horizontal
direction.
J. Location of holes and required blocking and back-up members shall be coordinated with sub-
contractors for other trades involved.
K. Openings, chases, slots, etc., for mechanical and electrical work shall be neatly and accurately
cut in studs and wallboard. Such openings, and fittings, boxes, etc., which require it shall be
properly reinforced and supported.
L. Provide adequate bracing in walls to support handrails, grab bars, wall mounted shelving, closet
poles, etc.
M. Attachment of stud hangers to the underside of metal decks or to the bottom chord of the open
web steel joists will not be permitted. All structural loads shall be hung from the top chord of any
open web steel joist. Loads may be transferred from the bottom chord to the top chord of a joist
by installation of a steel joist stiffener(see paragraph 2.11 above).
3.2 EXTERIOR FRAMING
A. See also the structural drawings for details and further requirements.
B. Provide welding where shown.
3.3 INTERIOR FRAMING
A. Steel stud partition shall be carried to 6"above the ceiling height, unless specifically shown
otherwise. Rear sales wall partition, walls under the front mezzanine, walls in areas without
ceilings, and the perimeter walls of the Pharmacy area shall extend full height to roof decking
above.
B. Partitions running at an angle to beams, steel joists and other objects extending down from the
slab or deck above, shall be carried between such objects.
C. Where a partition runs directly below and parallel to a steel joist, the steel joist shall be furred so
that gypsum board can be applied to both sides of the joist.
D. At all dropped soffits, provide and install cold rolled steel channel support as detailed on the
drawings.
E. Floor and ceiling tracks shall be accurately aligned according to partition layout and securely
fastened using approved fasteners at no more than 2'-0" o.c.
F. Studs shall be spaced at 1'-4"o.c., except at walls used to support wall cabinets or other wall
mounted equipment where spacing shall be reduced to 1'-0"o.c. and secured in place.
G. Tracks shall be used at the top of all doors and also above and below all borrowed light frames.
H. All studs shall be secured to both the top and bottom tracks.
Metal Studs & Light Gauge Framing—05400 -2
#Pwk SECTION 05400 - METAL STUDS & LIGHT GAGE FRAMING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all metal stud and light gage framing as indicated and/or herein specified,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Interior walls, fascias and ceiling drop walls.
2. Furring channels at interior face of exterior walls (where applicable).
3. Suspended drywall ceiling framing.
4. Exterior wall framing.
5. Any other locations or work as shown on the drawings or required to provide a
completed job.
6. Shop Drawings and Calculations
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings in four(4)copies, one (1)reproducible and three (3)blackline prints.
Said drawings shall include all bracing connections, catalog cuts and a layout drawing.
B. The omission of any materials called for on the Project Drawings from the Steel Contractor's
shop drawing shall not relieve him of responsibility for such materials, even though the Architect
approves said shop drawing.
C. No shop drawings shall be used in the field that does not bear the Architect's stamp of approval.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All metal studs, accessories, components, etc., shall be by "Super Stud Building Products Inc.",
"United States Gypsum", "Dale/Incor" or approved equal, unless otherwise noted.
B. Studs for exterior walls shall be 16 gauge (unless otherwise noted), sized in accordance with the
drawings. Provide top and bottom runners of the same gauge.
C. Studs for interior walls shall be 20 gauge (unless otherwise noted), sized in accordance with the
drawings. Provide top and bottom runners of the same gauge.
D. Channels for bridging of studs shall be 18 gauge.
E. Furring channels for use at the inside face of the exterior walls, where shown on the Drawings,
shall be 1"deep, "Z" shaped and at 2'-0"o.c. to allow for installation of rigid insulation. Provide
'/4"thermal shim between masonry and "Z"furring.
F. Rigid insulation for use in conjunction with the"Z"furring channels at the inside face of the
exterior walls shall be 1"thick extruded polystyrene board "Styrofoam Z-mate" by Dow Chemical
or equal. Minimum "R"value shall be 5.0 or as required by local code.
G. Furring channels for interior work shall be hat-type design 25 gauge minimum by 7/8" high.
H. Screws for installation of the various systems shall be the type recommended by the
manufacturer, sized as required.
1. Steel joist stiffeners shall be 2"x 2"x 3/16" steel angle welded to the top & bottom chord of the
joist.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Materials shall be stored inside the building and handled carefully to avoid damage.
B. Work shall be fully coordinated with other trades affected, particularly with gypsum drywall,
insulation, mechanical, and electrical work.
C. Tracks and studs shall be firmly secured to the floor, ceiling, and wall construction. Fastening
into concrete or masonry shall not chip, spall, or otherwise unnecessarily mar the substrate
Metal Studs & Light Gauge Framing—05400 - 1
I. Work shall be erected square, plumb, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and
intersections, rigidly braced and secured to surrounding construction, and tight and free of rattle,
vibration, and noticeable deflection after installation.
J. Miscellaneous Items: Include all other miscellaneous metal items required by the various trades,
but not specifically listed above, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous steel
bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items reasonably inferred or necessary for the
completion of the Work.
K. Provide steel channel iron door frames at all overhead doors within exterior masonry openings
as indicated on the drawings. Steel channel headers are not to be used in lieu of lintels.
L. Provide steel bent plate frames at all interior double acting doors as indicated on the drawings.
Frames in refrigerated rooms such as the Produce Pre-pack and Meat cutting room shall be
galvanized. All frames must be braced to the structure above.
M. Provide galvanized steel rods, turnbuckles, and fittings for the exterior decorative turnbuckles as
shown on the Exterior Elevations.
N. Furnish and install stainless steel closure panels to seal the gap between the Bakery
Ovens/proofer hood and the finish ceiling. Also provide stainless steel closure above and to the
sides of the Deli hood and Bakery ovens/proofer ..
O. Provide stainless steel column covers to 5'-0"A.F.F. on all steel tube columns within the Sales
Area that do NOT fall within the shelving or behind refrigerated cases.
END OF SECTION
Miscellaneous Iron—05110 -3
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metals shall be free from rust, scale and defects impairing strength, durability, or appearance,
and of best commercial quality for purposes specified. All metals shall be made of new
materials.
B. Metals shall be made with structural properties to sustain safely or withstand strains and
stresses to which normally subjected, true to detail, clean, straight, with sharply defined profiles,
curved work true to radii, and unless particularly noted, with smooth finished surfaces.
C. Paint for shop priming shall be a gray primer that complies with the SSPC specification.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Arrange all members and connections to
be shop welded and field bolted wherever possible.
B. Any refabrication or corrective measures necessary to accomplish proper fit shall not be
undertaken without the express approval of the Architect.
C. All exposed welded joints shall be ground smooth.
2.3 PAINTING
A. All miscellaneous ironwork shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry, and shall given one shop coat
of primer except where indicated to be galvanized. Channel iron or bent steel plate door frames
that are located in refrigerated areas such as the Produce Pre-pack, Meat Cutting Room, etc.
shall be galvanized.
B. After erection, retouch all portions of the shop coat that have been chipped or damaged during
erection, and all field welds and connections, with the same paint used for the shop coat.
C. Shop paint may be applied by brush or spray. Do not thin paint more than 5 percent when
brushes are used, nor more than 10 percent when spray methods are used.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be made and erected square, plumb, straight and true, accurately fitted and with tight
joints and intersections. Work shall be adequately reinforced and anchored in place. Exposed
work shall be finished smooth, with even, close joints and neat connections, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Fabricator shall be responsible for location and level of all work of this Section, except such
parts as may be delivered to others and set by them. In such cases, fabricator shall assist
others in properly locating said parts.
C. Bolts and Anchors: Provide bolts for fastening wood to metalwork, concrete and masonry.
Anchor bolts for fastening metalwork and wood to concrete and masonry shall be hooked at one
end. Column anchor bolts shall be ASTM A-307 steel in new foundations and "Chem-Studs"by
"The Rawl Plug Co." in existing concrete work.
D. As erection progresses all field welds, bolted connections and spots where the shop-applied
primer has been injured shall be primed with a primer to match the shop primer.
E. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning.
F. Pipe rails shall be 1 1/4"diameter steel pipe. All exterior rails shall be shop primed after
fabrication.All welds shall be ground smooth prior to priming. Provide angle stiffeners (3"x 3"x
3/16" minimum size) in partitions under the Meat Cutting Room Window, Deli Low Partition, and
other freestanding low partitions.
G. Furnish and install 2"x 2"x 1/8"aluminum corner guards at all outside corners in rooms finished
with "FRP" paneling. Corner guards shall be set in continuous beads of clear silicone caulking
and anchored to the walls with countersunk flathead stainless steel or alloy wood screws at 2'-0"
o.c. along each edge. Corner guards shall be full height to ceiling.
H. Provide and install miscellaneous pipe sleeves for utilities thru exterior wall, for mechanical
connections to Owner's casework and all other equipment.
Miscellaneous Iron—05110 -2
SECTION 05110 - MISCELLANEOUS IRON
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous metal work indicated and/or herein specified.
B. As part of the bid submission, each steel bidder shall include a statement that he has included
the following items in his bid, providing quantities where applicable:
1. Primer
2. All lintels
3. Total tons of all miscellaneous galvanized steel
4. Touch paint for all steel
5. Shop drawings
6. Turnaround time for shop drawings
1.2 STANDARDS
A. All miscellaneous ironwork shall conform to the applicable publications of the National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers(NAAMM).
B. All welding and equipment, both shop and field, shall conform to the latest edition of the AWS
Code for Welding in Building Construction (subject to State and local laws and ordinances). All
welding shall be completed by certified welders.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for miscellaneous ironwork, etc. shall be submitted with two (2)prints and one
(1)reproducible copy. All shop drawings shall be checked by the fabricator and the CM prior to
submission to the Project Architect. Each drawing shall bear a stamp which so states. Any shop
drawings that have not been so checked will not be accepted and will be immediately returned.
Any fabrication prior to final approval of said shop drawings shall be undertaken solely at the
Contractor's risk. See SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS for complete requirements.
B. The omission of any materials called for on the Project Drawings from the Sub-Contractor's
shop drawing shall not relieve him of responsibility for such materials, even though the Architect
approves said shop drawing.
C. No shop drawings shall be used in the field that does not bear the Architect's stamp of approval.
1.4 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Frames for all roof openings 8"x 8" or larger.
2. Shop painting of all items.
3. Inserts and anchors attached to structural steel for anchoring masonry.
4. Frames, lintels, guardrails, stair railings, pipe sleeves, and other miscellaneous
ironwork.
5. Guard posts and bumpers.
6. Angle iron and channel exterior door frames and sill angles.
7. Shop drawings and approvals of same.
8. Channel iron frames for interior double acting doors, and exterior door frames (within
Masonry walls).
9. Aluminum corner guards.
10. Louvers, vents, etc. as called for on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
11. Exterior decorative rods &turnbuckles at the canopy areas.
12. Stainless steel closures at the Bakery ovens and proofer and at the Deli Hood.
opok
Miscellaneous Iron—05110 - 1
*+ S. Work shall be erected square, plumb, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and
intersections, rigidly braced and secured to surrounding construction, and tight and free of rattle,
vibration, and noticeable deflection after installation.
T. Steel Work at Elevators: Provide steel sill angles, guide rail brackets, rail support framing, and
elevator pit ladders to conform to elevator shop drawings.
U. Miscellaneous Items: Include all other miscellaneous metal items required by the various trades,
but not specifically listed above, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous steel
bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items reasonably inferred or necessary for the
completion of the Work.
V. All composite shear studs shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's written
instructions.
W. Columns embedded in masonry walls shall be protected from moisture by a minimum of 8"of
watertight masonry, waterproofing material or cement mortar parging where required by local
building codes.
X. All columns in masonry walls to have 3/16"thick x 2"wide x 0'-8" long wire type,welded on
anchors at 2'-8"o.c. on one side only for anchorage of the masonry walls unless otherwise
specified on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Structural Steel—05100 -5
3.2 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be made and erected square, plumb, straight and true, accurately fitted and with tight
joints and intersections. Work shall be adequately reinforced and anchored in place. Exposed
work shall be finished smooth, with even, close joints and neat connections, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. All metal to metal jointing of exterior work, where necessary, shall be caulked and made water
and weathertight.
C. Fabricator shall be responsible for location and level of all work of this Section, except such
parts as may be delivered to others and set by them. In such cases, fabricator shall assist
others in properly locating said parts.
D. Bolts and Anchors: Provide bolts for fastening wood to metalwork, concrete and masonry.
Anchor bolts for fastening metalwork and wood to concrete and masonry shall be hooked at one
end. Column anchor bolts shall be ASTM A-307 steel in new foundations and "Chem-Studs"by
"The Rawl Plug Co."in existing concrete work.
E. Drifting may be used only to bring together the several parts. Drifting shall not be used in any
manner that will distort or damage the metal.
F. The use of a gas cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted on
any major member in the structural framing. Its uses will be permitted on minor members when
the member is not under stress.
G. Connections for all main members shall be by high strength bolts, unless otherwise noted.
H. All framed beam connections shall be made using double web angles, unless otherwise noted
on the Drawings.
I. As erection progresses all field welds, bolted connections, and spots where the shop-applied
primer has been injured (including deck welds)shall be primed with a primer to match the shop
primer.
J. Bridging of steel joists shall be in accordance with the SJI Specifications. All joists with spans of
40'-0"or longer will require a row of bolted diagonal bridging be in place prior to slackening of
hoisting lines.
K. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning.
L. All joists shall be set to the elevations and spacing shown on the approved shop drawings with
the appropriate end supports, bridging and end anchorage.
M. Each joist resting on steel supports, shall be welded or bolted to each support as required by the
SJI Specifications.
N. All roof joists shall be anchored down to resist uplift forces in accordance with SJI standard
specifications.
O. The joists shall be permanently fastened to supports and all bridging and anchors completely
installed before any construction loads (other than workmen)are placed on the joists.
P. The steel decking shall be installed in straight and continuous runs as are practicable, with ribs
at right angles to the supporting members and shall be continuous over at least three (3)
supports. End laps shall occur over bearing points only. End laps shall be not less than six (6)
inches. All deck units shall be secured to their supports by welding as noted on the Drawings. In
all cases, roof deck units shall be anchored in accordance with the supporting framework in a
manner to resist 30 PSF gross uplift forces, minimum, or as required by local code restrictions.
Q. Welded deck connections to steel supports shall be by fusion type welds as prescribed by the
AWS. The sizes, spacing and welding sequence shall be as recommended by the deck
manufacturer, but must not be less than that noted on the drawings. Welding shall be indicated
on the approved erection layouts or shop drawings. Side joints shall be mechanically fastened,
or welded; the type and spacing of fasteners shall be as noted on the drawings. Fasten
accessories to deck by welding or by self-tapping sheet metal screws. Prime all deck welds.
R. Openings for stacks, pipes, sumps, roof drains, ventilators, scuttles, and any other projections
through the roof shall be cut and fitted neatly and shall be reinforced as necessary for rigidity
and load carrying capacity. Openings larger than four square feet shall be pre-determined and
indicated on the shop drawings. Provide steel angle support for all roof openings 12"square or
larger.
Structural Steel—05100 -4
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Details of fabrication and workmanship where not indicated by details on the drawings shall be
in accordance with the current specification of the AISC for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
of Structural Steel for Buildings, and its Code of Standard Practice. Fabricate in the shop to the
greatest extent possible. Arrange all members and connections to be shop welded and field
bolted wherever possible. Shop cope beams as required; provide 1/2 in. web stiffeners welded
all around on both sides over columns for all beams, unless otherwise noted; shop drill or punch
for all connections; provide all necessary hardware, clips, erection seats and attachments, and
provide leveling plates, anchor bolts, and wall bearing plates. Conform to Table 1 - Framed
Beam Connection in the AISC Manual, and for all beam connections. Detail to develop the full
design strength of the member. See drawings for additional information.
B. Field and shop connections shall be made using either E70XX welds or ASTM A-325 bolts. All
welds shall meet the specifications of the American Welding Society(AWS). Bolts and bolted
connections shall meet AISC specifications.
C. Columns shall be straight and free from bow or twist,with bearing ends at right angles to the
columns axis. Shop weld all cap and base plates. Provide 1/4"thick leveling plates matching
column bases for all columns and beams resting on masonry or concrete.
D. Any refabrication or corrective measures necessary to accomplish proper fit shall not be
undertaken without the express approval of the Architect.
E. Steel joists shall be open web K-Series, KCS-Series or LH-Series as noted on the plans. All top
and bottom chords and bearing members shall be double-angles.
F. Lower chords of all joists shall be extended and attached on all column lines for structural
rigidity and as otherwise noted on the drawings. Where ceilings occur directly below underslung-
type joists, ceiling extension shall be provided, or the lower chord member extended.
G. All exposed welded joints shall be ground smooth.
H. Reinforce joists at brace support points and other locations of concentrated loads.Care shall be
taken to avoid damaging the joists during welding operations.
I. Beams framing at the tops of columns shall sit directly on top of the columns rather than into the
side, unless otherwise noted.
2.3 PAINTING
A. All structural steel and steel joists that are to be left exposed to view(areas designated on
drawings with ceilings noted "exposed to structure"), except as hereinafter noted, shall be
thoroughly cleaned and dry, and shall given one shop coat of primer. Where required by local
building code, omit primer at columns to receive waterproofing material or cement mortar
parging as specified in this section.
B. Surfaces of steel which are to be encased in concrete shall not be painted.
C. All connection portions of structural steel to be field welded shall receive one shop coat of
linseed oil.
D. After erection, retouch all portions of the shop coat that have been chipped or damaged during
erection, and all field welds and connections, with the same paint used for the shop coat.
Provide touch up primer at all deck welds.
E. Shop paint may be applied by brush or spray. Do not thin paint more than 5 percent when
brushes are used, nor more than 10 percent when spray methods are used.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The steel erector shall provide and install all temporary bracing needed to hold the frame in a
square position until the masonry shear walls are constructed and anchored to the frame. The
erector shall remove all temporary bracing as soon as possible, once it is no longer needed.
Structural Steel—05100 -3
girders have been designed to safely support all loads noted on the drawings and shall bear the
seal of a Structural Engineer registered in the Project's locale.
1.4 TESTING
A. The services of a qualified Inspection and Testing Company shall be retained. Test results shall
also be submitted directly to the Architect, Structural Engineer, Stop& Shop, and the local
Building Authorities in a timely fashion during the course of the Work.
B. The Construction Manager shall cooperate and assist the testing company in completing their
work.
1.5 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Structural steel beams, girders, columns, etc.
2. Column and beam base plates, leveling plates, etc.
3. Uplift Bracing steel.
4. Open web steel joists and truss girders.
5. Metal decking for roof.
6. Shear connectors for composite construction.
7. All necessary holes in structural members.
8. Shop painting of all items.
9. Anchor bolts and anchors for setting of leveling plates.
10. Inserts and anchors attached to structural steel for anchoring masonry.
11. Corrugated steel floor forms.
12. Roof support steel for HVAC equipment.
13. Shop drawings and approvals of same.
PART 2: PRODUCTS �w
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metals shall be free from rust, scale and defects impairing strength, durability, or appearance,
and of best commercial quality for purposes specified. All metals shall be made of new
materials.
B. Metals shall be made with structural properties to sustain safely or withstand strains and
stresses to which normally subjected, true to detail, clean, straight, with sharply defined profiles,
curved work true to radii, and unless particularly noted, with smooth finished surfaces.
C. Structural Steel:ASTM A-50.
D. Bolts: 3/4"diameter, ASTM A-325 high strength, unless otherwise noted.
E. Metal Deck: Roof deck shall be 1 1/2"painted, type "B", (3'-0"width of coverage)as
manufactured by"United Steel Deck"or approved equal. Roof deck shall be 22 ga. or 20 ga. as
noted on the structural drawings. The roof deck and steel joist spacing shall comply and be
installed with all applicable requirements of Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-28, as most recently
amended, for a Class I roof. Ribs shall be 6" O.0 & deck weight no less than 2.06 lbs. per sq. ft.
Install with 6"end laps and weld deck to steel framing. Composite floor deck shall be 2"
galvanized, "B-LOK", 20 gauge as manufactured by"United Steel Deck"or approved equal.
Provide gauge metal pour stops, end closures and other accessories that may be required to
complete the Work.
F. Structural Tubing:ASTM A-500 Grade B.
G. Paint for shop priming shall be a gray primer that complies with the SSPC specification.
H. Composite Shear Studs: Manufactured by"Nelson Stud Company".
Structural Steel—05100 -2
SECTION 05100 -STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all structural steel work indicated and/or herein specified.
B. As part of the bid submission, each steel bidder shall include a statement that he has included
the following items in his bid, providing quantities where applicable:
1. Total tons of structural steel
2. Total tons of joists and joist girders
3. Total number of squares of floor deck
4. Total number of squares of roof deck
5. Shop priming shall comply with SSPC specifications
6. Anchor bolts
7. Leveling plates
8. Rooftop condensing units supporting steel
9. All steel for canopies
10. Total tons of all galvanized steel
11. Touch paint for all steel and deck
12. Safety cables at the mezzanines
13. Number of mobilizations and zones
14. Shop drawings
15. Turnaround time for shop drawings
1.2 STANDARDS
A. All structural steel shall be designed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the latest
editions of the AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel
and the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
B. Erection of structural steel members must comply with OSHA guidelines.
C. All welding and equipment, both shop and field, shall conform to the latest edition of the AWS
Code for Welding in Building Construction (subject to State and local laws and ordinances). All
welding shall be completed by certified welders.
D. All open web steel joists and truss girders shall be designed,fabricated and erected in
accordance with the latest standards of the SJI.
E. All metal deck shall be designed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the latest standards
of the SDI.
F. Design Deflection shall not exceed local code requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for structural steel, steel joists,joist girders, metal deck, etc. shall be submitted
with two (2)prints and one (1) reproducible copy.All shop drawings shall be checked by the
steel fabricator and the CM prior to submission to the Project Architect. Each drawing shall bear
a stamp which so states. Any shop drawings that have not been so checked will not be
accepted and will be immediately returned.Any fabrication prior to final approval of said shop
drawings shall be undertaken solely at the Contractor's risk. See SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL
CONDITIONS for complete requirements.
B. The omission of any materials called for on the Project Drawings from the Steel Contractor's
shop drawing shall not relieve him of responsibility for such materials, even though the Architect
approves said shop drawing.
C. No shop drawings shall be used in the field that does not bear the Architect's stamp of approval.
D. The detailing of structural steel connections for any portions of the building shall be by the
Fabricator for loads as indicated on the drawings or as a part of these specifications.
Connections shall be submitted to the Architect and the Structural Engineer of Record for review
and approval.
E. The steel joist and truss girder manufacturer shall submit calculations for all special joists along
with the joist shop drawings. Said calculations shall include an affidavit stating that the truss
Structural Steel—05100 - 1
OW
DIVISION 5
METALS
ew
SECTION 04500 - MASONRY SEALER
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Supply and install masonry sealer for all exterior masonry as shown on the drawings and/or
herein specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 6 copies of manufacturers material specifications and application instructions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
1.1 MATERIALS
A. Sealer shall be "VIP Ombrella 9100 Clear" acrylic water repellent coating. The VIP product is
manufactured by the VIP Division of VIP/Lighthouse Products, P.O.Box 1253, New Smyrna
Beach, FL 32170, Tele: (800) 228-5537.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Surfaces shall be clean and dry. Surface, air and material temperatures should 50°F or higher
during application for best results. It may be applied at lower temperatures but caution must be
taken.
B. Re-point any loose or disintegrated mortar and allow 72 hours drying time before application.
Allow 6-12 hours curing time for caulking.
C. Treat any apparent alkali or efflorescence with proper neutralizing compound.
D. Provide two (2) coats of"VIP Ombrella 9100 Clear" acrylic water repellent coating on all CMU
surfaces.
E. Apply in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Masonry Sealer—04500 - 1
c. Cleaning: Clean down all exterior masonry surfaces at the completion of the
work with a diluted solution of muriatic acid in water. Masonry surfaces must
be flushed with clean water before applying acid solution, and flushed
thoroughly with clean water immediately after washing. Care shall be taken to
cover and protect metal and concrete surfaces from being splashed by the
acid solution. Clean interior surfaces with brush and water or suitable non-
staining cleaning solutions.
E. Protection:
1. The Contractor is to use proper procedures required to protect the masonry work from
deterioration, dis-coloration or damage during subsequent construction operations.
2. Normal weathering of masonry work, exposed to the weather after completion, will be
acceptable, provided other conditions and activities do not interfere and result in an
unacceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
14"k,
Unit Masonry—04200 -6
b. Where applicable, anchor veneer to cast-in-place concrete back-up with
dovetail anchors.
M. Control Joints: Provide vertical control joints in masonry where shown. Typically, control joints
shall be placed no greater than 30'-0"o.c.. Build-in related items as the masonry work
progresses. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking and sealants.
N. Lintels: (supplied under"Section 05000 - Structural Steel & Miscellaneous Iron").
1. Install steel lintels where shown or required.
2. Provide 8" minimum bearing at each end of all lintels, unless otherwise noted.
O. Flashing of Masonry Work:
1. Provide concealed(lashings in masonry work as shown, Refer to "Section 04150-
Masonry Accessories"for type of flashing required. Prepare masonry surfaces and free
from projections that might puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on bed of
mortar band cover with mortar. Seal flashing penetrations with mastic before covering
with mortar. Terminate flashing 1/2"from face of wall, unless otherwise shown.
a. Extend flashings beyond edge of lintels and sills at least 4"and turn up edge
at sides to form a pan to direct moisture to exterior.
b. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by over-lapping deformations
not less than 1 1/2"and seal lap with an elastic sealant.
c. Install flashings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
d. Install any elastic flashings in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Provide weep holes in the head joints of the first course of masonry immediately above
concealed flashings. Space at 2'-8"o.c., unless otherwise shown.
3. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built
into masonry work.
P. Grouting of Masonry:
1. Low Lift Grouting: Details shown on the structural drawings have been developed for
low lift grouting procedures. Said details shall be strictly adhered to.
2. High Lift Grouting: HIGH LIFT GROUTING WILL NOT BE ALLOWED ON THIS
PROJECT.
3.4 REPAIR POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained or not match
adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh
mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Repair existing masonry walls that are to remain to provide a"like new"appearance. The
existing right side CMU wall where the adjacent retail space is to be removed will require
extensive repair. It shall be a part of this contract to fully repair or replace all masonry defects,
damage, cracks, etc. as required in order to achieve a structurally sound, visually acceptable
wall surface.
C. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide
a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealants.
D. Cleaning Exposed, Unglazed Masonry Surfaces:
1. Wipe off excess mortar as the work progresses. Dry brush at the end of each day's
work.
2. Final Cleaning:After the mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean sample wall area of
approximately 50sf as follows. Obtain Architect's approval and acceptance of sample
cleaning before proceeding to clean rest of masonry work.
a. Dry clean to remove large particles of mortar using wooden paddles and
scrappers. Use chisel or wire brush if required.
b. Presoak wall by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt.
Unit Masonry—04200 -5
G. Collar Joints: Fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly with mortar by parging the
in-place wythe and shoving units into parging at non-load bearing interior walls or partitions
where metal ties or horizontal reinforcing are specified for structural bonding and full thickness
of wall or partition is required to meet code requirements for thickness-to-height ratio or fire
rating.
H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 4" in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed
surfaces of set mortar and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying any fresh
masonry.
I. Built-in Work:As work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Fill space between hollow metal frames, concrete walls and masonry solidly with mortar.
2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer
of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
J. Cavity Walls:
1. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings during construction. Strike joints facing cavity
flush.
2. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with horizontal joint reinforcing. Refer to "Section 04150 -
Masonry Accessories"for type of reinforcing required.
3. Provide weep holes in the exterior wythe of cavity walls located immediately above
ledges and flashings, spaced at 2'-8"o.c., unless otherwise shown. Weep holes shall be
formed with cotton lines extending 2'-0" up into cavity.
4. Coordinate masonry work with installation of other work.
K. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing:
1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Refer to
"Section 04150- Masonry Accessories"for type of reinforcing required. Fully embed
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8"on
exterior side of walls and 1/2"at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6"at
ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing except at wall
openings.
2. Reinforce all walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted
or specified to be omitted.
3. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L"and "T"
sections. Cut and bend units as directed by the manufacturer for continuity at returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
4. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c.vertically in all locations, unless
noted or shown otherwise.
5. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0"wide, by adding extra horizontal joint
reinforcing at approximately 8"above the lintel and 8" below the sill. Extend the
reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond the jambs of the opening, bridging any control
joint.
L. Anchoring Masonry Work:
1. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown and/or specified under"Section 04150 -
Masonry Accessories".
2. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to
comply with the following:
a. Provide an open space not less than 1/2" in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar
or other rigid materials.
b. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry
joints and attached to structure. Provide anchor with flexible tie sections,
unless noted otherwise.
c. Space anchors as shown, but not less than 1 tie per 2sf of surface area.
3. Anchor single wythe masonry veneer to backing with metal ties as follows:
a. Anchor veneer to steel stud back-up walls with metal ties embedded in .•w,
masonry joints and attached to structure at the steel studs. Provide anchors
with flexible tie section, unless otherwise shown.
Unit Masonry—04200 -4
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which unit masonry work is to be installed and correct
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-
wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown
or specified.
B. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not less
than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent
chases and/or recesses.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of the masonry work. After
installation of equipment, complete the masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the
opening.
D. Cutting of masonry units shall be by skilled, experienced mechanics. Cut units as required to
provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full size units without cutting where
possible. Use motor-driven saws for cutting where hand cuts would detract from the appearance
of the finished work.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Mortar Types: Unless otherwise indicated, use mortar as specified in "Section 04100 -Masonry
Mortar" and as follows:
1. For exterior work, use Type S mortar.
2. For interior work, use Type N mortar
3. Use Type M mortar for structural requirements unless concrete is shown.
B. Do not use mortar or grout that has begun to set or if more than 2 1/2 hours has elapsed since
initial mixing. Retemper mortar during the 2 1/2 hour period only as required to restore
workability.
C. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths
and to properly locate returns, offsets, openings and movement-type joints.Avoid the use of
less than half-size units at corners,jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
D. Lay-up walls plumb and true to comply specified tolerances, with courses level, accurately
spaced and coordinated with other work.
E. Pattern Bond: Lay all masonry in running bond with all vertical joints centered on units in
courses above and below.
F. Mortar Bedding and Jointing:
1. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
2. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical
face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on foundation walls and in all courses
of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced
or filled with grout or concrete, i.e., door frames.
3. Maintain joint width shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. If not shown, lay all work with 3/8"joints.
4. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to be concealed or to be covered with other
materials, unless otherwise shown.
5. Tool all exposed joints slightly concave, unless otherwise shown. Rake out mortar in
preparation for application of caulking or sealants where required.
6. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not
pound corner jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments
ew are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
Unit Masonry—04200 -3
E. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or +,
frost. For masonry which is to be wetted, comply with BIA recommendations. Do not build on
frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data, Veneer and Concrete Masonry Units: Submit 2 copies of the
manufacturer's data for each type of unit masonry required, including certified copies of
laboratory test reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the specified
requirements.
B. Submit three (3)samples of each type of masonry unit specified. Select units to show the range
of color and texture that can be expected in the finished work.
C. Architect's review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
A. Hollow Load-bearing CMU: ASTM C90, Grade N-1. All blocks shall be two celled, end or jamb
block units, with a minimum compressive strength of 2,OOOpsi (fm = 1,400psi).
B. Concrete Brick: ASTM C145, where shown. For exterior exposure above or below grade,
provide Grade U or Grade P.
C. Weight: Provide units using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C33, producing dry
weight of not less than 125 lbs. per CF.
D. Curing:
1. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum temperature of 350°F, and a minimum
pressure of 125 psi. Limit moisture absorption to 25% of saturation during delivery and
until time of installation. }*
2. Cure units in a moisture-controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure
and temperature to comply with ASTM C90, Type I. Limit moisture absorption during
delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I
units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau
Station nearest the project site.
E. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal dimensions of V-4"long x 8"high (1'-3 5/8"x 7
5/8"actual dimensions), unless otherwise indicated.
F. Type: Plain face where concealed from view, Ground-face (colored)elsewhere (see exterior
elevations for locations).
G. Color& Manufacturer: Ground-face CMU shall be by Jandris Masonry, Gardner, MA Tele: (978)
632-0089 or equal as approved by Stop&Shop. Colors are to be as follows:
a. Field area: #2504
b. Accent Band: #540
Submit samples of all colors for approval.
H. Exterior CMU walls are to be insulated with CMU inserts. Poured loose fill insulation is not
acceptable. Block insulation shall be "U"or"I"shaped inserts, `Korofil"or equal.
2.2 BRICK:
A. The brick shall meet the following criteria:
1. ASTM C216-92c, Grade SW, Type FBS.
2. Standard Modular size: 3 5/8"bed depth x 2 1/4"height x 7 5/8" length.
3. Brick shall be cored. Provide solid brick as required.
4. Brick shall match the existing masonry and should be one of the following: "Glen-Gery-
Aberdeen", distributed by the Spaulding Brick Co., 120 Middlesex Ave., PO Box 9117,
Somerville, MA 02145, or"Boren Victorian Blend" or"Boral Bordeaux", both as distributed
by Tri-State Brick of CT, 71 Hilliard St., Manchester, CT 06040.
Unit Masonry—04200 -2
SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Install all unit masonry as shown on the Drawings and/or herein specified. The requirements of
this section apply all materials specified elsewhere in Division 4.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated Masonry: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for unit
masonry construction, comply with applicable requirements for materials and installation
established by the American Insurance Association and other governing authorities.
B. Codes: Comply with the applicable requirements of governing authorities and codes for the
types of masonry construction shown, including the National Concrete Masonry Association.
C. Coordination: Review installation coordinate with other work that must be integrated with
masonry.
D. Construction Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not
exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8' in a story height or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40'or more.
Except for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines do not exceed
1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more.
2. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40'
or more.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of
columns,walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in
40'or more.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from
dimensions shown,do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2".
E. Job Mock-up: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panel using materials,
bond and joint tooling specified for final work. Provide special features as directed for caulking
and contiguous work. Build mock-up on site, as directed, of full thickness and approximately 4'x
4', indicating the proposed range of color,texture and workmanship to be expected in the
completed work. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start of
masonry work. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed
masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed. Provide mock-up
panel for both interior and exterior masonry.
F. Obtain units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture and color, for
each type required, for each continuous area and visually related area.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or ground
water and from soilage or inter-mixture with earth or other materials. Do not use metal
reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings, including ice, which will reduce or destroy
bond.
B. In exposed work, do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, discoloration or other defects that
might be visible or cause staining in the finished work.
C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather,when work is in progress, by covering the
top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down
both sides of the walls and hold securely in place.
D. Protect masonry from freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air is 40°F and falling.
Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work.
Comply with governing codes and with the"Construction and Protection Recommendations for
mss* Cold Weather Masonry Work"of the Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction by the Brick
Institute of America.
Unit Masonry—04200 - 1
B. Brick ties: Shall consist of the following:
1. Barrel Materials: Heckmann "No. 75 Pos-I-Tie®": One-Piece Screw consisting of a 92%
Zamac 2 Zinc barrel, washer, flanged head and eye to receive Pos-1-Tie®wire tie;
designed to seat barrel directly on structural portion of backup, with flanged head
covering fastener hole. Provide barrel shaft length and screws to suit substrate.
2. Wire Tie Materials: Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Wire: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm)diameter.
C. Fabric flashing for use at the base of all exterior masonry walls, at sills and heads of openings
and elsewhere as required shall be "Nervastral 30mil HD".
D. Reinforcing Rods:All reinforcing for masonry work shall comply with Section 03000 - Cast-In-
Place Concrete.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. See Section 04200—Concrete Unit Masonry for installation of masonry accessories specified
under this Section.
END OF SECTION
Masonry Accessories—04150 -2
SECTION 04150 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all masonry accessories to be installed under Section 04200 -Concrete Unit Masonry.
The extent of the masonry work is shown on the drawings. The types of masonry accessories
required include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Continuous horizontal wire reinforcing.
2. Reinforcing rods.
3. Anchoring devices.
4. Fabric flashing.
5. Other masonry accessories as shown on the Drawings and as may be required.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data, Masonry Accessories: submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications
and installation instructions for each masonry accessory required. Include data substantiating
that materials comply with specified requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-rated Masonry: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for unit
masonry construction (4-hr., 3-hr., and similar designations), provide accessories that have
been tested and listed for the construction shown.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
t00%.' 2.1 MATERIALS
A. Continuous Wire Reinforcing for Masonry:
1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10'with
matching corner("L")and intersection ("T") units. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire
complying with ASTM A82,with deformed or embossed continuous side rods and plain
cross-rods with unit width of 1 1/2 "to 2"less than thickness of wall or partition.
2. For single wythe masonry, provide ladder type units fabricated with single pair of side
rods and continuous diagonal cross-rods spaced not more than 16"o.c.
3. For multi-wythe masonry where coursing aligns (cavity or composite), provide laddur
type,tri-wire units fabricated with a single wire in each face shell of the back-up block
and one wire in the face veneer. The veneer wire shall be approximately 1 1/2"from the
outside of the wall.
4. For multi-wythe masonry where coursing does NOT align (cavity or composite), provide
laddur type with eye holes and pintels, tri-wire units fabricated with a single wire in each
face shell of the back-up block with eye hole extensions into cavity and pintel type brick
tie wire in the face veneer. The veneer wire shall be approximately 1 1/2"from the
outside of the wall. Do NOT bend eyehole extensions to align with veneer coursing.
5. Wire: Fabricate with 9-gauge side and cross-rods, unless otherwise indicated.
a. For use in interior partition walls, fabricate from mill-galvanized wire.
b. For use in exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc
coating complying with ASTM A153, Class 132.
c. Manufacturer: Horizontal masonry joint reinforcing for concrete masonry unit
walls and partitions shall be Keywall as manufactured by the Keystone Steel
and Wire Co., Peoria, Illinois, Standard Blok-Lok or Cavity-Lok as
manufactured by A.A. Wire Products Company, Chicago, Illinois or"Dur-O-
Wal". Corner and partition intersection reinforcement assemblies shall be
AWK prefabricated.
Masonry Accessories—04150 - 1
2.3 MORTAR WATERPROOFING
A. Waterproofing admixture for mortar shall be one of the following:
Admixture Manufacturer
Hydratite Plus W. R. Grace & Co.
Medusa Waterproofing Medusa Portland Cement Company
Omicron Mortarproofing Master Building Co.
Mortaron The Aquabar Co.
Hydrocide Paste Sonneborn Building Products, Inc.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 04200, "Concrete Unit Masonry".
END OF SECTION
Masonry Mortar& Grout-04100 -2
SECTION 04100 - MASONRY MORTAR & GROUT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The extent of the masonry work is shown on the drawings.
B. This section specifies the mortar and grout for unit masonry materials and installation specified
in Section 04200-Concrete Unit Masonry.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-rated Masonry: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for unit
masonry construction (4-hour, 3-hour and similar designations), provide mortar and proportions
as tested and listed for the particular construction.
B. Do not change source or brands of masonry mortar materials during the course of the work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data, Masonry Mortar& Grout: For information only, submit 2 copies of
manufacturer's specifications and instructions for each manufactured product. Indicate that copy
of each applicable instruction has been distributed to the Masonry Installer.
B. Samples, Masonry Mortar: Submit samples of each type of masonry mortar, showing the range
of color that can be expected in the finished work. Label samples to indicate type and amount of
colorant used. Architect's review will be for color only. Compliance with all other requirements is
the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
1.4 MATERIAL STORAGE
A. Store mortar and grout materials off the ground, under cover using tarpaulins, felt upper, or
polyethylene sheets, and in a dry location.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, non-staining, without air entrainment and of natural
color or white, to produce the required color of mortar. Provide samples for selection. Colors
shall be by Solomon Colors, Springfield, IL or equal as follows:
a. At the ground-face field masonry areas: SGS 44H —Deep Red
b. At the ground-face accent masonry areas: SGS 41 H —Pink
c. At plain-face masonry to be painted: Plain gray, un-colored
d. At brick masonry: Match Existing
Use Type III high-early strength as required for laying masonry in cold weather.
B. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Mortar Aggregates:ASTM C144 except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with
100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
D. Grout Aggregates: Meeting ASTM C404.
E. Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials which would impair strength or bond.
2.2 MORTAR &GROUT MIXES
A. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar and/or grout by use of admixtures or anti-freeze
agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270 Proportion Specifications, except limit
materials to those specified herein, and limit cement/lime ratio (by volume)as follows:
1. Type S: Not more than 1/2 part lime per part of portland cement for exterior work.
2. Type N: Not more than 1 part lime per part of portland cement for interior work.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476 for coarse grout.
Masonry Mortar& Grout -04100 - 1
DIVISION 4
MASONRY
elk
b. Review plans for floor slopes, depressed slabs and the like. If a conflict exists
between what is considered "good concrete slab practice" and the
specifications, resolve all objections and make final decisions a part of the job
record. Limitations imposed by weather or other special requirements shall be
understood by all parties.
c. All construction joint locations are to be determined by the Stop &Shop
Project Manager
4. Review and Inspection: Clarify all specifications, details and application requirements
including what work should be completed before the slab pour operations can begin, as
well as inspection requirements.
3.5 SIDEWALKS, PAVEMENTS AND CURBINGS
A. Sidewalks shall be cast-in-place reinforced 3000 psi concrete with 7% air. The reinforcing shall
be 6 x 6 x W1.4 x W1.4 W.W.M. The thickness shall be a 5"and the joint spacing will be 8'
maximum. The finish will be a float or fine broomed. The sidewalks will pitch 1/8" per foot from
the building to the top of a 6" curb that is 18"deep (min)and placed integral with the walk.
Expansion joints shall be a maximum of 3/8"wide.
B. Concrete Curbs throughout the project will be either pre-cast or cast-in-place concrete, 3000 psi
in 28 days with 7% air entrained. Provide 1/2"thick transverse expansion joint filler at no more
than 20 feet in interval; and 1/2"thick longitudinal joint filler between curb and sidewalk.
3.6 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS
A. All concrete shall be placed in dry excavations. Pump away any ground water as required to
provide a dry excavation.
B. For construction during winter,footings and floor slabs shall require protection from freezing
temperatures at the bearing surfaces until the building is enclosed and heated.
1. Elevated mezzanine slabs shall only be placed on structural steel framework which is
at, or has been heated to a steady temperature of 75°F plus for at least 24 hours prior to
placement and maintained at said temperature for a minimum of seven (7)days after
placement. Provide vented heaters and temporary enclosures as required.
C. Inserts and Attachments: Built into the concrete: collars, sleeves, or thimbles required for piping
and writing, anchors, sockets or inserts for supporting piping,fixtures or attachments; nailing
blocks and strips, bond ties and all other items required in the specifications or indicated on the
Drawings. Inserts supporting mechanical fixtures shall be furnished and located by the trade
who will use same. Dovetail slots shall be installed at 2' -0"on center(or as called for on the
drawings)wherever the brick shelf elevation is V-0"or more below the top of wall elevation.
D. Ambient temperature at point of placement shall be minimum of 451 and rising.
E. Hot water shall be required for all mixes with pours occurring from November 1 to March 30.
F. Temperature of concrete mix is not to exceed 901.
END OF SECTION
Concrete—03000 -9
the slab thickness at a maximum. Locations of joints in areas to receive epoxy flooring
shall be determined by the Stop& Shop Project Manager.
2. Construction joints shall be so constructed that they will be reinforced and end up
midway between the above control joints. The slab edges at construction joints will be
finished in such a way to form a hollow approximately 8" (total)wide by 3/8"deep. The
hollow will be filled and troweled with an approved epoxy or equal so as to conform to
the flatness and finish of the rest of the floor. Locations of joints in areas to receive
epoxy flooring shall be determined by the Stop &Shop Project Manager.
3. Isolation joints will be used next to fixed objects. Where there is no vertical movement
contemplated, as against the inside walls, use a bond breaker such as polyethylene or
tar paper.
4. There will be no expansion joints.
H. LASER SCREEDING: An "S240 Laser Screed" machine, as manufactured by S & S of NH or
equal, is strongly recommended for all FF> 35 and FL> 30 specified floors of any size. The
finisher is expected to work within his abilities and is responsible for the ultimate product. He
must be aware that control joints for large areas must be cut sooner than for lesser areas.
I. CURLING: Prior to installation of resilient tile and at least 28 days after placement, check all
areas of slabs for curling. Remove and replace all areas that have curled more than 1/16" in 4'-
0". Repair of curled areas in lieu of replacement may be allowed at the sole discretion of Stop&
Shop.
J. PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SLAB TO RECEIVE RESILIENT TILE FLOORING: After the
floor slab FF and FL testing is completed, and just prior to the start of installation of the resilient
tile flooring, the concrete slab finishing Construction Manager shall
1. Correct all high points by grinding as necessary.
2. Fill all low points, cracks, construction and control joints, etc.
3. All of this corrective work shall be coordinated with the work of the resilient tile flooring
Contractor.
4. The completed corrective work must be approved by and acceptable to the resilient tile
flooring Contractor.
K. PRE-SLAB POUR CONFERENCE:
1. Prior to the placing of any floor slabs within the building a Pre Slab Pour Conference
shall be held. The following persons or their designated representatives shall be in
attendance:
a. The Stop&Shop Project Manager
b. Landlord or Landlord's representative
c. The Architect
d. The Structural Engineer
e. The Construction Manager and his Superintendent
f. The Concrete Slab Subcontractor and his foreman
g. The Concrete Supplier
h. The Concrete Mix Designer
i. The Testing Laboratory Representative
j. The VCT Tile Subcontractor and his foreman
k. The Plumbing Subcontractor(optional)
I. The Refrigeration Subcontractor(optional)
m. The Electrical Subcontractor(optional)
2. Record of meeting: Construction Manager's representative shall record all decisions
made at the meeting that shall be made a part of the job record.
3. Items to be reviewed, discussed and resolved:
a. Review specifications, concrete mix, floor plans, slab details, 'Walker-Duct'
installation details, and pour stop details.
Concrete—03000 -8
C. Slabs to receive special treatment such as resilient tile, epoxy, etc shall receive a finish as
directed by the manufacturer of those products. Concrete slabs to receive the resilient the will be
cleaned, vacuumed, patched and re-cleaned before the the is applied. The tile applicator shall
accept the floor and use clean adhesive and exercise great care to prevent imperfections from
showing through the tile.
D. All exposed interior concrete floors that will be used as the final wearing surface shall be
vacuumed, sealed and hardened with two (2)coats of"SealHard" by L&M Construction
Chemicals, Omaha, Nebraska, or an approved equal. The second coat to be applied just prior to
Stop&Shop taking occupancy.
E. Finish Concrete Surfaces: Immediately upon removal of forms, point all form tie holes and other
defects flush with surface.
1. Remove all fins, and fill all honeycombing, holes and depressions with 1:2 mortar on all
exposed interior and exterior concrete surfaces. Before patching, thoroughly wet
surrounding concrete and keep wet for several hours. Brush into the surface to be
patched a grout of cement and water mixed to the consistency of paint. Carefully damp
cure these patches. Cut back protrusions.
2. WALLS:All surfaces, other than flat work, exposed on the exterior of the building shall
have smooth carborundum rubbed finish. Interior concrete, other than flat work, shall
have a rubbed finish using a cement mortar grout not to exceed 1/4" in thickness.
(Plasti-coat is not permitted).
3. Exterior sidewalks, ramps and loading docks shall be steel troweled followed by
brooming with a stiff bristle broom, with the brush marks running the short dimension of
the surface. Once sidewalks are properly cured, apply a colorless non-slip finish
compound such as Thoroshield, Seal Hard, or Clear Bond or equal according to
manufacturer's directions. .
4. Depressed slabs to additional finishes shall be screeded and floated only, and
depressed for the finish material.
5. Slabs to receive epoxy topping finish shall be steel troweled or finished as required by
the Epoxy Floor Subcontractor to provide a first class product.
3.4. SLABS
A. FF and FL numbers as specified by ACI 117-90,jointing plans,joint patterns,joint spacings,
finishing requirements, and the floor mixes are the keys to flat and level slabs. FF> 35/ FL> 30
will be used for slabs on grade which are to receive resilient tile and these values shall be used
as minimum tolerances, not averages. These items are an integral part of the design. Slabs-on-
grade will be 4" (+/- 1/4")thick minimum and will not have wire mesh. Fribulated polypropylene
fibers at the rate of 1 1/2 lbs. per cubic yard will be used for increased toughness and crack
integrity. Suspended slabs will have steel as required by the structural drawings.
B. The method of placement and finishing shall also be submitted by the Construction Manager
along with the certification of the finishing sub Construction Manager to Stop and Shop. Also
proof by the finishing sub that he has been and is able to meet the projects FF and FL
requirements.
C. The Construction Manager will submit proof that his firm and/or employees qualify for and have
any license required by the State or Municipality in which the project is being built.
D. The floor finisher used by the Construction Manager for the interior slabs will have to be on a
Stop& Shop certified list.
E. Slabs left bare will have a hard trowel burnished finish.
F. The interior floors shall have FF> 35 and FL > 30 when measured by a dipstick operated and
reported by a certified technician.
G. Joints in the slabs on grade will be as follows:
1. Control joints shall be sawn by use of a soff-cutt saw or equal.The control joint spacing
under the resilient the shall be 24 to 30 times the slab thickness at a maximum. The
depth of the saw cuts shall be 20% of the slab depth to provide aggregate interlock.
Control joint spacing at other interior slabs on grade shall be 30 to 36 times the slab
thickness at a maximum. Control joint spacing for exterior slabs shall be 24 to 30 times
Concrete—03000 -7
C. Concrete shall not be placed by means of open chutes, the combined length of which exceeds
30 feet, and shall not be allowed to drop freely through distances exceeding 8 feet or through
closely spaced reinforcing bars, conduits, etc., which will tend to segregate materials.
D. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign
material shall be deposited on the work.
E. Once concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of
the panel, section or individual foundation is completed. The top surface shall be generally level.
When construction joints are necessary, they shall be made in accordance with the following
requirements.
1. Construction and control joints not shown shall be located as to least impair the strength
and appearance of the work. Location of joints to be subject to Architect's approval.
2. Construction joints in supported slabs shall be located near the point of minimum shear,
unless otherwise designated on the Drawings or by the Architect.
3. Special care shall be taken in the preparation of all construction joints.
4. Except where otherwise specified, the surfaces of construction joints shall be prepared
in a manner which will insure bonding with concrete or grout later placed on them.
Wherever practical, construction joint surfaces shall be kept moist until new concrete or
grout is placed. On all horizontal construction joints, all mortar on protruding coarse
aggregate and all surface film shall be thoroughly removed from the bonding surface,
which will be restored to a clean condition by means of vigorous scrubbing with wire
brushes or by air and water jetting prior to final set of concrete. The placement of new
concrete or grout upon construction joints shall be preceded by a thin coating
(approximately 1/8 inch)of neat cement grout, which shall be thoroughly scrubbed into
the surface with wire brooms. Fresh concrete shall be placed against such surfaces
before the grout has hardened or dried. An interval of at least 10 hours shall elapse
between the time concrete is placed on either side of the construction joint.
F. Place concrete in layers not over 12 inches deep, and thoroughly compact by means of
vibrators, hand tamping and spading; during the operation of placing, thoroughly work the
concrete around reinforcement, embedded fixtures, pipes, conduits and into the corners of the
forms so as to prevent interior voids, honeycomb, and the patching of concrete surfaces after
forms are removed. Internal vibrators should be used to aid in the compaction of the concrete.
Extreme care shall be used on thin sections and exposed concrete. The Construction
Manager shall have a spare vibrator on site at all times during pours
G. The removal of forms shall be carried out in such a manner as to insure the complete safety of
the structure. In no case shall shores or supporting members be removed before the concrete is
set hard and has sufficient strength to safely carry its own weight and all additional loads upon it
or about to be put upon it. Formwork for walls, sides of beams and slabs, and other surfaces not
supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened
sufficiently to resist damage from form removal, insufficient curing, or cold temperature
(generally 24 to 48 hours). Formwork for beam,joists, slab soffits, and other surfaces that
support the weight of concrete shall remain in place until concrete has reached 75 percent of its
specified 28-day strength, except that after the concrete has reached its 7-day strength, the
form facing material may be removed in sections so that no unsupported span exceeds 1/4 of
the design span. Each section thus removed shall be securely reshored before removal of
adjacent sections. Reshoring shall remain in place until concrete has reached its 28-day design
strength and until the floor or roof above is capable of carrying its own weight and that of any
construction loads placed upon it.
3.3. CURING, FINISHING, &SEALING OF CONCRETE
A. Keep exposed surfaces of concrete moist for a period of at least seven (7)days after being
deposited. In hot weather, thoroughly wet exposed concrete at least twice daily during the first
week. All concrete will be cured in compliance with ACI-301.
B. All interior slabs shall have smooth level steel troweled finish unless otherwise noted.
Concrete—03000 -6
8. Measurements:
a. By Weight: Only weighing equipment approved by the Architect will be
allowed. The equipment shall be platform-operated, and the weighing beam
or dial shall be in full view of the operator. The equipment shall, when tested
with test weights, be accurate within four tenths (0.4)of one percent. The
equipment shall be capable of weighing to five (5)pounds and at least that
part of the total load of sand and stone aggregate which is a fraction of one
hundred (100)pounds, shall be indicated on a graduated beam or dial.
Convenient means shall be provided for removal of excess material in case of
overloading in order that the beam or dial scale may be brought to the proper
balance.
b. By Volume: In case aggregates are measured by volume, a definite system
must be employed for insuring that not less than the specified amount of
cement goes to each batch, and the fine and coarse aggregates shall be
measured by means of mechanical measuring devices which are readily and
accurately adjustable as to capacity.
c. All Methods: The methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such that
the proportion of water to cement can be accurately controlled during the
progress of the work and easily checked at any time.
9. Mobility: The mobility (consistency or workability)of the concrete is mainly dependent
upon the thoroughness of the mixing and the quantity of water contained in the mix. The
mobility of the concrete mix shall be at all times as the Architect may direct. However, in
general, the maximum slump shall measured at the point of discharge and shall be:
Max. Min.
Reinforced foundations-walls and footings 4" 2"
Slabs on grade 4" 2"
Suspended slabs 4" 2"
C. Prior to placing concrete, clean all equipment used for mixing and transporting the concrete;
remove all debris from the place to be occupied by the concrete; check forms for dimensions,
position and adequacy, and oil the forms with a non-staining oil. Masonry filler units which will
be in contact with concrete and the surface of earth on which concrete is to be placed, shall be
wetted without having free standing water on the surfaces; and the reinforcement and
embedded structural steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, paint or other coatings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Accurately position reinforcing as shown and secure against displacement by using at
intersections and splices annealed iron wire ties of not less than #18-gauge or suitable clips.
1. The bending of reinforcing to conform to the dimensions shown on Plans shall be
accurately done. Heating of bars to facilitate bending is not allowed.
2. Clean reinforcing of dried mortar and any other foreign matter before being covered by
concrete.
3. Place reinforcing for structural slabs in correct position as shown and hold in position
with precast blocks, polyethylene chairs, or other approved means.
4. Provide a clear cover from reinforcing steel to adjacent face of concrete surfaces as
follows:
Bottom of footings = 3"
Piers and walls = 1 1/2" (except 2" at#6 bars and larger)
Elevated Slabs = 3/4"
B. Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent the
separation or loss of the materials. Equipment for placing concrete shall be of such size and
design as to insure practically continuous flow of concrete at the deliver and without segregation
of the materials.
Concrete—03000 -5
5. An independent testing laboratory satisfactory to the Architect to sample sources of fine
and coarse aggregate proposed for use, to prepare a complete concrete design mix,
and perform laboratory test cylinders for 7 and 28-day testing shall be retained for the
job by the Owner. Sufficient time must be allowed before starting job concrete
placement to submit at least 7-day test results for approval along with copies of mix
design. Final approval will be given after submittal of 28-day cylinder tests showing
strength at least 15% greater than 28-day strength specified. This requirement may be
waived if design mix has been substantiated by past data in accordance with ACI
specifications.
6. Prior to starting construction, submit concrete mix design, and lab test data on the
proposed mix to the Architect, Structural Engineer, Stop&Shop Project Manager, and
the local Building Authorities. No change in source of materials or mix shall be made
without Architect's approval.
B. The proportions of cement and fine and coarse aggregate shall be determined by trial mixes,
and shall be dependent upon the relations of quantities of these materials necessary to produce
a workable mix, which will secure, in the finished structure, concrete having strength equal to or
greater than that assumed by the conditions of the design and to possess the density,
toughness and other physical properties necessary for durability. The mixed concrete shall have
a saturated, sticky, semi-plastic consistency showing no free water when removed from the
mixer.
C. Admixtures shall be used to reduce shrinkage and curling and to regulate setting times and
strength gains. Use the concrete with the least cement and water to get the final properties
desired. All exterior concrete will contain air entrainment. Air entrainment shall be 7% + 1%. Air-
entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C-260.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Forms:
1. Forms shall be substantial and tight, properly braced and tied so as to maintain position
and shape. Wire ties will not be permitted.
2. Forms shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions of the member as called for on
the Drawings. Joints in forms shall be made sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of
concrete.
B. Mixing:
3. Mix the concrete in quantities required for immediate use, and any which has developed
initial set, or which does not reach the forms within 1 1/2 hours after water has been
added shall not be used.
4. Mix all concrete by machine, having a capacity of not less than "one bag batch"of
concrete.
5. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered by the means and standards set
forth by ASTM C-94.
6. When concrete is mixed in a truck mixer loaded to its maximum rated capacity, the
number of revolutions of the drums or blades at mixing speed shall be not less than 70
nor more than 100.
7. When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transportation, the concrete shall be delivered
to the site and discharge completed within one (1)hour or before the drum has revolved
a total of 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of mixing water.
Concrete—03000 -4
H. Admixtures:
a. Air-entraining agent: "Aerolith"by Sonneborn Building Products, "Darex" by W. R. Grace
Company,"MB-VR" by Master Builders Company, or equal approved by the Architect
and Stop& Shop and conforming to ASTM C260.
b. No other admixtures may be used without the approval of the Architect, the Structural
Engineer and Stop& Shop's Engineering&Construction Division. Calcium chloride will
not be permitted.
I. Waterstop: Shall be by W. R. Grace, Construction Products Division Type 500. Water stop shall
be PVC split serrated type with centerbulb. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
J. Foundation Insulation: Shall be 2"thick"Styrofoam Type'SE' by Dow"or equal. It shall be
adhered to the foundation using "Styrofoam #11" mastic. Insulation shall extend from the top of
the slab to a point 4'-0" below the exterior finished grade.
K. Water: Shall be clean and potable.
L. Exterior Sealer: For use at all exterior sidewalks shall be "Thoroshield" by Thoro Systems, "Seal
Hard"by L & M, or"Clear Bond" by Guardian.
M. Expansion Joints for sidewalks shall be a standard type used in municipal sidewalk construction
with a maximum width of 3/8".
N. Leveling and spot patching materials for use in correcting low points, cracks, filling of
construction and control joints, etc. shall be either of the following products:
1. "Masco& Speed Top"as manufactured by"Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc."of Ayer, MA
(508-772-4444).
2. "Ardex"as manufactured by"Ardex, Inc."of Pittsburgh, PA(412-264-4240).
3. Technical data sheets and samples shall be submitted to the Architect and Stop&Shop
for approval prior to commencing the work."
4. Under no circumstances shall any gypsum based products be used as floor patching or
leveling
5. Use leveling compound as specified above for filling small cracks and depressions in
subfloors, construction and control joints,etc.
O. A bonding agent shall be used where a new concrete topping is to be installed over the existing
concrete slab to remain to insure proper adhesion.
2.2 MIXES
A. Grade and Strength:
1. Concrete having 3000 psi compressive strength after 28 days shall be used for all
concrete work, except at mezzanine slabs which shall be 3500 psi.
2. Normal weight concrete shall be used for all locations.
3. When mixed in accordance with the specified requirements for mobility and time of
mixing and when molded into test cylinders 6" in diameter by 12" long, concrete shall
develop not less than the specified compressive strength at the end of 28 days.
4. Strength, cement and water requirements.
Design Min. Lab. Str. Min. Cement Max. Net
Compr. Testing Age Factor Water"
Strength f c 7 days 28 days Sacks/cu.vd. gal/sack cement
3000 2100 3500 5.00 7.0
3500 3000 4000 6.00 6.2
"This total water in mix at time of placement, including free water of aggregate and
liquid admixtures. Concrete exposed to weather shall have a maximum water-cement
ratio of 6.0 gallons per sack.
Concrete—03000 -3
1.4 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS
A. The latest issues of the following Specifications and Recommended Practices are hereby made
a part of these Specifications, except where superseded by particular requirements of this
Specification or the Drawings: ACI 214, ACI 301, ACI 304, ACI 305, ACI 306, ACI 347, ASTM A-
36, ASTM C578, MHD-CDF, various ASTM Standards, State and Municipal Codes.
B. Copies of all noted Specifications and Manuals of Recommended Practices shall be kept on the
job site at all times during the work.
1.5 QC/QA PROGRAM: The QC/QA (Quality Control/Quality Assurance)programs will be as follows:
A. The QC program is the program that is devised by the Construction Manager(CM)and his subs
and suppliers to ensure that the desired finished results of the project are obtained with regard
to materials and workmanship adherence to the specifications. QC program will include, but not
be limited to, at least one set of cylinders for each day, or one set per 50cy placement,
whichever is greater. A set will consist of 4 cylinders, 1 to be broken at 7 days, 2 to be broken at
28 days, and one held for further testing in case of low cylinder results.
B. The QA program is the program carried out by the owner and/or his agent to check for
compliance with the specifications and the results of the QA testing will be the basis of
acceptance for the project workmanship and materials. The QA program will include but not be
limited to engaging the services of a certified laboratory (state or CCRL or AASHTO)to do any
testing required for mix design verification by the batch method as well as the testing of any QA
cylinders. All field technicians shall be MCIB or ACI certified.
C. The Construction Manager shall cooperate and assist the testing agency in completing their
work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Forms for Exposed Concrete shall be new plyform (or of equivalent quality)or shall be lined. "
Other forms shall be plyform, matched lumber or steel.
B. Steel Reinforcement shall be deformed bars complying with the requirements of ASTM A-615,
grade 60 and of domestic manufacture and shall be placed in compliance with the latest manual
of standard practice of the (CRSI)Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Welding and/or torching
of reinforcing bars will not be allowed or accepted.
C. Concrete engineered reinforcing fibers shall be polypropylene, collated, fibrillated fibers
("Fibermesh MD"from the Fibermesh Division of Synthetic Industries, Chattanooga, TN, Tele:
615-892-7243). Fibers shall be used in concrete slabs on grade as indicated on the Drawings
and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as to type and amount.
D. Cement:
1. Portland cement of domestic manufacture conforming to the requirements of ASTM C-
150, Type 1. Only one brand of cement shall be used throughout the project.
2. Air-Entraining Cement:ASTM C-150, Type 1A.
E. Normal weight concrete aggregates shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-33.
1. Fine Aggregate: Sand shall consist of hard, tough and preferably
siliceous material, clean, free from mineral or other coatings, soft
particles, clay, loam or other deleterious matter.
2. Coarse Aggregate: Shall consist of crushed stone or gravel having
clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, free from deleterious matter.
The 3/4"aggregate shall conform to size#67 in Table II of ASTM C-33.
F. Moisture Barrier: Shall be 6 mil. black polyethylene -all joints, cuts, laps, etc., shall be taped.
The design of the slab-on-grade requires a well-compacted base or CDF that will be able to take
the loads imposed on it. When vapor barriers are used care should be taken to assure that the
slab cures equally from the top and bottom to minimize curling (differential shrinkage).
G. Sealer and Surface Hardener: Slabs to be left exposed as finished floors shall receive (2) coats
of"SealHard"by L&M Construction Chemicals, Omaha, Nebraska, or approved equal. See
3.3.D for additional information. ''
Concrete—03000 -2
SECTION 03000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE: Furnish and install all concrete work shown on the drawings and/or herein specified,
including all plant, facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment, accessories,etc. necessary to
complete the work. The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
A. Forms.
B. Reinforcing and accessories, including reinforcing steel, polypropylene fibers, chairs, spacers,
supports, tie wire, vertical rods embedded in the foundation to be extended as required for
masonry wall reinforcing.
C. Foundations, walls, piers, etc.
D. Concrete slabs on grade inside and outside the building.
E. Shop drawings.
F. Pad foundations for equipment, manholes, thrust blocks, etc.
G. Finishing of exposed concrete.
H. Concrete floor hardener, sealers, etc.
I. Placing of all anchor bolts, inserts, sleeves, angles, etc. as may be required by this section or
others and which may be furnished by other sections.
J. Cutting and patching or existing concrete slabs or foundation walls for the scope of the new
work and as required by other trades.
K. Slab depressions.
L. Moisture barrier,foundation and slab insulation.
M. All sidewalks, ramps, stairs, etc.
N. Bases and fills for pipe bollards.
O. Pumping of concrete as required.
P. Concrete placement, vibrating, finishing, curing, saw cutting, and the construction and/or
installation of all joints at the proper location and at the proper times and of the proper types.
Q. CDF flowable fill for backfilling trenches for utilities and for structural backfill (where required).
R. Grinding of all high points found in the floor slab and the infill of existing slab depressions, in
those areas which are to be covered with resilient the flooring. Coordinate this work with that of
the resilient tile flooring Contractor.
S. Spot patching and leveling of all low points, cracks, construction and control joints, etc.found in
the floor slab, in those areas which are to be covered with resilient the flooring. Coordinate this
work with that of the resilient tile flooring Contractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Excavation, backfill, etc. - Division 2.
NOTE: ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE PLACED ON SOILS PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE PROJECT GEOTECHNICAL REPORT.
B. Masonry- Division 4.
C. Resilient Flooring - Section 09650.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in four(4)copies, one (1) reproducible sepia and three (3) black or
blueline prints. See the SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS for complete
requirements. Shop drawings shall show all required openings, miscellaneous steel items,
sleeves, anchor bolts, recesses, inserts and similar items required by the work under this or
other sections. CONTRACT DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, EITHER IN
WHOLE OR IN ANY PART THEREOF, FOR USE AS SHOP DRAWINGS.
B. Submit data sheets and material certificates for all the materials to used on the project including
but not limited to: waterstops, admixtures, inserts of all types,forming accessories and form
materials, chairs,jointing systems, concrete ingredients etc.
Concrete—03000 - 1
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
M. The demolition work shall be conducted with prime consideration given to the following:
1. Protection the existing supermarket operations, it's customers, and employees.
2. Protection of the public.
3. Protection from the weather.
4. Elimination of noise, shocks and vibration.
5. Elimination of dirt and dust.
6. Orderly access for delivery of goods to the existing stores.
7. Minimization of obtrusiveness of construction personnel.
N. DEMOLITION ADJACENT TO EXISTING SPACES,WHICH ARE TO REMAIN:
1. Prior to the start of demolition in any areas which are adjacent to existing spaces (that are to remain), the
Demolition Contractor(DC)and the Construction Manager(CM)shall very carefully examine(including
cutting inspection openings as needed)the "demolition line"to determine the actual construction, foundation
and/or slab connections, roofing structure conditions, etc. which could adversely affect the existing stores to
remain.
2. Once the actual conditions are determined, the DC shall consult with the CM, the Stop & Shop
Representative, the Landlord's representative, the Civil engineer, and the Architect as to the methods he
proposes to use to complete the demolition without impacting the adjacent tenants.
3. For bidding purposes, the demolition bidders should assume that last structural bay on each side of the
area to be demolished is tied into the areas which are to remain. This includes foundations, slabs, roof
structure, roofing, etc.
4. Based on that assumption, the bids should be based on careful removal of the last structural bay on each
side of the area to be demolished, including hand work where necessary. For example, it should be
assumed that the slabs will have to be sawcut and removed by hand so as not to undermine the adjacent
slabs which are to remain. Also, it should be assumed that the roof structure will have to be carefully cut and
removed. Likewise, a temporary roof closure will be required to maintain the weathertightness of the existing
stores to remain.
5. The DC shall provide all shoring of existing construction to remain required during the demolition process
to facilitate the safe removal of the areas to be demolished and to protect the adjacent areas to remain.
END OF SECTION
Demolition—02060-2
SECTION 02060— DEMOLITION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. The extent of the demolition is generally shown on the drawings. All items not shown specifically to be
removed but which are also not shown to be a part of the finished project shall be removed.
B. All work and operations under this contract shall be in conformance with all applicable Federal, State and
Local Codes and the regulations of all governing bodies with jurisdiction. Particular attention is directed
towards OSHA Chapter XV11 part 1926 and all related amendments.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
None
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE:
A. Before beginning the work the Owner's Representative, the Construction Manager, the Civil Engineer and
Architect will conduct a pre-demolition conference which shall be attended by the Construction Manager,the
Demolition General Contractor and representatives of major Subcontractors.
B. The Construction Manager shall present at this meeting the proposed schedule of demolition and
sequence of operations.
C. Issues relating to the overall project and the individual phases shall be discussed and any questions
resolved.
3.2 DEMOLITION:
A. No demolition shall begin until all temporary fences, temporary enclosures, temporary shoring, etc.
necessary to protect the existing shopping center customers,the general public, etc. are in place.
B. No demolition shall begin until the demolition operations and sequencing have been reviewed and
approved by the Owner's Representative.
C. If in the opinion of the Owner's designated representative,any demolition activity is endangering the
shopping center's operations, its customers, its equipment, etc., the activity shall be stopped immediately
and a new method of operation, acceptable to the Owner, shall be determined before proceeding further.
D. Demolition shall be completed in a timely fashion and shall be coordinated with all parties.
E. Demolished materials shall be wetted as necessary to control dust.
F. Demolished materials shall be removed from the site as soon as possible and shall be properly disposed
of in approved landfills. The Demolition Contractor shall supply certifications of same to the Owner.
G. All existing materials shall be demolished and removed from the site,this includes all existing
foundations, slabs, etc. regardless of depth below the new store foundation.
H. All necessary temporary shoring, cribbing, etc. shall be provided and shall be in compliance with all
applicable laws, rules and regulations.
I. The Construction Manager shall provide for fire watches during all torch cutting, welding, etc. operations to
protect against fire. He shall also provide an adequate number of fire extinguishers on site at all times. He
shall also provide an adequate number of fireproofing blankets to protect all combustible materials during
torch cutting or welding operations.
J. Ventilation: The Construction Manager shall provide adequate mechanical ventilation during all torch
cutting or welding operations to prevent the buildup of smoke within the existing occupied building.
K. Security: The Construction Manager shall be responsible for policing the demolition work area in such a
way that all trespassing is eliminated. The Construction Manager shall work closely with the Stop& Shop
Security Department to insure that store security is maintained at all times.
L. The Construction Manager shall send proper notices, make all necessary arrangements and perform all
other services required for disconnection and removal of and/or the care, protection and maintenance of all
public utilities, including fire hydrants, electric, telephone, water and gas services assuming all responsibility
and paying all cost.
Demolition—02060-1
Aekk
DIVISION 2
SITE WORK
(Except as included herein, Specification shall be provided under separate cover
from Site Engineer)
ew
AW measurements taken jointly by the CM and the equipment supplier involved. A record of the field
measurements shall be kept until time of substantial completion of the project, or until the
equipment has been fully installed and accepted by Stop &Shop, whichever is later.
Responsibility for fixed equipment fabricated accurately to field measurements to properly fit the
new construction shall be solely that of the CM, who shall pay all costs involved in correcting
any misfitting fixed equipment as fabricated.
1.12 EMERGENCY ADDRESSES
A. The CM shall furnish the Owner, Stop&Shop and Architect, in writing,the names, addresses
and telephone numbers of members of his organization to be contacted in the event of an out-
of-hours emergency at the building site. He shall obtain and submit similar lists for the major
subcontractors. He shall also post similar lists readily visible from the outside of the field office.
1.13 MATERIALS AND LABOR
A. All materials shall be new and of first grade quality. All labor in connection with this work,
including trucking, handling, installation, etc., shall be done by skilled craftsmen normally
employed by the various construction trades.
1.14 SUPERVISION
A. The CM shall keep on the work during its progress, a competent, licensed full-time
superintendent. The superintendent shall be approved by the Owner and Stop & Shop and the
Owner and Stop& Shop reserves the right to demand removal of the superintendent. The
approved superintendent shall not be removed without the consent of the Owner and Stop &
Shop, including their approval of the replacement. The CM is not to replace the superintendent
without the approval of the Owner and Stop & Shop.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the completion of the work,the Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Energy Management System
Contractors shall instruct such person or persons as Stop&Shop may designate regarding the
care and use of the systems specified herein and all apparatus pertaining thereto including
furnishing maintenance manuals on all associated equipment.
B. Pursuant to paragraph A above, the Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Energy Management
System Contractors shall make their respective foremen available to meet with the Stop& Shop
Maintenance Department Personnel on-site for a minimum of 4 hours on the Monday or
Tuesday of the store opening week. The actual time for such meeting shall be coordinated by
the Stop &Shop Project Manager. Such meetings shall be conducted independently.
1.16 FORCES REQUIRED ON SITE ON THE STORE OPENING DAY
A. Both the plumbing and electrical subcontractors shall have their respective foremen on site the
day of the store opening from store opening time till store closing time(or 9:00 PM at 24 hour
stores)to handle any problems which may arise.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3—EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Special Conditions—01500 -3
C. The CM shall also be held accountable for any charges by the testing company resulting from
the cancellations of any scheduled work by the CM.
1.7 USE OF POWDER ACTUATED FASTENING TOOLS
A. The use of these tools is allowed for work within buildings, except that they are not to be used
on any wall, floor, or ceiling that is occupied on the opposite side. Contractors, in the
construction of the project, may use these powder-actuated tools (sometimes referred to as stud
drivers), when the resulting fastener is considered structurally adequate for the intended use.
These fasteners should not be used to carry loads in tension but may be used in the following
applications:
1. Partitions:Anchoring wood, steel channels, angles or clips for partition bases to
concrete floors; and steel channels, angles or clips to concrete slabs.
2. Door Bucks:Anchoring door buck floor clips to concrete floors, and ceiling struts to
ceiling slabs. Fastening struts to structural steel members.
B. Only the CM's qualified personnel who have been trained in the safe operation of this fastening
tool shall be permitted to operate these devices.
1.8 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST FREEZING
A. The work must be carried on without interruption despite adverse weather and temperature
conditions and the CM shall provide such protection and conduct his work in such a manner as
will avoid delay or damage to the work.
B. For masonry the following precautions shall be followed:All masonry units delivered in freezing
weather shall be fully protected by a weathertight covering such as tarpaulin, Sisalkraft paper, or
other weatherproof materials to prevent the accumulation of ice on the brick or block. Loose
board covering will not be approved.All sand shall be heated in such a manner as to remove all
frost, ice and excess moisture. The equipment and method used for heating sand shall be such
as will prevent burning or scorching the sand. All water shall be heated to a temperature of
approximately 180°F. When necessary to remove frost or excess moisture, the bricks shall be
heated to a temperature of about 180°F. After mortar has been mixed, it shall be maintained at a
temperature of not less than 70°F or more than 100°F until it has been placed in the masonry.
Whenever the temperature is 45°F. and falling, work shall be protected and above precautions
taken; when temperature is 40°F. and rising, above methods not necessary, except as directed.
All finished work shall be protected against freezing for at least 48 hours. The use of any
chemicals intended to lower the freezing point of mortar will not be permitted.
C. For concrete, follow the recommendations of ACI 604-56 "Recommended Practice of Cold
Weather Concreting".
1.9 BLASTING
A. Blasting will not be allowed on this project.
1.10 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to bidding, the CM and each Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine the site and the
Contract Documents to ensure his knowledge of conditions and requirements affecting the work.
B. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed for CM's or Subcontractor's
failure to comply with this requirement nor will any condition at the site, whether or not in
agreement with conditions shown or called for on the Bid or Contract Documents, be allowed as
a basis for such claims, except as otherwise specifically provided for.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. General: Before ordering any materials or doing any work, the CM or his subcontractors shall
verify all measurements and shall be responsible for their correctness. No extra charge or
compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and
measurements indicated on the Drawings. Any differences which may be found shall be
submitted to the Architect for decision before proceeding with the work. AW%�
B. FIELD MEASUREMENTS OF FIXED EQUIPMENT:All dimensions for fixed equipment to be
supplied under this Contract or under separate contract(s)shall be determined by field
Special Conditions—01500 -2
SECTION 01500 -SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General
Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the provisions of Division 1 and the requirements of
the Drawings.
B. All work and operations under this contract shall be in conformance with all applicable Federal,
State and Local Codes and the regulations of all governing bodies with jurisdiction. Particular
attention is directed towards OSHA Chapter XV11 part 1926 and all related amendments.
C. Immediately on execution of the Contract carefully study and compare the Contract Documents
and report to the Architect in writing any error, in consistency or omission well in advance of the
pre-construction conference. Do not proceed on any affected Work without instruction from the
Architect. If he deems necessary the Architect will issue interpretation under ARTICLE 2.2.8 or a
Change Order will be issued under Article 12.
1.2 COORDINATION, CUTTING & PATCHING
A. The Construction Manager(CM)and subcontractors shall coordinate their work with adjacent
work and cooperate with other trades so as to facilitate general progress of the work. Each trade
shall afford other trades every reasonable opportunity for installation of their work and for
storage of their materials.
B. Do all cutting and patching, drilling, grouting, etc., necessary for any work required to complete
the additions and alterations.
1. All equipment used for core drilling by any trade shall be provided with an activated light
or buzzer to indicate when metal has been contacted.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Before the work begins,the Owner's Representative, Stop &Shop's Representative and the
Architect will conduct a pre-construction meeting that shall be attended by the CM and
representatives of major Subcontractors.
B. The CM shall present at this meeting the proposed schedule of construction, schedules of
values and payments, insurance certificates and the like required elsewhere in this
Specification.
C. Issues relating to the overall project and the phasing will be discussed and any questions
resolved.
1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Periodic progress meetings(weekly) shall be conducted by the CM. The CM shall invite the
needed subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Stop& Shop, and the Owner to coordinate the
work, as necessary to complete the project expeditiously and within the allotted time.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Seethe Supplementary Conditions and Section 01200 of the Technical Specifications for
modifications to the requirements for Shop Drawings and samples stated in ARTICLE 4.12 of
the General Conditions.
1.6 LABORATORY CONTROL
A. The CM will be held responsible for providing material of the strength and consistency specified
for each item of the work.
B. The Owner or Stop &Shop may, if recommended by the Architect, employ an Independent
Testing Laboratory to provide materials analysis,testing and inspection of workmanship and
materials placed in the work. The CM shall provide all required labor and assistance to the
laboratory to implement its functions.
Special Conditions—01500 - 1
3.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. The CM shall submit before final inspection request:
1. Project Record Drawings.
2. Certificates and Permits: Provide originals or acceptable copies of all final sign-off
approvals by officials, authorities and agencies having jurisdiction, including:
a. Demolition.
b. Final approved inspection reports.
c. Certifications as to proper disposal of all demolition materials, including any
hazardous materials.
d. Where applicable, Conservation Commission and/or Wetlands Authorities final
approval and acceptable notices.
e. Conditional or temporary permits shall be made final before final acceptance of
the Work.
END OF SECTION
-ON,
Project Closeout—01400 -2
SECTION 01400 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General
Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the provisions of Division 1 and the requirements of
the Drawings.
B. This section includes:
1. Closeout submittals.
2. Final inspection procedures.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
A. The Construction Manager(CM)shall keep at the site at all times a separate set of blackline
prints on which shall be noted neatly, accurately and promptly, as the work progresses, all
significant changes in structure,wall sections and floor plans, as well as any changes the
Architect may direct the CM to record.
B. The Plumbing, Heating and Ventilating and Electrical Subcontractors shall each keep at the site
at all times a separate set of blackline prints of the drawings showing his work, on which shall be
noted neatly, accurately and promptly, as the Work progress, the exact physical location and
configuration of the work as actually installed, including revisions or deviations from the Contract
Drawings.
C. The CM shall retain a competent Registered Professional Engineer or Registered Land
Surveyor, acceptable to the Architect, to maintain record drawings of all work outside the
building, noting neatly, accurately and promptly, as the Work progress,the exact physical
locations and configurations of the work as actually installed, including revisions or deviations
from the Contract Drawings. The record drawings shall show surface improvements and
underground work, and shall indicate and be referenced to permanent, tangible reference
marks. Horizontal dimensions locating such improvements or work shall be accurate to + 1/2
foot,with significant changes in vertical dimensions indicated to an accuracy of+ 1 inch and
significant changes in elevation indicated to an accuracy of+ 0.1 feet. The invert elevations of
all gravity operated utility lines and drainage structures shall be shown, accurate to +0.01 feet.
Top elevations of other underground utilities which are level or uniformly pitched shall be shown,
accurate to within +0.1 feet at their extremities. Underground utilities that generally follow the
contours of existing or finished grades, or that for some other reason are not continuously level
or uniformly pitched, shall be located by (1) relating utilities in question to finish grades by
dimensions, accurate to within 10%taken from points at tops of the utilities, (2)spot elevations
accurate to within 0.1 feet and (3)descriptive notes, or by other satisfactory means, as required
to provide a reasonably descriptive and accurate record of the work as constructed.
D. At the completion of the Work, the CM shall arrange through the Architect to obtain at the CM's
expense, reproducible copies of the drawings required by the three preceding paragraphs. The
CM, Subcontractors and the Engineer or Land Surveyor shall revise these reproducible copies
neatly, legibly and in accordance with the standards of drafting of the original drawings, so as to
clearly show the way in which the work was actually constructed. The CM, Subcontractors
and/or Engineer/Land Surveyor shall provide, in the same format as the original drawings, any
additional sheets required to record the as-built work.
Project Closeout—01400 - 1
masonry, concrete and other work subject to damage shall be protected against freezing or ice
formation. If low temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold
weather precautions, cease work and notify the Architect.
1.16 CONSTRUCTION FENCE
A. If required in the judgment of the CM or if requested by the Owner or the Tenant, a construction
fence shall be provided and maintained around the construction area in a layout approved by
the Owner and the Tenant so as not to encumber the premises, disrupt the work or disturb
access and egress of fire lanes and deliveries.
B. Construction fence shall be T-0" high and of chain link or other approved construction, erected
in a substantial manner, straight, plumb and true as approved by the Architect.
C. Gates shall be built into the fence at such approved locations as are necessary, well cross-
braced and hung on heavy strap hinges with proper post and hook for double gates. Provide
heavy hasps and padlocks for each gate. Provide keys to the Owner and the Tenant to facilitate
emergency access by the Owner's or Tenant's security forces.
D. All fencing shall be in accordance with local ordinances and shall be removed at such time
before final completion as the Architect directs. Restore the site to acceptable condition after
removing the fencing.
PART 2—PRODUCTS:
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Temporary Facilities & Controls—01300 -5
1.11 TEMPORARY COVERINGS
A. Roof surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic nor shall they be used for storage of materials
except where activity must take place in order to carry out work under this Contract.Adequate
protection of the roof surfaces, subject to prior written approval by the Architect or the Owner,
shall be provided.
1.12 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE, FACSIMILE MACHINE (FAX)AND COPY MACHINE
A. The CM shall provide, at no expense to the Owner or the Tenant, a job telephone and separate
fax machine for the duration of the Contract. Use of a single line for telephone and fax will not
be allowed. The CM shall pay for both local and long distance calls. Telephone and Fax shall be
for the convenience of the Owner, the Tenant, the Architect and other agents or employees of
the Owner or Tenant, as well as service for the CM. Telephone and fax machine shall be
located in the CM's temporary field office or trailer.
B. The CM shall provide, at no expense to the Owner or the Tenant, a plain paper copy machine
for the duration of the Contract. Use of a combination fax/copy machine will not be allowed. The
CM shall pay for all copies and maintenance of the machine. The copy machine shall be located
in the CM's temporary field office or trailer.
1.13 TEMPORARY TOILETS
A. The CM shall provide suitable toilet facilities for all staff and workers on site, including those of
other trades. Chemical toilets shall be provided where work is in progress and of a quantity as
required to conveniently serve the needs of personnel.
B. Chemical toilets and their maintenance shall meet all Federal, state and local laws, rules, board
of health standards, ordinances, etc. and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
C. Existing toilet facilities shall not be used by any construction personnel during the course of the
work under this Contract, unless the Owner approves such use in writing.
D. Upon completion of new toilet facilities, the Owner may, at his discretion, designate a specific
toilet area which may be used by construction personnel. However, such area shall be left in
first class condition equal to the accepted conditions of the toilet facilities not used during
construction.
1.14 SITE DRAINAGE
A. The CM shall have responsibility for site drainage at areas where work is being performed
and/or affected by demolition work. Maintain such drainage during the life of the Contract in a
manner approved by the Architect and so as not to adversely affect adjacent areas.
B. During the progress of the work, the CM shall provide, operate and maintain equipment of
adequate capacity to control all surface and ground water and sediment and to keep all
excavations, pits and other construction areas free of water at all times. Pumping equipment
shall be adequate to remove all hydrostatic pressure from any part of the building until the
structure has developed sufficient strength and weight to protect the work from displacement or
other damage.
C. Ground water level shall be maintained sufficiently below the level of the excavation at all times
to maintain a stable working platform. Ground water shall be controlled in such a manner as to
avoid adverse effects on the established ground water elevations adjacent to the site. Dispose
of drainage water in such a manner as to prevent sediment, erosion or other damage to
surrounding areas and as approved by the Architect.
1.15 WINTER CONSTRUCTION
A. The CM shall remove snow and ice within and surrounding the areas occupied by trailers,
storage, field office and the like including all areas affected by the construction which may impair
progress of the work, be detrimental to workmen or impair trucking, delivery or moving of
materials at job site or prevent adequate drainage at site or adjoining areas.
B. The CM shall take special precautions against damage to materials and work installed in
freezing weather, by providing special heat and coverings to prevent damage by elements, in a
manner approved by the Architect. Ground surfaces under footings and pipe lines, and
Temporary Facilities & Controls—01300 -4
B. The CM shall save the Owner and Tenant harmless from all claims arising from the use of public
streets, sidewalks and adjoining premises for construction purposes.
C. The CM shall keep all access roads and walks clear of debris, materials, construction plant and
equipment during demolition and building operations. Repair streets, drives, curbs, sidewalks,
fences, poles and the like where disturbed by the operations and leave them in as good a
condition after completion of the work as before operations started.
D. The CM shall protect the premises from injury by water,frost, wind,fire, accident or other cause
and any interference due to the work being performed under this Contract.
E. The CM shall provide ways and means to control the flow of water from every source that may
cause inconvenience or damage during the operations.
1.8 TEMPORARY STORAGE
A. The CM shall provide at the site, where directed, and maintain in good condition suitable and
substantial weather-tight storage as required for materials that may be damaged by storage in
the open.
B. The CM shall coordinate use by the trades of the available storage areas. Temporary buildings,
trailers, etc. shall be removed from the site no later than upon substantial completion of the
work. Layout of the storage facilities shall be subject to approval by the Owner and the Tenant.
Take care not to interfere with the Tenant's operations and deliveries.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOISTS AND CHUTES
A. The CM shall furnish, install, maintain and remove material and personnel hoists as required for
normal use by all trades and employ skilled operators, facilities, safety devices, etc. required for
safe operation. Provide suitable runways from hoists to each floor level and the roof. Remove all
such facilities after they have served their purpose.
B. Construction, maintenance and operation of material hoists shall conform to applicable
requirements of the "Standard Safety Code for Building Construction" published by USE
Standards Institute, to A.G.C. "Manual" requirements and to State and local requirements.
C. The CM shall furnish and maintain all temporary ladders, ramps, runways, chutes,derricks,
stairs and similar items required for proper execution of the Work and that of his trades and
permit use of such facilities by other trades which may be under separate contract with the
Owner. Hoists and chutes shall be so constructed as to prevent damage, staining or marring of
permanent work.
D. No materials, rubbish or debris shall be permitted to drop free, but shall be removed by use of a
material hoist and/or fully enclosed material/rubbish chute.
E. The CM shall provide openings in slabs, walls and partitions,where required,for moving in large
pieces of equipment. Close and/or restore openings and finish them after the equipment is in
place. Structural modification, if required, shall be subject to prior written approval by the
Architect and the Owner.
1.10 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Except as otherwise noted in any part of the agreement for work under this Contract, the CM
shall furnish, erect and maintain all staging and scaffolding for use during the Work. Staging and
scaffolding shall be of an approved design, erected and removed by experience staging builders
and shall have all accident prevention devices required by Federal, state and local laws.
B. Erect all such staging and scaffolding in sufficient time and in proper sequence so as not to
delay the work. Schedule and commence work so that building progress is not delayed or
obstructed once staging and scaffolding become available.
C. Erection of all staging, scaffolding, rigging, etc. shall be supervised and directed by a qualified
rigger. Upon request, a certified affidavit shall be submitted to the Owner stating that all staging,
scaffolding, rigging, etc. has been safely erected and conforms in all respects to Federal, state
and local laws and codes. Pay for all services in connection with the erection and inspection of
all staging, scaffolding, rigging, etc.
D. Above facilities shall be constructed and maintained in accordance with applicable requirements
of Federal, state and local authorities and shall be removed after they have served their
purpose.
Temporary Facilities & Controls—01300 -3
in the building, including screens, shall be provided at no cost to the Owner until acceptance of
the Work.
D. Under no circumstances shall temperature be allowed to reach levels which will cause damage
to portions of the work which may be subject to damage by low temperatures.
E. The CM shall make provisions during construction to allow the escape of"construction moisture"
by use of a breathing enclosure on at least a part of the openings or by mechanical ventilation.
He shall also provide adequate mechanical ventilation during all torch cutting, welding or
burning operations to prevent the building of smoke within the building.
1.5 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. The CM shall provide a temporary electric service panel and pay for electric energy required for
temporary electricity.
B. A temporary lighting system including wiring, bulbs, sockets, extensions, electrical panels and
the like, shall be furnished, installed and maintained as necessary to satisfy requirements of
safety and security. All such work shall comply with all applicable provisions of governing codes.
Additional temporary lighting shall be installed and maintained during the installation of any
finishes (i.e. floor tile, wall the and wall coverings, painting, etc.). Such additional temporary
lighting shall provide a minimum of 30 footcandles of light at the floor level on a maintained
basis throughout the work area. Adequate outdoor lighting shall be provided and maintained to
illuminate staging, stockpiles, trenches, projections, etc. to the satisfaction of the Architect and
general illumination throughout the site, adequate for watchmen and emergency personnel.
C. A temporary power distribution system, as necessary to provide adequate power for use of the
various trades, shall be installed and maintained throughout the areas of construction.
Termination of power distribution shall be at a location which will not adversely affect the
Owner's use of the site or the building. The temporary power system shall include all outlets,
wiring, transformers, panels, switches, circuit breakers, GFI circuits and other electrical devices
as required to provide necessary distribution and to protect the power supply system.
D. When the permanent electrical power and lighting systems are in operating conditions within the
work, they may be used for temporary power and lighting for construction purposes, provided
that: (1)prior written approval of the Owner is obtained; (2)the Owner assumes no responsibility
for the entire power and lighting systems; and (3)costs for operation of and restoration of the
systems are provided at no additional expense to the Owner.
E. At completion of the Work, all temporary panels, wiring, lighting and other temporary electrical
equipment and devices shall be removed, except where such panels and wiring were installed
as permanent work and used during the construction phase.
1.6 FIRE PROTECTION
A. The CM shall provide and maintain adequate fire protection in the form of fire tanks, fire
extinguishers or other effective means of extinguishing fire, ready for instant use, distributed
around the project and in and about temporary structures during construction of the work.
B. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in and dispensed from UL listed safety
containers in conformance with the National Board of Fire Underwriters' recommendations.
Storage shall not be within the building.
C. Tarpaulins, dust screens and the like used during demolition and construction work shall be
made of materials which are resistant to fire, water and weather. Tarpaulins shall have UL
approval.
D. Torch cutting and welding operations shall have approval before the work is started and
chemical fire extinguishers shall be available at locations where such work is in progress.
E. Do not light fire in or about the premises.
1.7 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND THE PUBLIC
A. The CM shall construct all fences, barricades and protective facilities including trench coverings
required for the protection of the public in accordance with municipal and State regulations.
Furnish and install all signs, lights, reflectors and all such protection facilities as may be
required.
Temporary Facilities & Controls—01300 -2
SECTION 01300 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PART 1 —GENERAL:
All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions,the
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes temporary facilities, utilities,weather protection and construction
necessary to complete the project property and including, without limitation:
1. Heat and ventilation.
2. Power.
3. Long duration temporary electrical and primary service work.
4. Light(including additional lighting during installation of finishes).
5. Tenting.
6. Staging.
7. Water.
8. Fire and security protection.
9. Hoists and chutes.
10. Telephone.
11. Phasing the work.
12. Sanitation.
13. Dust protection.
14. Protection of persons and property.
1.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICE (GENERAL)
A. The Construction Manager(CM)shall be responsible for arranging and providing specified
general services and temporary facilities as required for completing the work. He shall pay all
costs for general services and temporary facilities, except as otherwise specified until Final
Acceptance of the Work and remove same at completion of the Work.
B. The CM shall comply with applicable Federal, State and Municipal regulations.
C. The CM shall make connections to existing services and sources of supply, provide necessary
installations, labor, materials, equipment and remove temporary installations and conditions no
longer required and restore services and sources of supply to proper operating condition.
D. The CM shall perform work in phases as required by the Contract Documents or necessary to
properly complete the work.
1.3 TEMPORARY WATER
A. The CM shall provide water required for temporary use during construction and pay all charges.
B. The CM shall provide additional piping, hoses or connections necessary for temporary
construction that are not part of the existing system.
C. Water supply furnished for temporary use shall not be wastefully used.
1.4 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURE, HEATING &VENTILATION
A. The CM shall provide and pay for heating required for temporary use during the Work.
B. The CM shall provide additional piping or connections necessary for temporary construction that
is not part of any existing heating system. If the existing system is discontinued during
alterations of existing buildings or new work, provide and maintain at no expense to the Owner,
all heat for temporary use and connections. Under these conditions, portable units shall be
smokeless unit heaters, UL, FM and Fire Marshall approved. Surfaces, interior and exterior,
damaged by use of these space units shall be replaced with new materials or refinished to the
satisfaction of the Architect without additional cost to the Owner.
C. Temporary weathertight enclosures shall be provided as required during construction to make
ew the building weathertight and protect work from freezing or frost damage and as necessary to
ensure suitable working conditions for construction operations of the trades. All costs of closing
Temporary Facilities & Controls—01300 - 1
C. The CM shall review all proposed substitutions, shall affix his stamp acknowledging compliance
with the above requirements and shall include his recommendations regarding the affect such
substitutions will have on the work involved.
1.3 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
A. Whenever additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents is required to
perform the work, the CM shall make a request for information in writing.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 Not Used
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 Not Used
END OF SECTION
Submittals & Substitutions -01200 -2
SECTION 01200 -SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The shop drawings submitted shall have been examined by the Construction Manager(CM)and
shall bear a notation over his signature stating that to the best of his knowledge,they conform to
the requirements of the Contract. Submittals not conforming to this requirement will be returned
to the CM for proper processing. See the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for
further requirements relative to submittals.
B. Shop drawings (1 sepia and 4 prints of each)shall be prepared by the CM and submitted to the
Architect for review at the earliest time possible, in accordance with the requirements of the
General Conditions. Sepia and 1 print will be returned to the CM. Electronic submission of shop
drawings shall not be acceptable and shall be returned without review.
C. The CM shall not submit any shop drawing directly to an Engineer without the advance notice
and approval of the Architect. Failure to obtain the Architect's permission for such a submittal
will result in the immediate return of the submission to the CM without review.
D. The CM shall make all corrections or changes. He shall resubmit shop drawings until approval is
obtained. Any corrections or changes indicated on the shop drawings by the Architect shall not
be considered as extra work orders. Shop drawings shall be revised and resubmitted as often
as may be necessary until they are finally"approved" or"approved as noted". "Approved as
noted" shall mean that all comments, notes and changes indicated on the returned submittal
shall be incorporated in the work.
E. Show details of types, construction, placement, manufacturers, connections, gages, colors,
thickness, sizes of all components and the like.
F. Any ordering, fabrication or assembling of materials by the CM before receipt of the approved
shop drawings shall be at the CM's risk.
G. All shop drawings used in the field shall bear the Architect's approval.
H. The omission of any materials from the CM's shop drawings that are shown on the Architect's
plans or called for in the specifications shall not relieve the CM from the furnishing of such
materials even though the Architect approved the CM's shop drawings.
I. All shop drawings must have the name of the Building, the CM and the Architect.
1. If shop drawings show variations from the Contract requirements because of standard
shop practice or other reasons, make specific mention of such variations in the
submittal letter.
2. Such drawing approval will be general. It shall not relieve the CM of responsibility for
accuracy of such.shop drawings nor for proper fitting, construction of the work,
furnishing of materials or work required by the Contract and not indicated on the shop
drawing. Shop drawing approval shall not be construed as approving departures from
the Contract requirements or deviations from the intent of the design.
1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Should the CM desire to substitute another material for one or more shown or specified by
name, apply in writing for such permission; state credit involved, providing supporting data and
samples of both the specified material and the proposed substitution. Substitutions which
provide no advantage to the Tenant will not be considered. Approval of substitutions will be
based on the understanding that the CM receiving such approval will be responsible for all costs
occasioned by the substitution, regardless of by whom incurred. Lead requirements alone will
not be a sufficient basis for acceptance of a substitution.
B. Make no substitution for materials, articles or process required under the Contract unless written
approval is secured. Submit names of proposed manufacturers, material men, dealers who are
to furnish materials, fixtures, appliances or other fittings for approval as soon as possible, to
afford proper investigation. No manufacturer will be approved for any materials to be furnished
unless he is of good reputation, has ample capacity plant facilities and has successfully
produced similar products.
Submittals &Substitutions -01200 - 1
SECTION 01100 -SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the provisions of Division 1 and the
requirements of the Drawings are hereby made a part of each section of each division of the
specifications.
B. The work shall include all work shown on the drawings and/or called for in the specifications.
The work shall be complete in every respect and in conformance with all applicable
requirements of the governing laws, codes, rules and regulations.
C. The project consists of the renovation of the existing Super Stop &Shop and minor related site
work.
D. The work shall be phased as directed by the Stop&Shop Project Manager so that the existing
Supermarket can remain in operation and open for business to the public during the entire
construction schedule.
E. Environmental Site Restrictions:
1. Do not pollute public or private water supplies, municipal sanitary sewers or storm
drainage systems with fuel, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids or other harmful
materials. It is the responsibility of the Construction Manager and all Subcontractors to
comply with all applicable Federal, State, County and municipal laws regarding
pollution.
2. Special measures shall be taken to insure against spillage of any pollutants.
F. Discovery of Archaeological Finds: If during the work, articles of unusual value, or of historical or
archaeological significance are encountered, the ownership of such articles is retained by the
Owner, and information regarding their discovery shall be immediately furnished to the Architect.
Resolution shall be handled as a Change in the Work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work shall include careful examination of the drawings and specifications to determine
quantities, locations, sizes,types and details of the work described in the drawings and
specifications and includes all work incidental thereto.
B. Work as shown by the Contract Documents includes the work of all trades required and all
labor,equipment, services and supervision necessary and incidental to the work indicated. The
following descriptions of the work represents a brief summary of the project. For additional and
more complete information refer to the drawings and technical specifications.
1. Project Mobilization: This work includes Contractor and Subcontractor mobilization
costs, including permits, temporary work, bonding and insurance costs, etc.
2. Project General Requirements: This work includes all miscellaneous costs associated
with completion of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Summary of Work—01100 - 1
*• SECTION 01050 - FIELD SURVEYING
PART 1GENERAL:
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Survey and field engineering.
B. Quality control.
C. Project record documents.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 -Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the services of a Land Surveyor registered in the Project Locale and acceptable to
Arch itect/Engineer, to perform survey work of this section.
B. Provide the services of a Professional Engineer of the discipline required for specific service on
Project, licensed in the Project Locale.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified plot plan
illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction.
1.5 EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.
1.6 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Contractor to locate and protect survey control and reference points.
B. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings.
C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
D. Promptly report to Architect/Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation
required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect/Engineer.
1.7 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Establish a minimum of three (3) permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established
control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.
B. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and limit of work.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, and ground floor elevations.
C. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
END OF SECTION
Field Surveying—01050 - 1
ook
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
flook
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Stop &Shop Drawings:
F-1 Fixture Plan
F-2 Merchandising Plan
M-1 Mezzanine Plan
R-1 Refrigeration Sleeve Plan
R-2 Refrigeration Underground Plan
R-3 Refrigeration Systems Plan
R-5 Refrigeration Schedules
Stop &Shop Decor Drawings:
D0.0 Cover Sheet
D01.1 Sales Floor Construction Plan
D01.2 Mezzanine Construction Plan
D01.3 Fixture Merchandising Plan
D01.4 Signage Plan
D01.5 FRP Plan
D02 Floor Tile Plan
D03 Reflected Ceiling Plan
D04 Interior Elevations
D05 Exterior Elevations
D06 Bakery Department
D07 Customer Service Department
D07A Not Used
D08 Deli/Kitchen Table Department
D09 Community Kiosk
D10 Main Entrance Area
D11 Secondary Entrance Area
D12 Floral Shop
D13 Meat Department
D14 Pharmacy Department
D15 Seafood Department
D16 Ground Floor Toilet Rooms
D17 Not Used
D18 Not Used
D19 Relax, Renew, & Revive
D19A Health and Nutrition
D20 Everyday Celebrations
D21 Relax, Renew, & Revive Elevations
D22 Department Signage
D23 Touch Points
D24 Home Office Details
D25 Not Used
D26 Not Used
D27 Hallmark Details
A"ft,
List of Drawings -3
Mechanical Drawings: ^�
M-1 HVAC Plan
M-2 HVAC Partial Plan, Schedules, and Details
Electrical Drawings:
E001 General Information Sheet
E101 Lighting Controls & Schedules
E102 First Floor Lighting Plan
E103 Mezzanine Lighting Plan and Details
E201 First Floor Power Plan
E202 First Floor Refrigeration Power Plan
E203 Case Wiring Schedules and Details
E204 Front/Rear Mezzanine Power Plans
E205 First Floor Partial Power Plans
E206 Roof Electrical Plan
E301 EMS Raceway Plan
E401 Single Line Diagram
E402 Panel Schedules—Sheet#1
E403 Panel Schedules—Sheet#2
E501 Details Sheet#1
E601 Security Plan
E602 CCTV Plan .004.
E603 ISP/POS Communications Plan
E604 ISP/POS Communications Details
E605 Telephone Plan
E606 Scale Plan
E607 First Floor Fire Alarm Plan
E608 Mezzanine Fire Alarm Plan, Riser, and Details
E701 First Floor Demolition Lighting Plan
E702 First Floor Demolition Electrical Plan
E703 Roof Demolition Electrical Plan
List of Drawings -2
LIST OF DRAWINGS
SITE DRAWINGS:
Available from Civil Engineer
BUILDING DRAWINGS:
Cover Sheet
Demolition Plans:
DM.1 Demolition Plan
Fixture Plans:
F1.1 Fixture Plan
Architectural Drawings:
A1.1 Floor Plan
A1.2 Mezzanine Floor Plan & Details
A1.3 Reflected Ceiling Plan
A1.4 Slab Depression and Stub-Up Plan
A1.5 Roof Plan and Details
A2.1 Exterior Elevations and Details
A2.2 Interior Elevations
A3.1 Room Finish Schedule and Details
A3.2 Door Schedule and Details
A4.1 Exterior Wall Sections-Sheet#1
A4.2 Exterior Wall Sections -Sheet#2
A5.1 Interior Wall Sections
A5.2 Section Details
Decor Drawings:
D1.1 Decor Signage Plan
D1.2 Decor Drawing-Sheet#2
D1.3 Decor Drawing-Sheet#3
FT.1 Floor Tile Plan
Structural Drawings:
S1.1 Foundation Plan
S1.2 Mezzanine Framing Plan
S1.3 Roof Framing Plan
S2.1 Sections and Details
S3.1 Column Schedule&Piers Details
Fire Protection Drawings:
FP-1 Sprinkler Scope Plan
Plumbing Drawings:
P-1 Below Slab Piping - Plumbing
P-2 Above Slab Piping -Plumbing
P-3 Legend, Schedules, & Details
List of Drawings - 1
PROJECT STAFF
OWNER: STRUCTURAL:
Stop &Shop Supermarket Co. Dubois Engineering Associates, Inc.
Construction Department 117 Harrison Street
Quincy Center Plaza Manchester, NH 03104
1385 Hancock Street, 9th floor Telephone: (603)666-0900
Quincy, MA 02169 Fax: (603)669-0900
Telephone: (617)770-8706
Fax: (617) 770-8945 ELECTRICAL:
Engineering Advantage
ARCHITECT: 2 Park Street
Landry Architects Boston, MA 02122
389 Main Street Telephone: (617)288-3969
Salem, New Hampshire 03079 Fax: (617)825-8922
Telephone: (603)890-6414
Fax: (603)894-4358
PLUMBING & MECHANICAL:
Griffith &Vary, Inc.
12 Kendrick Road
Wareham, MA 02571
Telephone: (508)295-0050
Fax: (508)295-0003
!01*"
Project Staff- 1
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL
Section 16000-General 15
Section 16010-Basic Electrical Requirements 01
Section 16060-Minor Electrical Demolition for Renovation 03
Section 16111 -Conduit 06
Section 16112-Surface Raceways 03
Section 16113-Underfloor Ducts 04
Section 16123-Building Wiring and Cable 04
Section 16130-Boxes 04
Section 16141 -Wiring Devices 04
Section 16170 -Grounding and Bonding 03
Section 16180-Equipment Wiring Systems 03
Section 16190-Supporting Devices 02
Section 16195-Electrical Identification 02
Section 16440-Disconnect Switches 02
Section 16461 -Dry Type Transformers 05
Section 16470-Panelboards 05
Section 16495-Transfer Switches 03
Section 16510-Interior Luminaires 04
Section 16721 — Fire Alarm System 05
Table of Contents -3
DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ..,,
Section 07200- Building Insulation 01
Section 07220—Air&Vapor Barriers 01
Section 07240—Synthetic Stucco System 01
Section 07500—Roofing and Insulation 07
Section 07900 -Caulking and Sealing 03
DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 03
Section 08200 -Wood Doors & Frames 02
Section 08300- Special Doors 02
Section 08400-Aluminum Entrances, Storefronts & Glazing 03
Section 08460-Automatic Entrances 03
Section 08700 - Finish Hardware 05
DIVISION 9 -FINISHES
Section 09250- Gypsum Wallboard 04
Section 09300-Ceramic&Glass Tile 04
Section 09500- Suspended Ceilings 04
Section 09650- Resilient Flooring & Carpet Tile 05
Section 09700- Special Floor Coating System 04
Section 09900- Painting 08
Section 09950—Vinyl Wall Covering 03
DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES
Section 10150-Toilet Partitions &Accessories 01
Section 10160—Precast Concrete Bollards 01
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT USED
DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICALS
Section 15300— Fire Protection 29
Section 15400 - Plumbing 52
Section 15600 - HVAC 25
Section 15700— Hood Fire Suppression System 06
Table of Contents -2
PROJECT MANUAL
for
CONSTRUCTION OF SUPER STOP & SHOP #787
King Street(Route 5)
Northampton, Massachusetts
TABLE OF CONTENTS Pages
Title Page 01
Table of Contents 03
Project Staff 01
List of Drawings 04
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
To be obtained from the Construction Manager
CONTRACT FORMS
To be obtained from the Construction Manager and Owner
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
To be obtained from the Construction Manager
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01050- Field Surveying 01
loj0is Section 01100-Summary of Work 01
Section 01200 - Submittals& Substitutions 02
Section 01300-Temporary Facilities&Controls 05
Section 01400 -Project Closeout 02
Section 01500 -Special Conditions 03
DIVISION 2 -SITEWORK(Provided under separate cover by the Site Engineer)
Section 02600— Demolition 02
DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE
Section 03000 -Cast-In-Place Concrete 09
DIVISION 4 -MASONRY
Section 04100- Masonry Mortar& Grout 02
Section 04150 - Masonry Accessories 02
Section 04200- Unit Masonry 06
Section 04500 - Masonry Sealer 01
DIVISION 5 -METALS
Section 05100 -Structural Steel 05
Section 05110- Miscellaneous Iron 03
Section 05400- Metal Studs& Light Gage Framing 03
DIVISION 6 -CARPENTRY
Section 06000-Carpentry & Millwork 04
Table of Contents - 1
TECHNICAL PROJECT MANUAL
for
AN ADDITION TO & RENOVATION OF
0
Slop,
-
SUPER STOP & SHOP - #787
at
King Street (Route 5)
Northampton, Massachusetts
April 23, 2004
ay
�e
Stop &Shop Supermarket Co. '4
Construction and Engineering Department � Y ,
Quincy Center Plaza 1 °
1385 Hancock Street, 9th floor x
Quincy, MA 02169 �� �
sbi ., 070
TECHNICAL PROJECT MANUAL
for
AN ADDITION TO & RENOVATION OF
SmAx
SHOP
r
✓� l �;
3.
SUPER STOP & SHOP - #787
at
King Street (Route 5)
Northampton, Massachusetts
April 23, 2004
Stop&Shop Supermarket Co.
Construction and Engineering Department
Quincy Center Plaza
1385 Hancock Street, 9th floor
y,
Quincy, MA 02169